RCD30 - Documentation 784799 4.01 61 PDF

Leica RCD30 Documentation
Including Leica FCMS Version 4.01-61 for Leica RCD30
All Volumes
This documentation contains important information.

Please read carefully through before you use the system.
Document code 784799

Document release Version 4.01-61, Oct / 19 / 2012
This document shall not be reproduced in whole or in part without prior permission in writing
from Leica Geosystems AG, 9435 Heerbrugg (Switzerland), either by mechanical, photographic,
electronic, or other means (including conversion into or transmission in machine-readable form);
stored in any retrieval system; used for any purpose other than that/ those for which it is
intended; nor accessible or communicated in any form to any third party not expressly authorized
by Leica Geosystems AG to have access thereto.
ii Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Contents
Contents

About Leica RCD30 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvii
Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxvii
Typical sets and sub-sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxvii
Where to get more information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxvii
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 iii

Contents
Volume 1 User Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
About this User Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Scope of document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Product identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Meaning of symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Where to get assistance and training. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Headquarters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Contact Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Where to find more information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
System Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Overviews . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Standard components of a complete Leica RCD30 standalone system . . . . . . . . 9
Optional components for Leica RCD30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Overview of Leica RCD30 System Components and Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
CH61 / CH62 Camera Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Leica PAV80 Gyro-stabilized mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Standalone Pod. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
CC31 / CC32 Camera Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
MM30 Mass Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
IS40 Interface Stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
OC52 Operation Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
OC50 for Pilot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
GI40 Guidance Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Power connection accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
PS56 Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Installing the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
About unpacking Leica RCD30 components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Mount the Camera Head and the IMU into the Standalone Pod . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Mounting the IMU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Mount the PAV80 adapter ring to the pod. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Attach the protective filter to the lens and secure the filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Mounting the lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Remove the Camera Head cover - FMC transport lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Attache the lens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Remove the lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Hardware installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Pre-requirements for installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Safety specifications and standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
iv Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Contents
General note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Installation of the Sensor Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Inserting Pod in Leica PAV80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Removing Pod from Leica PAV80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Installation of the Camera Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Installation of the Operator Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Installation of IS40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Attaching of OC52 or OC50 Operator Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Adjustment of IS40 and OC50/OC52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Installation of the Operation Controller OC50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Adaptation of the anti-dazzle shield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Installation of the Guidance Indicator GI40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Insert Mass Memory into slots in CC31/CC32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Mass Memory safety checks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Cabling the Leica RCD30 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Cabling overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Chassis ground connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Connection to GNSS antenna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Connection of OC50 for Pilot and GI40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Power cable connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Ground check with PS56 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Software and Firmware installation and update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Step 1: Write down configuration settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Step 2: Updating the Leica RCD30 system (except OC50 for Pilot) . . . . . . . . . . 38
Update OC52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Update CC32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Step 3: Update of OC50 for pilot and GI40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Step 4: Configure the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
SRTM data installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
How to install SRTM data on Leica RCD30 with CC32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
How to modify installed SRTM data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Installation of SRTM-data on CC31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Preparation before installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Install SRTM data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Restore system protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Licensing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Automatic license check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
License file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Upload of license file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Trouble shooting for license file upload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
User check of license . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
System Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Before starting the system for the first time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Initial configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Flight checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Important notes for the photo flight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Leica RCD30 Field Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 v

Contents
Hardware operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Power switches on devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Power push button on CC31/CC32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Power switch on Leica PAV80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Power switch on OC52/OC50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Checklist before powering the Leica RCD30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Mandatory procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
For takeoff and landing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
For takeoff. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
If the aircraft is on the tarmac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Start-up sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
System shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Remove and in-flight exchange of mass memories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
MM remove/exchange if the Leica RCD30 is not in a powered ON state . . . . . . . 58
MM remove/exchange if the Leica RCD30 is in a powered ON state . . . . . . . . . . 58
In-flight swapping of Mass Memories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Remove Mass Memory from CC31/CC32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Insert Mass Memory into slots in CC31/CC32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Mass Memory safety checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Status LEDs and status messages on the hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Status LEDs on devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Status LED on Leica PAV80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Status LED on OC52/50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Status LED on GI40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Status display on CC31 or CC32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Software operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Locking management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
On-line help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
First help level - short description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Second help level - online documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Language selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Select the language for the operator.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Select the language for the pilot.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
General about Initial configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Leica FCMS for Leica RCD30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Selecting configuration sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Names of pre-configured configuration sets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Initial configuration of global parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Enter configuration dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Set Time Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Set system installation parameters and IMU type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Flight Guidance & Sensor Release configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Set flight guidance and sensor release configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Edit or create Flight Release set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Names of pre-configured Flight Release configuration sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
File operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
How to select data in the file selection dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Delete Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Delete data on USB stick connected to OC52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
vi Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Contents
Delete data in the OC52 memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Delete data on Mass Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Select data on Mass Memory and delete it . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Upload projects with flight plans and graphical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Download projects, flight plans and flight data.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Upload maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Prepare Mass Memories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
About data storage modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Flight execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Pre-flight check list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Start flight execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Ground start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Air-Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Sensor Status view during start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Sensor status and configuration after successful start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Leica PAV80 status indicated on LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
FCMS views, controls and GUI during flight execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Operation during flight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Main user tasks during flight execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Flight plan controlled flight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Manually controlled flight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Set configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Manual setting of Height, Altitude and GSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Image numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Automatic integration time control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Automatic Integration Time mode configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Operation in automatic integration time control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
User corrections to automatic integration time setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Manually start execution of an Auto IT control sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Checking the exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Configuration for Automatic Integration Time Control or for manual release. . . . 93
Manual Start / Stop image data recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Prepare for manual frame release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Start manually frame release sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Release manually additional frame within a frame release sequence. . . . . . . . . . . 94
Stop frame release sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Annotation - user log file entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Log data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Flight plan controlled flight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Project and flight plan selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Flight line selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Direct selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Direct selection by touch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Selection from the line listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Selection by line number or line label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Reverse line execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Abort line or abort project execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Shorten and/or extend a line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Marking sections of a line during data recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
User activation of FCMS route-finder algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
System check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 vii

Contents
Trouble shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

During startup as long as Leica FCMS is not fully operational . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Status messages on front panel of CC31/CC32 during start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Error messages on front panel of CC31/CC32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
During flight execution with Leica FCMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Trouble shooting PAV80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Trouble shooting OC52/OC50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Trouble shooting GI40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Export of status data for error analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Service Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Care & Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Cleaning and drying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Cleaning of Optical Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Cables and plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Dust filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Leica RCD30 storage and shipping case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Packing the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Transport. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Transport in a road vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Shipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Boresighting - IMU misalignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Service intervals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Safety Directions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Safety Directions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Intended use of the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Prohibited use of the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Limits of Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Manufacturer of the product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Manufacturers of non Leica Geosystems accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Shipping company. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Seller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Person in charge of the product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Service technician . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Aircraft installer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Hazards of use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
FCC Statement, Applicable in U.S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
viii Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Contents
Labeling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

About Technical Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Overview of Leica RCD30 specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Electronic characteristics of data chain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Camera Heads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Spectral range and filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Optics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Real-time view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
GNSS/IMU system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Camera Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Operational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Mass Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
External interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Overview of mechanical interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Dimensions and weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Environmental . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Applied standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Conformity to national regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Frequency band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Output power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
GNSS Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
System components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Devices and parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
IMU Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Tools and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Optional cables and other components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Documentation, Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Shipping Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Packing order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Warranty - Software License Agreement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

International Limited Warranty, Software License Agreement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
International Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Software License Agreement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Microsoft End User License Agreement ("EULA") . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
End user license agreement for MICROSOFT embedded systems . . . . . . . . . 159
Product specific terms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
General terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 ix

Contents
Volume 2 Technical Reference Manual . . . . . . 165
About this Technical Reference Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Scope of document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Product identification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Meaning of symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Where to get more information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Where to get assistance and training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Introduction to Leica RCD30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Resolution - interpretation - identification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Transition from film based to digital systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Terminology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Introduction to GNSS/IMU systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
GNSS-IMU for trajectory and attitude - the principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
GNSS-IMU post-processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Description of System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Leica RCD30 Airborne Digital Frame Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Summary of design concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Leica RCD30 - technical innovations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Summary of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Integration Time (IT) control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Automatic operation - system sets the IT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Principle of control loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Manual operation - user sets the IT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Leica RCD30 calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Leica RCD30 calibration intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Technical and calibration check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Verification of geometrical calibration by the user. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Validity of the Calibration Certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Example of Calibration Certificate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Leica RCD30 calibration block layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Description of Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Leica RCD30 Camera Heads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
CH61 Camera Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
CH62 Camera Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Standalone Pods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
x Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Contents
Leica PAV80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Main features of Leica PAV80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Cables to Leica PAV80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Leica RCD30 Camera Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
CH32 Camera Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
CH31Camera Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Main features of the CC31/CC32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Cables to CC3x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Mass Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
GNSS-IMU system NovAtel SPAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
GNSS-IMU for Leica RCD30 the principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Main Features of GNSS-IMU system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Use of GNSS-IMU data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
In-flight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
On the ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
GNSS antenna and cables to GNSS-IMU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
User Interface Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
OC52 - Operation controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Main features of the OC52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Cables to OC52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
IS40 Interface Stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
OC50 for Pilot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Main features of the OC50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Cables to OC50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
GI40 Guidance Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Main features of the GI40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Cables to GI40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Power connection accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Cables to CC3x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Ground Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
PS56 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Cables to PS56 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
DVD drive with USB connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
USB memory Stick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Leica RCD30 Standard tools and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Tools and accessories for OC50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Cases. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Case types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Data Download Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
MM30 Download Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Firmware and Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Software Leica FCMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Main features of Leica FCMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Modules and licensing of Leica FCMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Office Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Leica MissionPro - Flight Planning & Flight Evaluation Software . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Post Processing Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 xi

Contents
Leica FramePro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Leica IPAS TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Leica IPAS CO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Leica IPAS ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Leica IPAS CO+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Advanced operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Lever Arm and Boresight Angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
General information about lever arms and boresight angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Overview of camera calibration parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Internal Orientation Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Distortion free Leica RCD30 images. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Leica RCD30 calibration and bore sighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Bore sighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Option 1- use of photogrammetric software package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Option 2 - use of Leica IPAS CO+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Remarks to Option 1 and option 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Determination of PPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Cross flight layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Minimum requirement: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Suggested layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
GNSS lever arm - antenna vector determination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
How to determine the antenna offset vector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
How to measure the x, y and z components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Most accurate: traditional geodetic measure method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Simple method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Multiple Camera Heads Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Overview of Leica RCD30 multiple Camera Heads configurations. . . . . . . . . . 234
Components of a complete Leica RCD30 multiple Head system . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Optional components for Leica RCD30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Overview of Leica RCD30 System for Multiple Camera Heads Pods . . . . . . . 235
Leica RCD30 Oblique Trio System (3 Camera Heads) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Leica RCD30 Oblique Trio System Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Standard components of a complete Leica RCD30 Oblique Trio system . . . . . . 237
Optional components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Oblique Trio Pod. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
CC31 / CC32 Camera Controller Revision A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Installing the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Common Installation Tasks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Transport of System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Specific Installation Tasks for Leica RCD30 Oblique Trio system . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Mounting the Camera Heads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
xii Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Contents
Mounting the IMU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Inserting Oblique Trio Pod into Leica PAV80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Removing Oblique Trio Pod from Leica PAV80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Cabling Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Leica RCD30 Oblique Penta System (5 Camera Heads) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Leica RCD30 Oblique Penta Camera Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Main components:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Optional components for Leica RCD30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Oblique Penta Pod. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
CC31 / CC32 Camera Controller Revision A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Installing the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Common Installation Tasks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Specific Installation Tasks for Leica RCD30 Oblique Penta system . . . . . . . . . . 253
Mounting the Camera Heads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Mounting the IMU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Inserting Oblique Penta Pod into Leica PAV80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Removing Oblique Penta Pod from Leica PAV80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Cabling Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Mounting of the IMU into Leica RCD30 Oblique Pods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Overview IMU fixing screw holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
CUS4 - IMU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
IMU orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
CPT installation parameters for 3rd party setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
DUS5 - IMU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
IMU orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
LN200 installation parameters for 3rd party setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
NUS5 - IMU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
IMU orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
33BM61 installation parameters for 3rd party setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Leica RCD30 Oblique Pod Lever arms and Rotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Installation parameters for Leica RCD30 Oblique Trio Pod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Installation parameters for Leica RCD30 Oblique Penta Pod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Leica FCMS configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Configuration of Sensor Configuration for Oblique systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Housing Type Configuration in Leica FCMS for Oblique Trio and Oblique Penta
Pods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Mounting of the IMU for 3rd party installations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Overview IMU fixing screw holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
CUS4 - IMU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
IMU orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
CPT installation parameters for 3rd party setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 xiii

Contents
DUS5 - IMU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

IMU orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
LN200 installation parameters for 3rd party setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
NUS5 - IMU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
IMU orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
33BM61 installation parameters for 3rd party setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Mounting of the CH61/CH62 for 3rd party installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Summary mounting plate on CH61 or CH62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Service & Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Leica RCD30 User and Service technician know-how levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Know-how Level 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Know-how Level 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Standard accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Technical checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Removing grit and dust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Housings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Touch-screen of OC52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Removing oil and grease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Optical parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Removing condensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Cover glass in front of the lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Optical cleaning procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Fungus - and how to combat it . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
For airborne sensors in daily use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Freighting the sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Silica Gel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Shutter replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Important before starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Shutter replacement procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Tasks required after shutter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
How to replace the shutter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Leica RCD30 lens calibration file upload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Replacement of dust filters on fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Replacement of dust filters on CH61/CH62 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Replacement of dust filters on CC31/CC32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Replacement of dust filters on the OC52/OC50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Calibration / interval between technical checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Calibration verification by user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Recommended service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Remote Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Hardware required for remote access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Software and network requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Hardware interfacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Connection of the network cable to the Leica RCD30 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Software interfacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
xiv Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Contents
Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Leica RCD30 service level 1 spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Level 1 spare parts for OC50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Leica RCD30 service level 2 spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Operation with 3rd party components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Interfacing Leica RCD30 with 3rd party components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
User installation of Leica RCD30 with 3rd party components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Overview of Leica RCD30 configurations with 3rd party components . . . . . . . 302
Leica RCD30 with 3rd party GNSS/IMU system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Tasks made by using Leica RCD30 components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Startup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Leica FCMS configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
GNSS/IMU System Configuration in Leica FCMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Configuration of global parameter Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Data storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Leica RCD30 with 3rd party FMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Leica FCMS configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Flight Guidance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
FCMS Multi-sensor Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Error handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Leica RCD30 with 3rd party GNSS/IMU and 3rd party FMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Interface Control Document (ICD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

General about Leica RCD30 interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Connectors on CC3x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
LAN (Ethernet) Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
IMU Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
28V DC out - power connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
28V DC in - Power connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Aux1, Aux2, Aux3 - Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
OC connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Camera Head CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4, CH5 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
GNSS Antenna connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Ground connector (earth) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Overview Leica RCD30 camera system configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 xv

Contents
Leica RCD30 configurations provided by Leica Geosystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

1: Standalone, fully integrated Leica RCD30 camera system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
2: Leica RCD30 integrated in Leica ALS70, 60 or 50-II systems . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Leica RCD30 configurations with 3rd party components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
3: Leica RCD30 with 3rd party GNSS/IMU or GPS system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
4: Leica RCD30 with 3rd party FMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
5: Leica RCD30 with 3rd party GNSS/IMU or GPS and 3rd party FMS. . . . . . . 318
Important for 3rd parties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Leica RCD30 configurations with Leica components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Standalone, fully integrated Leica RCD30 camera system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Leica RCD30 camera system integrated in Leica ALS70 system . . . . . . . . . . 320
Leica RCD30 configurations with 3rd party components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Leica RCD30 system 3rd party interface on Aux3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Protocol on NMEA input to Aux3 for 3rd party GNSS/IMU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Protocol on NMEA output to AUX3 for 3rd party FMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
PPS input on AUX3 for 3rd party GNSS/IMU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
MEP output on AUX3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Protocol on LAN for FMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Y-cable to AUX3 connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Leica RCD30 camera system with 3rd party GNSS/IMU system . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Tasks to be performed by the 3rd party GNSS/IMU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Signal flow and cabling with 3rd party GNSS/IMU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Leica RCD30 camera system with 3rd party FMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Tasks to be performed by the 3rd party FMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Signal flow and cabling with 3rd party FMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Leica RCD30 with 3rd party GNSS/IMU and 3rd party FMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Tasks to be performed by the 3rd party FMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Tasks to be performed by the 3rd party GNSS/IMU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Signal flow and cabling with 3rd party GNSS/IMU and FMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
xvi Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Contents
Volume 3 Field Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
About Field Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
General for Leica RCD30 photo flights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

Important notes for the photo flight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
GNSS requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Required GNSS quality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Distance to GNSS ground reference station for DGNSS processing . . . . . . . . . . 336
Distance to GNSS ground reference station for PPP processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Location of GNSS ground reference station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
GNSS Base Station Setup for Post Processing DGPS operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Preferred sun elevation for image data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Preferred sun elevation to avoid reflection and Hot Spot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Preferred sun elevation to get perfect image data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Flight plan requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Hints for the sensor operator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Hints for the pilot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Flight recommendations and mandatory procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Turns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
On the flight line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
In-flight alignment for GNSS-IMU system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Getting perfect image data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Sun elevation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Illumination by direct solar radiation and by skylight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Terrain reflection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Spectral reflection of different surfaces between 400 nm - 850 nm . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Back-lit and front-lit surfaces in frame images. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Hot Spot, specular reflection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Hot Spot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Specular reflection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Avoiding Hot Spot and specular reflection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Integration time (IT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
IT depends on the following parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Dependant factors for the IT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Achieving maximum image quality with Leica RCD30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Determine correct exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Preventing motion-induced image smear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Flight preparation for imaging sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 xvii

Contents
Determine the flight window by using the Sun Angles tool in Leica FPES. . . . . 350
Flight Planning for imaging sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Planning parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
GSD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Planning data overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Forward overlap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Sidelap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Flight line direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Flight arrangements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Block without cross strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Block with cross strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Corridor mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Leica FCMS - Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Leica FCMS tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Main tasks of the Software module Sensor Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Main task of the Software module Flight Guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Main task of the module Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Highlights of Leica FCMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
In-flight quality control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Leica FCMS, the optimal interface in the Leica work flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
GUI design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Controls to group information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Use of color to group information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Figurative language on icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Key figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Key figures for components of the Leica RCD30 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Icon types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
General screen layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Touch screen interface on OC52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Direct selection by touch and pan of graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Hard key interface on OC50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Navigation within the menu tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Navigation within the menu tree in flight execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Navigation within the menu tree to reach Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Menu Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Menu Flight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Online help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
First help level- short description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Second help level - Leica RCD30 documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Icon reference list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Most frequently used icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Icons for the on-line help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Icons to control sensor release and integration time control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Icons to change views during flight execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Icons to scroll in list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Icons to select input fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Icons to the Mass Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Icons to enter values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
xviii Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Contents
Input and message control icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Icons to select / unselect data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Icons to edit / create data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Icons for execution of planned flights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Icons to adjust the image displayed on the real-time view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
More icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Icons to zoom graphical information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Icons to show or hide data in graphical or alphanumerical views . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Icons to filter data when browsing log data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Icons to copy data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Icons in service area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Icons to delete data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Icons for stabilized mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Leica FCMS - Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

About configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Configuration data base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Data base structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Configuration sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Pre-defined configuration sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
User defined configuration sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Current configuration set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
System configuration: Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Hardware configuration in Leica FCMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Sensor and GNSS configuration sets for different sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Enter Hardware Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Sensor configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Parameter description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Configuration of parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Configuration of Primary Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Typical setting RCD30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Configuration of the mount. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Configuration of MM mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Configuration of Secondary Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Configuration of parameter Secondary Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Configuration of GNSS/IMU System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Configuration of parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Typical setting SPAN (LAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Typical setting Simulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Typical setting Simulator with SPAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
FCMS multi-sensor configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Look and feel of FCMS Master and of FCMS Slave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Configuration of parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Configuration example: Multi-sensor system Leica ALS and Leica RCD30 . . 417
Settings on FCMS master system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Settings on FCMS slave system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
System configuration: Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Overview configuration of Global 1 parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 xix

Contents
Configuration of Flight Guidance & Sensor Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425

Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Names of pre-configured Flight Release configuration sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Flight Release configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Configuration of Guidance Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Configuration of Guidance Approach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Configuration of Sensor Release and Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Summary of Flight Guidance & Sensor Release settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Configuration of parameter Time zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Configuration of global parameter Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Configuration if IMU type is not pre-defined for the Sensor type . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Configuration of global parameter Real-time view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Configuration of Global 2 parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Configuration of global parameters Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Configuration of global parameters Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Configuration of global parameters Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Introduction to the use of maps in Leica FCMS flight guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Configuration Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Sensor configuration: Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Sensor configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Configuration of Height, Altitude and GSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Leica FCMS - Flight Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453

Basic layout of navigation view during flight execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Views. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
What is a control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
System controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Take-Off control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Memory control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
GNSS control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Flight guidance controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Color codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Wind control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Track and line direction control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Track deviation control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Position control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
North-up navigation control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Nose-up navigation control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Line deviation control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
In-line navigation control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
3-D Navigation control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
3-D Navigation control during approach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
3-D Navigation control along the line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Real-time view control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Flying altitude control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Desired altitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Aircraft to target control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Line progress control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
xx Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Contents
Speed control for frame sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474

Controls with project related information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Project control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Flight plan controlled flight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Manually controlled flight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Project progress control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Data filter control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Project area control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Line detail control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Graphic in-flight evaluation control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Alphanumeric in-flight evaluation control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Views during flight execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Leica FCMS views for flight navigation and project management . . . . . . . . . . 480
Leica FCMS views for Leica RCD30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Sensor status views. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Main system status view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Selection of sub-system status views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
GNSS status view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
GNSS-IMU status view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Mass Memory status view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Mount status view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Thumbnail and Histogram class view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Flight guidance views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Nose-up view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
North-up view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
In-line view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
3-D Navigation view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Flight Guidance information on the GI40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Guidance information on the GI40 during approach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Guidance information on the GI40 along the flight line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Error information on the GI40 along the flight line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
Project status views for in-flight evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
Graphic and alphanumeric in-flight evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
In-flight evaluation - graphic view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
In-flight evaluation - alphanumeric view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
Real-time view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Backdrop maps during flight execution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Annotation - user log file entries during flight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Edit or create annotation text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Browsing of logged status data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Start browser from Flight menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Start browser from Service menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Browsing log data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 xxi

Contents
Volume 4 Installation Information . . . . . . . . . . . 509
About Installation Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511

Structure of this volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Aircraft Installation Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513

Leica Geosystems company profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Overview of historic Leica Geosystems Airborne Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
The optical-mechanical era: 1935 1968 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
The electronic, microprocessor and multiprocessor era: 1968 1993 . . . . . . . . . 514
Todays Airborne Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Leica RCD30 medium format airborne camera. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
General note on aircraft for airborne sensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
To be taken into account when choosing a survey aircraft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Type of sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Mission profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Costs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Typical survey aircraft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Optical Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
Typical technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
Glass type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
Antireflection coating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
Leica Geosystems Sensor Installation Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
Sensor and GNSS installations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
Environment and Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
Responsibility for adequate power supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
Aircraft modifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
Responsibility for aircraft modifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
Main tasks to be performed by the installer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Installation tasks to be performed by the user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Leica Geosystems installation support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Leica Geosystems installation questionnaire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Leica Geosystems installation drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Main installation data for Leica RCD30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Overview airborne sensing system with Leica RCD30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Overview Leica RCD30 Standalone System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Environmental qualification forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
xxii Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Contents
Environmental qualification form Leica RCD30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523

Environmental qualification form Leica PAV80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Environmental qualification form OC52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Environmental qualification form OC50,GI40,IS40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
General information for mount and sensor installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Purpose of the installation drawings and tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Conditions to be fulfilled for mount and camera installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Stiff and vibrating-free mounting of the Leica PAV80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Installation of the Leica PAV80 directly on the aircraft floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
Installation of the Leica PAV80 in a hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
Installation in conjunction with an Optical Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
Ideal position of CH61/CH62 in the aircraft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
Airflow for cooling purposes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
Camera direction of CH61/CH62 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
Compensation of aircraft attitude angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
Orientation of sensor and mount. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
Limitation of Leica PAV80 rotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
Details about the installation drawings and more recommendations . . . . . . . . 532
Securing the sensor mount to the aircraft floor or hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
Chassis ground connection between mount and aircraft structure . . . . . . . . . . 536
Adapter plates and spacers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Plates for height adaptation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Spacer #764119 for height adaptation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Alternate installation with RC30 with 8.8/4 SAGA-F lens cone . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Installation if previously a Leica PAV30 was installed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Adapter plate PAV10 to Leica PAV80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Installation data Leica PAV80 with Leica RCD30 pod. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
Summary Leica PAV80 base plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
Airflow for cooling purposes Leica RCD30 pod. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
Chassis ground connection Leica PAV80 and Spacer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
Dimensions of bottom hole for different installation heights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Dimensions of bottom hole for Leica RCD30 Oblique Trio Pod . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Installation data for spacer for height adaptation of Leica PAV80. . . . . . . . . . . . 549
Summary Spacer # 764119 base plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
Installation drawings for adapter plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Installation of CH6x without Pod and Leica PAV80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Summary mounting plate on CH61 or CH62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Installation of CC31/32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
Installation on the aircraft floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
Installation in a rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
Ideal position of CC31/32 in aircraft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
Space required at the rear to connect the cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
Chassis ground connection between CC31/32 and aircraft structure . . . . . . . . 553
Summary mounting base for Leica RCD30 Camera Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
Summary of Camera Controller CC31 / CC32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
Installation of IS40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Ideal position of IS40 in aircraft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Installation if used alternatively with Navigation Sight mount PAS12 . . . . . . . . 557
Chassis ground connection between IS40 and aircraft structure . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Summary IS40 base plate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 xxiii

Contents
Installation of OC52/OC50 for operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560

Ideal position of OC52/OC50 for operator in aircraft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
Chassis ground connection for OC52/OC50 for operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
Installation of OC50 for pilot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
Ideal position of OC50 for pilot in aircraft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
Storage of the OC50 for pilot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
Chassis ground connection for OC50 for pilot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
Summary OC50 for pilot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
Installation of GI40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Ideal position of GI40 in aircraft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Storage of the GI40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Summary GI40 mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Installation of GNSS antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Installation of GNSS antenna on the fuselage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
How to install the GNSS antenna vertically above the Leica RCD30 . . . . . . . . . 568
Orientation of the GNSS antenna on the aircraft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Offset reference or Leica PAV80 rotation center to GNSS antenna . . . . . . . . . 568
Summary GPS-GLONASS antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
FAA Form 8130-3 for GPS-GLONASS antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
General about cabling and power connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
Overview cabling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
Overview installation data electrical installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
Power connection Leica PAV80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
Power connection CC31/CC32 to DC aircraft power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
Responsibility for adequate power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
UPS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
Power plug to aircraft power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
Power requirements, fuses and circuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
Circuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
Chassis ground connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
Power connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
PS56 Power Supply for ground test purposes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
Weight and balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
Installation Questionnaire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
Requested information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
Questionnaire for GNSS antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
xxiv Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Chapter 0 About Leica RCD30 Documentation
Version 4.01-61 Oct / 19 / 2012 xxv

xxvi Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

General
The Leica RCD30 documentation consists of several volumes. It is distributed as a whole or as
sub-sets. Sub-sets contain only some of the volumes, selected according to the needs of the target
reader.
Volumes
Volume 1 - Leica RCD30 User Manual
Contains important safety directions as well as instructions for system setup, operation and
maintenance as well as important care and handling information and Technical Data.
Volume 2 - Leica RCD30 Technical Reference Manual

Provides a complete description of the system as well as detailed information. Covers clean-
ing and technical checks, as well as exchange and replacement as far as this can be done by
the user. Contains further general information about system calibration and service intervals
Volume 3 - Leica RCD30 Field Manual

In addition to the User Manual, contains relevant information about recommendations for
flight execution, how to get perfect image strips and flight planning as well as for Leica
FCMS.
Volume 4 - Leica RCD30 Installation Information
Contains all information and data for preparation of an aircraft for installation of a Leica
RCD30 system.
Typical sets and sub-sets

Volume 1 - User Manual, printed version
Volumes 1 to 4 - Leica RCD30 Documentation, on CD/DVD
Document code and CD/DVD article # 784799
Delivered with the system.
Volume 1 and 4 - Leica RCD30 USM and Installation Information
For persons in charge of preparing aircraft for sensor installation.
Where to get more information

Internet http://www.leica-geosystems.com
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 xxvii

xxviii Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Leica RCD30 Documentation Volume - 1
User Manual
This manual contains important safety directions as well as instruc-

tions for setting up the product and operating it. Refer to section
"Safety Directions" in Volume 1, Chapter 6 on Page 123 for further
information. Read carefully through the User Manual before you
switch on the product.
Volume 1 Leica RCD30 User Manual
ii Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Leica RCD30 User Manual
Contents
Contents
About this User Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Scope of document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Product identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Meaning of symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Where to get assistance and training. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Headquarters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Contact Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Where to find more information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
System Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Overviews . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Standard components of a complete Leica RCD30 standalone system . . . . . . . . 9
Optional components for Leica RCD30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Overview of Leica RCD30 System Components and Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
CH61 / CH62 Camera Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Leica PAV80 Gyro-stabilized mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Standalone Pod. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
CC31 / CC32 Camera Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
MM30 Mass Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
IS40 Interface Stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
OC52 Operation Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
OC50 for Pilot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
GI40 Guidance Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Power connection accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
PS56 Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Installing the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
About unpacking Leica RCD30 components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Mount the Camera Head and the IMU into the Standalone Pod . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Mounting the IMU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Mount the PAV80 adapter ring to the pod. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Attach the protective filter to the lens and secure the filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Mounting the lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Remove the Camera Head cover - FMC transport lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Attache the lens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Remove the lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Hardware installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Pre-requirements for installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 i

Contents
Safety specifications and standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

General note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Installation of the Sensor Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Inserting Pod in Leica PAV80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Removing Pod from Leica PAV80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Installation of the Camera Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Installation of the Operator Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Installation of IS40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Attaching of OC52 or OC50 Operator Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Adjustment of IS40 and OC50/OC52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Installation of the Operation Controller OC50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Adaptation of the anti-dazzle shield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Installation of the Guidance Indicator GI40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Insert Mass Memory into slots in CC31/CC32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Mass Memory safety checks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Cabling the Leica RCD30 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Cabling overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Chassis ground connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Connection to GNSS antenna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Connection of OC50 for Pilot and GI40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Power cable connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Ground check with PS56 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Software and Firmware installation and update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Step 1: Write down configuration settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Step 2: Updating the Leica RCD30 system (except OC50 for Pilot) . . . . . . . . . . 38
Update OC52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Update CC32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Step 3: Update of OC50 for pilot and GI40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Step 4: Configure the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
SRTM data installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
How to install SRTM data on Leica RCD30 with CC32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
How to modify installed SRTM data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Installation of SRTM-data on CC31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Preparation before installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Install SRTM data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Restore system protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Licensing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Automatic license check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
License file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Upload of license file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Trouble shooting for license file upload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
User check of license . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
System Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Before starting the system for the first time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Initial configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Flight checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Important notes for the photo flight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
ii Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Contents
Leica RCD30 Field Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Hardware operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Power switches on devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Power push button on CC31/CC32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Power switch on Leica PAV80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Power switch on OC52/OC50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Checklist before powering the Leica RCD30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Mandatory procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
For takeoff and landing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
For takeoff. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
If the aircraft is on the tarmac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Start-up sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
System shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Remove and in-flight exchange of mass memories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
MM remove/exchange if the Leica RCD30 is not in a powered ON state . . . . . . . 58
MM remove/exchange if the Leica RCD30 is in a powered ON state . . . . . . . . . . 58
In-flight swapping of Mass Memories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Remove Mass Memory from CC31/CC32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Insert Mass Memory into slots in CC31/CC32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Mass Memory safety checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Status LEDs and status messages on the hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Status LEDs on devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Status LED on Leica PAV80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Status LED on OC52/50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Status LED on GI40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Status display on CC31 or CC32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Software operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Locking management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
On-line help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
First help level - short description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Second help level - online documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Language selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Select the language for the operator.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Select the language for the pilot.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
General about Initial configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Leica FCMS for Leica RCD30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Selecting configuration sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Names of pre-configured configuration sets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Initial configuration of global parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Enter configuration dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Set Time Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Set system installation parameters and IMU type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Flight Guidance & Sensor Release configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Set flight guidance and sensor release configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Edit or create Flight Release set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Names of pre-configured Flight Release configuration sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
File operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
How to select data in the file selection dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Delete Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 iii

Contents
Delete data on USB stick connected to OC52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Delete data in the OC52 memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Delete data on Mass Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Select data on Mass Memory and delete it . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Upload projects with flight plans and graphical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Download projects, flight plans and flight data.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Upload maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Prepare Mass Memories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
About data storage modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Flight execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Pre-flight check list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Start flight execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Ground start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Air-Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Sensor Status view during start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Sensor status and configuration after successful start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Leica PAV80 status indicated on LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
FCMS views, controls and GUI during flight execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Operation during flight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Main user tasks during flight execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Flight plan controlled flight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Manually controlled flight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Set configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Manual setting of Height, Altitude and GSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Image numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Automatic integration time control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Automatic Integration Time mode configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Operation in automatic integration time control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
User corrections to automatic integration time setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Manually start execution of an Auto IT control sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Checking the exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Configuration for Automatic Integration Time Control or for manual release. . . . 93
Manual Start / Stop image data recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Prepare for manual frame release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Start manually frame release sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Release manually additional frame within a frame release sequence. . . . . . . . . . . 94
Stop frame release sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Annotation - user log file entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Log data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Flight plan controlled flight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Project and flight plan selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Flight line selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Direct selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Direct selection by touch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Selection from the line listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Selection by line number or line label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Reverse line execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Abort line or abort project execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Shorten and/or extend a line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Marking sections of a line during data recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
User activation of FCMS route-finder algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
iv Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Contents
System check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Trouble shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
During startup as long as Leica FCMS is not fully operational . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Status messages on front panel of CC31/CC32 during start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Error messages on front panel of CC31/CC32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
During flight execution with Leica FCMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Trouble shooting PAV80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Trouble shooting OC52/OC50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Trouble shooting GI40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Export of status data for error analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Service Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Care & Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Cleaning and drying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Cleaning of Optical Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Cables and plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Dust filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Leica RCD30 storage and shipping case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Packing the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Transport. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Transport in a road vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Shipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Boresighting - IMU misalignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Service intervals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Safety Directions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Safety Directions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Intended use of the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Prohibited use of the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Limits of Use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Manufacturer of the product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Manufacturers of non Leica Geosystems accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Shipping company. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Seller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Person in charge of the product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Service technician . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Aircraft installer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Hazards of use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
FCC Statement, Applicable in U.S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 v

Contents
Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

About Technical Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Overview of Leica RCD30 specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Electronic characteristics of data chain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Camera Heads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Spectral range and filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Optics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Real-time view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
GNSS/IMU system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Camera Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Operational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Mass Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
External interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Overview of mechanical interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Dimensions and weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Environmental . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Applied standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Conformity to national regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Frequency band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Output power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
GNSS Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
System components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Devices and parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
IMU Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Tools and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Optional cables and other components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Documentation, Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Shipping Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Packing order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Warranty - Software License Agreement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

International Limited Warranty, Software License Agreement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
International Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Software License Agreement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Microsoft End User License Agreement ("EULA") . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
End user license agreement for MICROSOFT embedded systems . . . . . . . . . 159
Product specific terms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
General terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
vi Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Leica RCD30 User Manual Leica RCD30 Documentation Volume - 1
Chapter 1 About this User Manual
Version 4.01-61 Oct / 19 / 2012 1

Scope of document
This User Manual is designed to provide users with general instructions for use of the Leica
RCD30 manufactured by Leica Geosystems AG of Heerbrugg, Switzerland.
This User Manual describes:
The System and System Components
User Installation
Functions and Operation
Intended Use
Care and Handling
Safety Directions
Technical Data
Warranty and Software Licensing
Product identification
The article numbers and serial numbers of the components of the Leica RCD30 system are indi-
cated on the type plates. Enter them in the table below, and always refer to this information when
contacting your agency or service center.
Table 1. Product identification
Device Article number Serial number

CH61, CH62 784778, 777966
CC31, CC32 784749, 780048
50 mm lens 785422
80 mm lens 785423
MM30 - 256 785424
MM30 - 512 784796
MM30 - 1024 784795
OC52 (Operator) 767841
IS40 743070
OC50 for Pilot 745210
GI40 861330
PAV80 785071
2 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Abbreviations
Table 2. Abbreviations
Abbreviation Meaning
AGL Above ground level
ALT Altitude
AMSL Altitude above mean sea level
CCD Charged Coupled Device
CD Compact Disk
DEM Digital Elevation Model
DGPS Differentially-corrected GPS
DSM Digital Surface Model
FCMS Flight & Sensor Control Management System
FPES Flight Planning & Evaluation Software
FW Firmware
GB Gigabyte
GI40 Guidance Indicator
GLONASS Global Navigation Satellite System (Russia)
GNSS Global Navigation Satellite System
GPS Global Positioning System (USA)
GS Ground Speed (Speed over Ground)
GSD Ground Sampling Distance
GUI Graphical User Interface
HDG Heading
HDOP Horizontal Dilution of Precision
HW Hardware
IMU Inertial Measurement Unit
IP Initial Point
IPAS Inertial Position and Attitude System
IS40 Interface Stand
IT Integration Time
KML Keyhole Markup Language (Google Earth File)
LAN Local Area Network
Mb Megabit
MB Megabyte
MPE Maximum Permissable Exposure
OC50 / OC52 Operation Controller
PAV80 Gyro-stabilized camera mount
PD56 Power Distributorbox
PDOP Position Dilution of Precision
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 3

Table 2. Abbreviations
Abbreviation Meaning
PPP Precise Point Positioning
PS56 Power Supply
RTCA Radio Technical Commission for Aeronautics
RTCM Radio Technical Commission for Maritime Services
SCSI Small Computer System Interface
SNR Signal-To-Noise Ratio
SSD Solid State Drive (Disk)
SW Software
TGT True Ground Track
TRM Technical Reference Manual
USB Universal Serial Bus
USM User Manual
UTC Coordinated Universal Time
WGS84 World Geodetic System 1984
4 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Meaning of symbols
Danger: Indicates a potentially dangerous area, where, if not protected, a risk of crushes,
jams or cut off occurs.
Danger: Indicates a potentially dangerous area, where, if not protected, a risk of crushes,
jams or cut off occurs.
Danger: Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in
death or serious injury.
Warning: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation or an unintended use which, if not

avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
Caution: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation or an unintended use which, if not avoided,
may result in minor or moderate injury and/or appreciable material, financial and environmental
damage.
Important: Paragraphs which must be adhered to in practice as they enable the product to be
used in a technically correct and efficient manner.
Note: Highlights a point of special interest about a topic under discussion.
Tip: This points to a useful hint that may save time and trouble.
Trademarks
All trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 5

Where to get assistance and training

Important: Please be aware, that for a complete understanding of the functionality and
operation of the system it is necessary to participate in a Leica RCD30 product training and
maintenance course.
For assistance and training courses please contact your local Leica Geosystems subsidiary or rep-
resentative.
Headquarters
Contact Leica Geosystems AG e-mail:
Business Unit Digital Imaging info@leica-geosystems.com
Heinrich-Wild-Strasse Phone: + 41 71 727 3131
9435 Heerbrugg Fax: + 41 71 727 4674
Switzerland
Contact Support
Region Contact e-mail
Americas sensors@leica-geosystems.com
U.S.A., Canada, Central & South America
Asia / Pacific sensors-ap@leica-geosystems.com
(incl. Australia, China, Japan and Korea)
Europe, Middle East & Africa sensors-emea@leica-geosystems.com
Where to find more information

Refer to the Leica RCD30 Technical Reference Manual for the following subjects:
Description of the design principles of the system
Advanced operation of the system
Advance service and maintenance of the sy tem
Refer to the Leica RCD30 Field Manual for the following subjects:
Extended configuration and operational aspects of the Leica RCD30 system
Flight recommendations
Details about Leica FCMS
Refer to the Leica RCD30 Installation Information for the following subject:
Preparing an aircraft for installation
6 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Chapter 2 System Description
Version 4.01-61 Oct / 19 / 2012 7

Components
Overviews
The Leica RCD30 Series of 60 Megapixel medium format aerial cameras sets a new standard in
what can be expected from this type of digital frame cameras. A single camera head delivers co-
registered, direct-georeferenced multi-spectral RGBN imagery of 8956 x 6708 pixels at a pixel
size of 6 microns. Mechanical Forward Motion Compensation (FMC) along two axes provides
sharpest images and 50mm and a 80 mm ruggedized and thermal stabilized lens systems are
available. In-flight exchangeable mass memories are available with SSD and a capacity of
256GB, 512GB and 1TB. The Leica RCD30 series modular concept enables single and multi-
head standalone configurations as well as full integration to Leica ALS70 and other third party
sensors.
Leica Geosystems complete standalone aerial camera solution includes a GNSS/IMU system,
the Flight & Sensor Control Management System (Leica FCMS) and the Leica PAV80 Gyro-sta-
bilized mount.
The operational heart of the Leica RCD30 is the Flight & Sensor Control Management System
(Leica FCMS). All aspects of the Leica RCD30 operation are conducted using this software. The
operator communicates with the software through the OC52 Operation Controller. Remote con-
trol is made from the OC50.The system operates highly automated.
Leica FCMS features a graphical user interface, based on clear icons. On the Operator Interface
OC52 the icons are large buttons so that the touch screen interface is powerful, ergonomic and
effective. A remote device in the cockpit is provided for the pilot: OC50 for Pilot. Additionally
guidance information can be displayed by means of the Guidance Indicator GI40. The operator's
task is eased by predefined system configurations and quick navigation through the menu tree is
easily possible. The system is fully configurable to suit different users.
Figure 1: .Airborne sensing reference system with Leica RCD30
1 GNSS Satellites (not supplied)
2 Airborne GNSS Antenna
3 Leica RCD30 System
4 GNSS ground reference station

(not supplied)
8 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Figure 2: Overview of fully integrated Leica RCD30 Camera System
1 Standalone Pod with CH61 or CH62

and IMU
2 PAV80 Gyro-stabilized Mount
3 CC32 Control Unit
4 IS40 Interface Stand
5 OC52 Operator Controller
6 OC50 for Pilot
7 GI40 Guidance Indicator
Standard components of a complete Leica RCD30 standalone system
The main components are:

Leica RCD30 Digital Camera System with CH61 or CH62 Camera Head, NAG-50 and/or
NAT-D 80 mm lens, CC32 Camera Controller with GNSS/IMU system and exchangeable
Mass Memories, Mounting Plate for Camera Controller
Leica PAV80 Gyro-stabilized Mount with corresponding adapter ring, protection cover
Standalone Pod. (Holding camera Head and IMU to insert it into the Leica PAV80.)
User Interface Hardware for Operator and Pilot
Various cables
Leica RCD30 standard accessories
Shipping Cases
Software for operating, flight guidance and data post-processing
A detailed overview is given in section "System components" in Volume 1, Chapter 7 on Page

146.
Optional components for Leica RCD30

The main optional components are:
Duo, Oblique Trio or Oblique Penta Pod (Holding multiples Camera Heads and IMU for
mounting into the Leica PAV80)
Spacer between aircraft floor and base plate of the Gyro-stabilized Mount
Lenses with other focal lengths
Ground power supply

146.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 9

Overview of Leica RCD30 System Components and Options
10 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

CH61 / CH62 Camera Head
1. Lens bayonet ring on Camera Head

2. Airflow grid
3. Connector for cable to Control Computer
4. Camera Head CH61/CH62
5. Camera Head Mounting plate with four screw holes
6. Lens
1. Lens bayonet ring on Camera Head

2. Red mark on bayonet ring
3. Camera Head cover - FMC transport lock
4. Push button to unlock the bayonet ring
Lenses
1. Bayonet
2. Electrical connectors to Camera Head
3. Back lens cover
4. Front lens cover
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 11

Leica PAV80 Gyro-stabilized mount
1. Drift ring with zero mark

2. Adapter ring for pod with four fixing screw holes
3. Folding handle
4. Interface panel
5. Integrated protection cover
6. Plate covering the fixing hole area
7. Fixing screw hole
8. Base plate
Standalone Pod
1. Handles
2. Airflow
3. Ring to Leica PAV80 with four fixing screw holes
CC31 / CC32 Camera Controller

Front
1. Locks for Mass Memories
2. USB connectors (total 4)
3. Status display
4. Power push button
5. Airflow grid
6. Slots for Mass memories
12 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Figure 3: Leica RCD30 Control Unit CC31 or CC32 rear panel
Table 3. Rear Panel Connectors

Connector name Function
LAN Gigabit Ethernet connection
IMU IMU connector (CC32 only)
28 V DC out Power connector for Leica PAV80
28 V DC in 28VDC main power input
Aux 1, Aux2, Aux3 Connector to other devices e.g. Leica PAV80
OC Connector to Operator interface
CH1,CH2, CH3,CH4,CH5 Connector to Camera Heads CH61 and CH62
Antenna GNSS antenna (CC32 only)
Earth Chassis ground connection
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 13

MM30 Mass Memory

Front and Rear side of Mass Memory
Legend
1. Front side
2. Grooves (top and bottom) to define orientation in
Camera Controller or download adapter
3. Rear side
4. Connector

The IS40 holds the OC52 or the OC50 for operator.
All adjustable parts can be safely blocked.
To meet safety requirements the tube can be separated
easily and stored in a safe place.
Legend
1. Fixing plate for OC52/OC50 for operator
2. IS40 tubes
3. IS40 base plate
OC52 Operation Controller

Front side of OC52 for Operator
Legend
1. Status LED
2. Power switch
3. Touch screen
4. Hardware keys
14 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

OC50 for Pilot

Legend
1. Airflow grid
2. Power switch
3. Screen
4. Hardware keys
5. Removable dazzle shield

The GI40 provides guidance information to the pilot. It is
designed to be placed on the dashboard in the cockpit or
any other desired place.
Brightness is controlled automatically depending on the
ambient illumination level.
To switch off the GI40 simply disconnect the device.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 15

Power connection accessories
PS56 Power Supply

Legend
1. Cooling fans
2. Airflow slits
3. Receptacle for the AC power cable
4. Status LED
5. Circuit breaker
6. Main power switch
Case
Cases for the equipment are designed to protect all parts from damage during shipping. It is also
recommended to store the equipment in the cases when it is not used. See section Transport in
Volume 1, Chapter 5 and section Storage in Volume 1, Chapter 5.
For dimensions, weight, packing list etc. section Systems Components in Volume 1, Chapter 7.
Figure 4: Example of shipping case for Leica RCD30 components
Legend
1. Eyes designed to seal the shipping case
2. Shock indicators outside
16 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Chapter 3 Installing the System
Version 4.01-61 Oct / 19 / 2012 17

Unpacking
Important: All Leica RCD30 hardware components are shipped in shock-protected shipping
cases. Check the shock indicators which are located outside the shipping cases. If an indicator
appears RED, inform the freight handler immediately. Also inspect all components and make
sure they are not damaged.
About unpacking Leica RCD30 components

The standalone, fully integrated Leica RCD30 camera system consists of several components.
See section "Overview of Leica RCD30 System Components and Options" in Volume 1, Chapter
2 on Page 10. The components are shipped in three cushioned re-usable shipping containers. To
protect the Camera Head, the Optics and the IMU from shocks and vibration during shipment
this components are shipped separately and not mounted in the pod.
Unpack all components of the system and check for damage. Contact Leica Geosystems should
any components arrive damaged. Retain the shipping waybill for future reference.
To prepare for installing, mount the components as follows:

Mount the Camera Head and the IMU into the Standalone Pod
See section "Mount the Camera Head and the IMU into the Standalone Pod" in Volume 1,
Chapter 3 on Page 19
Attach the lens filter to the lens and secure it
See section "Attach the protective filter to the lens and secure the filter" in Volume 1, Chap-
ter 3 on Page 22
Mount the lens to the Camera Head
See section "Mounting the lens" in Volume 1, Chapter 3 on Page 23
18 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Mount the Camera Head and the IMU into the Standalone Pod
Important: Mounting of the Camera head and the IMU must be done in a clean environment.
Note: All tools required for mounting are part of article # 784801 RCD30 Tool Kit.
All screws are delivered with the pod
Mounting the Camera Head

Procedure
1. Place the standalone pod upside down
2. Loosen all 6 screws holding the tube of the pod
Screws: 5x M5 30 mm and 1 x M5 20 mm
3. Remove the tube from the pod
4. Turn the pod over
5. Take the Camera Head without Lens and place it as

shown in the picture on the left side
6. Connect the Camera Head cable
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 19

7. Place the Camera Head onto the pod plate as shown

in the picture on the left side.
Looking into flight direction the Camera Head cable
connector is located on the back side.
The flight direction is indicated on a sticker on the
pod plate. The circle on the picture shows the loca-
tion of the sticker.
8. Fasten securely the Camera Head to the pod plate.
Use all four screws #239435, M4x12mm
9. Turn the pod upside down

10. Put the tube back on the pod
11. Fix the tube to the pod
Make sure to use at the location with the small node
(marked with a circle on the photograph on the left
side) the short screw M5x20 mm
Use at all other locations the screws M5x30 mm
12. Fasten securely all six screws
Mounting the IMU
1. Place the pod upright

2. Loosen the four screws which fix the hood of the
pod
The screws are located at the handle side with two
screws on each side.
20 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

3. Remove the pod hood

4. Cut the transport safety band which secures the IMU
cable.
5. Place the IMU onto the mounting plate.

Important: Make sure the IMU is aligned according to
the definition given for each IMU type in the corre-
sponding paragraph IMU orientation in section
"Mounting of the IMU for 3rd party installations" in
Volume 2, Chapter 7 on Page 270.
The flight direction is indicated on a sticker on the
IMU mounting plate. The circle on the picture
shows the location of the sticker.
6. Connect the IMU cable.
7. Use all four screws to fasten the IMU to the mount-
ing plate. Screws types:
IMU CUS4-CPT: 4 x M6 x 20 mm #266667
DUS5-LN200: screws attached to IMU
NUS5-33BM61: 4 x M5x25 mm #180315
8. Place the hood onto the pod

9. Use all four screws to fix the hood of the pod
Mount the PAV80 adapter ring to the pod

Procedure
1. Turn the pod upside down
2. Place the PAV80 adapter ring to the pod as shown on
the picture on the left
3. The narrow screw holes (marked with green circles)
has to be placed in flight direction (cable outlet
side).
4. Use all three screws # 662917 M6x16mm to fix the
ring to the pod.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 21

Attach the protective filter to the lens and secure the filter
Procedure
The picture on the left shows the NAT-D 80 lens, the
protective filter in the open case and a roll of aircraft
safety wire. The wire is part of article # 784801
RCD30 Tool Kit.
1. Cut a piece of wire
NAG-D 50 mm approximately 20 cm length
NAT-D 80 mm approximately 10 cm length
2. Attach the protective filter to the lens
3. Thread the safety wire into on of the pairs of small

holes on the outside edge of the fitter hood.
See picture on the left
4. Thread one end of the safety wire though the closest

hole on the lens body.
See picture on the left
5. Twist the free ends of the safety wire together.

The ends should be twisted at least five turns
6. Cut off the non twisted ends of the safety wire
22 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Mounting the lens

Important: Mounting of the lens must be done in a clean environment.
Remove the Camera Head cover - FMC transport lock

Procedure
1. Turn the pod up side down
2. Push the lock button and hold it pushed down
3. Turn the bayonet ring counter clock wise until it

stops.
See picture on the left side
4. Turn the Camera Head cover counter clock wise

until it stops.
See picture on the left side
Remove the Camera Head cover.
Important: Make sure no dirt or dust falls into the
Camera Head.
Important: Store the Camera Head cover for later use.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 23

Attache the lens

Procedure
1. Remove the black protection cover from the back
lens
2. Insert the lens into the Camera Head
The red point on the lens has to be aligned with the
red point on the lens bayonet ring on the Camera
Head
3. Push the lens towards the Camera Head and hold it

pushed
4. Turn the bayonet clockwise until it stops
The picture on the left shows the lens securely attached

to the Camera Head.
Note: Note the location of the red points on the lens and
the bayonet ring
Remove the lens

Procedure
1. Put the pod upside down
2. Push the lock button and hold it pushed down
3. Turn the bayonet ring counter clock wise
4. Remove the lens
5. Attache another lens or the Camera Head cover
24 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Hardware installation
Pre-requirements for installation

It is assumed that a provider authorized for installation of payloads has completed all the tasks
listed in section "Main tasks to be performed by the installer" in Volume 4, Chapter 2 on Page
520.
Safety specifications and standards

Securing the equipment to the aircraft structure should comply with aeronautical standards.
General note
This chapter contains only information about installation for and by the user.
Important: Install all components according to the guidelines given by the authorized provider
for installation of payloads. Use only hardware from the authorized provider for installation of
payloads to secure the components to the aircraft.
Important: Install complete payload. The complete payload consists of all components of the
Leica RCD30 system. Do not power on individual components if the complete payload is not
installed and/or all cable connections are not made correctly.
Caution: Some of the Leica RCD30 system components that are to be installed in the aircraft
are very heavy: for more information please see Table 27 in section "System components" in
Volume 1, Chapter 7 on Page 146. Owing to their weight and size it is highly recommended that
at least two people are used in maneuvering these components in and out of the aircraft. This is
not only for the safety of the people involved, but also for the well-being of the equipment.
Danger: Keep any part of your body away from areas indicated with this symbol. To
protect personnel from dangerous areas, never power on the Leica PAV80 if no sensor is
inserted.
Danger: Keep any part of your body away from areas indicated with this symbol.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 25

Installation of the Sensor Mount

Caution: Always use the folding handles to carry the Leica PAV80.
Do never carry the Leica PAV80 by holding it inside the sensor hole!
Correct carrying method Dangerous carrying method
Procedure
1. If required place the spacer on the aircraft opening.
Position the spacer in the flight direction according
to the arrow marking.
Ensure that the spacer is securely fastened to the air-
craft structure according to the guidelines given by
the authorized installer.
2. Place the protection cover on the aircraft opening or
the spacer, with its flexible side towards the flight
direction.
3. Place the PAV80 according to the flight direction.

4. Insert the front two fastening screws in the base
plate through the holes into the aircraft floor,
adapter plate or spacer. Do not tighten them yet.
5. Loosen the screw [1]on the plate which covers the

fixing screw hole area. Turn the plate out to become
convenient access to the fastening screw location.
6. Insert the rear two fastening screws in the base
plate through the holes into the aircraft floor,
adapter plate or spacer, and tighten them firmly.
Tighten the front two fastening screws firmly.
26 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

7. Turn back the cover plates and fasten the screws to

secure the cover plates at the close position.
8. Ensure efficient chassis ground connection from
Leica PAV80 to aircraft structure according to the
guidelines given by the authorized installer.
See section "Chassis ground connection" in Volume
1, Chapter 3 on Page 35.
Caution: Always remove the sensor from the Leica PAV80 before you carry the mount.

A handle can break. Because each handle is
designed for a maximum load of 50 kg.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 27

Inserting Pod in Leica PAV80

Procedure
1. Insert the pod carefully into the Leica PAV80 as
shown on the picture on the left side The red arrow
in the picture on the left points in flight direction.
If the pod is inserted in the correct direction the
cable outlet of the pod is close to the Leica PAV80
connector panel.
Warning: Insert the Pod into the PAV80 only as shown in the image above. Never insert it
differently.
2. Use the screws (type M4 6 mm) to secure the pod in

the Leica PAV80.
Fasten the screws securely.
Use all four screws. See pictures below.
28 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Removing Pod from Leica PAV80

Procedure
1. Loosen all all four screws which secures the pod in
the Leica PAV80.
2. Lift the pod carefully out of the Leica PAV80.
Installation of the Camera Controller

Procedure
1. Place the CC31 / CC32 on to the prepared location
in the aircraft.
2. Ensure that the CC31 / CC32 is securely fastened to
the aircraft structure according to the guidelines
given by the authorized installer.
3. Ensure efficient chassis ground connection to the

aircraft structure according to the guidelines given
by the authorized installer.
This is either from the
CC31 / CC32 Earth connector
Mounting plate. (Example on the left)
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 29

Installation of the Operator Interface
Installation of IS40
Procedure
1. Place the IS40 base plate on to the prepared location
in the aircraft.
2. Ensure that the IS40 base plate is securely fastened
to the aircraft structure according to the guidelines
given by the authorized installer.

IS40 base plate to the aircraft structure according to
the guidelines given by the authorized aircraft
installer.
As an example the photo on the left shows a chassis
ground strap connected to one of the two conductive
areas located close to the tube.
Ground connection can also be made by means of
the conductive areas surrounding the screw holes.
4. Insert the tube into the IS40 base plate.

5. Fasten and tighten the lever on the flange of the
IS40.
30 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Attaching of OC52 or OC50 Operator Controller

Procedure
1. Place the fixing plate of the OC52/OC50 for Opera-
tor on to the fixing plate of the IS40 tube.
The two centering bolts on the IS40 fixing plate
must fit into the centering holes on the OC50 fixing
plate.
2. Fasten the centering screw to ensure safe fixing of

the OC50/OC52 on the IS40.
Adjustment of IS40 and OC50/OC52

Procedure
1. Adjust height of the IS40 tube as desired for conve-
nient operation.
2. Fasten and tighten the lever.
3. Adjust inclination of the OC50/OC52 on the IS40

tube as desired for convenient operation.
4. Fasten and tighten the lever.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 31

Installation of the Operation Controller OC50

Procedure
1. Place the OC50 on to the prepared location in the
aircraft.
2. Ensure that the OC50 is securely fastened according
to the guidelines given by the authorized installer.
OC50 screw holes to the aircraft structure accord-
ing to the guidelines given by the authorized air-
craft installer.
Adaptation of the anti-dazzle shield

Depending on the place of the OC50 in the cockpit an anti-dazzle shield might be required to
avoid reflection on the OC50 screen. A number of anti-dazzle shields are provided with the stan-
dard delivery. This shield is a low-cost item (consumable) part. Cut it to adapt it for a specific
installation and the pilots requirements.
Adaptation of the anti-dazzle shield
1. Attach the anti-dazzle shield to the OC50
2. On the anti-dazzle shield mark the shape which fits
the pilots needs.
3. Use scissors to cut the shield into the required shape.
Installation of the Guidance Indicator GI40

Procedure
1. Place the GI40 on to the prepared location in the air-
craft.
2. Ensure that the GI40 is securely fastened according
to the guidelines given by the authorized installer.
GI40 screw holes to the aircraft structure according
to the guidelines given by the authorized aircraft
installer.
32 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Insert Mass Memory into slots in CC31/CC32

The MM30 Mass Memories are removable, flash memory units.
Caution: MM30 must always be securely locked when inserted into the slots on the CC31/
CC32.
See section "Mass Memory safety checks" in Volume 1, Chapter 3 on Page 33.
How to insert the MM30 into the slots in the CC31/CC32

1. Insert one or two MM30 into the slot(s). Push it
fully inwards.
2. Insert the key(s) to the lock.

3. Turn the key(s) 90 clock wise to securely lock the
MM in the slot(s).
Mass Memory safety checks

MM80 safely installed, ready for operation
Check that the lock of each MM30 is securely locked.
The illustration on the left side shows how the lock
appears if the MM30 is securely locked. (Illustraton with
a green check mark below.)
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 33

Cabling the Leica RCD30 system

Caution: Do not modify the cables and do not extend the cable lengths.
Take care when removing Lemo connectors to avoid pulling on the cable. Instead, pull back on
the connector shell to release the locking mechanism. Twisting the connector shell may result in
damage to the connector or its mate.
Cabling overview
Figure 5: Cabling diagram of Leica RCD30 system
34 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

All cables needs to be connected according to Figure 5. Additional information is given in the
paragraphs below.
Tip: The part number of the cable is labeled on the cable, close to one of the connectors.
Chassis ground connection

Caution: For safety reasons, an efficient chassis ground connection between the aircraft
structure and the following Leica RCD30 components has to be fulfilled:
Leica PAV80, CC3x, IS40 and OC50.
Make the chassis ground connection according to the guidelines given by the authorized provider
for installation of payloads.
Connection to GNSS antenna

Caution: On the fuselage of a survey flight aircraft often more than one GNSS antenna is
installed. Make sure the GNSS antenna cable is connected to the GNSS antenna for the Leica
RCD30. GNSS antennas can have different electrical characteristics. If a GNSS antenna is
connected to the Leica RCD30 system which is not suitable, the Leica RCD30 system can
become damaged or the GNSS data quality will be poor.
Connection of OC50 for Pilot and GI40

Both devices can be connected in series to the OC52/OC50 for operator. Connect the OC50 for
Pilot to the OC52/OC50 for operator and the GI40 to the OC50 for pilot. The plugs on the OC50/
52 as well as the connectors of the cables are color coded. Connect the cables on the OC50/52
corresponding to the colors.
If no OC50 for pilot is installed, the GI40 is connected to the OC52/OC50 for operator.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 35

Power cable connection

Warning: Power for all components of the Leica RCD30 system should only be supplied
directly from the power source of the aircraft. To connect to the power source of the
aircraft, be sure to use only the cables, connectors and plugs as defined by the authorized
provider for installation of the payload. If you connect to another power source use only
power cables for the system provided by Leica Geosystems and make sure the power source
is fused according to the guidelines given in section "Power requirements, fuses and circuit
breakers" in Volume 4, Chapter 2 on Page 575. Make sure polarity is connected correctly.
Connect the cables according to Figure 6 below.
Figure 6: Power cabling diagram Leica RCD30
36 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Ground check with PS56 Power Supply

The PS56 is used to power-up the Leica RCD30 system for test purposes from a wall outlet.
Caution: Connect the PS56 only to an AC current wall outlet with the following specifications:
AC power capable for 15 A respectively 10 A minimum, 100-240 V~, 15-10A, 50/60 Hz, fused
with maximum 16A respectively 10 A, and ground connection.
Caution:
Use only the AC power cords provided by Leica Geosystems with the PS56 or according to
Standard IEC 60227 capable for 20A.
Do not use the PS56 outdoors and do not instal it in the aircraft.
Protect the PS56 from condensing moisture.
Do not obstruct the airflow. (Airflow slits and cooling fans)
The image on the left shows the PS56 front panel
1. Cooling fans
2. Airflow slits
3. Receptacle for the DC power cable
4. Status LED
5. Circuit breaker
7. Main power switch
Connect the cables according to Figure 6, Power cabling diagram Leica RCD30 in Volume 1,
Chapter 3 on Page 36.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 37

Software and Firmware installation and update

A Leica FCMS release consists always of a full set of Software and Firmware. The Leica
RCD30 system is delivered with all required Software and Firmware installed. Software and
Firmware to update the system comes on a CD. If this is not the case (e.g., software was down-
loaded from the Web) copy the Software and Firmware to a CD. Software and Firmware update
of the Leica RCD30 is made through the DVD drive connected to the OC52/OC50 for operator
and OC50 for pilot. The DVD drive is connected via the USB port.
Important: To ensure proper power use the HUB and always use both cables to connect the
DVD/CD drive to the OC52/OC50 for operator or OC50 for the Pilot.
Important: Make sure the same Leica FCMS version is installed on all components: OC52/
OC50 for operator, OC50 for pilot and GI40.
Important: Installation and update requires a fully operational Leica RCD30 system including
Mass Memory, operator and pilot interfaces like OC50 / GI40 (if part of the system) prior to
attempting software or firmware installation and update.
Important: Update of Leica RCD30 system (via OC52/OC50 for operator) and update of OC50
for pilot /GI40 is made in separate steps.
Step 1: Write down configuration settings
Step 2: Update of Leica RCD30 system (except OC50 for pilot/GI40)
Step 3: Update of OC50 for pilot and GI40
Step 4: Configure the system
Step 1: Write down configuration settings

Only system installation configuration settings will be restored automatically after the update.
All other sensor system specific settings and user defined configurations will be lost during
update. Write down relevant configuration settings to be able to reconfigure the system easily
after the update. How to access Configuration to get the parameters see section "Configuration"
in Volume 1, Chapter 4 on Page 64 and section "Leica FCMS - Configuration" in Volume 3,
Step 2: Updating the Leica RCD30 system (except OC50 for Pilot)
Update OC52
To update the SW and FW, proceed as follows:

1. Make sure the Camera Controller power is OFF.
2. Make sure the power switches on the OC52/OC50 for operator and OC50 for pilot are OFF
3. Connect the external DVD drive to the USB ports on the OC50/52 for operator. Use both
ports to ensure proper power to the DVD drive.
38 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Caution: Ensure non interrupted power during the whole update process. After a power failure
during the installation process the Leica RCD30 can be in an undefined state and only a Leica
Geosystems Service Engineer can recover it.
4. Insert the CD into the DVD drive.

5. Set power switch to ON on Camera Controller.
6. Set power switch to ON on OC52/O50 for Operator.
7. Wait until FCMS main menu is displayed on the operators interface.
8. Select [Service] from FCMS main menu.
9. Select [SW-Upload] to enter dialog to install FCMS consisting of Firmware and Software.
10. Confirm [Continue] to start installation process.
The system powers down, reboots and the installation will take place.
11. Watch the information displayed on the screen in a window with black background.
This process takes a few minutes.

If an installation step fails a corresponding message is displayed.
Important: Do not interrupt the installation process. Proceed until the end of the installation
procedure and after that contact a Leica Geosystems Aerial Sensor Service Center because the
system will not be in an operational state.
12. Watch the messages on the screen

Note: An upgrade can take up to 30 minutes.
Note: After the installation is complete the system restarts. Do not disconnect the DVD drive
nor remove the CD from the drive! After restart the system displays an error message, because
the CC31/CC32 is not yet updated and therefore the FCMS versions are inconsistent. Confirm
the message to reach the FCMS main menu.
13. Disconnect the USB DVD drive from the OC52/OC50.
Update CC32
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 39

1. Connect the external DVD drive to the USB ports on the CC32. Use both ports to ensure
proper power to the DVD drive.
during the installation process the Leica RCD30 can be in an undefined state and only a Leica
Geosystems Service Engineer can recover it.
2. Make sure the CH61/CH62 is connected to the CC32

3. Select [Service] from FCMS main menu on OC52/O50 for Operator
5. Confirm [Continue] to start installation process on CC32.
The CC32 reboots and the installation will take place.

The OC52/O50 for Operator powers down
Important: Do not interrupt the installation process.
Note: An upgrade can take up to 30 minutes.
Note: After the installation is complete the CC32 powers down automatically. This indicates
that the update is completed.
Step 3: Update of OC50 for pilot and GI40

1. Make sure the Camera Controller power is OFF.
2. Make sure the OC50 for pilot power switch is OFF
3. Connect the external DVD drive to the USB port on the Pilot OC50:
Important: To ensure proper power use the HUB and always connect both cables to connect
the DVD/CD drive to the OC50.
during the installation process the OC50 can be in a undefined state and only a Leica Geosystems
Service Engineer can recover it.
4. Insert the CD into the DVD drive.
40 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

5. Set power switch to ON on Camera Controller and OC52/OC50 for Operator.

6. Set power switch to ON on OC50 for Pilot.
7. Wait until FCMS log ON is displayed on the OC50 for pillot.
Important: Do not make any selections in the FCMS on the OC52 Operator Interface until the
update is complete and a system check is performed. All the following selections have to be
made on the OC50 for pilot.
Note: Ignore the error message about old versions. This is correct, because the other compo-
nents of the system are already updated. Confirm [Accept] and continue with step 8. Also ignore
the hourglass.
10. Confirm [Continue] to start installation process.
The system powers down, reboots and the 1st part of the installation will take place.
11. Watch the information displayed on the screen in a window with black background. This
process takes a few minutes.
If an installation step fails a corresponding message is displayed.

Important: Do not interrupt the installation process. Proceed until the end of the installation
procedure and after that contact a Leica Geosystems Aerial Sensor Service Center because the
system is not in an operational state.
12. Watch the messages on the screen.

13. An upgrade can take up to 30 minutes.
Note: After the installation is complete the system restarts. Do not disconnect the CD drive nor
remove the CD from the drive! After restart the system is ready for use through the FCMS main
menu.
14. Select [End] to quit FCMS on OC50 for pilot.
15. After automatic shutdown, switch OFF power on OC50 for pilot.
16. Select [End] to quit FCMS on OC50/52 for Operator.
17. After automatic shutdown, switch OFF power on .
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 41

18. Disconnect the USB DVD drive from the OC50.
Step 4: Configure the system

See section "Configuration" in Volume 1, Chapter 4 on Page 64 and section "Leica FCMS - Con-
figuration" in Volume 3, Chapter 4 on Page 397.
42 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

SRTM data installation

From SRTM DTM data Leica FCMS generates automatically Elevation Encoded and Shaded
Relief bitmaps. During flight execution this maps can be displayed on the map layer on various
views. For details about maps see section "Introduction to the use of maps in Leica FCMS flight
guidance" in Volume 3, Chapter 4 on Page 443.
World wide SRTM data are available for public use. The data are organized by continent.
Figure 7: SRTM data organization
For convenient installation and use in Leica FCMS world wide SRTM data are available on a set
of 4 DVD.
The installer, documentation and SRTM data are stored on the DVDs as described in Table 4.
Table 4. Content of Article # 780511 - 4 DVD with World wide SRTM data
Installation disk Content of DVD SRTM-Continent-Definition

DVD #1 Installer and SRTM Documentation
SRTM30 - world wide
SRTM3 - Middle East Africa
SRTM3 - Australia Australia
SRTM3 - Eurasia: Europe Eurasia
SRTM3 - Islands Islands
SWBD world wide
DVD #2 SRTM3 - Eurasia: Asia Eurasia
DVD #3 SRTM3 - North America North America
SRTM3 - South America South America
DVD #4 SRTM3 - Africa Africa
SRTM30 - Experimental
For the installation of SRTM data minimum DVD #1 is required. DVD #2 to #4 are required
depending on the areas selected for installation.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 43

SRTM data installation on the Leica RCD30 with CC32 is made through the DVD drive con-
nected to the OC52/OC50 for operator. The DVD drive is connected via the USB port.
Important: To ensure proper power use the HUB and always both cables to connect the DVD
drive to the OC52/OC50 for operator.
Important: Make sure the same FCMS version is installed on all components: OC52/OC50 for
operator, OC50 and GI40.
Important: SRTM data are installed on the OC52/OC50 for operator. No SRTM data should be
installed on the OC50 for pilot.
Important: The space on the internal memory is limited on the Leica RCD30. Installation of
SRTM data requires a local disk space of 2 GB (minimum) up to 15 GB (world wide).
For SRTM data and for bitmap maps typically 4 GB are available. The available memory space
can be checked in the sensors status view. See section "Sensor Status view during start-up" in
Install only the SRTM data of areas where you are currently making aerial survey. If you are
operating internationally use the installer to de-install unused SRTM data.
How to install SRTM data on Leica RCD30 with CC32
To install SRTM data proceed as follows:

1. Make sure the sensor systems control unit power switch is OFF.
2. Make sure the power switches on the OC52/OC50 for operator and OC50 for pilot are OFF
3. Connect the external DVD drive to the USB ports on the OC50/52 for operator. Use both
ports to ensure proper power to the DVD drive.
Caution: Ensure non interrupted power during the whole process. Installation of SRTM data
can take up to a few hours. After a power failure during the installation process the system can be
in a undefined state and only a Leica Geosystems Service Engineer can recover it.
4. Insert the DVD #1 into the DVD drive.

5. Set power switch to ON on .
6. Wait until FCMS main menu is displayed on the operators interface.
8. Select [SW-Upload] to start the installer of SRTM data.
The system powers down, reboots and the installation will continues.
9. Follow the steps of the installation wizard until the page Setup Type
10. Select Custom on the page Setup Type
44 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

11. Confirm Next on the installer window displayed on the screen.
Important: Do not change the default path
12. Confirm Next on the installer window displayed on the screen.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 45

13. Select the ares to be installed.

14. Check the space required and the available space. Adjust your selection, if required.
15. Make sure the installation disks for the selected areas are available before you continue.
16. Confirm Next on the installer window displayed on the screen..
Note: Installing can take up to a few hours.
17. Watch the messages on the screen and act accordingly

18. At the end confirm Finish to exit the installation wizard.
The system shuts down automatically.
How to modify installed SRTM data
To modify the SRTM installation proceed as follows:

1. Perform the steps 1 to 9 of the procedure given in paragraph How to install SRTM data on
Leica RCD30 with CC32 on Page 44.
The system powers down, reboots and the installation will continues.
2. Select Modify on the installer window displayed on the screen
3. Continue with the step 14 given in paragraph How to install SRTM data on Leica RCD30
with CC32 on Page 44
46 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Installation of SRTM-data on CC31

Important: The instructions below are only valid for Leica RCD30 systems with 3rd party
GNSS/IMU systems.
To install from this configuration SRTM data (Article #780511) on the CC31 proceed as follows:
Connect via UltraVNC to the FCMS running on the CC31.
Preparation before installation
Disable write filter on CC31

1. ExecuteWriteFilterManagement.EXE from Start->Program files-> Leica Geosystems ->
FCMS
2. Select TAB FBWF
3. Confirm Disable
4. Confirm Close
5. Shutdown and restart the CC31
Install SRTM data
Procedure
1. Connect the DVD drive to the CC31 and insert SRTM DVD disk #1 into the DVD drive
2. Run SRTMSetup.exe
3. Install desired data
Restore system protection
Enable write filter

1. Execute WriteFilterManagement.EXE from Start->Program files-> Leica Geosystems ->
FCMS
2. Select TAB FBWF
3. Confirm Enable
4. Confirm Close
5. Shutdown and restart CC31
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 47

Licensing
Automatic license check

On every startup FCMS automatically checks
the system license. If an expired license, no
license or if a temporary license is found a
message window is displayed. See example on
the left.
To operate an Leica RCD30 system at least the
module BASIC has to be licensed.
To upload a license file proceed as described in
section "License file" below.
License file
A license file has the following naming format:
AirborneLicense_Counter_SerialNumber.Filetype
The first section of the license file contains the description of the license.
Example of a license file AirborneLicense_2397_8072.txt:

Licensed Device: FCMS
System ID: 00-30-59-04-6A-0D
System serial number: 8072
Modules:
- Sensor Control ADS (749511), 3.10, permanent
- Flight Guidance (749513), 3.10, permanent
- Remote Control (749515), 3.10, permanent
Created on Thursday, December 11, 2008 by vol

License Version v3
#
F6Crm1WNOuTOMTS5uUJbhoNNdb6073vRL7h/h32xEUKDTXW+tO
970YNNdb6073vRg011vrTve9GkTe55ro2mOYoHfrM3jyCcG8tj
M99dxPPETZB+HiSEmKbyZCW0EFPxzlbc2U9Ym3/bPt+bQf8klQ
l3oSsuY8TZyTYhpIhgXXnfm83DdIAoNhQnR9wiNUWO2z7fm0H/
JJUJd6ErLmPE2ck2IaSIYF1535vNw3SAKDanul+fCcDAjds+35
tB/ySVCXehKy5jxNnJNiGkiGBded+bzcN0gCg22cwEqL/3dTTz
dRy0iOxMrfN1HLSI7Eyt
#
48 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Upload of license file
To upload a license file proceed as follows:

1. Copy the license file to the root directory of the transfer media (USB stick).
2. Connect the transfer media to the OC52/OC50 for operator.
3. Set power switch to ON on Camera Controller.
4. Wait until FCMS main menu is displayed.
To upload Leica PAV80 license files select from the FCMS main menu [Mount] and then select
[Service]from the mount sub-menu.
6. Select [License]
The upload starts automatically. After the upload a message window displays whether a new
license file was uploaded or not. The message window also lists the licensed modules and their
expiration date. In case the license file was not uploaded, see trouble shooting actions as given
below in section "Trouble shooting for license file upload".
7. Confirm [Accept] to close the message window.
Multiple message windows may appear, depending on the hardware configuration.

8. Select [End] to quit FCMS.
9. After FCMS license upload, restart the system to activate the license.
Trouble shooting for license file upload

Table 5. License file upload failures
Error source Remedy - user action

No licence file found on Check content of the transfer media. Make sure the license file
transfer media. is available in the root directory.
License file contains license Check if latest license file was used. Check the license
which is already expired. description file for license expiring date.
System ID does not match Check if the serial number of the OC52/50 for operator
with license file. corresponds to the serial number in license file name. The
serial number is also listed in the license description file. If the
serial number is correct, export the logfile (see section Export
of status data for error analysis in Volume 1, Chapter 4) and
contact Leica Geosystems Aerial Sensor Support.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 49

User check of license
To check the installed license proceed as follows:

1. Set power switch to ON on .
2. Wait until FCMS main menu is displayed.
4. Select [License]
The message No new license uploaded and the licensed modules and the expiration date is dis-
played in a message window.
5. Confirm [Accept] to close the message window.
Multiple message windows may appear, depending on the system configuration.
50 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Chapter 4 System Operation
Version 4.01-61 Oct / 19 / 2012 51

Before starting the system for the first time

Important: Before you switch on the Leica RCD30 system for the first time carry out the
following operations:
Read through the user manual as well as through the User Manuals of subcomponents.
Follow the installation recommendations with great care. See section "Installing the Sys-
tem" in Volume 1, Chapter 3 on Page 17.
Make sure that the correct supply voltage is available. See section "Electrical" in Volume
Make sure that the cabling of the system is correct. See section "Cabling the Leica
RCD30 system" in Volume 1, Chapter 3 on Page 34.
Be aware of the safety instructions. See whole chapter Safety Directions starting with
section "Safety Directions" in Volume 1, Chapter 6 on Page 124.
Initial configuration
The system is delivered with the Hardware parameters already configured and pre-defined con-
figuration sets. Nevertheless, the following global configurations must be redefined for each
installation of a system in a new aircraft, or if GNSS Antenna location is changed:
System installation parameters
- GNSS antenna vector
- Selection of IMU type
- Aircraft ID, minimum and maximum aircraft speed
Time zone
Mount type
Mass Memory operational mode.
All configurations are set within the FCMS software. Please follow the instructions in section
"Configuration" in Volume 1, Chapter 4 on Page 64.
Important: Make sure initial configuration for Leica PAV80 is also made according to the
instructions given in the Leica PAV80 User Manual, section Operation, paragraph Before
Starting the system the first time.
Flight checklist
Important: A 'Leica RCD30 flight checklist' is stored on the Leica RCD30 documentation CD
in DOC-format. It is recommended to operate the Leica RCD30 according to this checklist. The
list contains specific checks for the Leica RCD30 system. General rules and procedures for a
photo flight might be different for various flight crews. Feel free to adapt the checklist according
to your individual rules and requirements.
52 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Important notes for the photo flight
General
Warning: Leica FCMS is not officially approved for flight navigation! Do not use the flight
guidance information provided by Leica FCMS for navigation. Leica FCMS only suggests
an approach to the flight line and assists a user when flying on the photo line. It is the full
responsibility of the pilot/operator to observe the airspace and surroundings during flight.
Important: Pay special attention to all paragraphs in section "Flight recommendations and
mandatory procedures" in Volume 3, Chapter 2 on Page 340. These paragraphs contain
important information which must be taken into account when executing photo flights with the
Leica RCD30.
Important: Electromagnetic radiation by 3rd party devices can negatively interfere the Leica
RCD30 system in particular the embedded GNSS/IMU system. If this is the case, switch OFF
the 3rd party system or operate it at least 2 m away from the Leica RCD30 system.
Leica RCD30 Field Manual

The Leica RCD30 Field Manual contains important information which should be taken into
account for acquiring perfect data.
In section "General for Leica RCD30 photo flights" in Volume 3, Chapter 2 on Page 335 the
Field Manual covers the following aspects:
Flight recommendations and mandatory procedures.
Required GNSS quality
Distance to GNSS ground reference station
Location of GNSS ground reference station
Preferred sun elevation
Hints for the sensor operator
Hints for the pilot
Flight plan requirements
Flight recommendations and mandatory procedures
Required speed over ground (GS)
In-flight alignment for GNSS-IMU system
In section "Leica FCMS - Flight Execution" in Volume 3, Chapter 5 on Page 453, the Field Man-
ual covers the following aspects:
Layout of views during flight execution
Speed control and flying altitude control
Device status and Project controls
Views during flight execution
GI40 Guidance Indicator during flight
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 53

Hardware operation
Power switches on devices
Power push button on CC31/CC32

Color Function
No light Power OFF
Green circle Power ON
Power switch on Leica PAV80

Switch position Function
On Power ON
OFF Power OFF
REMOTE This position should only be used for Leica

ADS80 to remotely control power of the
mount by FCMS.
The Leica PAV80 is an optional for Leica RCD30
54 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Power switch on OC52/OC50

Switch position Function
ON Power ON
When power is set to ON, the OC52/OC50
boots and starts FCMS automatically.
OFF
The operator interface then connects to the
Leica RCD30 and the pilot interface
connects to the operator interface.
Power OFF.
Do not switch power OFF on the Operator
Interface until Windows is shut down.
Do not switch power OFF on the OC50 for
pilot until it is shutdown remotely from the
operator interface or by pressing the
Startup/Shutdown key on the front panel.
See section "Shutdown sequence OC50
only" in Volume 1, Chapter 4 on Page 57.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 55

Checklist before powering the Leica RCD30

Important: Before you set the Leica RCD30 power switches to ON check the following:
Check if the (optional) spacer under the Sensor Mount is fastened to the floor.
Check if the protection cover and all protection elements for the mount are installed.
Check if the mount base plate is correctly fastened to the floor or the spacer.
Check if the mount is loaded with the Pod.
Check if the Pod is securely fastened in the mount.
Check if the space in the aircraft surrounding the Pod allows for free movement of the
mount.
Check the cable connection from aircraft power supply to Leica RCD30 system.
Check that the cable length is sufficient to allow for free movement of the Pod in the mount.
Mandatory procedures
For takeoff and landing

Warning: Depending on the safety recommendations given by the aircraft installer store
OC50 for Pilot and GI40 in a safe place for takeoff and landing. Depending on the safety
recommendations given by the aircraft installer this might be valid for OC52 and the IS40
tube as well.
For takeoff
Important: The Leica PAV80 gyro-stabilized mount must be set to operational mode Stabili-
zation OFF for takeoff. This mode is automatically set if a flight plan is selected and if standard
Leica PAV80 settings are made in FCMS. If the operational mode is NOT Stabilization OFF
select in FCMS the Leica PAV80 view to set the mode.
If the aircraft is on the tarmac

Important: Switch OFF the aircraft power breaker or disconnect the aircraft power cable from
the Leica RCD30 system.
56 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Start-up sequence
Additional actions for ground check with external power

1. Make sure the aircraft power for the Leica RCD30 system is set to OFF.
2. Disconnect the cable CC3x aircraft power .
3. Connect the DC power cable CC3x to PS56.
4. Connect the AC power cable of the PS56 to the wall outlet
5. Set power switch on PS56 to ON.
6. Continue with step 2 of Normal start-up sequence
Normal start-up sequence

1. Make sure the aircraft power cable is connected and aircraft power is set to ON.
2. Set power switch on Leica PAV80 to ON (if Leica PAV80 used).
3. Push the power key button on CC3x.
4. Set power switch on OC52 to ON (if part of the system)
5. Set power switch on OC50 to ON.
During start-up phase the status of the system is

displayed on the display on the CC3x front panel. If
temperature or other parameters are out of range,
appropriate messages appear on the display. For details
see tables in section "Status LEDs on devices" in
Volume 1, Chapter 4 on Page 60
After a successful start-up Ready is displayed on the display and all further information is dis-
played on the OC52.
System shutdown
Shutdown sequence Leica RCD30 system (including OC52/OC50)

1. Exit FCMS.
2. Wait until the Operating System is shut down.
3. Set power switch on OC52 CC3x and OC50 to OFF.
4. Make sure the aircraft power is set to OFF.
Shutdown sequence OC50 only

1. Press [Shutdown] key located on the front side below the status LED.
2. Wait until the Operating System on the OC50 is shut down.
3. Set power switch on OC50 to OFF.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 57

Remove and in-flight exchange of mass memories

Important: If the Leica RCD30 system is in a powered ON state MM30 removal or in-flight
exchange has to be made by FCMS control. Select [MM Remove] or [MM swap] and follow
strictly the sequence provided by FCMS on the OC52.
MM remove/exchange if the Leica RCD30 is not in a powered ON state

Remove and insert the MM30 as described in the section Remove Mass Memory from CC31/
CC32 on Page 58.
MM remove/exchange if the Leica RCD30 is in a powered ON state

Select [MM Remove] from FCMS Main toolbar to start FCMS controlled remove of the mass
memories.
Step by step instructions of how to remove the MMs are provided by FCMS on the OC52. Follow
this instructions accurate.
In-flight swapping of Mass Memories

This is possible only during approach and turns. The available time for MM swap is limited.
Therefore, make sure correct spare MM80 are on hand before in-flight MM swap is started.
Task sequence
1. Make sure image data recording is not ON and no automatic release is planned for the next 5
minutes.
2. Change to Mass Memory status view
3. Select [MM Swap] to start FCMS controlled swapping of the mass memories.
Step by step instructions of how to execute MM swapping are provided by FCMS on the OC52.
Follow this instructions accurate. Confirm each step according to the messages in FCMS.
Remove Mass Memory from CC31/CC32

How to remove the MM30(s)
1. Insert the key(s) into the lock
2. Turn the key(s) 90 counter clock wise to unlock the
MM in the slot(s)
58 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

3. Push the plastic button located on the upper left side

of the MM slot once to release the button
4. Push the plastic button to release the MM30 from
the slot
5. Remove the MM30
Insert Mass Memory into slots in CC31/CC32

Caution: MM30 must always be securely locked when inserted into the slots on the CC31/
CC32.
See section "Mass Memory safety checks" in Volume 1, Chapter 4 on Page 59.
How to insert the MM30 into the slots in the CC31/CC32

1. Insert one or two MM30(s) into the slot(s). Push it
fully into the slot (s).
2. Push the plastic button located on the upper left side
of the MM slot completely in
3. Insert the key(s) into the lock

4. Turn the key(s() 90 clock wise to securely lock the
MM in the slot(s)
Mass Memory safety checks

MM80 safely installed, ready for operation
Check that each MM30 lock is securely locked. The
illustration on the left side shows how the lock appears if
the MM30 is securely locked. (Illustration with a green
check mark below)
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 59

Status LEDs and status messages on the hardware
Status LEDs on devices

Status LED on Leica PAV80 Color Indicated status
various See section "Leica PAV80 status indicated on
LED" in Volume 1, Chapter 4 on Page 82.
Status LED on OC52/50 Color Indicated status

Green o.k.
Orange Temperature error
Red Voltage error
Status LED on GI40 Color Indicated status

Blue Power ON
If the GI40 receives no flight guidance
information the display automatically is
switched off. This state is indicated by one
illuminated LED located on the upper right
center part of the display.
Status display on CC31 or CC32

Digit display on CC3x Message Indicated status
START-UP System is starting-up
READY System is ready. Start operation on OC52
Any other message See trouble shooting in section "During

startup as long as Leica FCMS is not fully
operational" in Volume 1, Chapter 4 on Page
108.
60 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Software operation
General
Figure 8: FCMS Main menu
From the main menu the following can be selected

File operation
Flight execution
Mount
MM exchange
Service
Language
Configuration
On-line help (selectable any time)
The Flight & Sensor Control Management System (FCMS) is used to conduct all aspects of rou-
tine operation of the Leica RCD30:
Language and Configuration. See Configuration on Page 64.
File operations. See File operations on Page 73.
Flight execution. See Flight execution on Page 79.
Service. See Service Area on Page 113.
The following pages of the USM give information for the basic operation of FCMS. Additional
information is given in the Field Manual.
Licensing
All FCMS software modules and components are licensed. If a system is not licensed or if the
license is expired an appropriate message is displayed on the operator interfaces after start-up.
How to upload a license file and how to check the license of a system is described in section
"Licensing" in Volume 1, Chapter 3 on Page 48. Details about FCMS modules and licensing is
given in section "Modules and licensing of Leica FCMS" in Volume 2, Chapter 4 on Page 215.
Locking management
FCMS can be operated simultaneously from multiple user interfaces (e.g. OC52 for the Leica
RCD30 operator and OC50 for the pilot). To ensure unambiguous configuration of the system a
locking management is implemented.
Example:
To prevent the system from being configured at the same time by two different users the configu-
ration icon is controlled by the locking management. Whoever selects a configuration icon first
locks the icon on the other user interfaces. A locked icon is inactive and therefore cannot be
selected. If the first user returns from configuration the lock is released.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 61

On-line help
On-line help is selectable in every menu and at any time. The Leica RCD30 on-line help facility
is split into two levels:
First help level gives a short description of each button on the status line on the OC screen.
Second help level allows browsing of Leica RCD30 documentation on the OC screen.
Note: Entering help does not interrupt operation of the sensor. For example, if the recording of
data was activated, this status remains the same even if the user enters help
First help level - short description

Select [Help] to activate first help level
Select any button or control to display the corresponding help text in the status line
Figure 9: Example view first help level
The Green background of the status line indicates that

first help level is activated.
In this mode, just touch any button or control to get a short
description of it on the status line.
Select [Help Return] to quit help level and to return to normal operation.
Select [Help Detail] to activate second help level to browse the Leica RCD30 documentation.
62 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Second help level - online documentation

Note: Entering second level help is only possible from first level help. It does not interrupt
operation of the sensor. For example, if the recording of data was activated, this status remains
the same even if the user enters second level help
Select [Help-Detail] to activate second help level to browse the Leica RCD30 documentation.
Use [Left arrow] and [Right arrow] to jump to previous or next section of the text.
Use [Scroll up] and [Scroll down] to scroll smoothly in the text.
Use [Fast scroll up] and [Fast scroll down] to scroll pages in the text.
Use [Home] to jump to table of content in second level help. (Online documentation).
Select [Help-Return] to leave help level.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 63

Configuration
Language selection
The language can be selected independently for the operator and for the pilot. Therefore, lan-
guage selection has to be made individually on each user interface
Important: Make sure flight execution is not started on the operator interface OC52.
Select the language for the operator.

Select [Language] from the Leica FCMS main menu on the OC52/50.
Figure 10: Language selection dialog
The black frame indicates the selected language.

The following languages are currently implemented:
English ,German, Spanish, Portuguese, Russian, Japanese
Use [TAB left] or [TAB right] to move the selection to the desired configuration set.
Select [Return] to activate the selected language and to return from the dialog to main menu.
Select the language for the pilot.

Important: Before you select the language for the pilot make sure that FCMS is not in flight
mode. Check on the OC50 operator interface if FCMS is in the main menu.
Select [Language] from the main menu on the OC50 for pilot.
64 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

General about Initial configuration

On new delivered Leica RCD30 all hardware configuration settings are already made in the fac-
tory. Details about hardware configuration is given in section "Hardware configuration in Leica
FCMS" in Volume 3, Chapter 4 on Page 404.
Leica FCMS for Leica RCD30

Important: Initial configuration of FCMS for Leica RCD30 must be performed under the
following circumstances:
After installation (either upon first use of system or when system is moved to another air-
craft)
When time zone has changed
The following initial configuration must be made:
Sensor and mount type
See section "Configuration of Primary Sensor" in Volume 3, Chapter 4 on Page 408.
GNSS system
See section "Configuration of GNSS/IMU System" in Volume 3, Chapter 4 on Page 411.
Flight Guidance & Sensor Release configuration
See section "Configuration of Flight Guidance & Sensor Release" in Volume 3, Chapter 4
on Page 425.
Time zone
See section "Configuration of parameter Time zone" in Volume 3, Chapter 4 on Page 435
Installation
- GNSS antenna vector
- Selection of IMU type
- Aircraft ID, minimum and maximum aircraft speed
See section "Configuration of global parameter Installation" in Volume 3, Chapter 4 on Page

436.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 65

Selecting configuration sets

Select [Configuration] from the main menu.
The main configuration dialog allows for selection of one of the pre-defined configuration data
sets or to modify one.
Figure 11: Example of Main Configuration dialog
The topmost on the list is the Current configuration set.

The origin of this configuration set is displayed in the
right most column.
In the next group of sets the User defined sets are listed,
if such sets have been defined.
In the last group of sets the Pre-defined sets are listed.
A set can also be selected by touching the desired row.
Use [Scroll Up] or [Scroll Down] to move the selection bar to the desired configuration set.
Select [Save As] to save enter a dialog to save a configuration with a new name.
Select [Configuration] to enter configuration dialogs for modifying the selected configuration set
or to create a new set. For details please refer to section "Configuration" in Volume 3, Chapter 4
on Page 402.
Select [Return] to activate selected configuration set and to return from the dialog.
Names of pre-configured configuration sets

These names have been given so as to be self-explanatory according to the conventions listed
below:
Table 6. Naming conventions in pre-configured configuration sets
Name Description
Default Config Standard sensor settings, configuration source Flight plan.
66 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Initial configuration of global parameters

Important: This must always be performed under the following circumstances:
After installation (either upon first use of system, when system is moved to another aircraft
or GNSS antenna installation has changed; when IMU type in Scanner has changed)
When moving to a different time zone.
Enter configuration dialog

Select [Configuration] from the FCMS main menu to enter main configuration dialog.
Confirm [Next view] until view Global 1 is displayed.
On the OC52 you can also touch the TAB Global 1 to change the view.
Figure 12: Example of Manual Configuration dialog for Global 1 parameters
In this dialog an overview of the configuration is given for

each sub-set of global parameters.
A sub-set field can also be selected by touching the
desired area.
Use [Previous configuration set] or [Next configuration set] to display another configuration set
in the selected sub-set field.
Use [Up] and [Down] to select another sub-set field.

On the OC52 you can also touch on the area to select another sub-set field.
Select [Return] to open dialog for Save, Cancel.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 67

Set Time Zone

Confirm [Next view] until view Global 1 is displayed.
On the OC52 you can also touch the TAB Global 1 to change the view.
Use [Up] and [Down] to select Time Zone.
Figure 13: Example of main configuration dialog TAB Global 1
All time zones are pre-defined.

Daylight saving is handled by the operating system.
Figure 14: Example of Time Zone dialog
Select Configuration to display a time zone graphic. This

is for information purposes only. No user settings can be
made in this dialog.
Select [Return] to close dialog
68 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Set system installation parameters and IMU type

Important: System installation parameters as well as the IMU type have to be set correctly. If
this is not the case the Leica RCD30 system will either not operate perfectly or collected data
will be useless. Enter in system installation parameters a unique aircraft identifier and store the
installation parameter also with a unique name. [E.g. use the aircraft registration number, also
called tail number)
Use [Up] or [Down] to select Installation in the Global 1 dialog.

On the OC52 you can also touch on the area Installation.
Use [Previous configuration set] or [Next configuration set] to display another System Installa-
tion Parameter set. If none of the System Installation Parameters sets matches, create a user
defined set as described below.
Edit or create installation set

Select [Configuration] to enter System Installation Parameter dialog. On exit from the dialog
the user can select to save the changes of current System Installation Parameter set or to save
changes as a new set or to cancel edits. Therefore, [Configuration] can be selected from any exist-
ing System Installation Parameter set.
Figure 15: Example of System Installation Parameters dialog
In this dialog the following parameters are defined:

IMU type. For not pre-defined IMU types see section
"Configuration if IMU type is not pre-defined for the
Sensor type" in Volume 3, Chapter 4 on Page 437.
Offset Reference to GNSS Antenna as measured
following the instructions given in section "How to
determine the antenna offset vector" in Volume 2,
Aircraft identifier and the minimum and the maxi-
mum aircraft speed.
Use [Tab Left] or [Tab Right] to select the desired parameter.
Select [+] button to increase value.

Use button with small [+] to increase in small steps.
Use button with large [+] to increase in large steps.
Select [-] button to decrease value.

Use button with small [-] to decrease in small steps.
Use button with large [-] to decrease in large steps.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 69

Select [Return] to open dialog for Save, Save as or Cancel.

Store the installation parameter with a unique name. Use the aircraft registration number
(also called tail number) as a name to save the installation parameters.
70 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Flight Guidance & Sensor Release configuration
Set flight guidance and sensor release configuration

Use [Up] or [Down] to select Flight Release in the Manual Configuration dialog.
On the OC52 you can also touch on the area Flight Release.
Use [Previous configuration set] or [Next configuration set] to display another flight release con-
figuration set.
Note: If none of the pre-configured Flight Guidance & Sensor Release sets matches, create a
user defined set as described below.
Edit or create Flight Release set

Select [Configuration] to enter Flight Release Configuration dialog. On exiting from configura-
tion the user can select in a dialog to save the changes of current Flight Release set or to save
changes as a new Flight Release set or to cancel edits. Therefore, [Configuration] can be selected
from any existing Flight Release set.
Figure 16: Example of Flight Release dialog
The Flight Release dialog consist of three sub-dialogs:

Guidance Project
Guidance Approach
Sensor Release Control
The example on the left shows the Guidance Approach
dialog.
Confirm [Next view] to display the desired configuration dialog.
On the OC52 you can also touch one of the TAB to change the view.
Use [Tab Left] or [Tab Right] to select the desired parameter.
Select [+] buttons to increase the value.

Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 71

Select [-] button to decrease the value.

Use button with large [-] to decrease in large steps
Note: A detailed description to the various parameters and settings is given in section "Configu-
ration of Flight Guidance & Sensor Release" in Volume 3, Chapter 4 on Page 425.
Names of pre-configured Flight Release configuration sets

below:
Table 7. Naming conventions in pre-configured Flight Release sets
Name Description
Slow AC Parameters typically suitable for aircraft flying at 70 kts to 120 kts
Standard AC Parameters typically suitable for aircraft flying at 110 kts to 170 kts
Fast AC Parameters typically suitable for aircraft flying at 150 kts to 250 kts
Very fast AC Parameters typically suitable for aircraft flying at 200 kts to 400 kts
72 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

File operations
How to select data in the file selection dialogs

Note: The procedure below is an example. It is valid for data selection on the external memory
or internal memory or Mass Memory device.
Figure 17: Example of Delete Project dialog
To delete data proceed as follows

1. Mark the files
2. Delete marked files
Touch the desired row or use the arrow up and arrow

down button to move the highlighted bar.
Use [Scroll Up] or [Scroll Down] to move the highlighted bar to the desired file.
Use [+] to expand listing.
Use [-] to collapse listing.
Use [Select] to mark the file at the current highlighted bar position.
Select [Select All] to mark all files.
Select [Deselect] if a marked file should not be selected.
Select [Deselect All] if all marked file should not be selected.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 73

Delete Data
Select [File] from FCMS main menu to enter file operations.
Select [Delete].
Delete data on USB stick connected to OC52

From FCMS point of view a USB stick connected to the OC52 is an external device.
Select [Delete external] to enter dialog to delete data on the USB memory stick. Select data to
delete it as described below in section Select data and delete it.
Delete data in the OC52 memory

Select [Delete Internal] to enter dialog to delete data in the Control Unit memory.
Delete data on Mass Memory

Select [Delete MM] to enter dialog to delete data on Mass Memory.
Important: For technical reasons there is no recovery possible of deleted data from the Mass
Memory. That is, there is no undo available!
The Mass Memory space can become fragmented if files are deleted which are not stored as last
files on the Mass Memory. To avoid fragmentation delete from time to time all files stored on the
MM80.
Select data on Mass Memory and delete it
Figure 18: Example of delete data on MM dialog
Data on single volume MM.

Stored on left or right unit.
Data with data backup.

Stored on left or right unit.
Joined operation data.

Both units are present.
Joined operation data, but one

unit is not present.
74 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Figure 19: Description of possible scenarios listed in the dialog Delete data on MM
Backup mode, Flight ID 20110708092525

Listing for data stored on the left MM. If only this entry is
deleted, backup is still available on the other MM, listed
below with same Flight ID.
Listing for data stored on the right MM. If only this entry
is deleted, backup is still available on the other MM, listed
above with same Flight ID.
Joined operation mode, Flight ID 20110708092021

Data stored distributed on left and right MM.
Single operation mode, Flight ID 20110707092433.
Stored on right MM. During this recording no left MM
was inserted.
Flight ID 20110706145108 is another example for single
operation mode.
Flight ID 2011070408138 is another example for single
operation mode. During this recording no right MM was
inserted.
Backup mode, Flight ID 20110704075939
Data recorded in Backup mode. Listing for data on left
MM. Backup (right MM) not present. No entry listed with
same Flight ID for data on right MM.
Joined operation mode, Flight ID 20110704072340

Data set broken. No associated data present on MM
currently inserted in the right MM slot.
Select data as described in section "How to select data in the file selection dialogs" in Volume 1,
Select [Delete selected] to delete the marked files from the storage media (either external, internal
or Mass Memory). A window opens for Continue delete or Cancel.
Select [Return] to exit the dialog. If files are marked for deleting, a window opens with the ques-
tion whether the selection shall be rejected or not. In case of OK the Delete dialog quits. Can-
cel returns to the Delete dialog.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 75

Upload projects with flight plans and graphical data

Important: Make sure to attach only virus free media to the Leica RCD30 system
Important: Attach the USB memory stick to the USB port on the OC52. Make sure FCMS is in
the Main menu during this operation, because some USB sticks are not recognized by the
operating system, if they are attached either before or during system start-up.
Select [Upload selected] to enter dialog to select data on the USB memory stick.
Select [Upload selected] to upload the marked files.
During upload a message window and a turning hour glass pops up.
Select [Return] to return. If files are marked, a window opens with the question whether the
selection shall be rejected or not. In case of OK the Upload dialog quits. Cancel returns to the
Upload dialog.
Download projects, flight plans and flight data.

the Main menu during this operation because some sticks are not recognized by the operating
system, if they are attached either before or during system start-up.
Select [Download selected] to enter dialog to select data.
Select [Download selected] to download the marked files.
During download a message window and a turning hour glass pops up.
76 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Select [Return] to return. If files are marked, a window opens with the question whether the
selection shall be rejected or not. In case of OK the Download dialog quits. Cancel returns to
the Download dialog.
Upload maps
For details about maps see section "Introduction to the use of maps in Leica FCMS flight guid-
ance" in Volume 3, Chapter 4 on Page 443.
the Main menu during this operation, because some USB sticks are not recognized by the
operating system, if they are attached either before or during system start-up.
Select [Upload selected] to enter dialog to select data on the USB memory stick.
Figure 20: Example of Upload dialog.
In this dialog all TIF files are listed which are stored in
the selected directory.
The map (file Example-map.TIF) and two other files
have to be stored in the same directory.
The file with the georeferencing information
(file Example-map.TFW)
The file with the transformation information
(file Example-map.TFD).
This file is created by the user in Leica FPES.
Select [Upload selected] to upload the marked files.
During upload a message window and a turning hour glass pops up.
Select [Cancel] to exit from the dialog. If files are marked, a window opens with the question
whether the selection shall be rejected or not. In case of OK the Upload dialog quits. Cancel
returns to the Upload dialog.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 77

Prepare Mass Memories
About data storage modes

Different data storage modes can be selected for data storage with Leica RCD30 and MM30.
Table 8. Data storage setups of Leica RCD30
Number of
MM formatted
MM mode MM required Remarks
as
for mode
Single Operation 1 Single Volume
Joint Operation 2 Single Volume Provides largest possible data
storage capacity.
Provides highest data though put.
Backup Operation 2 Single Volume Provides in-flight data backup.
Note: The MM mode is configured in FCMS. See section "Configuration of MM mode" in

78 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Flight execution
Pre-flight check list

Required GNSS quality available for the time span of the flight?
See section "Flight recommendations and mandatory procedures" in Volume 3, Chapter 2 on
Page 340.
Whole system properly installed in the aircraft and ready for takeoff?
See section "Hardware installation" in Volume 1, Chapter 3 on Page 25.
Cabling of all components is in accordance with diagram?
See section "Cabling the Leica RCD30 system" in Volume 1, Chapter 3 on Page 34.
All cables properly laid out and connected, no danger for clamping of cables also on mount,
etc.?
Windows/filter/lens and belly of aircraft free from dust and oil?
See section "Cleaning of Optical Components" in Volume 1, Chapter 5 on Page 116.
Check for sufficient disk space on OC52 memory.
Make sure Mass Memory recording mode is configured as desired.
Check for sufficient space on MM30 or delete old data on MM30!
See section "Delete data on Mass Memory" in Volume 1, Chapter 4 on Page 74.
Flight plans uploaded?
See section "Upload projects with flight plans and graphical data" in Volume 1, Chapter 4 on
Page 76.
Global configuration parameters Time Zone and Installation set correctly?
See section "Initial configuration of global parameters" in Volume 1, Chapter 4 on Page 67.
Data recording at GNSS ground reference station(s) started? (Valid if ground reference data
are required for DGNSS postprocessing)
Tip: A 'Leica RCD30 flight checklist' is stored on the Leica RCD30 documentation CD in
DOC-format. It is recommended to operate the Leica RCD30 according to this checklist. The list
contains specific checks for the Leica RCD30 system. General rules and procedures for a flight
might be different for various flight crews. Feel free to adapt the checklist according to your
individual rules and requirements.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 79

Start flight execution

Select [Flight] from FCMS main menu to start flight execution.
Ground start
Typically [Flight] is selected while the aircraft is on ground ready for take-off. With this proce-
dure the system is checked on ground. Troubleshooting in case of any malfunction is much sim-
pler than airborne.
Note: As long as the aircraft is static on ground the GNSS/IMU system of the Leica RCD30
does not provide a real-time solution. A warning message is displayed in the status line to
indicate this condition.
Air-Start
How to perform an Air-Start

1. Select [Flight]
2. Fly straight and level flight, with constant speed until the GNSS and the IMU symbol has
disappeared on the Take-Off control. See Figure 22, Example of Take-Off control in Vol-
ume 1, Chapter 4 on Page 81
Sensor Status view during start-up

During start-up of flight execution all necessary subsystems will be automatically initialized.
During this initialization phase the system remains in the Sensor Status view (Figure 21) until the
initialization is completed and all subsystems have passed the checks. The Sensor Status view
can be skipped. This allows to select the project and the flight plans during the initialization pro-
cess.
Figure 21: Example of Sensor Status view during initialization
On the upper right the Take-Off control is displayed. The

Take-Off control gives information as to whether the
system is ready for flight or not.
The Mass Memory and GNSS control are displayed in the

upper left and in the center. In the area below these
controls the status of the system are displayed: internal
memory, date and time.
During initialization the Take-Off control (Figure 22) is displayed on all views at the place of the
Sensor control. The Take-Off control shows the status of the system check. As long as a subsys-
tem has not passed the system check, the corresponding icon is displayed, (e.g., the Sensor sym-
bol is displayed as long as the sensor has not passed the self-test).
80 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

If the initialization phase is successfully completed the Take-Off control indicates o.k. by a check
mark symbol and the systems switches to the default view.
Figure 22: Example of Take-Off control
As long as the system is not ready for the flight an hour glass
symbol is displayed on the upper right side of the control.
The hour glass is replaced by a check mark symbol if all
components of the system are ready. After remaining in this state
a few seconds the Take-Off control is replaced by the Sensor
control.
Select [Arrow Right] to skip the Sensor Status view during initialization.
Sensor status and configuration after successful start-up

If the Take-Off control indicates o.k. with a check mark symbol the system is configured accord-
ing to the configuration set Current configuration. This is either the configuration the system
had the last time just before flight execution was quit or the configuration the user has set in the
configuration menu before [Flight] was started.
If another configuration is required proceed as given in section "Set configuration" in Volume 1,
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 81

Leica PAV80 status indicated on LED

Table 9. Leica PAV80 LED status
LED color Leica PAV80 status
orange - green blinking Initialization
orange i) Operational mode Stabilization OFF, if the Leica PAV80 is
in mechanical Zero position.
ii) Mount at the stabilization range limits.
Check message on OI40.
green Operational mode Stabilization ON
long green short red blinking Operational mode Stabilization ON, but no data for drift
control are available.
This is the case if the system is not moved, (e.g., during ground
check, if the aircraft is not moving).
short green long red blinking Operational mode Stabilization ON, but no data from the
GNSS/IMU system are available. Check message on OI40.
red Failures. For details and troubleshooting in the Leica PAV80
User Manual
FCMS views, controls and GUI during flight execution

See section "Leica FCMS - Flight Execution" in Volume 3, Chapter 5 on Page 453
82 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Operation during flight
Main user tasks during flight execution
Flight plan controlled flight

In a flight-plan-controlled flight the operator has to perform the following main tasks:
Set configuration.
See Set configuration on Page 84.
Select Project/ Flight plan.
See Flight plan controlled flight on Page 97.
In exceptional cases, store automatic integration time settings.
See Automatic integration time control on Page 87
Frequently check the real-time viewthumbnails to ensure that no clouds are obscuring the
terrain.
See section "Real-time view" in Volume 3, Chapter 5 on Page 501.
Mark part of a line, if the part might not be usable (e.g., clouds obscuring the terrain).
See section section "Marking sections of a line during data recording" in Volume 1, Chapter
4 on Page 105.
In case of an error react to the error messages and trouble shooting options.
See Trouble shooting on Page 108.
During project execution select desired flight lines and approach direction as desired.
See section "Flight plan controlled flight" in Volume 1, Chapter 4 on Page 97.
Manually controlled flight

In manual system operation the operator has to perform the following main tasks:
Set configuration.
See Set configuration on Page 84.
For each line set Height, Altitude and GSD if different than in the configuration.
See Manual setting of Height, Altitude and GSD on Page 85.
In exceptional cases, store actual reflected light level for integration time control.
See Automatic integration time control on Page 87
Start image data recording - stop image data recording.
See Manual Start / Stop image data recording on Page 94.
Frequently check the real-time view to ensure that no clouds are obscuring the terrain.
See section "Real-time view" in Volume 3, Chapter 5 on Page 501.
In case of an error react to the error messages and trouble shooting options.
See Trouble shooting on Page 108.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 83

Set configuration
A configuration set comprises sub-sets for Sensor and Heights. Therefore, when a configura-
tion set is selected all relevant parameters are configured in one go.
Select the configuration set which contains the settings desired for the project. If required, con-
figuration can be different for each flight line. To set a configuration, image data recording must
be set OFF.
Select [Configuration] from the Sensor status view to enter Leica RCD30 configuration dialog
view.
Figure 23: Example of Main Configuration
The top entry on the list is the Current configuration set.

The origin of this configuration set is displayed on the
right hand column.
In the next group of sets the User defined sets are listed
if such sets have been defined.
In the last group of sets are the Pre-defined sets listed.
The selection bar can also be set by touching the desired
row.
Use [Scroll Up] or [Scroll Down] to move the selection bar to the desired configuration set.
Select [Return] to load highlighted configuration set and to exit from dialog.
To change a configuration proceed as follows:

Confirm [Next view] to display the TAB Sensor & Height.
On the OC52 you can also touch one of the TAB to change the view.
Select [Configuration] to enter Leica RCD30 configuration dialog view.
More information about configuration is given in section "Leica FCMS - Configuration" in Vol-
ume 3, Chapter 4 on Page 397.
84 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Manual setting of Height, Altitude and GSD

Note: Height, altitude and GSD configuration is part of a flight planning. FCMS loads these
parameters for each flight line individually according to the data stored in the flight plan.
Therefore, these parameters need only to be configured by the user if non-planned lines are
manually released.
The Height, Altitude and GSD configuration is part of the configuration set. When a configura-
tion set is selected, Height, Altitude and GSD are set as well. To record data at the desired GSD
the terrain height must be correctly set. Therefore this parameter must be set for each flight line if
the terrain is not flat. For hilly terrain enter the minimum and the maximum elevation along the
flight line as setting for the terrain height.
Important: If Height, Altitude and GSD are not set correctly FMC will be incorrect, the speed
control as well as the flying altitude control do not show correct data. See section "Flight
guidance controls" in Volume 3, Chapter 5 on Page 460.
Select [Set heights] to enter dialog.
This can be done from the main level of all views as well as from some other lower level menus.
Figure 24: Example of Height, Altitude and GSD configuration dialog
In this dialog, all relevant heights and altitudes can be set.

Related parameters are linked. After input of heights and
altitude, the system re-computes related parameters.
Example:
If flying height is entered, the system computes Altitude,
GSD, and maximum allowed GS.
Use [Tab Left] or [Tab Right] to select the desired input parameter.
Select [+] buttons to increase value.


Use button with large [-] to decrement in large steps.
Select [Return] to load settings and to exit from dialog.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 85

Image numbering
With flight planning in Leica FPES the data is defined in the following hierarchy.
1. Project
2. Flight plan
3. AOI
4. Flight line label / flight line number
5. Event (Frame) number
This numbering is also used in Leica FCMS for flight execution and displayed to the user in the
following controls
The Project Control shows
- Project
- Flight plan
- Flight line label / flight line number
Details see section "Project control" in Volume 3, Chapter 5 on
Page 475.
Additionally each photograph is identified by a camera counter number

The Sensor control shows
0002 = Camera counter
Details see section "Sensor control" in Volume 3, Chapter 5 on
Page 456
When displayed in FCMS views the thumbnails are labeled in the upper left corner as follows
Images taken during an integration time adjustment
sequence:
1 = camera identifier
A on white background: Image taken during test sequence
Images taken along a line:

1 = camera identifier
Save icon: Image taken along the flight line
003 = FPES event number along the line
86 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Automatic integration time control
Introduction
In Auto IT mode Leica FCMS determines the correct integration time with a series of test expo-
sures. This series is made during the final approach to the line after the IT is passed. The histo-
gram classes of the first test exposure are analyzed. The result of this analysis is feed back to the
Auto IT control loop to adjust the settings for the next test exposure. After a few shots the best
integration time is determined. Depending on the configuration (see Table 11) the setting is
applied either to the first exposure or to all exposure taken along the line.
The number of test exposures to adjust the integration time for the first image and the optional
exposure correction are taken from the configuration. See Configuration for Automatic Integra-
tion Time Control or for manual release on Page 93
Any time when not executing a line the user can perform an Auto IT adjustment sequence to
determine the shutter speed for a particular survey area. This setting can be stored and used for
all lines of a survey area as long as the terrain type is similar and the lines are flown in a time
frame with similar sun elevation.
In many cases all photographs of a line or survey area can be taken with the same exposure set-
ting, because
it is flown within a time frame where the sun elevation and the atmospheric condition are
similar.
the mean reflected light from the ground changes only within a tolerable range.
the large exposure tolerance of the system due to the huge dynamic range of the image chain
Taking all photographs of a line or block with the same exposure setting might also be preferred
to simplify merging images to a mosaic.
In the following cases not all photographs along a line or within a survey area should be taken
with the same exposure setting:
The mean reflected light from the ground changes in a wide variety. e.g. A flight line starts
over forest area and ends in areas with sand or snow.
The flight is executed in a condition where the terrain illumination changes rapidly. e.g. due
to clouds which sometimes shade the sun.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 87

Automatic Integration Time mode configuration

Various Auto IT control modes can be selected. See below in Table 10
Table 10. Integration time control modes
Setting System setup / Application Remarks

Program Preferred selection if the Leica The system adjusts shutter speed
RCD30 system is installed in a and diaphragm size to get best
Leica PAV80 gyro-stabilized possible image.
mount. Program mode is
applicable for all applications.
Shutter speed priority Preferred selection if the Leica The system adjusts the diaphragm
RCD30 system is installed size. If at maximum possible
without a gyro-stabilized mount. adjusted diaphragm size images
To avoid image smear as result will become either underexposed
from aircraft movements or or overexposed, the system
aircraft vibrations set an automatically adjust the shutter
appropriate short shutter speed. speed priority setting. In such a
E.g. 1/500 .. 1/250 case a message is displayed to the
Shutter speed priority is also user.
selected if the images shall be
taken at a specific shutter speed.
Aperture priority Used if the images shall be taken The system adjusts the shutter
with a specific aperture. speed. If at maximum possible
adjusted shutter speed images will
become either underexposed or
overexposed, the system
automatically adjust the aperture
priority setting. In such a case a
message is displayed to the user.
Manual Manual setting of IT
Table 11. Adjustments along the line
Setting Description Remarks

Auto The Auto IT control loop adjusts along the Selected if the mean reflected light
line the setting for each photograph, if from the ground varies widely.
required
No All photographs along a line are taken with
the same setting.
In all Auto IT control modes Leica FCSM checks every photograph taken. In the case it detects
underexposure or overexposure a corresponding message is displayed to the user.
88 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Operation in automatic integration time control mode

Normally the user does not have to interfere with the system because the mean reflected light
from the ground only changes within a tolerable range along a flight line. Short-term light pulses,
e.g. caused by reflectance from water bodies of limited area, are attenuated by the control pro-
gram.
The user has only to interfere with the system and to use the store-function in the following
cases:
The approach to the line is over water
Clouds are below the aircraft in the area before the line starts
The terrain during approach has a different reflection than the terrain along the line
In this cases the reflectance measured over land on terrain with typical reflectance and without
clouds must be stored. See operation procedure in Figure 25.
Various control modes and store modes are available. See Automatic Integration Time mode
configuration on Page 88.
If adjustment along the line is set to Auto the user has to interfere in the following cases:
Sections with clouds below the aircraft appear along the line
Sections with water areas appear along the line
Also in this cases the Store mode has to be applied. See operation procedure in Figure 25.
At project start
Select [Configuration] from the System Status view to enter Leica RCD30 configuration dialog
and to select a configuration set where integration time is set to Automatic mode.
Integration time is set to Automatic mode for all pre-defined configuration sets. If you select a
user defined configuration set and if you intend to operate the Leica RCD30 in automatic integra-
tion time mode, please make sure that Automatic mode is configured as well.
Select the automatic mode which matches to the application and to the system setup.
Before the next line

Height, altitude and GSD configuration is part of a flight planning. FCMS loads these parameters
for each flight line individually according to the data stored in the flight plan. Therefore, these
parameters need to be configured by the user only, if non-planned lines are manually released. In
this case, select [Set heights] to enter dialog to set ground reference and to adapt GSD if desired
During approach to the line

Check the information given by the system in message windows, in the Application Class con-
trol, on the status line or in the speed control and act accordingly.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 89

Approach to the line over water or clouds

Set automatic integration time to store mode before flying over water area or over clouds. Pro-
ceed as follows:
Select [A-ST] to enter configuration.
Select [Store] to store .
Select [Automatic] to reset to automatic.

In automatic mode, integration time control program adjusts the exposure based on test exposu-
ires or based on images.
Figure 25: Example of how to use Automatic and Store
Confirm Store a short time before

the coast line is reached when over
land and heading towards the sea.
Confirm Auto a while after the

coast line is passed when heading
inland away from the sea.
Figure 26: Automatic and Store Status indicated on Sensor control
A on white background = Automatic ST on yellow background = Store
Figure 27: Busy state indicated on Sensor control
A turning hourglass on the upper right side of the control

indicates that the Auto IT control loop is busy.
Turning hourglass = Busy.
90 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Along the line

IT adustements made by the user will be aplied to the next image. If the Auto IT control loop is
configured to adjusts along the line the setting for each photograph, if required, use the store
mode when flying over water area or when flying over clouds along the line. Proceed as follows:
Select [A-ST] to enter configuration. Example of dialog see Figure 29 on Page 93.
Select [Store] to store the current exposure setting.
Select [Automatic] to reset to automatic.

In automatic mode, integration time control program adjusts the exposure based on test exposu-
ires or based on images.
User corrections to automatic integration time setting

Note: User corrections adjust the ideal integration time by a factor. The factor can be applied in
steps of 1/3 of a stop. The range is from -3/3 to +3/3.
The Auto IT control loop shifts the shutter speed accordingly.
Select [A-ST] to enter configuration. Example of dialog see Figure 29 on Page 93.
Select [configuration] to enable editing.
Use [Tab Left] [Tab Right] to select the shutter/IT correction for the desired camera.
Confirm [+] to increase the correction factor.
Confirm [-] to decrease the correction factor.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 91

Manually start execution of an Auto IT control sequence

This can be performed any time when not executing a line. Ensure that the terrain and light con-
dition is similar as for the survey area.
Select [A-ST] to enter RCD configuration. Example of dialog see Figure 29 on Page 93
Select [AutoConfig] to perform an AUTO IT sequence.
Select [Store] to store the current setting.
Select [Return] to exit from dialog.
Checking the exposure

Select [A-ST] to enter Leica RCD30 configuration. Example of dialog see Figure 29 on Page 93
Check the thumbnail and the histogram classes in the corresponding Sensor control on the RCD
configuration view. To display data for older photographs proceed as follows:
Select [Histograms] to display thumbnails and histogram classes.
Figure 28: Example of Thumbnail and Histogram class View
If camera 1 or camera 2 is selected the view shows six

thumbnails with corresponding sensor controls.
If camera 1 and 2 is selected the view shows on the left
half three thumbnails with corresponding sensor controls
for camera 1 and on the right half three thumbnails with
corresponding sensor controls for camera 2.
The dark grey areas in the example screenshot will be

replaced in-flight by the thumbnails.
More information about this view is given in section "Thumbnail and Histogram class view" in
Volume 3, Chapter 5 on Page 487. General information about image quality is given in section
"Achieving maximum image quality with Leica RCD30" in Volume 3, Chapter 2 on Page 349.
92 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Configuration for Automatic Integration Time Control or for manual release

Select [A-ST] to enter Leica RCD30 configuration.
Figure 29: Example of in-flight RCD configuration dialog
An overview of the settings is given in section "Sensor

configuration" in Volume 3, Chapter 4 on Page 446.
Use [Tab Left] [Tab Right] to select desired input parameter.


Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 93

Manual Start / Stop image data recording

Note: The Leica PAV80 operational mode control is linked to the Start and Stop of sensor data
recording if the PAV control mode is configured to AUTO. See section "Configuration of
Sensor Release and Control" in Volume 3, Chapter 4 on Page 432.
Prepare for manual frame release

Select [Start Stop] to enter sensor release level.
Note: Entering the sensor release level sets the Leica PAV80 to mode Stabilization ON if the
mount control is configured accordingly.
Optional: Select [Return] to return from release level without starting recording.
Note: Return without starting recording sets the Leica PAV80 to operational mode Stabilization
OFF if the mount control is configured accordingly.
Start manually frame release sequence

Select [Start] to release a series of photographs.
FCMS automatically returns from release level.
The red blinking dot on the Sensor control indicates that the
system is recording.
Select [Return] to return from release level.
Release manually additional frame within a frame release sequence

For each manual frame release confirm [Frame].
94 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Select [Return] to return from release level.
Stop frame release sequence

Select [Stop] to quit frame release sequence .
FCMS automatically returns from release level.
Note: Stop recording sets the Leica PAV80 operational mode to Stabilization OFF, if mount
control is configured accordingly.
or
Select [Return] to return from release level without stopping recording
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 95

Annotation - user log file entries

This feature allows to make user text entries to the flight plan data during flight execution. The
entries are time tagged. The data is passed to Leica FPES for flight evaluation.
Details are given in section "Annotation - user log file entries during flight" in Volume 3, Chapter
5 on Page 505.
Log data
During operation the system logs status information. This feature allows for error analysis.
Details are given in section "Browsing of logged status data" in Volume 3, Chapter 5 on Page
507.
The log data might also be required for analysis by a Leica Geosystems Sensor Service Techni-
cian. How to export the log data for this purpose is described in section "Export of status data for
error analysis" in Volume 1, Chapter 4 on Page 112.
96 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012


Important: Set desired Leica RCD30 sensor configuration. Make sure in FCMS Height,
Altitude & GSD configuration the configuration source is set to Flight Plan. See section
"Configuration of Height, Altitude and GSD" in Volume 3, Chapter 4 on Page 449.
Project and flight plan selection

To select a project and a flight plan from main flight toolbar proceed as follows:
Select [Select Project] to list the projects/flight plans.
Figure 30: Examples Project & Flight Plan Selection dialog
In this dialog, all projects stored in the flight data base on

the system are listed.
The listing can be expanded to flight plan level and to
flight level, if flight data are available. See Figure 31 on
Page 98.
Use [Scroll Up fast], [Scroll Up], [Scroll Down fast] or [Scroll Down] to select the desired proj-
ect.
The project is marked with the highlighted bar.
Use [+] to expand the highlighted project/flight plan by one column. See Figure 31 on Page 98.
Use [-] to collapse the expanded columns associated to the highlighted project / flight plan.
Select [Select] for selection. For selection confirm the check mark icon according to the rules
given below in Table 12.
Select [De-select] for de-selection. De-selection is opposite to the rules given in Table 12 on
Page 98.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 97

Select [Configuration] to change configuration of global parameters Flight Guidance & Sensor
Release. See section "Configuration of Flight Guidance & Sensor Release" in Volume 3, Chap-
ter 4 on Page 425.
Select [Return] to return from the selection dialog. If a selection was made it is loaded for flight
execution.
Figure 31: Detail examples of project listings
Collapsed project listing. Project Hemisphere is Project FPES-FCMS-TEST-2

expanded by one level. No is expanded by one level.
flight plans are yet flown. Already all flight plans are at
Therefore, no aircraft icon is least partly flown.
shown.
Table 12. Rules for project, flight plan and flight selection
Position of Confirm Selected project Selected flight Selected flights
highlighted bar check mark plan(s) (if existing)
project_A once A all non
project_A twice A all all
fight plan_I once A flight plan_I non
fight plan_I twice A flight plan_I all
flight_x once A flight plan_I flight _x
98 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Figure 32: Examples of project, flight plan and flight selection
How to select one flight plan and one existing flight

1. Move highlighted bar to project FPES-FCMS-TEST-2
2. Confirm button [+]
3. Move highlighted bar to flight plan Sargans
4. Confirm button [+]
5. Move highlighted bar to flight Sargans_8
6. Confirm [Accept]
The check mark in brackets on the left side of the project name
(FPES-FCMS-TEST-2) indicates that not all flight plans of the
project are selected.
The check mark in brackets on the left side of the flight plan
name (Sargans) indicates that not all flights are taken into
account.
The check mark on the left side of the flight Sargans_8 indi-
cates that FCMS recognizes the flight lines of this flight. All
lines already flown in flight #8 will not be automatically flown
again during the current mission.
Figure 33: Examples for adding a flight plan to a selection
How to add one flight plan to the selection of Figure 32

1. Move highlighted bar to flight plan Unterrheintal
2. Confirm [Accept]
The check mark in brackets on the left side of the flight plan
name (Unterrheintal) indicates that no or not all flights are
selected to be taken into account during flight execution.
Use [+] to expand the flight plan to list the flights for selection.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 99

Flight line selection

Definitions:
The next line is always the line to be flown following the next Initial Point (IP).
The current line is the line currently in execution.
A next line becomes the current line if the IP is passed and remains the current line until the end
of the line.
Note: FCMS flight guidance selects the next flight line automatically according to the configu-
ration. See section "Configuration of Guidance Project" in Volume 3, Chapter 4 on Page 426.
But at any time the user can override the automatic selection.
To select a flight line manually proceed as follows:

Select [Flight plan more] from the main toolbar to display more buttons for flight line selection.
Direct selection
Use [Previous line] to select the last not yet flown line.
This previous line is the last not yet flown line of the planned sequence.
Use [Next line] to select the first not yet flown line.
This next line is the first not yet flown line of the planned sequence.
Direct selection by touch

Direct selection by touch is possible in the following views:
North-Up
In-flight Evaluation
To select a line touch the flight line in the graphics part of the corresponding view
100 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Selection from the line listing

Select [GOTO line] to open the line selection dialog.
Figure 34: Example Flight line selection dialog
This overview dialog lists for each line:

- flight plan name
- line number
- line label
- status information (shown with icons)
- the maximum horizontal and vertical deviation of the
flown line to the planned line.
See also section "Alphanumeric in-flight evaluation
control" in Volume 3, Chapter 5 on Page 479.
Use [Scroll Up fast], [Scroll Up], [Scroll Down fast] or [Scroll Down] to select the desired line.
The line is marked with the highlighted bar.
On the operator interface you can also touch the line in the listing to select it..
Select [Cancel] to quit dialog without selection.
Confirm [Accept] to execute the selected line.
A message window is displayed if the selected line was already partly flown.
Confirm [Execute part] to execute only the missing parts of the line.
Confirm [Execute whole] to execute the whole selected line.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 101

Selection by line number or line label

Select [GOTO line] to open a dialog to enter either the line number or the line label.
Figure 35: Example Keyboard dialog
Use the touch screen keyboard to enter either the number

or the label of the line to be flown next.
Use [Tab Left] or [Tab Right] to select the desired input field.
Select [Cancel] to quit the dialog.
Select [Return] to return and to execute the line.
Reverse line execution

The planning direction is not relevant for flight execution. A line can be flown in either direction.
To reverse the line execution proceed as follows:
Select [Reverse line] to reverse the direction of approach to the next line.
102 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Abort line or abort project execution

Important: Manual stop of data recording as described in section "Manual Start / Stop image
data recording" in Volume 1, Chapter 4 on Page 94 will not stop flight execution nor stop project
execution.
To abort execution of the current line or flight execution of a project proceed as follows:
Select [Flight plan more] from the main toolbar to display more buttons for flight line selection
Alternatively the [More buttons] can be selected as well.
Confirm [Abort]
If flying along a line, line execution is aborted.
If not flying along a line, project execution is stopped.
Shorten and/or extend a line

A line can temporarily be modified for execution. The line can be extended and/or shortened at
the start and/or at the end point.
To select a flight line for temporarily modification proceed as follows:

Select [GOTO line] to open the line selection dialog.
Use [Scroll Up fast], [Scroll Up], [Scroll Down fast] or [Scroll Down] to select the desired line.
The line is marked with the highlighted bar.
Select [Part line] to activate the line modification dialog located on the bottom part of the view.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 103

Figure 36: Example shortened line dialog
The example on the left shows a line which was

shortened on both ends.
On the bottom of the window the planned line length is
shown in blue.
The data of the modified line are shown in red.
Use [Tab Left] or [Tab Right] to set the focus either to the line start or to the line end.


Select [Cancel] to quit the dialog.
Confirm [Accept] to execute the modified line.
104 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Marking sections of a line during data recording

This feature allows to mark sections of a line during data recording.
Note: The marking can only be activated along a planned flight line or during manual image
data recording.
At the end of a planned flight line FCMS automatically stops marking.
A marked section is handled by FCMS and by FPES similar to a section which was recorded
with a system error. Therefore, this feature is used to identify data which might be useless. E.g.
the terrain is obscured by clouds during data recording.
In flight the marked section is displayed color coded. See Table 127, Color codes in the
graphical presentation showing the line status in Volume 3, Chapter 5 on Page 478.
If a line is selected for re-flight, FCMS offers automatic re-flight of the marked section only.
To start / stop marking during data recording proceed as follows:

either
Confirm [Quality Error] to start marking.
or
Confirm [Quality Cancel] to stop marking.
Select [Return] to return from sensor release level.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 105

User activation of FCMS route-finder algorithm
Restart search for closest line

To reactivate the FCMS line finder algorithm proceed as follows:
Select [Recompute] to search for the closest line.
Recompute suggested approach path

To reactivate the FCMS line approach path computation proceed as follows:
Select [More buttons] from the main toolbar to display more buttons.
Select [Recalc] to compute a new optimum flight path to the next line.
106 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

System check
Steps to perform system check for a system installed in the aircraft

1. Move the aircraft to a place where there is no obstruction of the incoming signals to the
GNSS antenna.
2. Follow the recommendations in section "Before starting the system for the first time" in Vol-
3. Start-up system according to section "Start-up sequence" in Volume 1, Chapter 4 on Page 57
4. Start FCMS flight execution according to section "Start flight execution" in Volume 1,
FCMS performs a self test during the start up phase of flight
execution. If the check mark symbol appears on the upper right
side in the take-off control as shown in the example on the left
side all components including mount Leica PAV80 (if installed)
have passed the check successfully.
5. Wait until system has successfully passed the system check. The take-off control shows the
check mark symbol as shown in the example above for a short period of time. After that the
tool bar shows the main level icons for flight execution.
As long as the aircraft is not moving the embedded GNSS/IMU system is in status coarse
align and cannot provide drift information to the mount. Therefore, the mount symbol
remains displayed in brackets in the take-off control.
6. Exit flight and shut down the system according to section "System shutdown" in Volume 1,
Steps to perform system check for a system WITHOUT GNSS signal

1. Follow the recommendations in section "Before starting the system for the first time" in Vol-
2. Start-up system according to section "Start-up sequence" in Volume 1, Chapter 4 on Page 57
3. Select Configuration. Select GNSS-IMU Configuration. Select configuration set "Simula-
tion"
4. Start FCMS flight execution according to section "Start flight execution" in Volume 1,
FCMS performs a self test during the start up phase of flight
execution. If the check mark symbol appears on the upper right
side in the take-off control as shown in the example on the left
side all components including mount Leica PAV80 (if installed)
have passed the check successfully.
5. Wait until system has successfully passed the system check. The take-off control shows the
check mark symbol as shown in the example above for a short period of time. After that the
tool bar shows the main level icons for flight execution.
6. You can manually release frames.
7. Exit flight and shut down the system according to section "System shutdown" in Volume 1,
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 107

Trouble shooting
During startup as long as Leica FCMS is not fully operational
Status messages on front panel of CC31/CC32 during start-up

Table 14. Normal status messages on front panel CC31 / CC32
Message Description Trouble shooting user actions

START-UP System is starting-up. Wait until Ready is displayed.
READY System ready. System ready for normal operation.
Temperature Environment either hot or Cool down environment.
close to limit cold Warm up environment.
Input voltage Power source for the Camera Check power source
low Controller provides a voltage
close to the lower limit,
operation can become
impossible if the voltage
drops more.
Input voltage Power source for the Camera Check power source
high Controller provides a voltage
close to upper limit. Operation
can become impossible if the
voltage increases.
Error messages on front panel of CC31/CC32

Table 15. Error messages on front panel CC31/CC32

Leica FCMS Leica FCMS is not running Switch power on OC52 to ON
is not
responding
Hardware def. Cooling fan is not working Power cycle.
CC3x fan properly If the error persists, contact Customer Support
defect
Hardware def. Temperature sensor defect Power cycle.
Temp sensor If the error persists, contact Customer Support
Hardware def. Failure in electronic Power cycle.

Electronics component If the error persists, contact Customer Support
Camera failed Failure in electronic Power cycle.
component If the error persists, exchange camera Head, if
spare is available. Contact Support
108 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Table 15. Error messages on front panel CC31/CC32

Temperature Environment either too hot or Cool down environment or warm up
out of limits too cold environment.
Power cycle to reset and restart system.
Hardware def. Failure in power supply Power cycle.

Power supply electronic component If the error persists, contact Customer Support
Input voltage Power source for the Camera Check power source.
too high Controller provides a too high Power cycle to reset and restart system.
voltage.
Hardware def. Failure in electronic Power cycle.

CPU failed component If the error persists, contact Customer Support
Input voltage Power source for the Camera Check power source.
too low Controller provides a too low Power cycle to reset and restart system.
voltage.
During flight execution with Leica FCMS

During flight execution an internal monitoring program permanently checks the status of all
Leica RCD30 sub-systems as well as the data flow between these sub-systems. If an error or an
inconsistency is detected by this monitoring program, an Error message window is displayed
on the user interface. Also listed are suggested user actions to solve the problem. Because trouble
shooting information is given on the user interface, no further description is given here.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 109

Trouble shooting PAV80

Table 16. Status LED on Leica PAV80
Color Status Trouble shooting user actions

Green Leica PAV80 is in stabilization No
mode ON-AUTO.
Orange Operational mode Check message on OI40(ADS) or OC52/OC50
Stabilization OFF, if the (ALS). Status might be normal.
Leica RCD30 is in mechanical Select in FCMS [Mount] to change the
Zero position operational mode.
Mount at the stabilization Correct the attitude of the aircraft to allow the
range limits Leica PAV80 to operate within its mechanical
limits
long green Drift input data from GNSS- Check message on OI40 (ADS) or OC52/OC50
short red IMU system is missing. (ALS). Status is normal and no action is
blinking required if the system is not moved. E.g. during
ground check, if the aircraft is not moving.
short green Operational mode Check message on OI40 (ADS) or OC52/OC50
long red Stabilization ON, but no data (ALS).
blinking from the GNSS/IMU system
are available.
Red Failures. For details and troubleshooting see Leica Leica
PAV80 User Manual.
110 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Trouble shooting OC52/OC50

Table 18. Status LED on OC52/OC50
Color Status Trouble shooting user actions

Green o.k. No
Orange Temperature error If + cool down environment
Make sure the input fan filters are not
obstructed of dirty.
If - warm up environment
Red Voltage error Check aircraft power.
Table 19. Advanced trouble shooting OC52/OC50
Symptoms Possible cause Trouble shooting user actions

LED doesnt No power Check cable connection to CU80 (ADS) or SC
light up at all (ALS)
after
switching ON
LED lights Display is switched off Press the key + a few times to increase the
green but brightness.
OC52/OC50
display shows OC52/OC50 is shut down Press the key Shutdown/Startup once to
nothing restart the OC52/OC50.
Trouble shooting GI40

Table 20. Advanced trouble shooting GI40
Symptoms Possible cause Trouble shooting user actions

Display shows No power Check cable connection to CU80 or OC52/
nothing. OC50 respectively.
Display shows No flight plan selected, LED No.
nothing. Only indicates powered state. Select flight plan.
one LED is
illuminated
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 111

Export of status data for error analysis

During operation status information as well as other relevant information is logged by FCMS
into a data base. This data base is stored on the internal memory of the OC52. If a malfunction
cannot be solved by following the instructions given by FCMS to the operator, help is probably
required from a Leica Geosystems customer support technician. In this case, the support techni-
cian will need at least a clear error description and the log data to make an error analysis.
How to download logged FCMS status data from OC52

1. Attach the USB memory stick to the USB port on the OC52 for operator.
Important: Make sure FCMS is in the Main menu during this operation. Some sticks prevent
system startup, if they are attached either before or during system start-up.
3. Select [Download log data].
How to download logged status data from Leica PAV80

1. Switch power on Leica PAV80 to ON. Make sure the mount is initialized
2. Attach the USB memory stick to the USB port on the OC52 for operator
Important: Make sure FCMS is in the Main menu during this operation. Some sticks prevent
system startup, if they are attached either before or during system start-up.
3. Select [Mount] from FCMS main menu.
4. Select [Service] from PAV status menu.
5. Select [Download log data].
112 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Service Area
Select this area for the following tasks:
Firmware and Software installation
See section "Software and Firmware installation and update" in Volume 1, Chapter 3 on
Page 38
License upload and license check
See section "Licensing" in Volume 1, Chapter 3 on Page 48
Lens calibration file upload
See section "Leica RCD30 lens calibration file upload" in Volume 2, Chapter 8 on Page 289.
Browse the log data
See section "Browsing of logged status data" in Volume 3, Chapter 5 on Page 507
Export the log data
See section "Export of status data for error analysis" in Volume 1, Chapter 4 on Page 112
Shutter replacement procedure.
See section "Shutter replacement" in Volume 2, Chapter 8 on Page 285
Upload of customized configurations
Customized configurations and instructions of how to use it are provided on a case by case
basis.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 113

114 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Chapter 5 Care & Handling
Version 4.01-61 Oct / 19 / 2012 115

Care
Cleaning and drying

If the equipment becomes wet, leave it unpacked. Dry the product, the transport container, the
foam inserts and the accessories at a temperature not greater than +40C / +104F and clean them
thoroughly. Do not repack until everything is completely dry.
Cleaning of Optical Components

Blow dust off lenses/windows
Never touch the glass with your fingers
Use only a clean soft lint free cloth for cleaning. If necessary moisten the cloth with water or
pure alcohol. Do not use other liquids: these may attack polymer components.
Detailed instructions about how to clean optical components are given in section "Optical clean-
ing procedures" in Volume 2, Chapter 8 on Page 282
Cables and plugs

Keep plugs clean and dry. Blow away any dirt lodged in the plugs of the connecting cables.
Important: If you unplug connecting cables during the flight mission, you may lose data.
Always switch off the system before removing the cables.
Caution: During installation and any handling, make sure to provide protection for any
disengaged connectors. If available use protective covers for disengaged connectors to prevent
contamination of or damage to connector pins. Do not leave connectors or cables where they
could be stepped on.
Dust filters
Dust filters are located on the input fans of the CC31/CC32and the OC52/OC50. To ensure
proper cooling replace these filters if they have become dirty. Check the filters about every 6
months. Spare filters are part of the standard delivery. Instructions how to change the filters are
given in section "Replacement of dust filters on fans" in Volume 2, Chapter 8 on Page 290.
116 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Storage
Respect the temperature limits when storing the equipment, particularly in summer if the equip-
ment is inside a vehicle. Refer to section "Environmental" in Volume 1, Chapter 7 on Page 142
for information about temperature limits.
Caution: Always check that shipping container is completely locked prior to storage.
Important: The start-up time will be significantly shorter if the system temperature is above
0C / 32 F. Therefore, it is recommended to store the system above 0C / 32F until shortly
before it will be used (e.g., do not leave the system in the aircraft during cold nights).
Leica RCD30 storage and shipping case

The shipping cases for the Leica RCD30 components are designed to protect all parts from dam-
age during shipping. It is also recommended to store the equipment in the shipping case.
Figure 37: Example of shipping case
Legend
1. Eyes designed to be used to seal the shipping case
2. Shock indicator on the outside. See section Trans-
port in Volume 1, Chapter 5.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 117

Packing the system

Carefully place all components in the Shipping Case.
The Leica RCD30 Camera Head shipping case provides

space for one camera head and for two lenses stored in
the lens card boxes.
Attach the Camera Head cover. It locks the FMC device

and protects it from damage during transport.
The Leica RCD30 Camera Controller shipping case pro-

vides space for the Camera Controller, the mounting
plate, the RCD30 tool kit box, up to four mass memories
and cables.
The Leica RCD30 peripherals shipping case provides

space for the OC52, the OC50, the GI40 the GNSS
antenna, the PS56 and various cables.
The Leica RCD30 pod shipping case provides space for

the pod.
Important: Do never ship the pod with a Camera Head
installed.
Packing information for Leica RCD30 multi head systems are given in section "Multiple Camera
Heads Systems" in Volume 2, Chapter 6 on Page 233.
118 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Transport
Transport in a road vehicle

Never carry the product unsecured and without its proper casing in a road vehicle, as it can be
affected by shock and vibration. Always carry the product in its transport container and secure it.
Shipping
When transporting the product by rail, air or sea, always use the complete original Leica Geosys-
tems packaging, transport container and cardboard box, or its equivalent, to protect against shock
and vibration.
Caution: Do never ship the pod with the Camera head installed. Ship the camera Head always
in the Camera Head shipping case.
Caution: Always attach the Camera Head cover. It

locks the FMC device and protects it from damage
druing tranport.
The picture on the left side shows the Camera Head

upside down with correctly attached camera head cover.
Caution: Always check that the shipping container is completely locked prior to shipping.
Important: Do not carry the product shipping cases in the aircrafts cabin nor use the product
shipping cases in the cabin to stow spare components of the product.
Important: The product shipping cases have shock indicators on the outside. After transport
check the shock indicators. If an indicator appears RED, inform immediately the freight handler.
Also inspect all components and make sure they are not damaged.
After transport, or after storage for long periods, carry out the system checks described in this
User Manual.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 119

Figure 38: Example Leica RCD30 component shipping case
Legend
1. Eyes designed to be used to seal the shipping case
2. Shock indicator on the outside.
120 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Calibration
The geometric calibration of the Leica RCD30 is done individually for each spectral band order
to precisely co-register all four bands. The result of the calibration that is either done in the labo-
ratory, using a highest precision two-axis goniometer, or using self-calibration on the results of a
special calibration flight pattern.
The result of the calibration is stored in an XML file that contains distorting grids for all bands in
human readable form. The distortion values are scaled to fit a nominal fixed focal length for each
lens system type.
The distortion grids are used by Leica FramePro to convert the raw images into distortion-free
images. This makes the camera model as simple and portable as possible. Besides the nominal
focal length, it contaiins only an optional principal point offset.
IMU misalignment and principal point offset can be updated by the user using a simplified self-
calibration tool.
Boresighting - IMU misalignment

Important: Determination of IMU misalignment is essential for the proper operation of the
system and to ensure the system can produce the specified accuracy. IMU misalignment should
be estimated periodically.
IMU misalignment estimation is mandatory whenever the IMU is removed and re-installed
Please contact Leica Geosystems Sensor Customer Support if in doubt about the process.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 121

Service intervals
Various factors will affect the Leica RCD30 system, in particular:
Operating hours
Environmental conditions in use and storage
Care in use, handling and storage
In view of the above, there is no exact rule on how often calibration, service and overhaul of the
equipment is required. The following frequencies will serve as a general recommendation.
Table 21. Overview service intervals
Operation
Component Type of job Intervals
hours
Whole Leica RCD30 Preemptive technical and factory calibration N/A 2 years
system check
Shutter in lens Preemptive shutter replacement 200000
NAG-D 50 mm Exposures
NST-D 80 mm
All service tasks and replacements must be made by a Service Technician located in a Leica Geo-
systems Sensor Service Center. Please contact your Leica Geosystems service center in advance
to make service arrangements.
Points of contact are given in section "Where to get assistance and training" in Volume 1, Chapter
1 on Page 6.
Note: Information about the Leica PAV80 is given in the Leica PAV80 User Manual
Caution: Whenever system is maintained or upgraded make sure to use the most current
documentation.
W
Maintenance
Caution: Opening the system for service purposes is only allowed if an Leica RCD30 Service
and Maintenance training course given by Leica Geosystems AG has been completed.
122 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Chapter 6 Safety Directions
Version 4.01-61 Oct / 19 / 2012 123

Safety Directions
The following directions should enable the person responsible for the product, and the person
who actually uses the equipment, to anticipate and avoid operational hazards.
The person responsible for the product must ensure that all users understand these directions and
adhere to them.
Intended use of the system

The Leica RCD30 system is designed and suitable for photography from aircraft or helicopters
for the purpose of:
Surveying (cartography, construction sites, highway construction, flood zones, large asset/
pipeline/power line measurement, etc.)
Remote sensing (land use, environment, biodiversity, change detection, etc.)
Monitoring (land-slips, ice/snow movement, agriculture, disaster management, etc.)
Publicity (panoramic views, specific objects etc.)
Visualization
During operation for the purposes listed above the Leica RCD30 system is also used for:
Navigation support and guidance during survey flights
Control of Leica RCD30 airborne sensor components during survey flights
Collection of image, attitude, position and GNSS data during a survey flight
124 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Prohibited use of the system

The Leica RCD30 system shall not be used in any of the following ways:
Installation in an aircraft without an authorized provider of such installations.
Use of the product without instruction.
Use outside of the intended limits.
Disabling safety systems.
Removal of hazard notices.
Opening the product by using tools (e.g., screwdriver), unless this is specifically permitted
for certain functions.
Modification or conversion of the product.
Use after misappropriation.
Use of products with obviously recognizable damages or defects.
Use with accessories from other manufacturers without the prior explicit approval of Leica
Geosystems.
Inadequate safeguards at the working site
Warning: Adverse use can lead to injury, malfunction and damage. It is the task of the
person responsible for the equipment to inform the user about hazards and how to
counteract them. The product is not to be operated until the user has been instructed on
how to work with it.
Limits of Use
Please refer also to section "Technical Data" in Volume 1, Chapter 7 on Page 133.
Environment
Suitable for use in an atmosphere appropriate for permanent human habitation: not suitable for
use in aggressive or explosive environments.
Please refer also to section "Technical Data" in Volume 1, Chapter 7 on Page 133.
Danger: Local safety authorities and safety experts must be contacted before working in
hazardous areas, or in close proximity to electrical installations or similar situations by the
person in charge of the product.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 125

Responsibilities
Warning: The person responsible for the product must ensure that it is used in accordance
with the instructions. This person is also accountable for the training and the deployment of
personnel who use the product and for the safety of the equipment in use.
Manufacturer of the product

Leica Geosystems AG, CH-9435 Heerbrugg, hereinafter referred to as Leica Geosystems, is
responsible for supplying the product, including the user manual and original accessories, in a
completely safe condition.
Manufacturers of non Leica Geosystems accessories

The manufacturers of non Leica Geosystems accessories for the product are responsible for
developing, implementing and communicating safety concepts for their products, and are also
responsible for the effectiveness of those safety concepts in combination with the Leica Geosys-
tems product.
Shipping company
The shipping company does not require any product knowledge.
Seller
The seller of the product:
is trained by Leica Geosystems or Leica Geosytems agency in the use of the Leica Geosys-
tems product
is familiar with all known risks related to permitted and adverse uses of the product
is familiar with all functions necessary for using the product and can inspect and explain
them
knows local safety regulations
Person in charge of the product

The person in charge of the product has the following duties:
to understand the safety instructions on the product and the instructions in the user manual.
to be familiar with local regulations relating to safety and accident prevention.
to inform Leica Geosystems immediately if the product and the application becomes unsafe
to ensure that installation for airborne usage/environment is certified
126 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Service technician
The service technician must:
meet Leica Geosystems training requirements
know the purpose of the product and has read and understood the instructions in the user
manual
be familiar with all known hazards up to the assembly level described in the service manual
be familiar with all functions and is capable of inspecting and correcting them in accordance
with the service manual
Aircraft installer
The aircraft installer must:
be authorized for installation of payloads on aircraft
know and follow strictly the regulations given by the FAA authorities
know what types of aircraft modifications have to be certified by the FAA or national avia-
tion associations and act accordingly
Hazards of use
Warning: The absence of instruction, or the inadequate imparting of instruction, can lead
to incorrect or adverse use, and can give rise to accidents with far-reaching human,
material, financial and environmental consequences.
Precautions: All users must follow the safety directions given by the manufacturer and the direc-
tions of the person responsible for the product. The latter person is to make use of the sensor
course arranged annually by Leica Geosystems.
Caution: Watch out for erroneous flight results if the system is defective, if it has been dropped,
misused, modified, stored for long periods or transported. All of the connecting cables are
particularly at risk.
Precaution: Before each flight, carry out the system check. It is the duty of the person responsi-
ble for the system to ensure that the regular servicing prescribed in the User Manual is carried
out. These measures are particularly important after the equipment as a whole has been subjected
to abnormal use, and before and after important measurements.
Caution: If the accessories used with the product are not properly secured and the product is
subjected to mechanical shock, for example blows or falling, the product may be damaged or
people may sustain injury.
Precautions: When setting-up the product, make sure that the accessories are correctly adapted,
fitted, secured, and locked in position. Avoid subjecting the product to mechanical stress.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 127

Caution: In the case of a crash landing or extreme turbulence the crew and passengers may be
hurt by loose equipment parts.
Precautions: Store unused system components during flight in a safe place. Make sure that the
installation of the product is done by a certified aircraft modification company. The installation
must comply with the requirements stated in the installation drawings.
Caution: Do not open the system when it is connected to the power source. This may damage
your system and there is also a hazard of electrical shock.
Precautions: Only open the product if you have completed a service course at Leica Geosystems.
Always disconnect the product system from the power source before opening the system.
Caution: Loose equipment parts (especially cables) can destroy the equipment and can harm the
flight crew and passengers.
Precautions: When installing the product make sure that no loose equipment parts (especially
cables) are within the aircraft. Follow the installation instructions on the installation drawings.
Warning: If the product is improperly disposed of, the following can happen:
If polymer parts are burnt, poisonous gases are produced which may impair health.
If batteries are damaged or are heated strongly, they can explode and cause poisoning, burn-
ing, corrosion or environmental contamination.
By disposing of the product irresponsibly you may enable unauthorized persons to use it in
contravention of the regulations, exposing them-selves and third parties to the risk of severe
injury and rendering the environment liable to contamination.
Precautions: The product must not be disposed with household waste.

Dispose of the product appropriately in accordance with the national regulations in force in your
country.
Always prevent access to the product by unauthorized personnel.
Product specific treatment and waste management information can be downloaded from the
Leica Geosystems home page at http://www.leica-geosystems.com/treatment or received from
your Leica Geosystems dealer.
Warning: Never fly according only to the positional information provided by the product.
It is not permitted as a sole source of information for navigation. Flying only with products
position and altitude information can lead to crash landings.
Precautions: Always use a supplementary navigation system under VFR condition.
Caution: During the operation of the product there is a hazard of squeezing extremities or
entanglement of hairs and/or clothes by moving/rotating parts.
Precautions: Keep a safe distance of the moving/rotating parts.
128 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Warning: Only Leica Geosystems authorized service workshops are entitled to repair these
products.
Warning: Inadequate securing of the working site can lead to dangerous situations, for
example in traffic, on building sites, and at industrial installations.
Precautions: Always ensure that the working site is adequately secured. Adhere to the regula-
tions governing safety and accident prevention and road traffic.
Warning: If computers intended for use indoors are used in the field there is a danger of
electric shock.
Precautions: Adhere to the instructions given by the computer manufacturer with regard to field
use in conjunction with Leica Geosystems products.
Warning: If the product becomes during operation obviously damaged or has a defect (e.g.
smoke out of the product) it can result in death or serious injury.
Precaution: Immediately switch OFF or disconnect the product from supply line. (E.g. set the
power switch of the power line to the product from the aircraft to OFF.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 129

Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
Description
The term Electromagnetic Compatibility is taken to mean the capability of the product to func-
tion smoothly in an environment where electromagnetic radiation and electrostatic discharges are
present, and without causing electromagnetic disturbances to other equipment.
Warning: Electromagnetic radiation can cause disturbances in other equipment.
Although the product meets the strict regulations and standards which are in force in this
respect, Leica Geosystems cannot completely exclude the possibility that other equipment
may be disturbed.
Caution: There is a risk that disturbances may be caused in other equipment if the product is
used in conjunction with accessories from other manufacturers, for example field computers,
personal computers, two-way radios, non-standard cables or external batteries.
Precautions: Use only the equipment and accessories recommended by Leica Geosystems.
When combined with the product, they meet the strict requirements stipulated by the guidelines
and standards. When using computers and two-way radios, pay attention to the information about
electromagnetic compatibility provided by the manufacturer.
Caution: Disturbances caused by electromagnetic radiation can result in erroneous

measurements. Although the product meets the strict regulations and standards which are in force
in this respect, Leica Geosystems cannot completely exclude the possibility that the product may
be disturbed by very intense electromagnetic radiation, for example, near radio transmitters, two-
way radios or diesel generators.
Precautions: Check the plausibility of results obtained under these conditions.
Warning: If the product is operated with connecting cables attached at only one of their
two ends, for example external supply cables, interface cables, the permitted level of
electromagnetic radiation may be exceeded and the correct functioning of other products
may be impaired.
Precautions: While the product is in use, connecting cables, for example product to external bat-
tery, product to computer, must be connected at both ends.
130 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

FCC Statement, Applicable in U.S.

Warning: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B
digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a resi-
dential installation.
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communication.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be
deter-mined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the inter-
ference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is
connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Warning: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Leica Geosystems for

compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Labeling
Example type plate: location on CU31 Example type plate: location on CH61
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 131

132 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Chapter 7 Technical Data
Version 4.01-61 Oct / 19 / 2012 133

About Technical Data

The Chapter Technical Data contains relevant information about:
Electrical data
Environmental conditions
Weight and part numbers of Leica RCD30 system components
Weight, size and content of shipping cases
Note: Dimensions for all parts is given in section "Aircraft Installation Information" in Volume
4, Chapter 2 on Page 513
134 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Overview of Leica RCD30 specifications
Electronic characteristics of data chain

CCD size 60 MP, 8956 x 6708 pixels
Dynamic range CCD chain 73 dB
Resolution A/D converter 14-bit
Data channel 16-bit lossless
Maximum frame rate (Uno/Duo) 1.0 sec
Maximum frame rate (Oblique Trio) 1.5 sec
Maximum frame rate (Oblique Penta) 1.8 sec
Camera Heads
Camera Head CH61 Camera Head CH62
Dimensions 129 mm x 129 mm x 168 mm (L x W x H)
Weight 3.5 kg (without lens)
Sensor Type 1x Bayer Array CCD for RGB 1x Bayer Array CCD for RGB and
1x CCD array for NIR
Active Pixels RGB 8956 x 6708 pixels 8956 x 6708 pixels
Active Pixel NIR - 8956 x 6708 pixels, 2x2 binned
Pixel Size RGB 6.0 x 6.0 micron 6.0 x 6.0 micron
Pixel Size NIR - 6.0 x 6.0 micron, 2x2 binned
Shutter See Optics on Page 136
Spectral range and filters

Spectral band nm
Blue 420 - 520 (at = 50%)
Green 500 - 580 (at = 50%)
Red 565 - 660 (at = 50%)
Near-infrared 780 - 880 (at = 50%)
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 135

Optics
Lens design User exchangeable
Ruggedized design for airborne application.
Temperature compensated for high accuracy performance between
-10C and + 30 C
Type / Part number NAG-D #785422 NAT-D #785423
Nominal focal length 50 mm 80 mm
Field of view (FoV) 56.5across track 37.1across track
43.8along track 28.2along track
f - numbers 4.0, 5.6, 8.0, 11 2.8, 4.0, 5.6, 8.0
Focus Infinity Infinity
Resolution optimized for CCDs
Shutter Type Central shutter, user replaceable
Speed 1/50 to 1/1000 sec
Life >200,000 Frames
Lens Mount Easy to use bayonet connection
Automated electrical connection
Stabilized connection mechanics
Real-time view
Type Image thumbnails
GNSS/IMU system
General NovAtel SPAN embedded in CC32
GNSS receiver Internal 54 - channel dual frequency GNSS (GPS and GLONASS)
receiver L1/L2, low noise, 20 Hz raw data, DGPS ready
GPS and GLONASS
IMU Integrated and rigidly mounted in Pod
Different IMU types are available. See Table 22
See IMU specifications.(Not part of Leica RCD30 Documentation)
Real-time solution Deeply coupled GNSS/IMU solution
GNSS/IMU data storage On MM30 removable solid state disk mass memory
Table 22. IMU supported by Leica RCD30
Leica IMU IMU High performance Weight Dimension

IMU manufacturer type gyros kg W x L x H mm
Model
CUS4 NovAtel CPT 100 Hz Fiber Optic Gyro 2.29 168 x 152 x 89
DUS5 Northrop Grumman LN200 200 Hz Fiber Optic Gyro 0.75 89 x 89 x 85
136 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Table 22. IMU supported by Leica RCD30
Leica IMU IMU High performance Weight Dimension

IMU manufacturer type gyros kg W x L x H mm
Model
NUS5 SAGEM 33BM61 500 Hz Dry-tuned Gyro 2.0 120 x 150 x100
Table 23. Absolute accuracy after post-processing (RMS)
Leica IMU CUS4 DUS5 NUS5

Model
IMU type CPT LN200 33BM61
Position 0.05 - 0.3 m 0.05 - 0.3 m 0.05 - 0.3 m
Velocity 0.02 m/s 0.005 m/s 0.005 m/s
Roll & Pitch 0.015deg 0.005 deg 0.005 deg
Heading 0.03 deg 0.008 deg 0.008 deg
Table 24. Relative accuracy
Leica IMU CUS4 DUS5 NUS5

Model
Angular < 0.07 deg/ < 0.01 deg/sqrt < 0.01 deg/sqrt
random noise sqrt (hour) (hour) (hour)
Drift < 1.0 deg/hour < 0.1 deg/hour < 0.1 deg/hour
Motion compensation
Forward Motion Mechanical forward and lateral motion compensation along two axis
Compensation
Angular Motion Leica PAV80 gyro-stabilized mount

Compensation (AMC)
Camera Controller
Interfaces to camera Heads 5
Image Data Storage See Mass Memory on Page 138
Firmware Storage CF with Enhanced Write Filter
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 137

Operational
User interactions Highly automated operation by Leica FCMS
Automatic integration time control (diaphragm and shutter speed)
Data recording Not limited. Mass memory can be exchanged in-flight during turns.
Capacity of Mass Memories see Table 25
Mass Memory
Technology Solid state memory, flash disk technology
Removable Drive Carrier
Operational modes Joint volume of combined two MM30 Data recording to single MM30
Data recording to two single volumes for in- flight data backup
Table 25. MM30details

Type Weight Capacity of single volume Capacity of joint volume
(pair)
MM30-1200 0.5 kg 1.2 TB 2.4 TB
~19800 frames RGB or ~39600 frames RGB or
~15800 frames RGBN ~31600 frames RGBN
MM30-1024 0.5 kg 1 TB 2 TB
~17000 frames RGB or ~34000 frames RGB or
~13600 frames RGBN ~27200 frames RGBN
MM30-600 0.5 kg 600 GB 1.2 TB
~ 9900 frames RGB or ~18800 frames RGB or
~ 7900 frames RGBN ~15800 frames RGBN
MM30-512 0.5 kg 512 GB 1 TB
~ 6800 frames RGBN ~13600 frames RGBN
MM30-320 0.5 kg 320 GB 640 GB
~ 4200 frames RGBN ~ 8400 frames RGBN
MM30-256 0.5 kg 256 GB 512 GB
~ 4250 frames RGB or ~ 8500 frames RGB or
~ 3400 frames RGBN ~ 6800 frames RGBN
138 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

External interfaces
Communication LAN
GNSS antenna TNC
connector
Flight Management Power and data interfaces to Leica FCMS with OC52 for operator,
System OC50 for Pilot and GI40
Mount Leica PAV80
Interface for 3rd party components see section "Interface Control Document (ICD)" in Volume 2,
Overview of mechanical interfaces

Camera Head CH61, CH62 Diameter: 129 mm; height: 168 mm without lens
Leica NAG-D 50 mm Lens Diameter: xxx mm; height: 76 mm
Leica NAT-D 80 mm Lens Diameter: xxx mm; height: 46 mm
Pod Standalone, Duo Diameter: 39 cm upper part, 32 cm lower part; height:
51cm. (dimensions without handles)
fits into PAV80 mount
Pod Oblique Trio, Oblique Penta Diameter: 390 mm; height: 485 mm (dimensions without
handles)
fits into PAV80 mount
Camera Controller CC31, CC32 300 mm x 260 mm x 140 mm (LxWxH), 6.1 kg
Mass Memory MM30 Removable, portable 256GB to 1.2TB
pair fits into slot in Camera Controller CC31/CC32
Operation Controller OC52 12.1 touch-screen with a resolution of 1024 x 768
pixels. Fits onto Interface Stand IS40
Interface Stand IS40 Height adjustable 53cm to 78 cm
fits RC30 Nav-sight installation
Mount for pod Leica PAV80 gyro-stabilized mount
GNSS-IMU provides gyro and drift reference
OC50 for Pilot 6.3 screen with a resolution of 1024 x 768 pixels.
Power switch and 18 hard keys for operation
Designed for cockpit mounting
Guidance Indicator GI40 LED array display with four numeric displays.
Designed for cockpit mounting
Total weight installed Fully integrated Leica RCD30 camera system ~80 kg
(depending on configuration)
Dimensions and weight

Dimensions for all parts is given in section "Aircraft Installation Information" in Volume 4,
Chapter 2 on Page 513. The dimensions for the shipping cases are given in Table 39, Shipping
cases in Volume 1, Chapter 7 on Page 153.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 139

The weight for all parts is given in section "Leica RCD30 system devices and parts" in Volume 1,
140 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Electrical
Voltage input 22.0 - 30.3 V DC
Maximum voltage ripple 1.4 Vpp (1 to 15 kHz)
Reverse polarity protection Internal on all devices powered by aircraft input.
Over voltage protection Internal on all devices (continuous short circuit after over voltage).
Table 26. Power consumption at 28 V DC
Device Average Maximum Connected Devices Configuration examples

Peak
[1] [2] [3] [4]
CH61 50 W 60 W - - - 2X 4X
CH62 55 W 65 W - X X 1X 1 X-
CC31 65W 100 W 2 x MM30 - X - -
110 W 145 W GNSS antenna X - X X
2 x MM30
IMU CUS4
CC32
105 W 140 W GNSS antenna - - - -
2 x MM30
IMU DUS5
115 W 150W GNSS antenna - - - -
2 x MM30
IMU NUS5
OC52 30 W 40 W,<0.3s - X - X X
OC50 30 W 40 W,<0.3s - X - X X
GI40 10 W 40 W,<0.3s - X - X X
PAV80 30 W 250 W,<0.3s - X - X X
Total Average 265 W 120 W 365 W 465 W
~580 W ~165 W ~650 W ~770 W
Total Maximum / Peak
<0.3s <0.3s <0.3s <0.3s
For specifications of circuit breakers at aircraft power output see section "Power requirements,
fuses and circuit breakers" in Volume 4, Chapter 2 on Page 575.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 141

Environmental
Operating temperature (except MM30) -20C to +55C *
Operating temperature MM30 0C to +55C
Operating temperature Oblique Trio and 0C to +45C
Oblique Penta Systems
Storage temperature -40C to +85C
(except CH61/CH62 NAG-D, NAT-D)
Storage temperature -40C to +70C
CH61/CH62 NAG-D, NAT-D
Air pressure (system in non pressurized ICAO 25,000 ft, 7620 m AMSL
aircraft)
Air pressure (system in pressurized aircraft) ICAO 50,000 ft, 15240 m AMSL
Humidity 0% rH to 95% rH according to ISO 7137
(non-condensing)
EMC according to ISO 7137
Vibrations according to ISO 7137
Shock operational according to ISO 7137
Crash safety according to ISO 7137
Emergency landing according to FAA Part 25
Environmental qualification form see section Environmental Qualification Forms in Volume 4,

Tip: * Startup is faster if MM0, OC50/52 are not below 0C. Store in cold or hot seasons this
light weight components in the office and not in the aircraft on the tarmac.
Applied standards
General standards for temperature,
ISO 7137, RTCA DO-160G, EUROCAE-14E
electronics environment etc.
Emergency landing FAR 23.561 Fixed Wing
FAR 27.561 Helicopter
142 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Conformity to national regulations

FCC Part 15 (applicable in US)
Hereby, Leica Geosystems AG, declares that the Leica RCD30 system with GNSS antenna
is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive
1999/5/EC. The declaration of conformity may be consulted at http://www.leica-geosys-
tems.com/ce.
Class 1 equipment according European Directive 1999/5/EC (R&TTE) can be placed on the
market and be put into service without restrictions in any EEA member state.
The conformity for countries with other national regulations not covered by the FCC part 15 or
European directive 1999/5/EC has to be approved prior to use and operation.
Frequency band
Type Frequency band [MHz]
GNSS (GPS) 1227.6
1575.42
GNSS (GLONASS) 1246.4375 - 1254.3
1602.4375 - 1611.5
Output power
Type Output power [mW]
GNSS (GPS and GLONASS) Receive only
Antenna
Internal GNSS antenna element (receive only)
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 143

GNSS Antenna
Active L1/l2 Glonass + L1/L2 GPS + Onmi Star Antenna
Type: ANT-A72 GOLA-TW
Figure 39: GPS-GLONASS Antenna Mechanical Specifications, Article #777441
144 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Figure 40: GPS-GLONASS Antenna Electrical Specifications, Article #777441
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 145

System components
Devices and parts

Table 27. Leica RCD30 system devices and parts
Part # Device / Part Net weight Shipped in case

784778 CH61 Camera Head 3.1 kg Camera Head
777966 CH62 Camera Head 3.1 kg Camera Head
785422 Leica NAG-D 3.5 / 50mm lens 0.8 kg Camera Head
785423 Leica NAT-D 2.8 / 80mm lens 0.5 kg Camera Head
789322 Lens filter 0.03 kg Camera Head
783773 RCD30 Standalone Pod 10 kg Pod
784788 RCD30 Duo Pod 10 kg Pod
798313 RCD30 Oblique Trio Pod xxxxx 17 kg Pod
797722 RCD30 Oblique Penta Pod xxxxx 17 kg Pod
780048 CC32 Camera Controller 5 kg Camera Contr.
784794 CC31 Camera Controller 4.8 kg Camera Contr.
783453 CC31/CC32 Mounting Plate 1.4 kg Camera Contr.
784802 CC31/CC32 Mounting Plate for ALS 1.1 kg Cardbox
784783 CH61/CH62 Mounting Spacer A
784784 CH61/CH62 Mounting Spacer B
795245 MM30 Mass Memory 1200 GB 0.5 kg Camera Contr.
784797 MM30 Download Station 3.5 kg Card box
767840 OC52 Operation Controller 3.0 kg Peripherals
743070 IS40 Interface Stand, consisting of mount and tube 5.45 kg Card box
745210 OC50 for Pilot 1.50 kg Peripherals
756135 OC50 Hand Bag 0.1 kg Peripherals
752446 OC50 Accessories 0.1 kg Peripherals
146 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Table 27. Leica RCD30 system devices and parts
Part # Device / Part Net weight Shipped in case

770610 GI40 Guidance Indicator, Blue LEDs 0.40 kg Peripherals
777441 Airborne GPS/GLONASS antenna L1/L2 0.30 kg Peripherals
785071 PAV80 gyro-stabilized mount 36.9 kg PAV80
The following parts are delivered with thePAV80:
790944 PAV80 adapter ring for RCD30 1.35 kg
764123 PAV80 standard protection cover 2.65 kg
764111 Leica PAV80 standard tools and accessories 0.1 kg PAV80
784801 RCD30 ToolsKit. For content see Table 33 0.7 kg Camera Contr.
763733 CD/ DVD drive 0.55 kg Camera Cont
763734 USB Hub, 4 port 0.05 kg Camera Contr.
743064 USB Memory Stick 0.03 kg Camera Contr.
764189 PS56 Power Supply 4.20 kg Peripherals
790732 eSATA PCI-E Card 4x 0.88 kg Camera Contr.
764119 Spacer for Leica PAV80 8.20 kg Card box
784803 Cable bundle jacket Pod
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 147

IMU Selections
Table 28. CUS4-IMU
Part # Part Net weight

789616 IMU-CPT 2.36 kg
789109 Cable CC32 to IMU CPT, 3.5 m 1.2 kg
791816 Cable CC32 to IMU CPT, 7 m
Table 29. DUS5-IMU
Part # Part Net weight Integrated in

747984 IMU LN200 0.75 kg
784806 Cable IMU LN200 to CC32, 3.5 m xx kg
Table 30. NUS5-IMU
Part # Part Net weight Integrated in

752025 IMU 33BM61 2.0 kg
752374 Cable IMU 33BM61 to SH or LS, 0.41 m 0.25 kg
784805 Cable IMU 33BM61 to CC32, 3.5 m xx kg
148 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Tools and accessories

Table 33. Leica RCD30 Tool Kit
Part # Qty Part Shipped in

773206 1 Tool box
766396 1 Safety wire spool
784057 3 Filter pad for CC31/CC32
780564 3 Filter foam for CH61/CH62
790810 1 Hexagon Wrench Key, 5mm
767552 1 Hexagon Wrench Key, 4mm
784801 791630 1 Hexagon Wrench Key, 3mm Camera Head

767551 1 Hexagon Wrench Key, 2.5mm
742677 1 Torx Wrench #10
790867 1 Torx Wrench #8
791138 1 Screwdriver #0
790808 1 Allen key 4mm
795214 1 Torque screwdriver Hex 1.5mm 20cNm
785735 1 Fuse kit for RCD30
Table 34. Tools and accessories for OC50
Part # Qty Part Shipped in

760442 3 Dazzle shield OC Accessories
752446 case packed in
752067 6 Dust filter for OC50 input fans ALS Accessories
shipping case
Note: Dimensions for all parts is given in section "Aircraft Installation Information" in Volume
4, Chapter 2 on Page 513. The dimensions for the shipping cases are given in Table 39,
Shipping cases in Volume 1, Chapter 7 on Page 153.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 149

Cables
Table 35. Cables
Part # Connection Type Length Shipped in case

784779 CH6x to Camera Controller Electrical 3.5 m Pod
784787 CH6x to Camera Controller Electrical 5.0 m
783407 CC31 to Leica ALS60/70 Electrical Camera Contr.
784811 CC3x to Leica PAV80 Electrical 3.0 m
821218 GNSS antenna to CC32 Electrical 10.0 m Peripherals
752739 Power Cable PAV Electrical 4.0 m PAV80
745938 OC50 to OC52 Electrical 7.0 m Peripherals
822132 GI40 to OC50 or OC52 Electrical 5.0 m Peripherals
764193 CC33/32 to DC aircraft power Electrical 1.0 m Peripherals
765173 CC31/32 to DC aircraft power Electrical 4.0 m Peripherals
821446 PS56 to AC power, US Electrical 3.0 m Peripherals
763811 PS56 to AC power, SCHUKO Electrical 2.5 m Peripherals
Optional cables and other components

Table 36. Optional cables and other components

757559 GNSS antenna to CC31 Electrical 2.5 m Peripherals
757760 Cable OC50 to OC52 Electrical 10.0 m Peripherals
764030 Cable OC50/52 to OC50/52 Electrical 0.8 m Peripherals
757734 Cable ADS40/80 to ALS60/70 Electrical 7.0 m
757727 GNSS 1x4 Antenna splitter Electrical -
765173 Cable PD56 to Aircraft power Electrical 4m
764247 PHT50 holder for OC50 on IS40 Mechanical -
745210 OC50 Operation Controller MMI - Card Box
767840 OC52 Operation Controller MMI - Card box
783405 CC31/CC32 AUX splitter Camera Contr.
784812 CC31 to PAV80 with 3rd party Electrical 3.0 m Camera Contr.
GNSS/IMU system
150 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Table 36. Optional cables and other components

784813 CC31/32 to PAV80 with 3rd party Electrical 3.0 m Camera Contr.
FMS
791817 CC31/CC32 to PAV80 Electrical 6.5 m Camera Contr.
791818 Power Cable PAV, CU, SH Electrical 6.5 m PAV80
791921 CH61/62 Camera Connector Cable Electrical 7.0m Camera Contr.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 151

Documentation, Software
Table 37. Documentation, Software Media
Part # Name Form Shipped in case

784799 Leica RCD30 Documentation Digital on DVD Accessories case
784800 Leica RCD30 User Manual Hardcopy Accessories case
764113* Leica PAV80 User Manual Hardcopy PAV80
764112* Leica PAV80 Documentation & Digital on CD PAV80
Controller SW
749560 Leica FCMS - Flight & Sensor Control Digital on CD Accessories case
Management System
753771 Leica FCMS Flight Simulator Digital on CD Accessories case
763806 Leica RCD30 Calibration Certificate and Hardcopy and Accessories case
Calibration File CD
780511 World wide SRTM data (disk 1 to 4) Digital on DVDs Peripherals
*If optional Leica PAV80 purchased
Licensing
Table 38. Firmware, Software Licensing
Part # Name Part # of 1 year Part # of upgrade

SW Maintenance from previous version
771231 FCMS Sensor control RCD 5302690
798263 FCMS Sensor Control RCD 5305296
Oblique - 3 to 5 Sensor Heads
749513 FCMS Flight guidance 88369 766467
749515 FCMS Remote control 88370 766468
152 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Shipping Cases
Table 39. Shipping cases
Part # Case Name Tareweight Gross weight Size Volume

(l*w*h)
784781 CH6x 9.5 kg 31 x 81 x 41 cm3 0.103 m3
784791 Standalone/ 11.35 kg xx 61 x 55 x 57 cm3 0.191 m3
Duo Pod
798343 Trio/Penta xx.xx kg xx xx x xx x xx cm3 0.xxx m3
Pod
784798 CC3x 10.7 kg 31 x 81 x 41 cm3 0.103 m3
784809 Peripherals 10.2 kg 31 x 81 x 41 cm3 0.103 m3
764120 PAV80 23.8 kg ~ 70 kg 80 x 66 x 42 cm3 0.2218 m3
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 153

Packing order
Table 45. Contents of shipping case Camera Head
Devices / Parts Cables Documentation / Software

CH61 or CH62
NAG-D 50 mm
NAT-D 80 mm
Table 46. Contents of shipping case Camera Controller

CC31 or CC32 Leica RCD30 CD
CC3x Mounting plate Leica RCD30 USM hardcopy
1 to 4 MM30
RCD30 ToolsKit
CD/DVD drive
USB Hub 4 port
USB stick
eSATA PCI-E Card 4x
Table 47. Contents of Shipping Case Peripherals

OC52 OC52 to CC3x FCMS CD
OC50 incl. hand bag OC50 to OC52 Flight Simulator CD
GI40 GI40 to OC50/52 FPES DVD
GNSS antenna GNSS antenna cable FramePro CD
OC50 Acessories CC3x to aircraft power World Wide SRTM DVD box
PS56 Power CC3x to PS56
Lens filter Power PS56 to AC
Table 48. Contents of Shipping Case Pod

RCD30 Single Pod CH6x to Camera Controller
Cable CC32 to IMU
Cable bundle jacket
154 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Table 49. Contents of shipping case Leica PAV80

Leica PAV80 with protection PAV80 to DC power Leica PAV80 User Manual
cover and adapter ring
Leica PAV80 Standard Leica PAV80 Documentation &
accessories Controller SW
Table 50. Contents of cardboard box

Spacer - -
IS40
Download Station
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 155

156 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Chapter 8 Warranty - Software License Agreement
Version 4.01-61 Oct / 19 / 2012 157

International Limited Warranty, Software License Agreement
International Limited Warranty

This product is subject to the terms and conditions set out in the International Limited Warranty
which you can download from the Leica Geosystems home page at http://www.leica-geosys-
tems.com/internationalwarranty or collect from your Leica Geosystems distributor. The forego-
ing warranty is exclusive and is in lieu of all other warranties, terms or conditions, express or
implied, either in fact or by operation of law, statutory or otherwise, including warranties, terms
or conditions of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose, satisfactory quality and non-
infringement, all of which are expressly disclaimed.
Software License Agreement

This product contains software that is pre-installed on the product, or that is supplied to you on a
data carrier media, or that can be downloaded by you online pursuant to prior authorization from
Leica Geosystems. Such software is protected by copyright and other laws and its use is defined
and regulated by the Leica Geosystems Software License Agreement, which covers aspects such
as, but not limited to, Scope of the License, Warranty, Intellectual Property Rights, Limitation of
Liability, Exclusion of other Assurances, Governing Law and Place of Jurisdiction. Please make
sure, that at any time you fully comply with the terms and conditions of the Leica Geosystems
Software License Agreement.
Such agreement is provided together with all products and can also be referred to and down-
loaded at the Leica Geosystems home page at http://www.leica-geosystems.com/swlicense or
collected from your Leica Geosystems distributor.
You must not install or use the software unless you have read and accepted the terms and condi-
tions of the Leica Geosystems Software License Agreement. Installation or use of the software or
any part thereof, is deemed to be an acceptance of all the terms and conditions of such license
agreement. If you do not agree to all or some of the terms of such license agreement, you may not
download, install or use the software and you must return the unused software together with its
accompanying documentation and the purchase receipt to the dealer from whom you purchased
the product within ten (10) days of purchase to obtain a full refund of the purchase price.
158 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Microsoft End User License Agreement ("EULA")
End user license agreement for MICROSOFT embedded systems

You have acquired a device ("DEVICE") that includes software licensed by Leica Geosys-
tems from Microsoft Licensing, GP or its affiliates ("MS"). Those installed software prod-
ucts of MS origin, as well as associated media, printed materials, and "online" or electronic
documentation ("SOFTWARE") are protected by international intellectual property laws
and treaties. The SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All rights reserved
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA"),
DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPY THE SOFTWARE. INSTEAD, PROMPTLY
CONTACT LEICA GEOSYSTEMS FOR INSTRUCTIONS ON RETURN OF THE
UNUSED DEVICE(S) FOR A REFUND. ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE, INCLUD-
ING BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICE, WILL CONSTI-TUTE YOUR
AGREEMENT TO THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF ANY PREVIOUS CON-
SENT).
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE. This EULA grants you the following license:
You may use the SOFTWARE only on the DEVICE.
NOT FAULT TOLERANT. THE SOFTWARE IS NOT FAULT TOLERANT. LEICA
GEOSYSTEMS HAS INDEPENDENTLY DETERMINED HOW TO USE THE SOFT-
WARE IN THE DEVICE, AND MS HAS RELIED UPON LEICA GEOSYSTEMS TO
CONDUCT SUFFICIENT TESTING TO DETER-MINE THAT THE SOFTWARE IS
SUITABLE FOR SUCH USE.
NO WARRANTIES FOR THE SOFTWARE. THE SOFTWARE is provided "AS IS" and
with all faults. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFOR-
MANCE, ACCURACY, AND EFFORT (INCLUDING LACK OF NEGLICENCE) IS
WITH YOU. ALSO, THERE IS NO WARRANTY AGAINST INTERFERENCE WITH
YOUR ENJOYMENT OF THE SOFTWARE OR AGAINST INFRINGEMENT. IF YOU
HAVE RECEIVED ANY WARRANTIES REGARDING THE DEVICE OR THE
SOFTWARE, THOUSE WARRANTIES DO NOT ORIGINATE FROM, AND ARE
NOT BINDING ON, MS.
No Liability for Certain Damages. EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, MS SHALL
HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
USE OR PERFORMANCEOF THE SOFTWARE. THIS LIMITATION SHALL
APPLY EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE, IN NO
EVENT SHALL MS BE LIABILE FOR ANY AMOUNT IN EXCESS OF U.S. TWO
HUNDRED FIFTY DOLLARS (U.S.$250.00).
Limitations on Reverse Engineering, Decompilation, and Disassembly. You may not reverse
engineer, decompile, or disassemble the SOFTWARE, except and only to the extent that
such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation.
SOFTWARE TRANSFER ALLOWED BUT WITH RESTRICTIONS. You may per-
manently transfer rights under this EULA only as part of a permanent sale or transfer of the
Device, and only if the recipient agrees to this EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade, any
transfer must also include all prior versions of the SOFTWARE.
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS. You acknowledge that SOFTWARE is subject to U.S. export
jurisdiction. You agree to comply with all applicable international and national laws that
apply to the SOFTWARE, including the U.S. Export Administration Regulations, as well as
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 159

end-user, end-use and destination restrictions issued by U.S. and other governments. For
additional information see http://www.microsoft.com/exporting/.
Product specific terms

RESTRICTED FUNCTIONALITY. You are licensed to use the SOFTWARE to provide
only the limited functionality (specific tasks or processes) for which the DEVICE has been
designed and marketed by Leica Geosystems. This license specifically prohibits any other
use of the SOFTWARE programs or functions, or inclusion of additional software programs
or functions that do not directly support the limited functionality on the DEVICE.
a) Notwithstanding the foregoing, you may install or enable on the DEVICE systems utili-
ties, resource management or similar software (including without limitation anti-virus
software) (collectively, "Support Software") solely for the purpose of administration, per-
formance enhancement and/or preventive maintenance of the DEVICE. You acknowl-
edge and agree that with respect to any Support Software: (i) the Support Software may
not be compatible with the SOFTWARE installed on your DEVICE; (ii) no warranty is
provided by MS, Micro-soft Corporation or their affiliates for any Support Software that
you may install on your DEVICE; and (iii) neither MS, Microsoft Corporation nor their
affiliates is responsible for technical support of any Support Software you may install on
your DEVICE. Please contact Leica Geosystems if you have any questions regarding any
Support Software that you are considering installing on your DEVICE.
b)The DEVICE may use terminal services protocols (such as Remote Desktop Protocol,
Remote Assistance or Independent Computer Architecture) to connect or access Applica-
tions (as defined below) running on a server; however, these Applications may not run
locally on the DEVICE. For purposes of this provision, "Applications" mean software
that provides any of the following functionality: consumer or business tasks or processes
performed by a computer or computing device, including email, word processing, spread-
sheets, database, scheduling, or personal finance.
DEVICE CONNECTIONS. The SOFTWARE may not be used by more than two (2) pro-
cessors at any one time on the DEVICE. You may permit a maximum of ten (10) computers
or other electronic devices to connect via Server Message Block (SMB) to the DEVICE to
utilize one or more of the following services of the SOFTWARE: (a) file services, print ser-
vices, (b) Internet information services and/or (c) remote access (including connection shar-
ing). The ten connection maximum includes any indirect connections made through
"multiplexing" or other software or hardware which pools or aggregates connections. This
ten connection maximum does not apply to other uses of the SOFTWARE. Unlimited simul-
taneous inbound connections are permitted via TCP/IP.
CLIENT ACCESS LICENSES. If you use the DEVICE to access or utilize the services or
functionality of Microsoft Windows Server products (such as Microsoft Windows Server
2003), or use the DEVICE to permit workstation or computing devices to access or utilize
the services or functionality of Microsoft Windows Server products, you may be required to
obtain a Client Access License for the DEVICE and/or each such workstation or computing
device. Please refer to the end user license agreement for your Microsoft Windows Server
product for additional information.
REMOTE DESKTOP FEATURES/NETMEETING/REMOTE ASSISTANCE. The
SOFTWARE may contain NetMeeting, Remote Assistance, and Remote Desktop technolo-
gies that enable the SOFTWARE or other applications installed on the DEVICE to be used
remotely between two or more computing devices, even if the SOFTWARE or application is
installed on only one DEVICE. You may use NetMeeting, Remote Assistance, and Remote
Desktop with all Microsoft products; provided however, use of these technologies with cer-
160 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

tain Microsoft products may require an additional license. For both Microsoft products and
non-Microsoft products, you should consult the license agreement accompanying the appli-
cable product or contact the applicable licensor to determine whether use of NetMeeting,
Remote Assistance, or Remote Desktop is permitted without an additional license.
REMOTE BOOT FEATURE. Your DEVICE may be enabled with a Remote Boot feature
which includes the Remote Boot Installation Service tool. You may (i) use the Remote Boot
Installation Service tool to install one (1) copy of the SOFTWARE onto your server solely
for the purpose of deploying the SOFTWARE to one or more DEVICEs on which you are
licensed to run the SOFTWARE (i.e. DEVICEs to which the appropriate Certificate of
Authenticity is affixed) ); (ii) download the SOFTWARE over your internal network only
onto such licensed DEVICEs; and (iii) use the Remote Boot Installation Service only for
deployment of the SOFTWARE to licensed DEVICEs as part of the Remote Boot process.
Please refer to the DEVICE documentation, if provided with your DEVICE, or contact
Leica Geosystems for additional information.
AUTOMATIC INTERNET-BASED SERVICES. The SOFTWARE features described
below are enabled by default to connect via the Internet to Microsoft computer systems
automatically, without separate notice to you. You consent to the operation of these features,
unless you choose to switch them off or not use them. Microsoft does not use these features
to collect any information that will be used to identify you or contact you. For more infor-
mation about these features, please see the privacy statement at http://go.microsoft.com/
fwlink/?LinkId=25243
Web Content Features. Under the SOFTWARE's default configuration, if you are con-
nected to the Internet, several features of the SOFTWARE are enabled by default to retrieve
content from Microsoft computer systems and display it to you. When you activate such a
feature, it uses standard Internet protocols, which transmit the type of operating system,
browser and language code of your DEVICE to the Microsoft computer system so that the
content can be viewed properly from your DEVICE. These features only operate when you
activate them, and you may choose to switch them off or not use them. Examples of these
features include Windows Catalog, Search Assistant, and the Headlines and Search features
of Help and Support Center.
Digital Certificates. The SOFTWARE uses digital certificates based on the x.509 standard.
These digital certificates confirm the identity of Internet users sending x.509 standard
encrypted information. The SOFTWARE retrieves certificates and updates certificate revo-
cation lists. These security features operate only when you use the Internet.
Auto Root Update. The Auto Root Update feature updates the list of trusted certificate
authorities. You can switch off the Auto Root Update feature.
Windows Media Player. Some features of Windows Media Player automatically contact
Microsoft computer systems if you use Windows Media Player or specific features of it: fea-
tures that (A) check for new codes if your DEVICE does not have the correct ones for con-
tent you attempt to play (this feature may be switched off), and (B) check for new versions
of Windows Media Player (this feature will operate only when you are using Windows
Media Player).
Windows Media Digital Rights Management. Content providers are using the digital
rights management technology for Windows Media contained in this SOFTWARE ("WM-
DRM") to protect the integrity of their content ("Secure Content") so that their intellectual
property, including copyright, in such content is not misappropriated. Portions of this
SOFTWARE and third party applications such as media players use WM-DRM to play
Secure Content ("WM-DRM Software"). If the WM-DRM Software's security has been
compromised, owners of Secure Content ("Secure Content Owners") may request that
Microsoft revoke the WM-DRM Software's right to copy, display and/or play Secure Con-
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 161

tent. Revocation does not alter the WM-DRM Software's ability to play unprotected content.
A list of revoked WM-DRM Software is sent to your DEVICE when-ever you download a
license for Secure Content from the Internet. Microsoft may, in conjunction with such
license, also download revocation lists onto your DEVICE on behalf of Secure Content
Owners. Secure Content Owners may also require you to upgrade some of the WM-DRM
components in this SOFTWARE ("WMDRM Upgrades") before accessing their content.
When you attempt to play such content, WM-DRM Software built by Microsoft will notify
you that a WM-DRM Upgrade is required and then ask for your consent before the WM-
DRM Upgrade is downloaded. WMDRM Soft-ware built by third parties may do the same.
If you decline the upgrade, you will not be able to access content that requires the WM-
DRM Upgrade; however, you will still be able to access unprotected content and Secure
Content that does not require the upgrade. WM-DRM features that access the Internet, such
as acquiring new licenses and/or performing a required WM-DRM Upgrade, can be
switched off. When these features are switched off, you will still be able to play Secure Con-
tent if you have a valid license for such content already stored on your DEVICE.
WINDOWS UPDATE AGENT (ALSO KNOWN AS SOFTWARE UPDATE SER-
VICES). If the SOFTWARE includes Windows Update Agent ("WUA") (also known as
Software Update Services) functionality that may enable your DEVICE to connect to and
access updates ("Windows Updates") from a server installed with the required server com-
ponent then the following conditions apply:
Without limiting any other disclaimer in this EULA, or any EULA accompanying a Win-
dows Update, you acknowledge and agree that no warranty is provided by MS, Microsoft
Corporation or their affiliates with respect to any Windows Update that you install or
attempt to install on your DEVICE;
In addition, you acknowledge and accept that (i) Windows Updates may not be necessary or
suitable for installation on or use with your DEVICE or the SOFTWARE, and (ii) if
installed or attempted to be installed on your DEVICE, Windows Updates may not function
on the DEVICE or may malfunction and/or cause harm to the DEVICE, to operators of the
DEVICE or to other persons or property. If you connect to a server that installs a Windows
Update, you agree that you assume all risk and liability with regard to any Windows Update
that you install or attempt to install on your DEVICE using functionality provided by SOFT-
WARE. You further agree that neither MS, Microsoft Corporation nor their affiliates have
any liability to you with respect to any Windows Update that you install or attempt to install
on your DEVICE; and
Leica Geosystems is solely responsible for providing technical support, if any, to you in
connection with your installation of Windows Updates installed on your DEVICE using
WUA functionality provided by the SOFTWARE. Please contact Leica Geosystems if you
have any questions regarding any Windows Update that you are considering installing on
your DEVICE or otherwise regarding the WUA functionality.
NOTICES REGARDING THE MPEG-4 VISUAL STANDARD. The SOFTWARE may
include MPEG-4 visual decoding technology. This technology is a format for data compres-
sion of video information. For this technology, MPEG LA, L.L.C. requires this notice:
"USE OF THIS PRODUCT IN ANY MANNER THAT COMPLIES WITH THE
MPEG-4 VISUAL STANDARD IS PROHIBITED, EXCEPT FOR USE
DIRECTLY RELATED TO (A) DATA OR INFORMATION (i) GENERATED BY
AND OBTAINED WITHOUT CHARGE FROM A CONSUMER NOT THEREBY
ENGAGED IN A BUSINESS ENTERPRISE, AND (ii) FOR PERSONAL USE
ONLY; AND (B) OTHER USES SPECIFICALLY AND SEPA-RATELY
LICENSED BY MPEG LA, L.L.C.
162 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

If you have questions regarding this notice, please contact MPEG LA, L.L.C., 250
Steele Street, Suite 300, Denver, Colorado 80206; Telephone 303 331.1880; FAX
303 331.1879; www.mpegla.com."
General terms
PRODUCT SUPPORT. Product support for the SOFTWARE is not provided by MS,
Micro-soft Corporation or their affiliates. For product support, please refer to Leica Geosys-
tems support number provided in the documentation for the DEVICE. Should you have any
questions concerning this EULA, or if you desire to contact Leica Geosystems for any other
reason, please refer to the address provided in the documentation for the DEVICE.
END USER PROOF OF LICENSE. If you acquired the SOFTWARE installed on the
DEVICE, or on a compact disc or other media, a genuine Microsoft "Proof of License"/Cer-
tificate of Authenticity label with a genuine copy of the SOFTWARE identifies a licensed
copy of the SOFTWARE. To be valid, the label must be affixed to the DEVICE, or appear
on Leica Geosystem's software packaging. If you receive the label separately other than
from the Leica Geosystems it is invalid. You should keep the label on the DEVICE or pack-
aging to prove that you are licensed to use the SOFTWARE. This End User License Agree-
ment ("EULA") is valid and grants the end-user rights ONLY if the SOFTWARE is genuine
and a genuine Certificate of Authenticity for the SOFTWARE is included. For more infor-
mation on identifying whether your SOFTWARE is genuine, please see http://www.micro-
soft.com/piracy/howtotell.
BACKUP COPY. You may make one (1) backup copy of the SOFTWARE. You may use
this backup copy solely for your archival purposes and to reinstall the SOFTWARE on the
DEVICE. Except as expressly provided in this EULA or by local law, you may not other-
wise make copies of the SOFTWARE, including the printed materials accompanying the
SOFT-WARE. You may not loan, rent, lend or otherwise transfer the backup copy to another
user.
RESTRICTED USE. The SOFTWARE is not designed or intended for use or resale in haz-
ardous environments requiring fail-safe performance, such as in the operation of nuclear
facilities, aircraft navigation or communication systems, air traffic control, or other devices
or systems in which a malfunction of the SOFTWARE would result in fore-seeable risk of
injury or death to the operator of the device or system, or to others.
NO RENTAL/COMMERCIAL HOSTING. You may not rent, lease, lend or provide com-
mercial hosting services with the SOFTWARE to others.
SEPARATION OF COMPONENTS. The SOFTWARE is licensed as a single product. Its
component parts may not be separated for use on more than one device computer.
CONSENT TO USE OF DATA. You agree that MS, Microsoft Corporation and their affil-
iates may collect and use technical information gathered in any manner as part of product
support services related to the SOFTWARE. MS, Microsoft Corporation and their affiliates
may use this information solely to improve their products or to provide customized services
or technologies to you. MS, Microsoft Corporation and their affiliates may disclose this
information to others, but not in a form that personally identifies you.
INTERNET GAMING/UPDATE FEATURES. If the SOFTWARE provides, and you
choose to utilize, the Internet gaming or update features within the SOFTWARE, it is neces-
sary to use certain computer system, hardware, and software information to implement the
features. By using these features, you explicitly authorize MS, Microsoft Corporation, their
affiliates and/or their designated agent to use this information solely to improve their prod-
ucts or to provide customized services or technologies to you. MS, Microsoft Corporation or
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 163

their affiliates may disclose this information to others, but not in a form that personally iden-
tifies you.
TRADEMARKS. This EULA does not grant you any rights in connection with any trade-
marks or service marks of Leica Geosystems, MS Microsoft Corporation or their affiliates
and suppliers.
LINKS TO THIRD PARTY SITES. You may link to third party sites through the use of
the SOFTWARE. The third party sites are not under the control of MS, Microsoft Corpora-
tion or their affiliates. Neither MS, Microsoft Corporation nor their affiliates is responsible
for contents of any third party sites, any links contained in third party sites, or any changes
or updates to third party sites, or any changes or updates to third party sites. Neither MS,
Microsoft Corporation nor their affiliates is responsible for webcasting or any other form of
transmission received from any third party sites. MS, Microsoft Corporation or their affili-
ates are providing these links to third party sites to you only as a convenience, and the inclu-
sion of any link does not imply an endorsement by MS, Microsoft Corporation or their
affiliates of the third party site.
ADDITIONAL SOFTWARE/SERVICES. This EULA applies to updates, supplements,
add on components, product support services, or Internet-based services components ("Sup-
ple-mental Components"), of the SOFTWARE that you may obtain from Leica Geosystems,
MS, Microsoft Corporation or their affiliates after the date you obtain your initial copy of
the SOFTWARE, unless you accept updated terms or another agreement governs. If other
terms are not provided along with such Supplemental Components and the Supplemental
Components are provided to you by MS, Microsoft Corporation or their affiliates then you
will be licensed by such entity under the same terms and conditions of this EULA, except
that (i) MS, Microsoft Corporation or their affiliates providing the Supplemental Compo-
nents will be the licensor with respect to such Supplemental Components in lieu of the
"COMPANY" for the purposes of the EULA, and (ii) TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PER-
MITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE SUPPLEMENTAL COMPONENTS AND ANY
(IF ANY) SUPPORT SERVICES RELATED TO THE SUPPLEMENTAL COMPONENTS
ARE PROVIDED AS IS AND WITH ALL FAULTS. ALL OTHER DISCLAIMERS, LIM-
ITATION OF DAMAGES, AND SPECIAL PROVI-SIONS PROVIDED HEREIN AND/
OR OTHERWISE WITH THE SOFTWARE SHALL APPLY TO SUCH SUPPLEMEN-
TAL COMPONENTS. MS, Microsoft Corporation or their affiliates reserve the right to dis-
continue any Internet-based services provided to you or made available to you through the
use of the SOFTWARE.
RECOVERY MEDIA. If SOFTWARE is provided by Leica Geosystems on separate
media and labeled "Recovery Media" you may use the Recovery Media solely to restore or
rein-stall the SOFTWARE originally installed on the DEVICE.
TERMINATION. Without prejudice to any other rights, Leica Geosystems or MS may ter-
minate this EULA if you fail to comply with the terms and conditions of this EULA. In such
event, you must destroy all copies of the SOFTWARE and all of its component parts.
NOTICE REGARDING SECURITY. To help protect against breaches of security and
malicious software, periodically back up your data and system information, use security fea-
tures such as firewalls, and install and use security updates.
164 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Technical Reference Manual


Volume 2 Leica RCD30 Technical Reference Manual
166 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Leica RCD30 Technical Reference Manual Leica RCD30 Documentation Volume - 2
Chapter 1 About this Technical Reference Manual
Version 4.01-61 Oct / 19 / 2012 167

Chapter 1 About this Technical Reference Manual
Scope of document
This Technical Reference Manual contains detailed information about all components of the
Leica RCD30 system.
In particular, this Technical Reference Manual describes:

Technical concepts
Components
Advanced operation
Advanced User Service and Maintenance
Important: Please be aware that, for a complete understanding of the functionality and
operation of the system, it is necessary to participate in a product training and maintenance
course.
Note: To use the product in a permitted manner, please refer to the detailed safety directions in
the User Manual.
General
See section "Product identification" in Volume 1, Chapter 1 on Page 2.
Abbreviations
See section "Abbreviations" in Volume 1, Chapter 1 on Page 3.
Meaning of symbols
See section "Meaning of symbols" in Volume 1, Chapter 1 on Page 5.

Documents Other volumes of Leica RCD30 Documentation

See section "Where to get assistance and training" in Volume 1, Chapter 1 on Page 6.
168 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Chapter 2 Introduction to Leica RCD30
Version 4.01-61 Oct / 19 / 2012 169

Resolution - interpretation - identification

When the human eye tries to identify an object on an image or a screen it is to a great extent the
number of pixels that the object is represented by, which define what information or objects the
human brain can extract.
Image interpreters have more or less agreed on the following three stages:
1. Detection - discover the existence of an object
Size of detectable object = GSD x 1
As soon an object contains one pixel which is different from the surrounding pixels you can
detect it.
2. Recognition - identify an object within a group type
Size of recognizable objects = GSD x 3
When an object covers 3 GSD x 3 GSD you can identify it in a group of objects
3. Identification -identify an object within a precise object type
Size of identifiable object = GSD x 21
As soon as an object covers 21 GSD x 21 GSD you can identify an object type.
Table 51. Resolution examples
GSD 12.8 m 6.4 m 3.2 m 1.8 m
GSD 80 cm 40 cm - 1 1/4 ft. 20cm - 2/3 ft. 10 cm - 1/3 ft.
The resolution examples in Table 51 are based upon the high resolution image (10 cm) and were
created from it by re-sampling an extract.
170 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Transition from film based to digital systems
Terminology
Table 52. Terminology Explanation
Airborne digital camera Leica RCD30 Film aerial camera RC30
Central Perspective Central Perspective
Terminology, such as focal length and its properties, are the same in the Leica RCD30 airborne
digital sensor and the RC30 analog aerial camera. Other terms are derived differently. In other
instances there are different words or terms used to represent items of a similar nature.
Ground Sampling Distance / Photo Scale

Leica RCD30 - direct digital work flow. The term Ground Sample Distance (GSD) is
used. For a desired map accuracy a certain GSD is needed. The GSD results from sensor
altitude above ground, lens focal length and physical pixel size.
RC30 film based work flow. The term Photo Scale or Image Scale is used. For a
desired map accuracy a certain photo scale is needed. Photo scale results of altitude above
ground and the focal length of the lens.
Examples
Leica RCD30
Ground Sampling Distance
Analog aerial camera

Photo Scale
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 171

Important: For direct digital image acquisition the term Photo Scaleshould never be taken as
a figure to characterize the image, the image quality or the sensorss application range. The
photo scale is a well known figure in the traditional film workflow. But this figure is misleading
in the direct digital workflow because it does not take into account the resolution (pixel size or
the dimensions) of the CCD. Characterizing direct digital images by the term Photo Scale would
be a similar mistake to characterizing scanned film photographs without indicating the Scan
Resolution.
Table 53. Average GSD for various map scales
Average GSD Map Scale Map standard Comparable film photographs
with x-y contour photo scale pixel size on

Leica RCD30 accuracy interval ground of
RMSE scanned film
3.5 - 7 cm 1 : 500 0.125 m 0.25 m 1 : 3,000 to 1 : 5,500 2.5 - 5 cm
7 - 11 cm 1 : 1000 0.25 m 0.5 m 1 : 5,000 to 1 : 8,000 5 - 7.5 cm
11 - 15 cm 1 : 1,500 0.4 m 0.75 m 1 : 6,500 to 1 :10,000 7.5 - 10 cm
15 - 21 cm 1 : 2,000 0.5 m 1m 1 : 8,000 to 1 : 11,000 10 - 15 cm
18 - 25 cm 1 : 2,500 0.60 m 1.25 m 1 : 8,500 to 1 : 13,000 12.5 - 17.5 cm
21 - 35 cm 1 : 5,000 1.25 m 2.5 m 1 : 12,000 to 1 : 18,000 15 - 25 cm
28 - 42 cm 1 : 10,000 2.50 m 5m 1 : 17,000 to 1 : 27,000 20 - 30 cm
35 - 50 cm 1 : 20,000 5m 10 m 1 : 25,000 to 1 : 35,000 25 - 35 cm
35 - 57 cm 1 : 25,000 6.25 m 12.5 m 1 : 28,000 to 1 : 42,000 25 - 40 cm
35 - 70 cm 1 : 50,000 12.5 m 20 m 1 : 40,000 to 1 : 60,000 25 - 50 cm
35 - 90 cm 1 : 100,000 25 m 50 m 1 : 60,000 to 1 : 90,000 25 - 50 cm
172 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Table 54. Irrelevance of photo scale for direct digital images
Equal GSD at different image scales - even when the CCD pixel size is different
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 173

Introduction to GNSS/IMU systems
General
GNSS/IMU integrated systems have been widely used in many high accuracy surveying and
mapping applications in airborne, land and marine environments. A GNSS/IMU system gener-
ally consists of a GNSS receiver, an Inertial Measurement Unit (IMU) and associated electronics
and software for system control, computation and user interface. In the case of the Leica RCD30
the GNSS/IMU system is fully embedded into the Hardware and Software. The minimal user
interactions are conducted by using the Leica FCMS.
An IMU usually consists of a triad of accelerometers, a triad of gyros, the analog electronics, A/
D converter and digital electronics for calibration, temperature compensation as well as data
interface. Three accelerometers measure 3D accelerations in the IMU body axes, while three
gyros measure 3D rotations of IMU body axes relative to the inertial frame. IMU measurements
can be made at a very high data rate, from 100Hz to 1000Hz. In surveying and mapping applica-
tions, these measurements are usually output at 100Hz to 500Hz.
GNSS/IMU systems have been used since a long time with airborne film cameras such as Leicas
RC30. Today GNSS/IMU systems have become a standard component for all advanced airborne
sensors to provide direct georeferencing or to assist in the aerotriangulation process. A GNSS/
IMU system is also required in an airborne LIDAR systems to provide the georeference informa-
tion for the laser scanner so that the ground three-dimensional position for each laser pulse can
be calculated from the scan angle and range measured by the scanner.
The basic principle of IMU navigation is the application of Newtons law of motion. Gyro mea-
surements are used to calculate the attitude of the IMU body axes relative to local geographic
frame (local north, east and up axes). This attitude is then used to transform the acceleration in
the IMU body axes to the local frame. The velocity change can be calculated by performing one
integration on the acceleration, while position change can be calculated by performing another
integration on the velocity change. Therefore the position, velocity and attitude can be computed
along the time series from a known initial position and velocity.
A GNSS/IMU integrated system can combine the advantages of individual GNSS or IMU sys-
tems while at the same time overcome the shortcomings of the individual systems. An IMU has
the advantages of providing a very accurate short term solution at a very high data rate and it is a
completely self-contained system. But an IMU navigation solution has the shortcoming of drift-
ing over long term because of the sensor errors. While GNSS technology can provide uniform
high accuracy position and velocity usually at a rate up to 20Hz, it has several shortcomings
including the dependency on the line-of-sight from receiver antenna to GNSS satellites which
makes it susceptible of signal obstruction especially in urban environment. GNSS does not pro-
vide accurate attitude information either, and usually the data rate is not high enough for the air-
borne applications. The integration of two technologies provides a homogenous highly accurate
position, velocity and attitude solution at a high data rate. The GNSS raw measurements or com-
puted position and velocity are used to calibrate the IMU sensor error using a Kalman filter. The
IMU short term solution can be used to bridge GNSS outages especially in urban environment,
under heavy canopy, underground as well as underwater.
A Kalman filter is usually utilized to blend the GNSS and IMU data together to produce an opti-
mal solution from a GNSS/IMU integrated system. It consists of two main steps: Kalman predic-
tion and Kalman update. Kalman prediction predicts the system state and its covariance for the
next epoch based on the information from current epoch using a system dynamic error model;
Kalman update corrects the errors in the predicted state vector and its covariance based on the
174 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

observation model using the measurements as illustrated in the following figure. In a GNSS/IMU
system, the state vector usually consists of the following elements: position error, velocity error,
attitude error, accelerometer and gyro biases, scale factor error and non-orthogonality.
Figure 41: Kalman filtering process
There are several ways to integrate GNSS/IMU, namely loosely coupled, tightly coupled and
deeply-coupled. Illustrations to the different integrations are given in Figure 42 on Page 175,
Figure 43 on Page 176 and in Figure 44 on Page 176
The GNSS/IMU system embedded into the Leica RCD30 provides a deeply-coupled real-time
solution where the real-time GNSS/IMU integrated solution is fed back to the GNSS receiver
board tracking loop. The GNSS/IMU post-processing software Leica IPAS TC uses tightly cou-
pled algorithms where the raw GNSS pseudorange and carrier phase measurements are used in
the Kalman filter. The combination of the deeply coupled real-time integration and tightly cou-
pled post-processing enables flights with tighter turns. During these turns, GNSS signal will be
reacquired faster after the turn. And if there are epochs where fewer than four satellites are
observed, the measurements from those satellites will still be used in the post-processing.
Figure 42: Loosely coupled GNSS/IMU integration
In this integration mode, GNSS measurements are processed in a separate Kalman filter. GNSS
position and velocity are produced first before they are fed into the GNSS/IMU integration Kal-
man filter. This mode is simpler to implement and in general more reliable when there are
enough GNSS satellites observed.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 175

A tightly coupled integration is illustrated in Figure 43 on Page 176.
Figure 43: Tightly coupled GNSS/IMU integration
In the tightly coupled mode, GNSS raw measurements are fed into the integration filter directly.
This mode will allow GNSS measurements still to be used when there are fewer than four satel-
lites observed. While in the loosely coupled mode, these measurements will not be able to be fed
into the integration filter.
Figure 44: Deeply coupled GNSS/IMU integration
A deeply coupled integration mode will feed the IMU derived velocity into the tracking loop of a
GNSS receiver to allow it to track weaker signal and allow it to reacquire signal much faster.
This is especially useful in the urban environment when a GNSS satellite is lost and reacquired
very frequently.
A complete GNSS/IMU system consists of various hardware and software components. The
hardware is fully embedded into the Leica RCD30 system and the IMU is rigidly mounted to the
sensor.
176 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

GNSS-IMU for trajectory and attitude - the principle

GNSS and IMU data are collected during the image acquisition and written to the Memory of the
Leica RCD30 system. These two data streams must be post-processed along with optional GNSS
base station data, to produce a precise position and attitude stream.
The GNSS sensor generates an absolute position at 2Hz.
The IMU sensor generates incremental velocity and angular change at up to 500 Hz.
(depending on the IMU type)
Trajectory given by IMU is updated with GNSS measurements.
The post-processed trajectory is then interpolated to generate position & orientation at the
rate required by the mapping sensor.
Figure 45: Principle of GNSS-IMU data post-processing
GNSS-IMU post-processing
The GNSS data is recorded referenced to the World Geodetic System of 1984 (WGS 84). This
gives the position of the GNSS antenna. The Leica RCD30 system records instantaneous changes
in position and attitude of the sensor system. The IMU is rigidly attached to the sensor system.
The high frequency readout of the IMU is used to verify the GNSS data and to provide instanta-
neous positioning of the sensor system between GNSS recordings. The IMU system generates
relative position and attitude information. Thus, it provides very precise position and attitude
only over short periods of time. As time increases, the position and attitude obtained from the
IMU drift away from the true position and attitude. This attitude data must be corrected and
transformed to real world coordinates by using the GNSS data. Thus, the GNSS data is also used
to correct the bias and drift of the IMU system. The IMU records attitude referenced to the "local
vertical" (plumb line direction). Corrections can be applied for deflection of the vertical direc-
tion, the alignment of the IMU coordinate system with the sensor coordinate system and the
GNSS antenna offset. Furthermore, image data can be additionally corrected during a triangula-
tion process.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 177

178 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Chapter 3 Description of System
Version 4.01-61 Oct / 19 / 2012 179

Workflow
180 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Leica RCD30 Airborne Digital Frame Camera

Digital camera systems are widely used in many high accuracy airborne survey and mapping
applications. Such systems generally consist of a rugged, stabilized lens connected to a digital
camera head, along with associated electronics and software for system control, image data pro-
cessing and storage, and user interface. The camera-lens system is typically provided with a fac-
tory-calibrated measurement of the Interior Orientation (also known as the Camera Model),
which describes such parameters as focal length (scale), alignment, and optical distortion.
Figure 46: Airborne sensing reference system with Leica RCD30
1 GNSS Satellites (not supplied)
4 GNSS ground reference station (not

supplied)
Figure 47: Overview fully integrated Leica RCD30 Camera System
1 Pod with CH61 or CH62 and IMU

3 CC32 Control Unit
5 OC50 for Pilot
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 181

Summary of design concept

The Leica RCD30 Series of 60 Megapixel medium format aerial cameras sets a new standard in
what can be expected from this type of digital frame cameras. A single camera head delivers co-
registered, direct-georeferenced multi-spectral RGBN imagery of 8956 x 6708 pixels at a pixel
size of 6 microns. Mechanical Forward Motion Compensation (FMC) along two axes provides
sharpest images and 50mm and a 80 mm ruggedized and thermal stabilized lens systems are
available. In-flight exchangeable mass memories are available with SSD and a capacity of
256GB, 512GB and 1TB. The Leica RCD30 series modular concept enables single and multi-
head standalone configurations as well as full integration to Leica ALS70 and other third party
sensors.
Leica Geosystems complete standalone aerial camera solution includes a GNSS/IMU system,
the Flight & Sensor Control Management System (FCMS) and the Leica PAV80 Gyro-stabilized
mount.
The operational heart of the Leica RCD30 is the Flight & Sensor Control Management System
(FCMS). All aspects of the Leica RCD30 operation are conducted using this software. The oper-
ator communicates with the software through the OC52 Operation Controller. Remote control is
made from the OC50.The system operates highly automated.
Leica FCMS features a graphical user interface, based on clear icons. On the OC52 the icons are
large buttons so that the touch screen interface is powerful, ergonomic and effective. A remote
device in the cockpit is provided for the pilot: OC50 for Pilot. Additionally guidance information
can be displayed by means of the Guidance Indicator GI40. The operator's task is eased by pre-
defined system configurations and quick navigation through the menu tree is easily possible. The
system is fully configurable to suit different users.
182 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Leica RCD30 - technical innovations

The Leica RCD30 product is a result of Leica Geosystems experience in manufacturing large for-
mat digital airborne sensors.
Mechanical Forward Motion Compensation (FMC) along two axes
Direct-georeferenced multi-spectral RGBN imagery
High resolution optics, perfectly adapted to CCD
High data throughput
Solid state technology mass memory
Leica FCMS software for highly automated operation
Automatic integration time control for perfect digital image quality
Graphical MMI for easy operation
Touch screen for unambiguous operation
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 183

Summary of components
Digital camera systems allow direct geo-referenced imaging when used with GNSS/IMU sys-
tems such as the NovAtel SPAN, which is an integrated part of the Leica RCD30 Camera Con-
troller CC32.
The basic principle of airborne survey imaging is to trigger the framing camera over a specific
exposure station or to trigger it at a rate such there are overlapping frames of at least 60% for-
ward overlap from one contiguous exposure station to the next. In either case, the camera system
outputs a Mid-Exposure Pulse event (MEP) that is captured by the GNSS/IMU system. In post-
processing, the MEP event is correlated with the Navigation data from the GNSS/IMU system,
and an Exterior Orientation is computed for each frame of digital image data.
The Leica RCD30 system is a highly integrated digital camera system. It is shown in Figure 46
and Figure 47. It consists of the following main components
Leica RCD30 Digital Camera System with
- one up to maximal five Camera Heads with exchangeable lens
either or mixed CH62 (four band) / CH61 (RGB)
- CC32 Camera Controller (with integrated GNSS/IMU system)
or
- CC31 Camera Controller (without GNSS/IMU system)
Leica PAV80 Gyro-stabilized Mount with corresponding adapter ring, protection cover and
protection elements, depends on mount type
User Interface Hardware for Operator and Pilot:
- OC52 or OC50 operation controller for the Operator
- OC50 and/or GI40 for the Pilot
Pod to mount Camera heads and IMU
Various cables
Leica RCD30 Standard accessories
Shipping Cases
Software:
- Leica FPES, Flight Planning & Flight Evaluation Software
- Leica FCMS, Flight & Sensor Control Software for sensor operation and flight guidance
Ground Processing Software Suite with the modules:
- Leica FramePro software for data download, quality control, and generation of radiometric
compensated distortion free images
- Leica IPAS TC for GNSS/IMU data processing
- Leica IPAS CO+ for Camera Orientation
184 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Integration Time (IT) control
Integration time can be controlled by

Automatic operation
Manual operation
The control mode is defined in each configuration set. All pre-configured configuration sets have
the IT control mode set to Automatic. The control mode becomes valid if a configuration set is
loaded or if the loaded configuration is edited. The user can change the IT control mode any
time. If data recording is ON the new mode will become active after data recording was stopped.
Automatic operation - system sets the IT

How to operate see section "Automatic integration time control" in Volume 1, Chapter 4 on Page
87.
Principle of control loop

The IT is set by the system in an adjustment loop.
Before a flight line (or during approach, any time and started by the user) Leica FCMS releases a
series of test exposures of the Leica RCD30 system. After each test exposure the system checks
the image data histograms provided by the CCD and adjusts the settings for the next test expo-
sure, if required.
Along the line the adjustment loop continuously runs and the exposure of each photograph is
checked. The user can configure weather the IT is fix for all images of the line or the IT is
adjusted for the next exposure along the line, if required due to terrain reflection variation.
Store
If [Store] is confirmed before image data recording is started, the auto IT data is frozen and will
be used for the next lines as long as store-mode is set. The adjustment loop still runs in the back-
ground but without impact to the IT setting.
If [Store] is confirmed during image data recording and the system is configured to release all
images along the line with the same IT, the current setting of the IT for image data recording
remains as it is. But the actual IT resulting from the control loop is stored to be used for the next
lines as long as store-mode is set.
Manual operation - user sets the IT

The user set in the configuration the desired diaphragm and the shutter speed
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 185

Leica RCD30 calibration
Leica RCD30 calibration intervals

See also section "Calibration" in Volume 1, Chapter 5 on Page 121.
Technical and calibration check

It is recommended to send in the whole Leica RCD30 system every 2 years for a preemptive
technical and calibration check at a Leica Geosystems Aerial Sensor Service Center.
Verification of geometrical calibration by the user
Validity of the Calibration Certificate

The Calibration Certificate and all steps of the calibration process are signed by inspectors of the
Calibration Department of Leica Geosystems, attesting the correctness of the results at the time
of calibration.
Validity of the Calibration Certificate is defined by the contractor, who bases the validity period
on national or international guidelines or rules. In some countries local or national authorities
define rules for validity and expiry date of a Calibration Certificate.
Example of Calibration Certificate

On the following pages an example of an Leica RCD30 Calibration Certificate is shown.
The description of the calibration process as given in this section is added as an appendix to each
calibration certificate. The calibration data is stored in a file delivered on a CD. Calibration cer-
tificate and calibration file both have the same unique ID. For a naming example see Figure 48
on Page 187, paragraph Certificate and calibration data ID located in the lover section of the
cover sheet.
186 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Figure 48: Example of Leica RCD30 calibration certificate, cover sheet
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 187

Figure 49: Example of Leica RCD30 calibration certificate, page 2
188 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 189

190 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 191

192 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Leica RCD30 calibration block layout

The calibration block consists of four bi-directionally flown strips, forming crosses at two flight
levels. This means, at each of the two flight levels, the lines W-E, E-W, N-S, S-N have to be
flown. The line centres of all the flight lines should closely match and the lines should just be
long enough to make sure that the image intersection square is present in all images.
Although the calibration can be done without control points, ground control will provide addi-
tional redundancy, which allows a better measure for the quality of the calibration. That's why;
the intersection square should contain a number of good control points, ideally signalized ones.
There should be pairs of control points in each corner of the intersection square.
Table 55. Leica RCD30 calibration flight parameters

NAG-D 50 mm NAG-D 80 mm
Height over ground 1000 m 1500 m 1600 m 2400 m
Ground pixel size 12 cm 18 cm 12 cm 18 cm
Drawing 1: Calibration cross layout, plan view
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 193

Drawing 2: Calibration cross layout - oblique view
194 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Chapter 4 Description of Components
Version 4.01-61 Oct / 19 / 2012 195

Leica RCD30 Camera Heads
CH61 Camera Head

60 Megapixel CCD Delivers co-registered, direct-geore-
ferenced RGB imagery of 8956 x 6708 pixels at a pixel
size of 6 microns. Mechanical Forward Motion Com-
pensation (FMC) along two axes provides sharpest
images. Bayonet for user exchangeable lenses
The picture shows the CH61, connector side, with the 80

mm lens.
CH62 Camera Head

60 Megapixel CCD Delivers co-registered, direct-geore-
ferenced multi-spectral RGBN imagery of 8956 x 6708
pixels at a pixel size of 6 microns. Mechanical Forward
Motion Compensation (FMC) along two axes provides
sharpest images. Bayonet for user exchange bel lenses.
The picture shows the CH62, front side, with the 80 mm

lens.
Lenses
Leica NAG-D 50mm and Leica NAT-D 80 mm. Both
lenses are ruggedized and thermal stabilized and have a
mechanical user exchangeable central shutter. No fac-
tory calibration is required after shutter replacement.
NAT-D 80 mm: left side in picture
NAG-D 50 mm: right side in picture.
196 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Standalone Pods
Mounting pod for installation of Camera Head with
IMU into Leica PAV80 Gyro-stabilized mount.
Inserts for mounting Single or Dual Camera Heads are

available.
Oblique Trio and Oblique Penta Pods are also available

for mounting 3 or 5 Camera Heads respectively.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 197

Leica PAV80
The Leica PAV80 Gyro-stabilized Sensor Mount serves
the purpose of connecting the Leica RCD30 with the air-
craft such that the Leica RCD30 is isolated from disturb-
ing aircraft movements (shifts, vibrations and rotations).
The Leica PAV80 is a new generation sensor mount con-
ceived not only to absorb aircraft vibrations passively
through a damper system but also to reduce low fre-
quency angular oscillations. The latter is realized by
means of an electronic control system combined with
gyro sensors and high torque motors controlled by a
intelligent high-speed bifurcated control loop.
Main features of Leica PAV80

Nadir accuracy alignment to GNSS-IMU reference
Drift alignment according to GNSS-IMU reference
Improvement of residual angular velocity
Gimbal data for post-processing
Extended stabilization range
Intelligent high-speed bifurcated control loop
For more information about the Leica PAV80 please refer to the Leica PAV80 documentation:
Leica PAV80 User Manual
Leica PAV38 Documentation including Technical Reference Manual
This documents are available separately and not part of this Leica RCD30 documentation.
Cables to Leica PAV80

The cable on the right connects the Leica PAV80 to the
power out connector on the CU3x.
198 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Leica RCD30 Camera Controller
CH32 Camera Controller

The CC32 Camera Controller of the Leica RCD30 sys-
tem provides a large variety of interfaces. See section
"Interface Control Document (ICD)" in Volume 2,
Chapter 11 on Page 311. The CC31 has also two slots
for Mass Memories.
The CC32 has a GNSS/IMU system embedded. There-
fore, the CC32 is for fully integrated Leica RCD30 sys-
tems.
The picture shows the CC31/CC32 from front side
CH31Camera Controller
The CC31 Camera Controller of the Leica RCD30 sys-
tem provides a large variety of interfaces. See section
"Interface Control Document (ICD)" in Volume 2,
Chapter 11 on Page 311. The CC31 has also two slots
for Mass Memories.
The CC31 has no GNSS/IMU system embedded. There-
fore, the CC31 is for setups with external or 3rd party
GNSS/IMU systems.
The picture shows the CC31 from back side.
Main features of the CC31/CC32

Link to up to five CH61/CH62
Embedded NovAtel SPAN Inertial Positioning & Attitude System (GNSS-IMU) with inte-
grated GPS-GLONASS receiver (CC32 only)
High data throughput to MM30
Embedded Microsoft Windows operating system
Real-time extensions
Cables to CC3x
This cable is used to connect the CC3x to the power
source of the aircraft. The cable is delivered with an
open end on the aircraft power side.
Only qualified and authorized technicians are allowed to
install plugs to connect to aircraft power.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 199

Mass Memory
The MM30 Mass Memories, removable units with high
performance flash technology memory providing various
storage capacity. See section "Mass Memory" in Volume
1, Chapter 7 on Page 138. The storage capacity is suffi-
cient for several hours of flight.The MM30 can be
exchanged in-flight. Enormous volumes of image data
are routed directly to the MM30s and metadata is
recorded there. The result is that all necessary data from
the flight mission reside on the MM30s, which can be
easily removed after landing and connected to a worksta-
tion for ground processing.
The MM30 with shock resistant flash disk withstand the varying pressures and vibrations in the
airborne environment.
Main features of MM30:
Flash disk array, capacity see section "Mass Memory" in Volume 1, Chapter 7 on Page 138
Exchangeable between flight lines
Portable, weight see section "Devices and parts" in Volume 1, Chapter 7 on Page 146
Shock and pressure resistant
200 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

GNSS-IMU system NovAtel SPAN

The Inertial Position & Attitude System NovAtel SPAN is fully embedded into the CC32 and is
an integrated part of the Leica RCD30 system. The IMU is mounted inside the pod.
The Inertial Position and Attitude System (GNSS-IMU) is designed to offer high performance,
reflecting the primary need for a high frequency of measurements (200 to 500 Hz, depending on
the IMU type). The inertial measurement unit itself is rigidly mounted such that there is no flex-
ing or variability in its relationship to the CH61 or CH62. The system also includes a GNSS sys-
tem with GPS and GLONASS receiver.
The positional information from the GNSS and the attitude information from the IMU are com-
bined to provide estimates of the aircraft's trajectory.
GNSS-IMU for Leica RCD30 the principle

GNSS and IMU data are collected during the image acquisition phase and written to the Mass
Memory inserted into the CC32. These two data streams must be post-processed, along with
optional GNSS base station data, to produce precise position and attitude data for every frame
data.
Main Features of GNSS-IMU system

GNSS-IMU processor board stack with GPS/GLONASS receiver integrated into CC32
Camera Controller
IMU integrated into Pod
High short-term IMU attitude accuracy, < 4" after linear correction
100 to 500 Hz IMU readout frequency, depends on IMU type
Specifications see section "GNSS/IMU system" in Volume 1, Chapter 7 on Page 136.
Use of GNSS-IMU data
In-flight
The Leica PAV80 accepts data from GNSS-IMU system real-time solution as input for Leica
PAV80 attitude control, in order to benefit from better data of higher accuracy attitude sensors of
IMU. The benefits for the Leica PAV80 are:
High nadir accuracy of Leica PAV80 due to alignment to GNSS-IMU reference
Automatic drift alignment of Leica PAV80 to GNSS-IMU reference
Low residual angular velocity of Leica PAV80
Gimbal data output from Leica PAV80 for post-processing
On the ground
GNSS and IMU data are collected during the flight. On the ground during post-processing of this
data the position and attitude information is computed. This information is required for georefer-
encing of Leica RCD30 images. See section "Introduction to GNSS/IMU systems" in Volume 2,
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 201

GNSS antenna and cables to GNSS-IMU

Airborne GPS - GLONASS antenna.
Only authorized technicians or personnel are allowed to
install a GNSS antenna on the fuselage of the aircraft.
The antenna cable connects the airborne GNSS antenna

to the antenna connector on the CC32. The GNSS-IMU
processor board is installed inside the CC32 Camera
Controller.
202 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

User Interface Hardware
OC52 - Operation controller

The OC52 is the user interface for the operator. It is a
rugged single board computer with a high contrast LCD
color touch screen. The screen size is 12.1" / 31 cm and
the resolution is 1024 x 768 pixels.Two OC52 can be
connected to have available an additional operator
interface.
The OC52 can be attached to the IS40. The OC52 is
connected to the CU3x in series with the OC50 for Pilot
Main features of the OC52

Compact interface to the Leica RCD30.
12.1 inch high contrast LCD color screen with 1024 x 768 pixels resolution.
Brightens and contrast adjustable to adapt to the illumination in the airplane.
Designed for use in passenger cabin.
Touch screen for easy operation in all flight conditions.
More than one OC52 can be connected in a chain to the Leica RCD30 system.
Cables to OC52
This cable connects OC52 to CU3x.
The red marked connector connects to the CCU3x.
The yellow marked connector connects to the OC52.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 203


The IS40 consists of a base and an extendable tube. The tube is
inserted into the base. A bolt locks the tube to the base. The tube
can be rotated and adjusted in height. All adjustable parts can be
safely blocked. To meet safety requirements the tube can be
separated easily. E.g. to store it in a safe place during take-off
and landing.
Four screws are used to mount the base to the aircraft floor. The
screw holes on the base are located at same positions as the
screw holes of the RC30 navigation sight mount PAS12 to allow
the use of previous installation modifications. The diameter of
the lower part of the tube is equal to the diameter of the RC30
navigation sight.
204 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

OC50 for Pilot

Note: Typically the OC50 is the pilot interface of the Leica RCD30. It also allows remote
control of the Leica RCD30.
The OC50 for Pilot is a remote interface device for the

Leica RCD30. The OC50 is a rugged single board
computer with a high contrast LCD color screen. The
screen size is 6.3 inch and the resolution is 1024 x 768
pixels. The OC50 is defined for use in the cockpit and
very compact such that it can be easily placed in the
cockpit. Hard keys are located below the icons displayed
on the screen to command Leica FCMS. This ensures
operation in all flight conditions.
Depending on the place of the OC50 in the cockpit an
anti-dazzle shield might be required to avoid reflection
on the OC50 screen. A number of anti-dazzle shields are
provided with the standard delivery. This shield is a low-
cost item (consumable) part. Cut it to adapt it for a
specific installation and the pilots requirements.
Main features of the OC50

Compact remote interface for remote control of the Leica RCD30.
6.3 inch high contrast LCD color screen with 1024 x 768 pixels resolution.
Brightens and contrast adjustable to adapt to the illumination in the cockpit.
Designed for use in passenger cabin or in the cockpit.
Hard keys to ensure operation in all flight conditions.
More than one OC50 can be connected in a chain to the Leica RCD30 system.
Can be used in parallel with GI40 (connection in a chain).
Cables to OC50
This cable connects OC50 to OC52.
The red marked connector connects to the OC52.
The yellow marked connector connects to the OC50.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 205


The GI40 provides guidance information to the pilot. It is
designed to be placed on the dashboard in the cockpit or
any other desired place. In the center part of the GI40 a
large LED array displays guidance information during
the approach to the line. It shows graphically the
deviation when flying along the line. Numeric displays
located on the left and right side show additional
information such as Line direction, Bearing, heading
correction, desired altitude and flying time from current
position to begin or to end of the line.
Main features of the GI40

Compact device
Provides graphic and numeric guidance information.
Automatic brightness adjustment to adapt to the illumination in the cockpit.
Defined for use in the cockpit.
Can be used in parallel with OC50 (connection in a chain).
Cables to GI40
This cable connects GI40 to the OC50 or the OC52.
The red marked connector connects either to the OC50 or
the OC52.
206 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Power connection accessories
Cables to CC3x
This cable is used to connect the CC3x to the power
source of the aircraft. The cable is delivered with an
open end on the aircraft power side.
Only qualified and authorized technicians are allowed to
install plugs to connect to aircraft power.
This cable is used for ground checks of the Leica RCD30

system. It connects the CC3x to the PS56 Power Supply.
The cable is also shown in section Ground Power Sup-

ply on Page 208.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 207

Ground Power Supply
PS56 Power Supply

The PS56 Power Supply is used to power-up the Leica
RCD30 system for test purposes from a wall AC current
outlet providing 110V/230V 50/60Hz.
The PS56 Power Supply has a main power switch and a

circuit breaker. DC power for the Leica RCD30 system
is provided on the output receptacle.
Cooling fans are integrated at the back end.
Cables to PS56
This cable is used to connect the CC3x to the PS56
Power Supply.
The cable is also shown in section Power connection

accessories on Page 207.
Input power cable. The photo on the left shows two

cables with different plug types. The required type
depends on the standard valid in a country for wall outlet
power receptacles.
208 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Accessories
DVD drive with USB connector

The DVD drive is used to upload Software and Firmware
to the OC52. Power to the DVD drive is provided
through the USB connection.
USB memory Stick

The USB memory stick is used to transfer data such as
flight plans, log-files, etc. between office and airborne
system.
The memory stick is not used to transfer data stored on
the Mass Memory MM30.
Leica RCD30 Standard tools and accessories

Part # 664260 - Chassis Ground Strap
This is a spare part.
It is the authorized aircraft installers task to prepare the
aircraft for chassis ground connection and to provide to
the users guidelines for the User Installation of the
Leica RCD30 system into a particular aircraft.
Screwdrivers and allen keys. Parts of article #

784801Leica RCD30 tool kit
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 209

Dust filter element for CC3x and CH6x input fans
These are spare parts. Instructions about replacement are

given in section section "Replacement of dust filters on
CC31/CC32" in Volume 2, Chapter 8 on Page 290section
"Replacement of dust filters on CH61/CH62" in Volume
Spare fuses and aricraft safety wire. Parts of article #

784801Leica RCD30 tool kit.
210 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Tools and accessories for OC50

Part # 752446 contains:
3 dazzle shields.
The dazzle shield is a low-cost item (consumable) part. It
has to be cut to adapt it for a specific installation and the
pilots requirements. Therefore a quantity of three is
standard delivery.
6 dust filters for OC50 input fans
These are spare parts. Instructions how to replace filters

are given in section "Replacement of dust filters on the
OC52/OC50" in Volume 2, Chapter 8 on Page 291.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 211

Cases
General
The cases for the Leica RCD30 are designed to protect all parts from damage during shipping. It
is also recommended to store the equipment in the cases. See section "Leica RCD30 storage and
shipping case" in Volume 1, Chapter 5 on Page 117 and section "Calibration" in Volume 1, Chap-
ter 5 on Page 121.
For dimensions, weight, packing list etc. section "Packing order" in Volume 1, Chapter 7 on Page
154 and section "Packing order" in Volume 1, Chapter 7 on Page 154.
Case types
Case with hinged lid.
The cases have:
Eyes designed to seal the shipping case (1)
Shock indicators outside (2)
212 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Data Download Components
MM30 Download Station

The download station is used to copy the image and
flight data from the MM30 to a post processing computer
with eSATA controller.
Two MM30 can be inserted and powered simultaneously
Instructions how to use are given in the Users Guide

delivered with the MM30 Download Station
eSATA controller card is required to connect the MM30 Download Station to a computer.
Article #790732, eSATA Controller card for Desktop PC
Article #785918, eSATA Controller card for Notebook
Instructions how to install the cards are given in the corresponding Users Guide delivered with
the cards.
Information how to install the drivers is also given in the Leica FramePro User Manual, Section
Appendix.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 213

Firmware and Software
General
Firmware and Software for the Leica RCD30 system is always released as a whole. It is identi-
fied by the Leica FCMS release number. It consists of the following components
Embedded version of Operating System
Firmware for all customized boards
Software Leica FCMS with various modules.
Operating System
The Operating System for the Leica RCD30 is an embedded version of Microsoft Windows. It is
specially configured for Leica RCD30. The operation system is hidden to the user to simplify the
operation of the Leica RCD30. The user operates the Leica RCD30 through Leica FCMS. See
section "Software Leica FCMS" in Volume 2, Chapter 4 on Page 214.
Firmware
The Leica RCD30 system comprises several customized boards and sub-components with firm-
ware. All firmware is part of a Leica FCMS release to ensure consitent system setup.
Software Leica FCMS

The operational heart of the Leica RCD30 is the Flight &
Sensor Control Management System (FCMS). All aspects
of the Leica RCD30 operation are conducted using this
software. The operator communicates with the software
through the OC52 Operator Controller. Remote control is
made from the OC50 or from a 2nd OC52.
Leica FCMS features a graphical user interface, based on clear icons. On the OC52 the icons are
large buttons so that the pressure sensitive touch screen interface is powerful, ergonomic and
effective. A remote device in the cockpit is provided for the pilot: OC50 for Pilot. Additionally
guidance information can be shown by means of the Guidance Indicator GI40. The operator's
task is eased by predefined system configurations and quick navigation through the menutree is
easily possible. The system is fully configurable to suit different users. For details section "Leica
FCMS - Configuration" in Volume 3, Chapter 4 on Page 397.
Main features of Leica FCMS
Easy to learn and get started quickly

Clear icons on large buttons
Integrated tutorial
Simulator Software to train operators and pilots on ground
214 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Simple operation of the sensor

Quick navigation within the menu tree
System fully configurable for different users
Optimized flight guidance

North-up view for project overview and to control the progress in flight execution
Nose-up view for optimized approach and turns
In-line and 3-D view for precise navigation along the line
Display of suggested flight path for approach and during turns
Highly automated sensor operation

Automatic Integration Time control
Automatic sensor release according to the flight plan
Monitors completeness of project for flight plan controlled photo flights
Remote control from multiple user interfaces

Operator and pilot can display different views
Locking ensures unambiguous operation
Single men operation from remote interface possible
System self test and self-supervising

Automatic System Hard- and Software checking during start-up
In-flight permanent self-supervising of Hardware components and Data
Automatic error detection which provides recovery options
Simple maintenance and troubleshooting

Automated Software and Firmware installation
Troubleshooting with suggested user actions to solve a problem
Perfect data interfaces in the work flow

Streamlined data interface from flight planning to flight evaluation
User log entries during the flight goes along with the data
Modules and licensing of Leica FCMS

Leica FCMS is a bundle of powerful modules. A Leica FCMS release consists not only of the
Software for the Flight & Sensor Control Management System. It comprises additionally the cus-
tomized operating system and a full set of Firmware required for the various electronic boards
which are located in the components of the sensors system as well as in the GNSS-IMU system.
See below in Figure 54.
The Software modules are licensed according to the customer's requirements. See below in Fig-
ure 54.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 215

Figure 54: Components and licensing of Leica FCMS.
216 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Office Software
Leica MissionPro - Flight Planning & Flight Evaluation Software

Leica MissionPro (Flight Planning & Flight Evaluation Software) makes survey flight projects
easier to manage. It provides optimized flight planning, flight evaluation for good quality control
at an early stage of the workflow and project management to considerably increases mission pro-
ductivity and to cut overall cost. Leica MissionPro fits perfectly into Leica Geosystems' seamless
workflow.
Post Processing Software
Leica FramePro
Leica FramePro software simplifies download and processing of Leica RCD30 images. It assists
during processing with Leica IPAS Pro, IPAS CO and IPAS ABS. The output are radiometric
adjusted, distortion free images.
Leica IPAS TC
The postprocessing software for the Leica RCD30 system is called Leica IPAS TC. It combines
the GNSS and IMU data through a rigorous Kalman filter to produce optimal position, velocity,
and attitude with their corresponding statistics information using tightly couporithm. It provides
two modes to use GNSS data, either in differential mode with reference receivers or in precise
point positioning (PPP) mode using aircraft GNSS data only. IPAS TC also provides a simple
Windows-based user interface and further automates the GNSS/IMU data processing.
Leica IPAS CO
Leica IPAS CO (Camera Orientation) is used to calculate camera orientation angles as well as
compute camera exterior orientations based on final solution from Leica IPAS TC.
Leica IPAS ABS

Leica IPAS ABS (Automatic Boresight Software) is used to automatically calculate the IMU
misalignment.
Leica IPAS CO+

This is the short name for the bundle IPAS CO and IPAS ABS.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 217

218 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Chapter 5 Advanced operation
Version 4.01-61 Oct / 19 / 2012 219

Lever Arm and Boresight Angles

Note: Boresight angles must be determined by test flight after initial installation as well as after
any incidence or evidence that the Leica RCD30 has been subjected to shock or impact.
General information about lever arms and boresight angles

The reference frame center is the mount rotation axis in pitch and roll. See section "Height of
Leica RCD30 in Leica PAV80 with different lenses" in Volume 2, Chapter 5 on Page 228. If the
sensor system is not installed into a mount a virtual reference point is defined.
Accurate measurements of lever arms and boresight angles are required for the Leica RCD30 to
operate properly. The following measurements are required:
Vector reference frame center to GNSS antenna phase center (Figure 55)
This is a measurements which has to be performed by the user. See section "GNSS lever arm
- antenna vector determination" in Volume 2, Chapter 5 on Page 225.
Vector reference frame center to IMU center
This is pre-defined in Leica FCMS for various IMU types and Leica camera mounts. See
table in latest release notes. In case of non-standard installations it is a user task to define it.
Vector reference frame to aircraft frame
This is pre-defined and will only change, if the installation is different than standard. See
section "Orientation of sensor and mount" in Volume 4, Chapter 2 on Page 530.
Vector reference frame to IMU body frame.
This parameter is the IMU misalignment. See section "GNSS lever arm - antenna vector
determination" in Volume 2, Chapter 5 on Page 225.
Vector reference frame to user frame
This parameter is defined by the position of the Lens entrance pupil. The data are provided
in Table 59, Height of Leica RCD30 in Leica PAV80 with different lenses in Volume 2,
Figure 55: Lever Arms
Figure 56: Rotations
220 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Overview of camera calibration parameters
Internal Orientation Parameters

Interior Orientation - also known as the sensor model or camera model - is obtained from labora-
tory and/or flight calibration of each camera/lens system. It defines the camera characteristics
required for the reconstruction of the object space bundle of rays from image points.
The camera model is specified by ten parameters (refer to Table 56 on Page 221). The nomencla-
ture corresponds to standard photogrammetric practice.
Distortion free Leica RCD30 images

The final output of the Leica FramePro download processing are distortion free images.
Table 56. Camera Model Parameters of distortion free images
Symbol Parameter Units Value of distortion free images

c Focal length mm value given in the calibration certificate
xP, yP Principal point mm Zero
The origin of the pixel coordinate system
(0,0) is at the center of the image.
k0, k1, k2 Symmetric radial distortion Zero
p1, p2 Decentering Zero
b1, b2 Non-orthogonality Zero
Caution: Attempting to disassemble the CH61/CH62 Camera Head voids the validity of the
camera model. Do not disassemble the Camera Head. If the mechanical or operational integrity of
the Camera Head is in question, contact Leica Geosystems for assistance.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 221

Leica RCD30 calibration and bore sighting

Details about calibration are given in section "Leica RCD30 calibration" in Volume 2, Chapter 3
on Page 186
Bore sighting
In order to use the embedded GNSS/IMU system to provide georeferencing information to Leica
RCD30 data, boresighting is required.
In order to boresight the IMU of the Leica RCD30 system, either a photogrammetric software
(see option 1 below) or the software Leica IPAS CO+ provided by Leica Geosystems (see option
2 below) can be used. For detailed information about Leica IPAS CO+, please reference to Leica
IPAS CO+ User Manual.
Option 1- use of photogrammetric software package
The following steps are required for boresighting:

1. Conduct a cross flight with Leica RCD30 at a location where good quality ground control
points are present and set as photo targets,
2. Process IPAS data using Leica IPAS TC and generate the georeference file (.sol file),
3. Process imageries from Leica RCD30 using a photogrammetry software and generate a AT
file,
4. Use Leica IPAS CO, compute the boresight angles based on the *.sol file and AT file.
It is important to note that in order to produce a set of accurate boresight angles, four require-
ments should be met:
Accurate *.sol file,
Accurate misalignment estimations from the AT
Rigid mounting between the IMU and camera
Accurate time-tagging of camera event
Option 2 - use of Leica IPAS CO+
The following steps are required for boresighting:

1. Conduct a cross flight with Leica RCD30.
2. Process IPAS data using Leica IPAS TC and generate the georeference file (.sol file),
3. Use Leica IPAS CO+, compute the boresight angles and PPA based on the *.sol file.
It is important to note that in order to produce a set of accurate boresight angles, four require-
ments should be met:
Accurate *.sol file,
Rigid mounting between the IMU and camera
Accurate time-tagging of camera event
Remarks to Option 1 and option 2

In order to produce accurate roll, pitch angles from *.sol file, the following aspects should be
considered:
222 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Maximum separation between aircraft and the reference GNSS receiver is within the speci-
fication
Post-processed GNSS solution is accurate
There are either S-turn or Figure-8 turns before and after the flight and each flight line is
short. See section "In-flight alignment for GNSS-IMU system" in Volume 3, Chapter 2 on
Page 341.
Post-processing of GNSS/IMU data in IPAS Pro is accurate
In order to accurately determine omega, phi and kappa misalignment angles from an AT file,
careful consideration should be given to the layout of the photo block. There must be sufficient
overlap in both the along-track and the cross-track directions, and there must be overlapping per-
pendicular flight lines to ensure a large amount of image observation redundancy. A minimum of
16 tie/pass points per image should be observed using either manual or automated point picking
techniques. Each tie/pass point should be observed in at least 3 images to maximize reliability of
the solution. The final AT solution should be free of systematic errors introduced by poor or
insufficient camera calibration or setup.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 223

Determination of PPA
Important: Determination of the Principle Point of Autocollimation (PPA) is essential for the
further use of the Leica RCD30 images in the workflow. The PPA should be determined in the
following cases:
Before first use after Lab calibration

Each time a shutter was changed
The following steps are required for PPA determination:

1. Conduct a flight according to section "Cross flight layout" in Volume 2, Chapter 5 on Page
224
2. Process distortion free images
3. Process IPAS data and compute Exterior Orientation without misalignment angle
4. Use either a photogrammetric Software like ORIMA or Leica IPAS CO+ to determine the
IMU misalignment and PPA (x 0, y0) in one step.
5. Update the Leica RCD30 Camera Calibration file. See Leica Frame Pro User Manual.
6. Verify PPA
- Generate a new set of distortion free images by using the updated calibration file
- Use either a photogrammetric Software like ORIMA or Leica IPAS CO+ to compute the
PPA.
The PPA has now to be nearly Zero
Cross flight layout
Minimum requirement:
One line flown in both directions
One line perpendicular to the line flown in both directions
At least four images on each flight line
GSD should be 10 cm or larger
Suggested layout
(This is similar as a calibration flight layout. See section "Leica RCD30 calibration" in Volume 2,
Cross lines at about 12cm GSD, about 8 images per line
Cross lines at about 18 cm GSD, about 12 image per line
All lines flown in both directions
224 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

GNSS lever arm - antenna vector determination
General
For the GNSS/IMU system real-time solution which provides navigation data during the photo
flight and for GNSS/IMU data post-processing, the GNSS lever arms has to be known. This is
the vector from the position of the GNSS antenna phase center to the reference point. If the sen-
sor system is installed in a camera mount the reference point is identically with the Camera
Mount rotation axis pitch and roll. If the sensor system is not installed into a mount a virtual ref-
erence point is defined. .
Figure 57: Coordinate system for GNSS Lever Arm, forward facing installation
The GNSS lever arm is typically different for each installation and aircraft. If the system is used
in a number of different aircraft, it is important to note which aircraft a particular GNSS lever
arm measurements apply to. A sample form for recording this information is shown below in
Table 57.
Table 57. GNSS Antenna Position Data Form
Sensor System Type
System Serial Number
Aircraft Manufacturer
Aircraft Model
Aircraft Tail Number
Antenna Used (if not antenna supplied)
GPS Lever Arm (in reference frame, X) meters
GPS Lever Arm (in reference frame, Y) meters
GPS Lever Arm (in reference frame, Z) meters
The lever arm measurements has to be entered in Leica FCMS Configuration. See section "Set
system installation parameters and IMU type" in Volume 1, Chapter 4 on Page 69. During
operation the settings are loaded by Leica FCMS and stored in the GNSS/IMU data. During post
processing of GNSS/IMU data the lever arms are taken into account by Leica IPAS TC.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 225

How to determine the antenna offset vector

Important: Determine the GNSS antenna vector as accurately as possible, since the vector
directly affects the accuracy of the position data output used in post-processing.
The x, y and z components of the vector should be known with an accuracy better than 20
mm.
Important: Do not assume that the center line of the connector mounted to the underside of the
GNSS antenna is directly underneath the antenna phase center. The location of the phase center
of the GNSS antenna delivered with the Leica RCD30 is given in section "GPS-GLONASS
Antenna" in Volume 4, Chapter 2 on Page 571. If a GNSS antenna from other suppliers is used
make sure to have the corresponding drawings available.
Procedure for Leica RCD30 with Leica PAV80

1. Install the mount Leica PAV80 into the aircraft.
2. Make sure the adapter ring appropriate for the sensor is attached to the mount.
3. Do not insert the sensor into the mount
4. Make sure the Leica PAV80 is in mechanical ZERO position. (This should be the case for
Pitch, Roll an Drift if the mount was shut down correctly).
5. Measure the x, y, z components from center of Q to phase center of GNSS antenna.
For Q see section "Cross section of the Leica RCD30 pod in Leica PAV80" in Volume 2,
Chapter 5 on Page 227. Please note that the axis z is perpendicular to plane Q and the signs
are as shown in Figure 57 above.
The phase center of the GNSS antenna is given in section "GPS-GLONASS Antenna" in
How to measure the vector components see section "How to measure the x, y and z compo-
nents" in Volume 2, Chapter 5 on Page 230.
6. Subtract from component z (which is a negative value) the offset from Q to D. See
Drawing 3, Cross section of the Leica RCD30 pod in Leica PAV80 in Volume 2, Chapter
5 on Page 227 and Table 59, Height of Leica RCD30 in Leica PAV80 with different lenses
in Volume 2, Chapter 5 on Page 228.
.
Table 58. Example installation parameters GNSS antenna
Vector Q to GNSS antenna as measured Installation parameters GNSS antenna

x = 103 mm x = 103 mm
y = -92 mm y = -92 mm
z = - 1230 mm z = -1301 mm
In the example above the offset Q to D is 71 mm (-1230mm - 71 mm = -1301mm)
226 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Drawing 3: Cross section of the Leica RCD30 pod in Leica PAV80
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 227

Table 59. Height of Leica RCD30 in Leica PAV80 with different lenses
Position in Designation Height

Drawing 3 x [mm] y [mm] z [mm]
Leica RCD30
IP Image plane (CCD plane) 9.8
G Entrance pupil / projection. centre
Single Camera Head, f = 50 mm 0 0 -119.7
Single Camera Head, f = 80 mm 0 0 -80
Dual Head insert
Camera #1, f = 50 mm
M Supporting ring of Leica RCD30 -168.2

Gyro-stabilized mount Leica PAV80
with Leica RCD30 adapter ring
Q Fixing plane of Leica RCD30 on 168.5
adapter ring
C Fixing plane for adapter ring on PAV80 158.5
D PAV80 Rotation axis for Pitch and Roll 97.5
F Fixing plane on aircraft for PAV80 0
Optical window, port slide
N Upper side of optical window or of port -d
slide
O Lower side of optical window -d
228 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Procedure for Leica RCD30 without Leica PAV80

1. Measure the x, y, z components from center of Q to phase center of GNSS antenna.
Q is the intersection of the screw holes of the mounting plate for the CH61/CH62 camera
head. For Q see Drawing 4, Fixing screw holes for CH61/CH62 in Volume 2, Chapter 5
on Page 229.
The phase center of the GNSS antenna is given in section "GPS-GLONASS Antenna" in
How to measure vector components see section "How to measure the x, y and z compo-
nents" in Volume 2, Chapter 5 on Page 230.
2. Add to the component z (which is a negative value) the offset from Q to G. For G see
Table 60. An example is given in Table 61.
Table 60. Entrance pupil of Leica RCD30 lenses

Q Measure mark on mounting plate 0 0 0
G Entrance Pupil Projection Center 0 0
Leica NAG-D f = 50 mm -54.2mm
Leica NAT-D f =80 mm - 14.5 mm
.
Table 61. Example NAG-D 50mm installation parameters GNSS antenna
Vector Q to GNSS antenna as measured Installation parameters GNSS antenna

x = 103 mm x = 103 mm
y = -92 mm y = -92 mm
z = - 1230 mm z = -1284 mm
Drawing 4: Fixing screw holes for CH61/CH62
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 229

How to measure the x, y and z components

Important: Make sure that the aircraft skin thickness and the electrical centre of the GNSS
antenna are taken into account in your measurements.
Most accurate: traditional geodetic measure method

If the Leica PAV80 is part of the installation make sure the Leica PAV80 is in mechanical
ZERO in Pitch, Roll and Drift.
Use geodetic instruments such as Tachymeters, Levels etc. to measure distances, horizontal
angles and vertical angles to the targets.
Adjust all measurements to obtain 3D co-ordinates with the relative position for center of Q
and for the phase center of the GNSS antenna.
The coordinate system is as shown in Figure 57, Coordinate system for GNSS Lever Arm, for-
ward facing installation in Volume 2, Chapter 5 on Page 225.
Orientation of the coordinate system is defined by plane Q. In case a Leica PAV80 mount is part
of the installation it has to be set to mechanical ZERO in Pitch, Roll and Drift. The origin of the
co-ordinate system is the center of Q. For Q see section "Cross section of the Leica RCD30 pod
in Leica PAV80" in Volume 2, Chapter 5 on Page 227.
Simple method
Important: This method is only sufficient if it is performed with care and if the GNSS antenna
is installed close to the ideal position which is vertically above the Sensor Head.
Place the aircraft on jacks and level the aircraft until plane Q is leveled in x and y. For Q
section "Cross section of the Leica RCD30 pod in Leica PAV80" in Volume 2, Chapter 5 on
Page 227.
Setup a rope to mark the x-axis in the aircraft at the level of plane Q.
Use a plummet to measure z from the GNSS antenna to the level of plane Q.
Use a ruler or measuring tape to measure the y component right-angled from the plummet
position to the x-axis. Mark the intersection on the x-axis.
Use a ruler or measuring tape to measure the x component. Measure from the intersection of
y on the x-axis along the x-axis to the center of Q.
Figure 58: Coordinate system for Drawing 3 and Table 59.
230 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 231

232 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Chapter 6 Multiple Camera Heads Systems
Version 4.01-61 Oct / 19 / 2012 233

Overview
Overview of Leica RCD30 multiple Camera Heads configurations

Leica RCD30 Oblique Trio System with three camera heads
This configuration have one nadir and two oblique Camera Heads (forward and backward)
mounted in a pod and is designed for corridor mapping applications.
See section "Leica RCD30 Oblique Trio System (3 Camera Heads)" in Volume 2, Chapter 6
on Page 236 for more details.
Leica RCD30 Oblique Penta System with five camera heads
This configuration have one nadir and four oblique Camera Heads mounted in a pod and is
primarily designed for urban mapping applications.
See section "Leica RCD30 Oblique Penta System (5 Camera Heads)" in Volume 2, Chapter
6 on Page 249 for more details.
Components of a complete Leica RCD30 multiple Head system

The main components are:
Leica RCD30 Digital Camera System with multiple CH61 and CH62 Camera Heads, NAG-
50 and/or NAT-D 80 mm lenses
CC32 Camera Controller Revision A with GNSS/IMU system and exchangeable Mass
Memories, Mounting Plate for Camera Controller
Leica PAV80 Gyro-stabilized Mount with corresponding adapter ring, protection cover
Duo Pod, Oblique Trio or Oblique Penta Pod (Holding multiples Camera Heads and IMU
for mounting into the Leica PAV80)
Various cables
Shipping Cases

146.

Lenses with other focal lengths
Ground power supply

146.
234 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Overview of Leica RCD30 System for Multiple Camera Heads Pods
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 235

Leica RCD30 Oblique Trio System (3 Camera Heads)
Overview
The Leica RCD30 Oblique Trio system have one nadir and two oblique Camera Heads (forward
and backward) and is designed for corridor mapping applications.
Leica RCD30 Oblique Penta System Camera Head and Lens Parameters
Camera Head Lens View Direction Look Angle [deg]
CH62 (RGBN) NAG-D 50mm Nadir 0
CH61 (RGB) NAT-D 80mm Forward 45
CH61 (RGB) NAT-D 80mm Backward 45
Leica RCD30 Oblique Trio System Footprint
1. Nadir CH62 (RGBN) Camera Head

NAG-D 50mm
0 look angle
2. Forward CH61 (RGB) Camera Head
NAT-D 80mm
45 look angle
3. Backward CH61 (RGB) Camera Head
NAT-D 80mm
45 look angle
236 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Components
The Leica RCD30 Oblique Trio system consists of standard Leica RCD30 components with an
Oblique Trio Pod. The standard Leica RCD30 components are described in detail in section
"Components" in Volume 1, Chapter 2 on Page 8
Standard components of a complete Leica RCD30 Oblique Trio system

Leica RCD30 Digital Camera System with:
1 x CH62 Camera Head (RGBN) with NAG-50 mm lens
2 x CH61 Camera Heads /RGB) with NAT-D 80 mm lens
CC32 Camera Controller Revision A with GNSS/IMU system, exchangeable Mass Memo-
ries, and Mounting Plate for Camera Controller
Leica PAV80 Gyro-stabilized Mount and protection cover
Oblique Trio Pod. (Holding Camera Heads and IMU for mounting into the Leica PAV80.)
Various cables
Shipping Cases
Optional components
Ground power supply
Technical data for the components are described in section "System components" in Volume 1,
The Leica RCD30 Oblique Trio Pod is the only component that are unique to the Leica RCD30
Oblique Trio system.
Oblique Trio Pod
1. Handles
2. Airflow
3. Ring with 8 screw holes for mounting to Leica
PAV80
4. Cables inside cable conduit
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 237

CC31 / CC32 Camera Controller Revision A

Front
3. Status display
5. Airflow grid
238 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Installing the System
This section describe only the additional tasks for installing the Leica RCD30 Oblique Trio sys-
tem. General information about unpacking, mounting, attaching, installation and safety informa-
tion of the Leica RCD30 Oblique Trio system are given in section "Unpacking" in Volume 1,
Chapter 3 on Page 18 and section "Hardware installation" in Volume 1, Chapter 3 on Page 25
Most installation tasks for the Leica RCD30 Oblique Trio system are identical to the installation
tasks for a Leica RCD30 Standalone system except for the following tasks.
The following Installation tasks are specific to the Leica RCD30 Oblique Trio system:
1. Mounting the Camera Heads and IMU into the Oblique Trio Pod
2. Inserting Oblique Trio Pod into Leica PAV80
3. Removing Oblique Trio Pod from Leica PAV80
Unpacking
Important: Follow all the Instructions in the Unpacking section as specified in section
"Unpacking" in Volume 1, Chapter 3 on Page 18
Common Installation Tasks
Important: See section "Hardware installation" in Volume 1, Chapter 3 on Page 25 for all
common installation tasks.
Transport of System
Important: See section "Transport" in Volume 1, Chapter 5 on Page 119 for important and
detailed instructions on the transport of the system
Transport of System
Caution: Do never ship the pod with the Camera heads installed. Ship the camera Head always
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 239


during tranport.

Specific Installation Tasks for Leica RCD30 Oblique Trio system
common installation tasks and important information
The following Installation tasks must be completed before Mounting the Camera Heads
and IMU into the Oblique Trio Pod:
1. task "Attach the protective filter to the lens and secure the filter" in Volume 1, Chapter 3 on
Page 22 in Volume 1, Chapter 3, Page 22
2. task "Mounting the lens" in Volume 1, Chapter 3 on Page 23 in Volume 1, Chapter 3, Page
23
240 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Mounting the Camera Heads

Procedure
1. Place the pod upside down
2. Loosen all 9 screws holding the lower pod cover to
the pod
Screws: 9 x M4 x 6mm (#764542)
3. Remove the lower pod cover from the pod
4. Loosen all 12 screws holding the 3 camera mount-

ing blocks
Screws: 8 x ISO10642 M5 x 12mm (#668937)
Screws: 4 x ISO4762 M5 x 12mm (#236258)
5. Remove the 3 camera mounting blocks from the pod
1 x Nadir (90) camera mounting block
2 x Oblique (45) camera mounting blocks
6. Place into one of the Oblique (45) camera mount-

ing block one CH61 Camera head with NAT-D 80
mm lens already attached
7. The form factor of the mounting block and mount-
ing pin only allows one possible fitting
8. Fasten all 4 screws to secure the mounting block to
the CH61 Camera Head
Screws: 4 x ISO4762 M4 x 12mm (#239435)
9. Place into the remaining Oblique (45) camera
mounting block the last CH61 Camera head with
NAT-D 80 mm lens
Screws: 4 x ISO4762 M4 x 12mm (#239435)
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 241

11. Place into the Nadir (90) camera mounting block

the CH62 Camera head with NAG-50 mm lens
already attaches
Screws: 4 x ISO4762 M4 x 12mm (#239435)
14. Any Camera Head can be connected to any of the

camera head cables since the order in which the
Camera Heads are connected on the CC32 Camera
Controller is not important. In Leica FCMS the user
defines the direction which each Camera Head is
pointing with the with the serial number and not the
order of Camera Head cables on the CC32 Camera
Controller.
15. Connect a Camera Head cable with the CH62 Cam-
era head. Ensure that the cable connection is secure.
16. Place the Nadir (90) camera mounting block with
the fastened Camera Head in the base of the pod in
the nadir slot
17. Fasten with all 4 screws the Nadir (90) camera
mounting block to the base of the pod
Screws: 4 x ISO4762 M5 x 12mm (#236258)
242 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

18. Connect the second Camera Head cable with the

first CH61 Camera head. Ensure that the cable con-
nection is secure.
19. Place this connected Camera Head with Oblique
(45) camera mounting block in the pod in the cor-
rect oblique slot
20. Fasten the Oblique (45) camera mounting block
with all 4 screws to the base of the pod
Screws: 4 x ISO10642 M5 x 12mm (#668937)
21. Connect the third Camera Head Cable with the sec-
ond CH61 Camera heads
(45) camera mounting block in the remaining
oblique slot in the base of the Pod
with all 4 screws to the base of the Pod
24. Screws: 4 x ISO10642 M5 x 12mm (#668937)
25. Write the Camera Head Serial Number for each

Camera Head and the corresponding position down.
26. The form is Figure 5, Leica RCD30 Oblique Trio
Camera Head Serial Number and Position in Vol-
The Camera Head Serial Numbers and correspond-
ing slot positions are used in Leica FCMS to calcu-
late the correct FMC for each Camera Head during
image acquisition.
27. Check that the white O-ring are in the groove

around the mounting ring before putting the lower
pod cover back on the pod
28. Put the lower pod cover back on the pod

29. Fix the lower pod cover to the pod
30. Fasten securely all 7 screws
Screws: 9 x M4 x 6 (#764542)
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 243

Mounting the IMU

pod
The screws are located on the side with two screws
on each side.

cable.

"Mounting of the IMU into Leica RCD30 Oblique Pods"
The flight direction is indicated on the IMU mount-
ing plate with a triangle.
7. Use all 4 screws to fasten the IMU to the mounting
plate. Screws types:
IMU CUS4-CPT: 4 x M6 x 20 mm #266667
NUS5-33BM61: 4 x M5x25 mm #180315
244 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

8. Check that the white O-ring are in the groove before

putting the hood back on the pod
Drawing 5: Leica RCD30 Oblique Trio Camera Head Serial Number and Position
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 245

Inserting Oblique Trio Pod into Leica PAV80
Procedure
1. Insert the Oblique Trio Pod carefully into the Leica
PAV80 as shown on the picture on the left side. The
red arrow in the picture on the left points in flight
direction.
If the Oblique Trio Pod is inserted in the correct
direction the interface panel of the cable outlet of
the Oblique Trio Pod is close to the Leica PAV80
connector panel.
Warning: Insert the Oblique Trio Pod into the Leica PAV80 only as shown in the image
above. Never insert it differently.
2. Use the screws (M5 x 8mm) to secure the pod in the

Leica PAV80.
Use all 8 screws. See pictures below.
246 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Removing Oblique Trio Pod from Leica PAV80

Procedure
1. Loosen all eight screws which secures the pod in the
Leica PAV80.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 247

Cabling
This section describes only additional tasks for cabling the Leica RCD30 Oblique Trio system.
General information about cabling, chassis ground connection, connection of GNSS antenna,
Operator and pilot display and Power cable connection of the Leica RCD30 are given in section
"Cabling the Leica RCD30 system" in Volume 1, Chapter 3 on Page 34.
Cabling Overview
Figure 59: Cabling diagram of Leica RCD30 Oblique Trio system
248 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Leica RCD30 Oblique Penta System (5 Camera Heads)
Overview
The Leica RCD30 Oblique Penta system have one nadir and five oblique Camera Heads (for-
ward, backward, left and right) and is designed for corridor mapping applications.
Table 62. Leica RCD30 Oblique Penta Camera Head and Lens Parameters
Camera Head Lens View Direction Look Angle [deg]
CH62 (RGBN) NAG-D 50mm Nadir 0
CH61 (RGB) NAG-D 50mm Forward 35
CH61 (RGB) NAG-D 50mm Backward 35
CH61 (RGB) NAG-D 50mm Left 35
CH61 (RGB) NAG-D 50mm Right 35
Leica RCD30 Oblique Penta Camera Footprint
1. Nadir CH62 (RGBN) Camera Head

NAG-D 50mm
0 look angle
2. Forward CH61 (RGB) Camera Head
NAG-D 50mm
35 look angle
3. Backward CH61 (RGB) Camera Head
NAG-D 50mm
35 look angle
4. Right CH61 (RGB) Camera Head
NAG-D 50mm
35 look angle
5. Left CH61 (RGB) Camera Head
NAG-D 50mm
35 look angle
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 249

Components
The Leica RCD30 Oblique Penta system is comprised of standard Leica RCD30 components
with an Oblique Penta Pod. The standard Leica RCD30 components are described in detail in
section "Components" in Volume 1, Chapter 2 on Page 8
Main components:
Leica RCD30 Digital Camera System with:
1 x CH62 Camera Head (RGBN) with NAG-50 mm lens
4 x CH61 Camera Heads (RGB) with NAGD 50 mm lens
CC32 Camera Controller Revision A with GNSS/IMU system, exchangeable Mass Memo-
ries, and Mounting Plate for Camera Controller
Leica PAV80 Gyro-stabilized Mount and protection cover
Oblique Penta Pod. (Holding Camera Heads and IMU to insert it into the Leica PAV80.)
Various cables
Shipping Cases

Ground power supply

146.
Technical data for the components are described in section "System components" in Volume 1,
The Leica RCD30 Oblique Penta Pod is the only component that are unique to the Leica RCD30
Oblique Penta system.
250 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Oblique Penta Pod
1. Handles
2. Airflow
3. Ring with 8 screw holes for mounting to Leica
PAV80
4. Cables inside cable conduit
CC31 / CC32 Camera Controller Revision A

Front
3. Status display
5. Airflow grid
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 251

Installing the System
This section describes only the additional tasks for installing the Leica RCD30 Oblique Penta
system. General information about unpacking, mounting, attaching, installation and safety infor-
mation of the Leica RCD30 Oblique Penta system are given in section "Unpacking" in Volume 1,
Chapter 3 on Page 18 and section "Hardware installation" in Volume 1, Chapter 3 on Page 25
Most installation tasks for the Leica RCD30 Oblique Penta system are identical to the installation
tasks for a Leica RCD30 Standalone system except for the following tasks.
The following Installation tasks are specific to the Leica RCD30 Oblique Penta system:
1. Mounting the Camera Heads and IMU into the Oblique Trio Pod
2. Inserting Oblique Penta Pod into Leica PAV80
3. Removing Oblique Penta Pod from Leica PAV80
Unpacking
Important: Follow all the Instructions in the Unpacking section as specified in section
"Unpacking" in Volume 1, Chapter 3 on Page 18
Common Installation Tasks
common installation tasks.
Transport of System
Important: See section "Transport" in Volume 1, Chapter 5 on Page 119 for important and
detailed instructions on the transport of the system
Transport of System
Caution: Do never ship the pod with the Camera heads installed. Ship the camera Head always
252 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012


during tranport.

Specific Installation Tasks for Leica RCD30 Oblique Penta system
common installation tasks and important information
The following Installation tasks must be completed before Mounting the Camera Heads
and IMU into the Oblique Penta Pod:
1. task "Attach the protective filter to the lens and secure the filter" in Volume 1, Chapter 3 on
Page 22 in Volume 1, Chapter 3, Page 22
2. task "Mounting the lens" in Volume 1, Chapter 3 on Page 23 in Volume 1, Chapter 3, Page
23
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 253

Mounting the Camera Heads

Procedure
1. Place the pod upside down
2. Loosen all 9 screws holding the lower pod cover to
the pod
Screws: 9 x M4 x 6 (#764542)
3. Remove the lower pod cover from the pod
4. Loosen all 20 screws holding the 5 camera mount-

ing blocks
Screws: 20 x ISO4762 M5 x 12mm (#236258)
5. Remove the 5 camera mounting blocks from the pod
1 x Nadir (90) camera mounting block
4 x Oblique (45) camera mounting blocks
6. Place into one of the Oblique (35) camera mount-

ing block one CH61 Camera head with NAG-D 50
mm lens already attached
Screws: 4 x ISO4762 M4 x 12mm (#239435)
9. Mount the remaining 3 x Oblique (35) camera
mounting blocks with the 3 x CH61 Camera heads
with NAG-D 50 mm lens
10. Fasten all 12 screws to secure the mounting blocks
to the CH61 Camera Heads
Screws: 12 x ISO4762 M4 x 12mm (#239435)
254 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

11. Place into the Nadir (90) camera mounting block

the CH62 Camera head with NAG-50 mm lens
already attaches
Screws: 4 x ISO4762 M4 x 12mm (#239435)
14. Any Camera Head can be connected to any of the

camera head cables since the order in which the
Camera Heads are connected on the CC32 Camera
Controller is not important. In Leica FCMS the user
defines the direction which each Camera Head is
pointing with the with the serial number and not the
order of Camera Head cables on the CC32 Camera
Controller.
15. Connect a Camera Head cable with the CH62 Cam-
era head
16. Place the Nadir (90) camera mounting block with
the fastened Camera Head in the base of the pod in
the nadir slot
17. Fasten with all 4 screws the Nadir (90) camera
mounting block to the base of the pod
Screws: 4 x ISO4762 M5 x 12mm (#236258)
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 255

18. Connect the second Camera Head cable with the

first CH61 Camera head
(45) camera mounting block in the pod in the cor-
rect oblique slot
with all 4 screws to the base of the pod
Screws: 4 x ISO4762 M5 x 12mm (#236258)
21. Connect the other 3 Camera Head Cables with the 3
CH61 Camera heads
22. Place the 3 connected Camera Heads with Oblique
(45) camera mounting blocks in the remaining
oblique slots in the base of the Pod
23. Fasten the remaining 3 Oblique (45) camera
mounting blocks with all 12 screws to the base of
the Pod
Screws: 12 x ISO4762 M5 x 12mm (#236258)
24. Write the Camera Head Serial Number for each

Camera Head and the corresponding position down.
25. The form is Figure 6, Leica RCD30 Oblique Penta
Camera Head Serial Number and Position in Vol-
The Camera Head Serial Numbers and correspond-
ing slot positions are used in Leica FCMS to calcu-
late the correct FMC for each Camera Head during
image acquisition.
26. Check that the white O-ring are in the groove

around the mounting ring before putting the lower
pod cover back on the pod
27. Put the lower pod cover back on the pod

28. Fix the lower pod cover to the pod
29. Fasten securely all 9 screws
Screws: 9 x M4 x 6 (#764542)
256 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Mounting the IMU

pod
The screws are located on the side with two screws
on each side.

cable.

"Mounting of the IMU into Leica RCD30 Oblique Pods"
The flight direction is indicated on the IMU mount-
ing plate with a triangle.
7. Use all 4 screws to fasten the IMU to the mounting
plate. Screws types:
IMU CUS4-CPT: 4 x M6 x 20 mm #266667
NUS5-33BM61: 4 x M5x25 mm #180315
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 257

8. Check that the white O-ring are in the groove before

putting the hood back on the pod
Drawing 6: Leica RCD30 Oblique Penta Camera Head Serial Number and Position
258 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Inserting Oblique Penta Pod into Leica PAV80

Procedure
1. Insert the Oblique Penta Pod carefully into the Leica
PAV80 as shown on the picture on the left side. The
red arrow in the picture on the left points in flight
direction.
If the Oblique Trio Pod is inserted in the correct
direction the interface panel of the cable outlet of
the Oblique Trio Pod is close to the Leica PAV80
connector panel.
Warning: Insert the Oblique Penta Pod into the Leica PAV80 only as shown in the image
above. Never insert it differently.
2. Use the screws (M5 x 8mm) to secure the pod in the

Leica PAV80.
Use all 8 screws. See pictures below.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 259

Removing Oblique Penta Pod from Leica PAV80

Procedure
1. Loosen all eight screws which secures the pod in the
Leica PAV80.
260 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Cabling
This section describes only the additional tasks for cabling the Leica RCD30 Oblique Penta sys-
tem. General information about cabling, chassis ground connection, connection of GNSS
antenna, Operator and pilot display and power cable connection of the Leica RCD30 are given in
section "Cabling the Leica RCD30 system" in Volume 1, Chapter 3 on Page 34.
Cabling Overview
Figure 60: Cabling diagram of Leica RCD30 Oblique Penta system
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 261

Mounting of the IMU into Leica RCD30 Oblique Pods

Important: The content of this chapter gives information how to install the IMU for the Leica
RCD30 Oblique Trio and Oblique Penta system. It is only valid for Leica RCD30 Oblique Trio
and Oblique Penta Pods with embedded GNSS/IMU system NovAtel SPAN (CC32).
Overview IMU fixing screw holes
Drawing 7: Fixing screw holes for IMU LN200, 33BM61 and CPT
Note: Not all IMU fixing screw holes are shown
262 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

CUS4 - IMU
Manufacturer Novatel
IMU Type CPT
Screws M6 screw per screw hole
Fixing holes 4 x 7 mm diameter for M6, location see Drawing 8, CPT IMU
mounting in Volume 2, Chapter 6 on Page 263
Drawings See Drawing 8, CPT IMU mounting in Volume 2, Chapter 6 on
Page 263.
Cables See section "IMU Selections" in Volume 1, Chapter 7 on Page 148.
IMU orientation
Place the IMU according to Drawing 8. The orientation is defined by the connector and the flight
direction.
Drawing 8: CPT IMU mounting
CPT installation parameters for 3rd party setup

Table 63. Offset and rotation Reference to CPT IMU
Reference Offset [m] Rotation [deg]
x y z Omega Phi Kappa

Intersection of mounting screw 0.005 -0.031 -0.079 180 0 90
hole. (C in Drawing 8)
Lever arms see section "Lever Arms" in Volume 2, Chapter 5 on Page 220.
Rotations see section "Rotations" in Volume 2, Chapter 5 on Page 220.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 263

DUS5 - IMU
Manufacturer Northrop Grumman
IMU Type LN200
Fixing screw threads 4 x M4, location see Drawing 7, Fixing screw holes for IMU
LN200, 33BM61 and CPT in Volume 2, Chapter 6 on Page 262
Drawings See Drawing 9, LN200 IMU mounting in Volume 2, Chapter 6 on
Page 264.
IMU orientation
Place the IMU according to Drawing 9. The orientation is defined by the connector and the flight
direction.
Drawing 9: LN200 IMU mounting
LN200 installation parameters for 3rd party setup

Table 64. Offset and rotation Reference to LN200 IMU
Intersection of mounting screw -0.006 +0.005 -0.072 180 0 -90.0

264 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

NUS5 - IMU
Manufacturer SAGEM
IMU Type 33BM61
Screws M 5 screw per screw hole
LN200, 33BM61 and CPT in Volume 2, Chapter 6 on Page 262
Drawings See Drawing 10, 33BM61 IMU mounting in Volume 2, Chapter 6
on Page 265.
IMU orientation
Place the IMU according to Drawing 10. The orientation is defined by the connector and the
flight direction.
Drawing 10: 33BM61 IMU mounting
33BM61 installation parameters for 3rd party setup

Table 65. Offset and rotation Reference to 33BM61 IMU
Intersection of mounting screw -0.022 +0.023 -0.070 180 0 -90

Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 265

Leica RCD30 Oblique Pod Lever arms and Rotations

The lever arms and rotations for every Leica RCD30 Camera Head in the Leica RCD30 Oblique
Trio Pod and Leica RCD30 Oblique Penta Pod are given for reference purposes. This informa-
tion is already available in Leica FCMS and only needed for GNSS-IMU and camera exterior
orientation processing. For more details, see section "Office Software" in Volume 2, Chapter 4 on
Page 217.
The reference frame center is the mount rotation axis in pitch and roll.
Installation parameters for Leica RCD30 Oblique Trio Pod

Table 66. Offset and rotation Reference to Leica PAV80 Rotation Centre
Device Offset [m] Rotation [deg]
Camera Head x y z Omega Phi Kappa

Nadir -0.124 0.000 0.238 0 0 0
Forward 0.024 0.110 0.194 0 45 0
Backward -0.024 -0.110 0.194 0 -45 180
Installation parameters for Leica RCD30 Oblique Penta Pod

Table 67. Offset and rotation Reference to Leica PAV80 Rotation Centre
Device Offset [m] Rotation [deg]
Camera Head x y z Omega Phi Kappa
Nadir 0.000 0.000 0.238 0 0 0
Forward 0.050 0.130 0.227 0 35 0
Backward -0.050 -0.130 0.227 0 35 180
Left 0.130 -0.050 0.227 0 35 -90
Right -0.130 0.050 0.227 0 35 90
266 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Leica FCMS configuration

Configure Leica FCMS according to the information given in the Leica RCD30 User Manual and
in section "Leica FCMS - Configuration" in Volume 3, Chapter 4 on Page 397. Exceptions are
given in the sections below.
Configuration of Sensor Configuration for Oblique systems

The Primary Sensor has to be set to Leica RCD30 and the following parameters have to be con-
figured by the user.
Sensor Type
MM Mode
Generate release
Housing Type
Camera Head Serial Numbers
Mount
A description of the parameters is given in Table 68 on Page 267.
A description how to enter the dialog and make the settings is given in section "Configuration" in
Table 68. Sensor configuration parameters for Oblique systems
Parameter Setting Remarks

Sensor type RCD30 Select sensor type
Generates Release Yes Always Yes
Feedback
MM mode Single or Joint Operation Always Single or Joint Operation
Housing Type RCD30 Oblique Trio Select RCD30 Oblique Trio
RCD30 Oblique Penta or RCD30 Oblique Penta
depending on the Oblique system type
Camera Serial Numbers Forward Enter the correct serial number for
Nadir every Camera Head position
Backward
Left
Right
Mount PAV80 Always PAV80
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 267

Housing Type Configuration in Leica FCMS for Oblique Trio and Oblique Penta
Pods
Figure 61: Sensor Type Configuration in Leica FCMS for Oblique Trio Pod
Important: Only Single or Joint Mode Operation for the MM30 Mass Memories are possible
for Leica RCD30 Oblique system
Figure 62: Sensor Configuration in Leica FCMS for Oblique Penta Pod
Operation
Operate Leica FCMS according to the information given in the Leica RCD30 User Manual and
in section "Leica FCMS - Flight Execution" in Volume 3, Chapter 5 on Page 453.
268 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Chapter 7 Mounting
Version 4.01-61 Oct / 19 / 2012 269

Chapter 7 Mounting
Mounting of the IMU for 3rd party installations

Important: The content of this chapter gives information how to install the IMU of the Leica
RCD30 system by 3rd parties. It is valid for Leica RCD30 systems with embedded GNSS/IMU
system NovAtel SPAN (CC32).
Mounting information for installations of Leica RCD30 with 3rd party GNSS/IMU systems has
to be provided by the supplier of the 3rd party GNSS/IMU system.
Overview IMU fixing screw holes
Drawing 11: Fixing screw holes for IMU LN200, 33BM61 and FSAS
270 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Chapter 7 Mounting
CUS4 - IMU
Manufacturer Novatel
IMU Type CPT
Fixing holes 4 x 7 mm diameter for M6, location see Drawing 13, CPT IMU in
Drawings See Drawing 13, CPT IMU in Volume 2, Chapter 7 on Page 272.
IMU orientation
flight direction.
Drawing 12: CPT IMU mounting
CPT installation parameters for 3rd party setup

Table 69. Offset and rotation Reference to CPT IMU

Intersection of mounting screw 0.010 -0.031 -0.031 180 0 90
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 271

Chapter 7 Mounting
Drawing 13: CPT IMU
Note: Units in Drawing 13 are imperial and in [metric].
272 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Chapter 7 Mounting
DUS5 - IMU
Manufacturer Northrop Grumman
IMU Type LN200
LN200, 33BM61 and FSAS in Volume 2, Chapter 7 on Page 270
Drawings See Drawing 15, LN200 IMU in Volume 2, Chapter 7 on
Page 274.
IMU orientation
flight direction.
Drawing 14: LN200 IMU mounting
LN200 installation parameters for 3rd party setup

Table 70. Offset and rotation Reference to LN200 IMU
Intersection of mounting screw -0.004 +0.005 -0.024 180 0 -90.0

Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 273

Chapter 7 Mounting
Drawing 15: LN200 IMU
Note: Units in Drawing 15 are imperial.
Unit
274 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Chapter 7 Mounting
NUS5 - IMU
Manufacturer SAGEM
IMU Type 33BM61
Screws M 5 screw per screw hole
LN200, 33BM61 and FSAS in Volume 2, Chapter 7 on Page 270
Drawings See Drawing 17, 33BM61 IMU in Volume 2, Chapter 7 on
Page 276.
IMU orientation
flight direction.
Drawing 16: 33BM61 IMU mounting
33BM61 installation parameters for 3rd party setup

Table 71. Offset and rotation Reference to 33BM61 IMU
Intersection of mounting screw -0.006 +0.008 -0.022 180 0 -90

Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 275

Chapter 7 Mounting
Drawing 17: 33BM61 IMU
Note: Units in Drawing 17 are metric.
276 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Chapter 7 Mounting
Mounting of the CH61/CH62 for 3rd party installations

Important: The Camera Head shall be protected from shocks and vibrations. Install the Camera
head on a mounting plate with shock absorbers. The shock absorbers shall have a resonance
frequency of <20 Hz. Make sure all mounting components fulfill crash safety requirements.
Summary mounting plate on CH61 or CH62

Material Stainless Steel
Thickness 7 mm at the mounting screw holes
Fixing holes 4 x 5 mm diameter for M4 screws. See Drawing 18, CH61/CH62
Chassis ground Each fixing hole is surrounded with a conductive area.
Size See Drawing 18, CH61/CH62 in Volume 2, Chapter 7 on
Page 277. and Drawing 19, CH61/CH62 with NAG-D 50mm and
NAT-D 80mm in Volume 2, Chapter 7 on Page 278.
Material Stainless Steel
Drawing 18: CH61/CH62
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 277

Chapter 7 Mounting
Drawing 19: CH61/CH62 with NAG-D 50mm and NAT-D 80mm
278 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Chapter 8 Service & Maintenance
Version 4.01-61 Oct / 19 / 2012 279

Leica RCD30 User and Service technician know-how levels
Know-how Level 1
Standard Leica RCD30 know-how for operators
Either an operator who participated in a Leica Geosystems service level 1 training course or an
operator with experience and self study of low level service aspects of the sensor system.
Leica RCD30 Users (Airborne Crew, Ground Crew) and Leica Geosystems representatives with
extended knowledge. Training documents: Leica RCD30 Documentation
Know-how Level 2
Enhanced Leica RCD30 know-how for operators
Experienced operator who has participated on a Leica Geosystems service level 2 training pro-
gram. A Service level 2 operator who is a field technician able to do minor repairs.
Leica RCD30 Users and Leica Geosystems Service Engineers with extended knowledge and
error tracking capabilities. Training documents are i. the product documentation and ii. product
specific service documentation. The documents are handed over during the training.
Standard accessories
The standard accessories comprise parts required for Leica RCD30 service and maintenance per-
formed by the user. Content see section "Tools and accessories" in Volume 1, Chapter 7 on Page
149. But the Leica RCD30 system has no mechanical parts that need user service. The only parts
the user has to exchange are the fan filter elements.
Technical checks
The Leica RCD30 system is designed as a turn-key system. The user is not required to perform
technical checks on the service level, except:
Check that cover glass in front of optics is clean. (This item is also part of the pre-flight
checklist. See section "Pre-flight check list" in Volume 1, Chapter 4 on Page 79).
Check for dirt on the fan filter element.
Check cables for damage.
Check cleanliness of plugs.
280 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Cleaning
Removing grit and dust

Caution: Never use flammable cleaning material or keton-type materials for cleaning (e.g.
acetone, ethyl alcohol, toluene, ethyl acid, methyl, or chloride).
Caution: Openings on the housings are provided for ventilation only. Avoid any type of
cleaning which allows humidity or water inside the housings.
Housings
To clean the housings, use a cloth lightly dampened with a mild detergent.
Touch-screen of OC52
To clean the OC52 touch screen, lightly dampen a soft, clean cloth with water or a mild deter-
gent. If possible, use a special screen cleaning tissue.
Removing oil and grease
Optical parts
Caution: The cover glass of the lens on the SH91/SH92 and the optical window must never to
be allowed to come into contact with grease or oil. These materials are particularly harmful to the
coatings on the optical parts.
Grease marks and fingerprints must therefore be removed at once. For this purpose, wrap clean
cotton wool around a wooden cleaning stick, moisten with ether (medical) and carefully wipe the
dirty parts. Replace the cotton wool as often as necessary, until no grease marks remain.
Removing condensation
Cover glass in front of the lens

The cover glass of the lens must be protected against condensation. Wet optical parts must not be
wiped dry with n ordinary cloth. Use a chamois leather or a lint-free cloth.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 281

Optical cleaning procedures

Caution: Improper cleaning technique and/or material can result in damage to optical coatings
or electrical short circuits and potential damage or degraded performance of the product.
Caution: Proper maintenance of optical components must be followed in order to keep surfaces
free of dirt, grime, oil or other contaminants encountered as a result of day-to-day operation. A
contaminated lens, filter or window can significantly reduce optical sensitivity and image
sharpness. Take care to prevent dirt, dust, oil and fingerprints from touching the lens or filter.
Keeping the optical elements clean is key to extending the life and quality of the optics. Only
clean optical elements when necessary. Excessive cleaning can damage optical elements.
Note: Take care to prevent fingers from coming into contact with fiber or lens during filter or
lens changes.
The following supplies are recommended for optical component cleaning

Wiping materials (any of the following):
- Disposable lens cleaning tissues
- Microfiber lens cleaning cloths
Cotton balls for padding the wiping material
Lens cleaning solvents (any of the following, in order of preference):
- Acetone, preferably a spectroscopic grade (J T Baker #9010) or comparably priced organic
residue analysis grade (J T Baker #9254). Be sure to use a clean covered container and
clean the container closure.
- Alcohol
Caution: Avoid the use of common facial tissues or paper towels as these can be abrasive,
resulting in coating damage. They may also contain lotion or oils and leave a residue on optical
surfaces.
Caution: Never use abrasive products or tools to clean the optical surfaces. The use of stiff
brushes, metal tools or abrasive cleaners can cause damage to optical coatings.
Note: Select a cleaning tissue or cloth twice as large as the maximum dimensions to be cleaned.
Note: Avoid cleaning products containing large amounts of dyes or perfumes, as these can leave
a residue.
Wash hands thoroughly before cleaning optics. This minimizes the potential for transferring skin
oils to the optical surfaces during cleaning. If available, wear powder-free latex gloves while
cleaning.
282 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Elements having considerable surface contamination should first be freed from dust using optic-
grade compressed air. This will remove the bulk of the loose soil and should preclude scratching
of the optics. A mounted lens should never be removed from its mounting for cleaning.
Caution: If using running water for cleaning on the exterior of the aircraft, do not get water
near connectors or electronics.
Minor contamination can be removed using lens tissue or a microfiber lens cleaning cloth alone.
Use light pressure and a circular motion.
For tougher contaminants, a solvent may be needed. Use a cotton ball moistened with alcohol to
clean around the edges of the mount and the lens. In cleaning glass lenses and windows, alcohol
or acetone should be used. Any grease or oily residue must be removed, as it will otherwise
spread over the entire face of the optic.
Note: Always place the solvent on the cloth, never directly on the optical surface.
Dip a cotton ball covered with folded lens tissue or microfiber cloth in the lens cleaning solvent,
and wipe the lens with a rotary motion starting from the center and working toward the outer
edge of the lens. Acetone will remove dirt that alcohol will not, and having a higher evaporation
rate. This will result in fewer streaks or drying marks. As the cleaning operation progresses, the
lens tissue will have a tendency to drag, indicating a clean lens.
Caution: Do not press hard on optics or filter. This may damage optical coatings.
Use a rapid rotary motion with several tissues moistened with acetone or alcohol to give the lens
a final cleaning.
Note: Microfiber lens cleaning cloths can be cleaned with hot water and air dried
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 283

Fungus - and how to combat it
Introduction
In hot, humid conditions fungus grows easily on the surface of optical glass. The growth can
reach such an extent that the optical parts become totally unusable. Since spores of fungi are
present everywhere, they begin to germinate where ever the required temperature and humidity
are found. Specs of dust, dirt fluff and grease provide nutrition. In time the spreading fungus
etches into the glass destroying its hard polished surface. Hard coatings hardly help, because
although the destruction of a toxic coating causes fungi to die, many are left to attack the glass
underneath. It may be interesting to note that it is not the fungi themselves that eat into the glass
but their acidic by-products.
Fungicides inhibit the growth of the fungus to a certain extent but, unfortunately, they are
impractical for the use with aerial sensors. The only sure way of preventing fungus growth is to
reduce humidity, preferably to 60% or less. Provided humidity can be held below this level, the
spores will not germinate and so fungus will not grow. The other point is to keep the glass clean
to deprive the fungus of nutrition. Although aerial sensors are installed in aircraft and used air-
borne, they have to be freighted from time to time and occasionally stored for lengthy periods. It
follows that various methods are needed to combat fungus growth.
For airborne sensors in daily use

In a humid climate, the sensor should be exposed to light and air. Dont leave it in hot, direct sun-
light, however, as this is neither necessary not advisable! Put the aircraft in a shady spot where
there is usually some circulation of air. This will help to dry any moisture on the glass.
Storage
Before storing the sensor it should be cleaned. Wipe the paint work and clean the glass carefully.
See section "Cleaning" in Volume 2, Chapter 8 on Page 281.
The aim for storage must be to reduce humidity, to deprive fungus of the environment it needs. If
stored in the shipping cases, a bag of blue silica gel must be placed in the shipping case. Pink sil-
ica gel is saturated with moisture and therefore completely useless.
Freighting the sensor

Airborne sensors must sometimes be shipped and are likely to remain in their shipping cases for
a considerable time. Special precaution has to be taken, therefore, to keep the air in the shipping
cases as dry as possible. For shipment, blue silica gel in a dust-proof bag is all that is required.
Silica Gel
Silica gel is blue when dry and pink when saturated with moisture. When pink it must never be
left in the shipping case with the sensor but must be removed from the bag and heated to just
above 100C (212F) to evaporate the moisture. As soon as the crystals turn to blue again they
are allowed to cool and then put back in the bag. Silica gel can be regenerated and used as a des-
iccant as often as desired.
284 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Shutter replacement
Important: Shutter replacement requires Enhanced Leica RCD30 know-how for
operators. See page 280.
It is mandatory to follow strictly the guidelines and to replace the shutter in a professional man-
ner to maintain the geometric calibration within 2 pixels.
If 2 pixels accuracy is not sufficient re-calibration is required. How to calibrate see section
"Leica RCD30 calibration" in Volume 2, Chapter 3 on Page 186
Important before starting

Caution: Replacement of lens or shutter must be done in a clean, dry environment to prevent
contamination of lens and/or focal plane and/or future internal condensation.
Caution: Ensure non interrupted power to the Leica RCD30 system during the whole
replacement process. If a power failure occurs during the replacement process the lens will be in
an undefined state and only Leica Geosystems Support can recover it.
Note: The procedure given below has to be executed in a sequence for each lens.
Shutter replacement procedure
Prepare for shutter replacement

1. Setup a fully operational Leica RCD30 system including Mass Memory
2. Push the power button on Camera Controller
4. Select [Shutter]
Leica FCMS reads out lens/shutter parameters. After this is completed Leica FCMS shuts down
power to the Camera Head and displays a message window with the next steps.
5. Follow the steps listed in the Leica FCMS message window. The next steps are:
6. Disconnect and remove the Camera Head from the system.
7. Replace the shutter by following the instructions given in paragraph How to replace the
shutter on Page 286.
8. Re-connect the Camera Head to the system
9. Confirm OK
Leica FCMS initializes the new shutter. A message is displayed if this is completed.
Procedure continues on next page!
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 285

Tasks required after shutter replacement

Important:
10. Execute a system check. See section "System check" in Volume 1, Chapter 4 on Page 107
11. Determine the PPA. See section section "Determination of PPA" in Volume 2, Chapter 5 on
Page 224
12. Update the calibration file on the Camera Head. See section "Leica RCD30 lens calibration
file upload" in Volume 2, Chapter 8 on Page 289
How to replace the shutter

Caution: Replacement of lens or shutter must be done in a clean, dry environment to prevent
contamination of lens and/or focal plane and/or future internal condensation.
The picture on the left side shows the shutter module.

Part # 782525
It is the same for both lenses

NAT-D 2.8/80mm Art.Nr. 785423
NAG-D 4.0/50mm Art.Nr. 785422.
Procedure
1. Move the Camera Head with attached lens from the
aircraft to a clean and dust-free environment.
2. Remove the lens form the Camera Head
Important: Do never loosen the screws located on the
back side of the lens, because separate the lens from this
side invalidates the lens calibration.
3. Place the lens front side up onto a table.

4. Loose the six screws located on the front side of the
lens.
The appropriate screw driver is part of the RCD30
tools
The arrow on the picture on the left point to the
screws.
286 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

5. Separate the front part and back part of the lens.
6. Loose the three screws located on the shutter mod-

ule
The appropriate screw driver is part of the RCD30
tools
The arrow on the picture on the left point to the
screws.
7. Separate the shutter module from the lens part as

shown in the picture on the left.
8. Loose the two screws on the shutter IF board
9. Remove the shutter from the lens
10. Place the replacement shutter and the shutter IF

board exactly as shown in the picture on the left to
the lens part
11. Mount the shutter IF board to the lens part
12. Turn the lens part and check on the back side if the
electrical connector to the Camera Head is nicely
centered.
If this is not the case, adjust mounting of the shutter
IF board
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 287

13. Secure the two screws of the IF board with Loctite

221
14. Insert the shutter module into the lens part

15. Fix the shutter module it with the three screws
16. Secure the screws with Loctite 221
17. Ensure the cable to the motor (white wires) and
other cables do not obstruct the optical parts. The
cables has to be placed as shown in the picture on
the left.
18. Place the front part of the lens onto the back part of
the lens
19. Insert the six fixing screws of the front part of the
lens, but do yet NOT tighten the screws!
20. Mandatory use the Torque screw driver Hex
1.5mm 20cNm (RCD30 tools Article # 795214) to
tighten screws in the order given in the picture on
the left.
21. Secure the screws with Loctite 221
Important: After shutter replacement the shutter has to be initialized. Continue and finalize the
procedure given in section "Shutter replacement procedure" in Volume 2, Chapter 8 on Page 285
and in section "Tasks required after shutter replacement" in Volume 2, Chapter 8 on Page 286.
288 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Leica RCD30 lens calibration file upload
Procedure
1. Copy the lens calibration file to the root of a USB stick
2. Setup a fully operational Leica RCD30 system including Mass Memory
Important: Make sure the camera head and the attached lens of the Leica RCD30 system corre-
sponds to the lens calibration file.
3. Insert the USB stick to a USB slot on the Camera Controller

4. Push the power button on Camera Controller
6. Select [Sensor]
Leica FCMS reads the calibration file and uploads it to the Camera Head.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 289

Replacement of dust filters on fans
Replacement of dust filters on CH61/CH62

Warning: Before starting to exchange filters, disconnect Camera Head cable.
Replacement of the fan filter

1. Loosen the four screws. See arrows on the picture
on the left.
2. Remove the metallic filter cover
3. Exchange filter foam
4. Put back the metallic filter cover
5. Fasten securely all four screws
Replacement of dust filters on CC31/CC32

Warning: Before starting to exchange filters, disconnect power cable to CC3x.
Replacement of the fan filter

1. Loosen the six screws. See arrows on the picture
on the left.
2. Remove the metallic filter cover
3.
4. Exchange filter foam

Place the foam accurate into the frame as it is
shown on the picture on the left side
5. Put back the metallic filter cover
6. Fasten securely all six screws
290 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Replacement of dust filters on the OC52/OC50

Warning: Before starting to exchange filters, disconnect all cables.
Example OC50. Replacement on OC52 is similar

Replacement of the fan filters
1. Disconnect all cables
2. Turn the OC50 so you see the back
3. Loosen the eight screws. See arrows on the picture
on the left.
4. Remove the back cover
5. Remove the dust filters from the two fans.
6. Exchange the filter element. Make sure the filters

fit perfectly into the frames of the fans. See picture
on the left side.
7. Put back the cover onto the housing
8. Carefully insert the eight screws into the screw
holes
9. Securely fasten the eight screws
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 291

Fuses
Fuses protect components of the Leica RCD30 system from serious damages. All fuses are
located inside the devices.
Caution: Do not exchange fuses if you have not participated on a Leica RCD30 service level 2
maintenance training at the factory.
If the Leica RCD30 is installed and operated according to the guidelines fuses will not blow out
unless an internal electric or electronic malfunction occurred, which needs to be repaired. There-
fore, fuses should not be exchanged on-site unless expressly authorized by a Leica Geosystems
Customer Support Engineer.
292 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Calibration / interval between technical checks

A description of the Leica RCD30 calibration method is given in section "Leica RCD30 calibra-
tion" in Volume 2, Chapter 3 on Page 186. An example of an Leica RCD30 Calibration Certifi-
cate can be found in section "Example of Calibration Certificate" in Volume 2, Chapter 3 on Page
186.
Calibration verification by user

Leica RCD30 Camera Head calibration should be verified at the beginning of each flying season
and during the flying season after half a year of operation. Please contact Leica Geosystems Sen-
sor Customer Support if in doubt about the process.
Recommended service intervals

See section "Service intervals" in Volume 1, Chapter 5 on Page 122.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 293

Remote Diagnostics
Remote diagnositics allows a Leica Geosystems Service techinciain to access the Leica RCD30
system remotely. The content of this section explains the remote diagnostics interface and the
hardware requirements and procedures for remote access to the system.
Requirements
Hardware required for remote access

Important: Remote access needs all components of a Leica RCD30 system including Mass
Memory, operator and pilot interfaces like OC50 / GI40 (if part of the system).
Ensure non interrupted power during the whole remote diagnostic process.
Laptop Computer with RJ45 network port and a wireless network adaptor
RJ45 standard network cable
Software and network requirements

Internet connection (Mobile broadband or other wireless connection)
TeamViewer software (teamviewer.com)
Hardware interfacing
The computer that is being used to interface to the sensor must have a physical network adapter
with an RJ45 port. A standard RJ45 cable will be required to interface the computer to the sensor.
Connection of the network cable to the Leica RCD30 system

Connect the RJ45 cable to the LAN port of the Laptop and the LAN port of the Leica RCD30
system.
Figure 63: LAN connector on Leica RCD30 system for remote diagnostics
294 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Software interfacing
After connecting the RJ45 cable proceed as follows:

1. startup the Leica RCD30 system
2. Boot the Laptop computer
3. Connect the Laptop to the internet
4. Navigate to the TeamViewer web page
Internet URL: http://www.teamviewer.com/en/download/index.aspx
5. Select in Additional downloads TeamViewer Quick Support
The quick support option will load a temporary client that will present them with a session
ID and password. The session ID and password is dynamic and once the session is termi-
nated the program is not longer running and there is no new software installed on the sys-
tem.
6. Click on the download button
If the download does not start or if you do not get prompted to download or run the program,
a small tab may show up below your address bar on internet explorer or whatever web
browser that you may be using. The tab that may show up before you get prompted to run or
download the program will present if your security settings are such that you have to verify
all downloads that come from non trusted web pages.
Click on the tab to enable you to run the program. If this tab is not present then the screen
shot below can be disregarded.
After the security notification is click on and the download and or running of the program is
enabled the following window will appear.
7. Click on the run button once the window below is presented.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 295

After this button is pressed you may be presented with another window with a run button, if
this is the case, click on the run button again.
After the program has loaded, a window will appear on the screen with the session id and pass-
word.
296 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

8. Communicate the ID and Password to the Leica Geosystems Support Engineer.

He needs this data to connect remotely to the Leica RCD30 system.
All other configurations and settings or software downloads required will be executed by the
Leica Geosystems Support Engineer connecting to the Leica RCD30 system.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 297

298 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Chapter 9 Spare parts
Version 4.01-61 Oct / 19 / 2012 299

Chapter 9 Spare parts
Spare parts
All Leica RCD30 users are strongly recommended to keep a recommended list of spare parts in
stock. The purpose of having these spare parts readily available is because the Leica RCD30
operator himself can carry out routine maintenance of the airborne digital system.
Leica RCD30 service level 1 spare parts

To exchange the parts in this paragraph Leica RCD30 service level 1 know how is required. Def-
inition see section "Know-how Level 1" in Volume 2, Chapter 8 on Page 280.
Table 74. Spare cables for Leica RCD30
Part number Description Quantity

821218 Cable GNSS Antenna to CC32 1
664260 Chassis Ground Strap 1
745938 Cable OC50 to CC31/CC32 1
822132 Cable GI40 toCC31/CC32/OC50 1
Table 75. Spare tools and accessories for Leica RCD30
Part number Description Quantity

784801 Standard tools and accessories. Content see 1
section "Tools and accessories" in Volume 1,
743064 USB Memory Stick 1
Level 1 spare parts for OC50

Table 76. Tools and accessories for OC50
Part # Part Quantity

Dazzle shield 3
752446
Dust filter for OC50 input fans 6
Leica RCD30 service level 2 spare parts

To exchange the parts in this paragraph Leica RCD30 User and Service Technician know how
level 2 is required. Definition see section "Know-how Level 2" in Volume 2, Chapter 8 on Page
280.
300 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Chapter 10 Operation with 3rd party components
Version 4.01-61 Oct / 19 / 2012 301

General
Interfacing Leica RCD30 with 3rd party components

All relevant information for 3rd parties about interfacing Leica RCD30 with 3rd party compo-
nents are given in section "Interface Control Document (ICD)" in Volume 2, Chapter 11 on Page
311.
User installation of Leica RCD30 with 3rd party components.

Install the components provided by Leica Geosystems according to the guidelines given in sec-
tion "Installing the System" in Volume 1, Chapter 3 on Page 17.
Install 3rd party components according to the guidelines provided by the 3rd party supplier.
Overview of Leica RCD30 configurations with 3rd party components

Leica RCD30 with 3rd party GNSS/IMU system
Details about interfacing see section "Leica RCD30 camera system with 3rd party GNSS/
IMU system" in Volume 2, Chapter 11 on Page 325.
Details about cabling, configuration and operation see section "Leica RCD30 with 3rd party
GNSS/IMU system" in Volume 2, Chapter 10 on Page 303.
Leica RCD30 with 3rd party FMS
Details about interfacing see section "Leica RCD30 camera system with 3rd party FMS" in
FMS" in Volume 2, Chapter 10 on Page 306.
Leica RCD30 with 3rd party GNSS/IMU and 3rd party FMS
Details about interfacing see section "Leica RCD30 with 3rd party GNSS/IMU and 3rd
party FMS" in Volume 2, Chapter 11 on Page 329.
GNSS/IMU and 3rd party FMS" in Volume 2, Chapter 10 on Page 309.
302 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Leica RCD30 with 3rd party GNSS/IMU system
Overview
Figure 64: Configuration of Leica RCD30 system with 3rd party GNSS/IMU
Tasks made by using Leica RCD30 components

In this setup the Leica RCD30 system is configured and operated by using the full functionality
of Leica FCMS for Leica RCD30 Sensor Control and Flight guidance. The operator and pilot
interfaces are typically equal to the fully integrated Leica RCD30 system. Except that the OC52
connects via UltraVNC to the FCMS running on the CC31.
Figure 65: Cabling of Leica RCD30 system with 3rd party GNSS/IMU
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 303

Startup
Sequence
1. Power up the 3rd party GNSS/IMU system.
Power up the Leica RCD30 system components
2. Connect to Leica RCD30 Camera Controller on IP 10.60.135.15 using UltraVNC
3. Select "FCMS" from WINDOWS [Start] -> All Programs -> "Leica Geosystems"
After successfully completing the startup sequence the system will be ready for use in Leica
FCMS Main Menu.

Configure FCMS according to the information given in the Leica RCD30 User Manual and in
section "Leica FCMS - Configuration" in Volume 3, Chapter 4 on Page 397. Exceptions are
given in the sections below
GNSS/IMU System Configuration in Leica FCMS

Make the settings as given below:
Figure 66: GNSS/IMU Configuration for 3rd party system
Sensor type NMEA(RS232)

Important: Even though the system must generates a PPS, select "No" in this configuration
RS232 Port settings: COM8 typical at 38400 Baud. (RS232 port setting has to match the port set-
tings on the 3rd party NMEA source.
304 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

IMU Type:
either
WITH IMU, if the NMEA source has an IMU and delivers the NMEA message $PASHR
FCMS assumes that the attitude received with the message $PASHR describes both the sen-
sor and aircraft attitude.
NONE in all other cases.
Important: Do not mount the Camera Head oriented reverse to the standard flight direction.
Configuration of global parameter Installation

Make the settings as given below:
IMU type:
Select Unknown
Offset Reference to GNSS antenna:
Values are not relevant in this setup, enter zero
mum aircraft speed:
This parameters are important. Enter the aircraft reg-
istration number (also called tail number) and enter
valid speed data.
Operation
in section "Leica FCMS - Flight Execution" in Volume 3, Chapter 5 on Page 453.
Data storage
NMEA-GNSS/IMUdata is not stored on the Leica RCD30 system.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 305

Leica RCD30 with 3rd party FMS
Overview
Figure 68: Configuration Leica RCD30 system with 3rd party FMS

In this setup the Leica RCD30 system configuration is made by using the Leica FCMS module
Leica RCD30 Sensor Control. This task can be performed either on the OC52 or - if supported
by the 3rd party - on the display of the 3rd party FMS computer. OC52 or 3rd party computer
connect via UltraVNC to the FCMS running on the CC32.
Figure 69: Cabling of partly integrated Leica RCD30 system
306 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Startup
Sequence
1. Power up the Leica RCD30 system components
Power up the 3rd party FMS system.
2. Connect to Leica RCD30 Camera Controller on IP 10.60.135.15 using UltraVNC
3. Select "FCMS" from WINDOWS [Start] -> All Programs -> "Leica Geosystems"
After successful completed the power up sequence the system will be ready for use in Leica
FCMS Main Menu.

Configure FCMS according to the information given in the Leica RCD30 User Manual and in
section "Leica FCMS - Configuration" in Volume 3, Chapter 4 on Page 397. Exceptions are
given in the following paragraphs
Flight Guidance
Configure it according to the instructions of the 3rd party flight guidance system.
FCMS Multi-sensor Configuration

In the FCMS Multi-sensor configuration select "Slave", enter the IP Adress of the master guid-
ance system and select the port which is offered by the 3rd party FMS.
GNSS/IMU Configuration for 3rd party system
These are the network ports that FCMS can use:

Port 1: 27001
Port 2: 27002
Port 3: 27003
Port 4: 27004
Port 5: 27005
Port 6: 27006
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 307

Operation
in section "Leica FCMS - Flight Execution" in Volume 3, Chapter 5 on Page 453. Exceptions are
given in the sections below.
Error handling
Leica FCMS provides Leica RCD30 status information. If display of this messages is imple-
mented in the 3rd party FMS the follwing information is available to the user:
Message if the Leica RCD30 (Slave) is in an error state
Message if the Leica RCD30 (Slave) has a pop up warning message
Message if the Leica RCD30 (Slave) has a pop up error message
308 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Overview
Figure 70: Configuration Leica RCD30 system in 3rd party setup with Leica PAV80
Figure 71: Configuration Leica RCD30 system in 3rd party setup

by the 3rd party - on the display of the 3rd party FMS computer. OC52 or 3rd party computer
connect via UltraVNC to the FCMS running on the CC31.
Operation
This setup is a combination of the two setups described in the previous sections of this chapter.
See Leica RCD30 with 3rd party GNSS/IMU system on Page 303 and Leica RCD30 with 3rd
party FMS on Page 306.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 309

310 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Chapter 11 Interface Control Document (ICD)
Version 4.01-61 Oct / 19 / 2012 311

General about Leica RCD30 interfaces
Overview
The Camera Controller CC31/ CC32 of the Leica RCD30 system has a wide range of external
connectors. The pin-out of the connectors available for 3rd party is described in this chapter.
Figure 72: Leica RCD30 Control Unit CC31 or CC32 rear panel
Table 77. Rear Panel Connectors

Connector Public Function Socket Type
LAN YES Gigabit Ethernet connection RJ-45 female
IMU NO IMU connector (CC32 only)
28 V DC out YES 28VDC output power, 10A max Amphenol
97-3102A-14S-2S
28 V DC in YES 28VDC main input power Jger 533763
Aux 1 NO Gigabit Ethernet LAN
2 x RS232 serial ports
Aux 2 NO Event in, Event out, PPS Lemo ECA.2B.318
Aux 3 YES 28VDC output, 5 A max.
OC NO Connector to Operator and Pilot

interface
CH1,CH2, NO Connector to Camera Heads
CH3,CH4,CH5 CH61 and CH62, power and data
Antenna YES GNSS antenna (CC32 only) TNC female
Earth YES Chassis ground connection Thread M5
312 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Connectors on CC3x
LAN (Ethernet) Connection

A 10/100/1000 Base-T Ethernet interface provides communication between the Leica RCD30
and other computers for monitoring or controlling the system. The Ethernet port supports the
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP). The Leica RCD30 has an RJ-45
female connector and requires an RJ-45 Cat5E cable.
The network of all AUX connectors and of the LAN connector are connected to the same Ether-
net switch within the CC3x.
IMU Connector
The IMU connector is configured to connect various types of IMUs with the CC32. For a list of
Leica RCD30 supported IMUs, please section "IMU" in Volume 1, Chapter 7 on Page 61.
Important: Do only use IMU cables provided by Leica Geosystems.
Note: The Camera Controller CC31 has no embedded GNSS/IMU system. The IMU connector
is not populated on the CC31.
28V DC out - power connector

Note: This connector is intended to power the Leica PAV80 Gyro-stabilized mount. If intended
to power non-certified 3rd party, non-Leica Geosystems products, the user does so on his own
risk and is fully responsible for any malfunction, damage or hazards as a result of the use.
Table 78. Power Connector, pins 28V DC out

Connector Pin Description Signal Type Signal Direction
Amphenol 3106A-14S-2P
A + 28 V DC Power Output
B Ground Power Output
C Ground Power Output
D + 28 V DC Power Output
Important: Maximum output 10 A

Do only use power cables provided by Leica Geosystems.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 313

28V DC in - Power connector

Connects the CC3x with the aircraft power or power distributor box.
Important: Pre-fuse with less than 50A.
Important: Ensure certified aircraft installation to avoid power surcharge.
Table 79. Power Connector pins 28V DC in

Connector Pin Description Signal Type Signal Direction
Jger 530763006
1 not used
2 + 28 V DC Power Input
3 not used
4 Ground Power Input
Important: Do only use power cables provided by Leica Geosystems.
Drawing 20: Cable CC3x to DC aircraft power, # 764193 (1m) or 765173 (4m) open end
314 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Aux1, Aux2, Aux3 - Connectors

Note: Aux1 and Aux2 are for internal use only.
Note: Only Aux 3 port is for 3rd party use.
Note: Standard connection to the Aux3 connector is by using the Leica Geosystems article #
783405. See Y-cable to AUX3 connector on Page 323.
Table 80. Aux3 connector pins

Connector Pin Signal Type Signal Remark
LEMO Description Direction
FGA.2B.318
1 Aircraft power, +28V DC Output Max 5A

for all three Aux together
2 Aircraft power 0V Output Must not be connected to
GND to avoid current loops
3 Logic GND GND for
Event, RS232 and PPS
4 Tx1+
Data Output
5 Tx1- Ethernet
6 Rx1+
Input
7 Rx1-
8 Event out 5 V CMOS Output CMOS - level with

10mA drive current
9 Event in 5 V TTL Input 5V TTL level with
weak pull-up
10 Rx - A Input
Data GNSS/IMU system
11 Tx - A RS-232 Output
12 Rx - B Input
Data Camera control
13 Tx - B RS-232 Output
14 Tx2+ Output
Data
15 Tx2- Ethernet additional pins for Gigabit
16 Rx2+
Input
17 Rx2-
18 PPS output 5V CMOS Output CMOS - level with

10mA drive current
The pins of each AUX connector are galvanically isolated with the exception of the 28V power
output pins.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 315

OC connector
Note: This connector is for internal use only.
Connects the CC3x with the Leica Geosystems Operation Controller OC5x.
Camera Head CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4, CH5 Connectors

Note: This connector is for internal use only.
Each connector connects the CC3x with a Camera Head CH6x. Up to five CH6x can be con-
nected.
GNSS Antenna connector

Signals from the GNSS antenna are coupled to the embedded GNSS receiver within the Camera
Controller via the Antenna connector located on the rear of the unit. The connector on the Leica
RCD30 Control Unit is a female TNC connector. For the antenna cable, use high quality coaxial
cable.
Note: The Camera Controller CC31 has no embedded GNSS/IMU system. The GNSS antenna
connector is not populated on the CC31.
Ground connector (earth)

M5 thread hole. The surrounding area of the GND screw hole of the Leica RCD30 Camera Con-
troller is conductive.
316 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Overview Leica RCD30 camera system configurations

A complete standalone aerial camera system includes a GNSS receiver or a GNSS/IMU system
and a survey flight management system (FMS) for camera release and flight guidance. For the
Leica RCD30 system the following configurations are supported:
Leica RCD30 configurations provided by Leica Geosystems
1: Standalone, fully integrated Leica RCD30 camera system

Consisting of:
Single Camera Head CH61 or CH62, dual or quadruple head
Camera Controller CC32 with embedded GNSS/IMU system, airborne GNSS antenna
Leica PAV80 gyro-stabilized camera mount, pod for Camera Head(s) and IMU
Leica FCMS Flight & Sensor Control Management System
User interface OC52, interface stand IS40, Pilot interface OC50 and/or GI40
Details see section "Standalone, fully integrated Leica RCD30 camera system" in Volume 2,
2: Leica RCD30 integrated in Leica ALS70, 60 or 50-II systems

Leica RCD30 components:
Single Camera Head CH61 or CH62
Camera Controller CC31 without embedded GNSS/IMU system
Leica FCMS module Camera Control Leica RCD30
Details see section "Leica RCD30 camera system integrated in Leica ALS70 system" in Volume
Leica RCD30 configurations with 3rd party components
3: Leica RCD30 with 3rd party GNSS/IMU or GPS system

Consisting of:
Leica Geosystems components
Camera Head CH61 or CH62
Camera Controller CC31 without embedded GNSS/IMU system
Optional Leica PAV80 gyro-stabilized camera mount, pod for Camera Head and IMU
Leica FCMS Flight & Sensor Control Management System
User interface OC52, interface stand IS40, Pilot interface OC50 and/or GI40
3rd party components

3rd party GNSS/IMU system
Details see section "Leica RCD30 camera system with 3rd party GNSS/IMU system" in Volume
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 317

4: Leica RCD30 with 3rd party FMS

Consisting of:
Camera Controller CC32 with embedded GNSS/IMU system, airborne GNSS antenna
Optional Leica PAV80 gyro-stabilized camera mount, pod for Camera Head and IMU
Optional for camera control: user interface OC52, interface stand IS40

3rd party flight management system
Optional: Software to display the of camera control on the screen of the 3rd party FMS. Use
the remote control software UltraVNC from www.uvnc.com.
Details see section "Leica RCD30 camera system with 3rd party FMS" in Volume 2, Chapter 11
on Page 327.
5: Leica RCD30 with 3rd party GNSS/IMU or GPS and 3rd party FMS
Consisting of:
Camera Controller CC31without GNSS/IMU system
Optional: Leica PAV80 gyro-stabilized camera mount, pod for Camera Head and IMU
Optional for camera control: user interface OC52, interface stand IS40

3rd party GPS or GNSS IMU system
3rd party flight management system
Optional: Software to display the of camera control on the screen of the 3rd party FMS. Use
the remote control software UltraVNC from www.uvnc.com.
Details see section "Leica RCD30 with 3rd party GNSS/IMU and 3rd party FMS" in Volume 2,
Important for 3rd parties

3rd party GPS, GNSS/IMU and FMS have to provide the interfaces as described in the following
pages of this ICD document.
318 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Leica RCD30 configurations with Leica components
Standalone, fully integrated Leica RCD30 camera system
In this setup Leica FCMS Flight & Sensor Control System is the sole interface for both Operator
and Pilot. All aspects of the Leica RCD30 operation are conducted using this software. Details
are given section "Software Leica FCMS" in Volume 2, Chapter 4 on Page 214.
Figure 73: Configuration of fully integrated Leica RCD30 system
Figure 74: Cabling of fully integrated Leica RCD30 system
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 319

Leica RCD30 camera system integrated in Leica ALS70 system
In this setup Leica FCMS Flight & Sensor Control System is the sole interface for both Operator
and Pilot. All aspects of the Leica RCD30 operation are conducted using this Leica FCMS mod-
ule Sensor Control Leica RCD30. Details are given section "Software Leica FCMS" in Volume
Figure 75: Configuration of Leica RCD30 system integrated in Leica ALS70 system
Figure 76: Cabling of Leica RCD30 system integrated in Leica ALS70 system
Note: Figure 76 shows in black the connections of the Leica RCD30 components to the Leica
ALS70. The cabling for Leica ALS 70 in Figure 76 is for illustration purposes only. Cabling
information for the Leica ALS70 is given in the Leica ALS70 User Manual.
320 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Leica RCD30 configurations with 3rd party components

Note: All signal flow graphics and cabling graphics in this section show standalone configura-
tions. If Leica RCD30 is installed with a 3rd party LIDAR the Leica PAV80 and the Leica
RCD30 pod for the Camera Head may not be used. The CH61 or CH62 should then be mounted
on shock absorbers.
Leica RCD30 system 3rd party interface on Aux3

All 3rd party systems connect to the Aux 3 port of the CC3x.
Table 81. Functionality dedicated to Aux3 port of Leica RCD30 for 3rd party
Interface Signal Pins on AUX3 Pins on cable #783405
Release and Ethernet 4,5,6,7,14,15,1 See Table 85 on Page 324.
communication 6,17
NMEA input in case of 10

GNSS/IMU 3rd party GNSS/IMU
information See Table 84 on Page 324
NMEA output in case of 11
embedded GNSS/IMU *)
PPS Input PPS input in case of 3rd 9

party GNSS/IMU
MEP MEP output 8
*) Alternatively retrieve this information though Ethernet. See NovAtel SPAN documentation.
Protocol on NMEA input to Aux3 for 3rd party GNSS/IMU

The PPS/NMEA data is required for time stamping the images and for the FMC correction. The
following messages must be available at 38400 baud, 8 Databit, 1 Stop bit, none parity
Table 82. NMEA input messages

NMEA Message Rate Remark
$ZDA or $INZDA 1 Hz Mandatory for time stamping of images
$INGGA or $GPGGA 5 to 20 Hz Mandatory for FMC and FMS geoidal separation field
in the message is mandatory
$INVTG or $VTG 5 to 20 Hz Mandatory for FMC
$PRDID or $PASHR 5 to 20 Hz Optional for full FMC accuracy (Preferred option)
$HDT or $INHDT 5 to 20 Hz Optional for FMC (Heading. Alternative option, if

preferred option listed above is not available)
$GSA, 1 Hz Optional for FMS satellite information
$GSV 1 Hz Optional for FMS satellite information
Important: The orientation of the computed reference frame must point into flight direction.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 321

Protocol on NMEA output to AUX3 for 3rd party FMS

The data is provided at 38400 baud, 8 Databit, 1 Stop bit, none parity
Table 83. NMEA output messages

NMEA Message Rate Remark
$ZDA 1 Hz
$INGGA 5 Hz
$INVTG 5 Hz
$GSA 1 Hz
$GSV 1 Hz
$PASHR 5 Hz
PPS input on AUX3 for 3rd party GNSS/IMU

The Event input on AUX3 can be configured to be the PPS source. This is required for a system
configuration with a 3rd party GNSS/INS system. The PPS must be low active.
MEP output on AUX3

The MEP output is available, but not required for data processing. Each collected image contains
an embedded GPS timestamp. Leica FramePro supports *.sbet and *.sol files for postprocessing.
The MEP output is a low active pulse.
Protocol on LAN for FMS

The camera is not released by a TTL trigger input. The camera must be released by a LAN com-
mand, which allows GPS timestamps to precisely release the camera. Details about the commu-
nication to the Leica RCD30 system is given in the Leica RCD30 Ethernet Interface Control
Document.
322 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Y-cable to AUX3 connector
Drawing 21: # 783405, Cable AUX to RJ45 and D-Sub15
The connectors of the two ends of cable # 783405 are described in Table 84 and Table 85.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 323

Table 84. Cable # 783405, I/O connector pin-out DB-15

Pin Pin Description
1 28V DC
2 N/A
3 Logic ground
4 Event out
5 Event In (PPS input)
6 RXD (Receive Data) A
7 TXD (Transmit Data) A
8 RXD (Receive Data) B
9 GND 28V
10 N/A
11 TXD2 (Transmit Data) B
12 PPS output
13 N/A
14 N/A
15 N/A
Table 85. Cable #783405, Ethernet LAN connector pin-out

RJ45 Pin Description
1 Tx1+
2 Tx1-
3 Rx1+
4 Rx1-
5 Tx2+
6 Tx2-
7 Rx2+
8 Rx2-
324 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Leica RCD30 camera system with 3rd party GNSS/IMU system

See also section "3: Leica RCD30 with 3rd party GNSS/IMU or GPS system" in Volume 2,
Overview
Figure 77: Configuration of Leica RCD30 system with 3rd party GNSS/IMU

In this setup the Leica RCD30 system is configured and operated by using the full functionality
of Leica FCMS for Leica RCD30 Sensor Control and Flight guidance. The operator and pilot
interfaces are equal to the fully integrated Leica RCD30 system.
Tasks to be performed by the 3rd party GNSS/IMU

The 3rd party GNSS/IMU system has to provide the following
Position and time synchronization information for Leica FCMS
Details see Protocol on NMEA output to AUX3 for 3rd party FMS on Page 322
IMU attitude data and the drift reference to the Leica PAV80, if Leica PAV80 is used.
For this the Leica PAV80 IMU-OP is required. Details about Leica PAV80 interface is given
in the Leica PAV80 documentation.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 325

Signal flow and cabling with 3rd party GNSS/IMU
Figure 78: Signal flow of Leica RCD30 system with 3rd party GNSS/IMU
Figure 79: Cabling of Leica RCD30 system with 3rd party GNSS/IMU
326 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Leica RCD30 camera system with 3rd party FMS

See also section "4: Leica RCD30 with 3rd party FMS" in Volume 2, Chapter 11 on Page 318.
Overview
Figure 80: Configuration Leica RCD30 system with 3rd party FMS

by the 3rd party - via VNC on the display of the 3rd party FMS computer.
Tasks to be performed by the 3rd party FMS

The 3rd party FMS has to provide the following
Release command for the Camera Head CH6x of the Leica RCD30 system.
Control of the Leica RCD30 system at least up to a certain extent.
Communication with the Leica RCD30 system is via LAN. Details about the communica-
tion to the Leica RCD30 system is given in the Leica RCD30 Ethernet Interface Control
Document.
Control the Leica PAV80, if Leica PAV80 is used.
Detail about the LeicaPAV80 interface are given in the Leica PAV80 documentation.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 327

Signal flow and cabling with 3rd party FMS
Figure 81: Signal flow of partly integrated Leica RCD30 system
Figure 82: Cabling of partly integrated Leica RCD30 system
328 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

See also section "5: Leica RCD30 with 3rd party GNSS/IMU or GPS and 3rd party FMS" in Vol-
Overview
Figure 83: Configuration Leica RCD30 system in 3rd party setup with Leica PAV80
Figure 84: Configuration Leica RCD30 system in 3rd party setup

by the 3rd party - via VNC on the display of the 3rd party FMS computer.
Tasks to be performed by the 3rd party FMS

The 3rd party FMS has to provide the following
Release command for the Camera Head CH6x of the Leica RCD30 system.
Control of the Leica RCD30 system at least up to a certain extent.
Communication with the Leica RCD30 system is via LAN. Details about the communica-
tion to the Leica RCD30 system is given in the Leica RCD30 Ethernet Interface Control
Document.
Control the Leica PAV80, if Leica PAV80 is used.
Detail about the LeicaPAV80 interface are given in the Leica PAV80 documentation.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 329

Tasks to be performed by the 3rd party GNSS/IMU

The 3rd party GNSS/IMU system has to provide the following
Position and time synchronization information for Leica FCMS
Details see Protocol on NMEA output to AUX3 for 3rd party FMS on Page 322
IMU attitude data and the drift reference to the Leica PAV80, if Leica PAV80 is used
For this the Leica PAV80 IMU-OP is required. Details about Leica PAV80 interface is given
in the Leica PAV80 documentation.
Signal flow and cabling with 3rd party GNSS/IMU and FMS
Figure 85: Signal flow of Leica RCD30 system with 3rd party GNSS/IMU and FMS components
Figure 86: Cabling of Leica RCD30 system with 3rd party GNSS/IMU and FMS components
330 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Field Manual


332 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Leica RCD30 Field Manual Leica RCD30 Documentation Volume - 3
Chapter 1 About Field Manual
Version 4.01-61 Oct / 19 / 2012 333

Volume 3 Leica RCD30 Field Manual
Chapter 1 About Field Manual
Scope of document
The Field Manual contains relevant information about:
Operational aspects of the Leica RCD30 system
Flight recommendations
Getting perfect images
Flight planning for Leica RCD30
General
See section section "Product identification" in Volume 1, Chapter 1 on Page 2
Abbreviations
See section "Abbreviations" in Volume 1, Chapter 1 on Page 3
Meaning of symbols
See section "Meaning of symbols" in Volume 1, Chapter 1 on Page 5

Documents Other volumes of Leica RCD30 Documentation

See section "Where to get assistance and training" in Volume 1, Chapter 1 on Page 6
334 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Chapter 2 General for Leica RCD30 photo flights
Version 4.01-61 Oct / 19 / 2012 335

Important notes for the photo flight

guidance information provided by Leica FCMS as a means of navigating. Leica FCMS only
suggests an approach to the flight line and assists a user when flying on the photo line. It is
the full responsibility of the pilot/operator to watch the airspace and be aware of
surroundings during flight.
Important: Pay special attention to all paragraphs in section "Flight recommendations and
mandatory procedures" in Volume 3, Chapter 2 on Page 340. These paragraphs contain
important information which must be taken into account when executing photo flights with the
Leica RCD30.
GNSS requirements
Required GNSS quality

Important: Be sure that GNSS fulfills always at least the following limits during a photo flight:
At least five satellites are tracked
PDOP is always lower than 4
If the GNSS quality is checked in advance during mission planning always take stricter limits
than given above. E.g. never plan a flight for a time where the expected PDOP is more than 3,
because the actual GNSS constellation during the photo flight might be worse.
Note: The limits given above in the Important section are only guidelines because the
following factors have also to be taken into account:
Distance of airborne system to ground reference station, see below in paragraph " Distance
to GNSS ground reference station for DGNSS processing".
Area surrounding the ground reference station, e.g. buildings shading the antenna. etc.
Quality of ground reference receiver
For GNSS/IMU airborne systems providing a deeply coupled real-time solution and if the
data are processed by using Leica IPAS TC the limitations during steep turns are different.
See section "Turns" in Volume 3, Chapter 2 on Page 340.
Distance to GNSS ground reference station for DGNSS processing

Important: Be sure always to fulfill during a photo flight the following limits:
Fly-over ground reference station before and after image data acquisition.
In-flight alignment is flown not more than 20 km away from the location of the ground ref-
erence station.
No part of the project is more than 50 km away from the ground reference station.
Consider the use of multiple base stations when lines are longer than 100km.
Note: The limits given in the important section above are only guidelines because the following
factors have also to be taken into account:
Parameters listed above in paragraph " GNSS requirements".
No loss of lock during photo flight, except Leica IPAS Freebird is in use.
336 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Distance to GNSS ground reference station for PPP processing

PPP processing does not require a GNSS ground reference station. Therefore, no distance limit
exists.
Note: For PPP processing the following factors have also to be taken into account during the
photo flight:
A PPP mission should last at least 90 minutes
Parameters listed above in paragraph Required GNSS quality on Page 336.
No loss of lock during photo flight, except Leica IPAS Freebird is in use.
Location of GNSS ground reference station

Note: Place the GNSS ground reference station away from hangars, buildings, trees or similar
obstructions. It should have a clear view of the sky at any angle above 10 from the horizon.
GNSS Base Station Setup for Post Processing DGPS operation

The GNSS base station must record data continuously for the period during which the sur-
vey aircraft is flying.
The base station must be a geodetic-quality GNSS, and must be placed at a known location.
The base station should log data at the same frequency as the airborne GNSS/IMU system
This is 2 Hz. If a 2 Hz-capable base station is not available, satisfactory results can usually
be obtained using a 1 Hz logging rate.
Note: Alternatively to a user set-up base station data from Continuously-Operating Reference
Station (CORS) networks can be used. If CORS data is available at the required update rate and
if the nearest reference station is at an acceptable range from the aircraft, then satisfactory
accuracy should be attainable in the processed data.
Note: Alternatively to a user set-up base station also PPP processing can be used.
Preferred sun elevation for image data
Preferred sun elevation to avoid reflection and Hot Spot

Tip: To avoid specular reflection and Hot Spots in the image take the sun elevation into account.
Information about the technical background as well as guidelines can be found in section
"Getting perfect image data" in Volume 3, Chapter 2 on Page 343.
Preferred sun elevation to get perfect image data

Tip: To get perfect image data and to prevent the CCD from getting underexposed or overex-
posed, the IT must correspond to the amount of light reflected from the terrain. Information
about the technical background as well as guidelines can be found insection "Getting perfect
image data" in Volume 3, Chapter 2 on Page 343.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 337

Flight plan requirements

The flight plan should meet certain requirements. Details are given in section "Flight preparation
for imaging sensors" in Volume 3, Chapter 2 on Page 350.
Hints for the sensor operator

Note: If you are not flying with real-time differential GNSS, please take into account that the
horizontal error of the GNSS position can be up to 10 m/30 ft. The error in GNSS height can be
up to three times the horizontal error.
Tip: Use the real-time view to check the path of the flight line at random. This is to detect errors
in flight planning in a timely manner.
338 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Hints for the pilot

Warning: Never fly according only to the positional information provided by the product.
It is not permitted as a sole source of information for navigation. Flying only with products
position and altitude information can lead to crash landings.
Precautions: Always use a supplementary navigation system under VFR condition.
guidance information provided by Leica FCMS for navigation. Leica FCMS only suggests
an approach to the flight line and assists a user when flying on the photo line. It is the full
responsibility of the pilot/operator to observe the airspace and surroundings during flight.
Warning: The displayed altitudes are only advisory in nature and should not be used as a
source of obstacle and terrain avoidance information. Always refer to current aeronautical
charts for appropriate minimum clearance altitudes.
Warning: The background map and DTM data display feature is only to be used as an aid
for terrain avoidance. Terrain data is obtained from third party sources. Leica Geosystems
AG is not able to verify the accuracy of the terrain data.
Warning: The Leica FCMS has a very high degree of functional integrity. However, the
pilot must recognize that providing monitoring and/or self-test capability for all
conceivable system failures is not practical. It may be possible for erroneous operation to
occur without a fault indication shown by Leica FCMS. It is thus the responsibility of the
pilot to detect such an occurrence by means of checking the information provided by the
instruments in the cockpit.
Note: It is highly recommended to maintain the required aircraft altitude according to the
displayed value on the altimeter. The GNSS height value is accurate only within a tolerance of up
to +/- 50 m/150 ft.
The pilot is being guided by track offset, heading and true course information. Due to the nature
of these calculations, a certain latency exists in the feedback provided. Therefore, the pilot
should not attempt to make too frequent corrections for every indicated deviation. Too frequent
corrections shorten the heading and offset calculation cycle, which results in pilot induced oscil-
lation and confusion. Therefore, it is recommended to maintain the aircraft heading for a short
time and then correct the heading substantially. In other words:
Too many heading corrections made within a matter of seconds will result in a rough trajectory
and confusing navigation information.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 339

Flight recommendations and mandatory procedures
Turns
The GNSS/IMU system embedded in the Leica RCD30 provides a deeply coupled real time solu-
tion. This allows missions to be flown with steep U-turns with up to 45 angle bank, if the GNSS/
IMU data are post-processed with Leica IPAS TC
But it is recommended to fly the in-flight alignment figures (see In-flight alignment for GNSS-
IMU system on Page 341) with a bank angle of 25 or less to avoid loss of lock on GNSS data
during this phase of the photo flight and to ensure perfect post-processing of GNSS-IMU data.
On the flight line

Important: During the image data recording the aircraft attitude in Pitch and Roll must be
within the rotation limits of the gyro-stabilized sensor mount Leica PAV80. Only if this is the
case, the sensor can be leveled by the mount and angular image motion is compensated.
The maximum limits of Leica PAV80 rotation are

Roll stabilization range is -7 to +7
Pitch stabilization range is -8 to +6
Drift stabilization range is -30 to +30
Note: Please be aware that the rotation limits of the Leica PAV80 given above can be reduced
due to the following reasons:
Confined space of the aircraft imposes a restriction.
Aircraft is flying with a low airspeed and therefore the attitude angle is larger than the typi-
cal attitude angle to which the sensor installation was adopted.
340 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

In-flight alignment for GNSS-IMU system

In-flight alignment is necessary to initialize and stabilize the IMU of the GNSS-IMU system.
Table 91. Phases during flight execution where an in-flight alignment is required
Air-Start Project execution Interrupted flight execution

After Start-up Before each survey area Before interruption
After each survey area After interruption
Note: For Project execution as an exception there is no need to perform an in-flight alignment if
another survey area was flown less than 20 minutes ago.
Figure 87: Example of in-flight alignments
Steps of in-flight alignment BEFORE flight over survey area or AFTER restart of execution
1. Depending on approach direction, choose one of the patterns given in Figure 88.
2. Start in-flight alignment procedure no more than 10 minutes before first line.
3. At least 5 minutes of flight with constant heading, velocity and altitude.
4. Perform turns according to the pattern at bank angle <25.
5. Turns must be finished with less than 5 minutes of flight remaining until reaching first line.
Steps of in-flight alignment AFTER flight over survey area or BEFORE flight interruption
1. Depending on the exit direction from the survey area, choose a pattern given in Figure 88.
2. Start in-flight alignment immediately after the last line.
3. Fly a pattern as given in Figure 88 in reverse direction (Example for reverse see Figure 87).
4. Perform turns according to the pattern at bank angle <25.
5. After turns at least 5 minutes of flight with constant heading, velocity and altitude.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 341

Figure 88: Examples of in-flight alignment patterns
Pattern A Pattern B
This in-flight alignment pattern ensures a This in-flight alignment pattern is economic
perfect in-flight alignment. with respect to flying time. But it needs to be
Sequence of turns is not important. That is, flown perfectly. Otherwise in-flight alignment
either left or right 360 turn can be first. will not be accurate.
Sequence of the 180 turns is not important.
That is, either left or right turn can be first.
Pattern C Pattern D
This in-flight alignment pattern is ideal if the This alignment pattern is ideal if the approach is
approach is opposite to the line direction. opposite to the line direction.
Pattern E Pattern F Pattern G
This in-flight alignment pattern This in-flight alignment pattern This in-flight alignment pattern
is ideal if approach is opposite is ideal if the approach is 90 to is ideal if the approach is 90 to
to the line direction. the line direction. the line direction.
This pattern needs to be flown This pattern needs to be flown
perfectly. Otherwise in-flight perfectly. Otherwise in-flight
alignment will not be accurate. alignment will not be accurate.
342 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Getting perfect image data
Introduction
This paragraph gives an understanding of the factors which have an influence on image quality.
On the long information chain from sun light to image data the following main parameters play a
role:
Sun elevation
Atmosphere, aerosol, haze, scattered light
Terrain illumination and shadowing
Back-lit and front-lit
Terrain reflection
Hot Spot, specular reflection
Lens, CCDs, filters
IT
In principle most factors are the same as for traditional film based cameras. This is particularly
the case for the parameters: sun elevation, atmosphere, aerosol, haze, scattered light, terrain illu-
mination and shadowing, terrain reflection, lens and filters. Comparable terms for digital images
and film-based images are given in Table 92 below.
Table 92. Equivalent terminology for digital and film images
Digital images, CCD Film images

Pixel Size Granularity
Conversion Gain Film Speed
Spectral Sensitivity Spectral Sensitivity
Resolution AD converter Film Processing
Integration Time (IT) Exposure Time
Low signal to noise ratio (SNR) in image data Under exposed
Saturated areas in digital image Over exposed
Short explanations for the terms used for digital images are given in the following sections.
Sun elevation
The Sun elevation changes over the year as well as over the time of the day. The higher the sun
elevation the stronger the illumination through direct solar radiation. Aerial photography camera
operators have always had to take the sun elevation into account. This does not change for digital
image data. With very low sun elevation the terrain illumination might not be sufficient for col-
lecting good image data.
The size of the shadow of an object on the ground depends on the Sun elevation. The lower the
Sun elevation the larger the shadow. Large shadow areas are usually not desirable in aerial photo-
graphs.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 343

Table 93. Examples of different sun elevation
Sun elevation at different date Sun elevation at different day time
Sun elevation at 50N at noon Sun elevation at 50N on 21st June

from June to December. between 6.00h and 18.00h.
Table 94. Examples of illumination intensity by direct solar radiation under clear sky
Sun elevation Illumination by direct solar radiation

17 9,300 lux
20 12,600 lux
30 26,100 lux
41 42,900 lux
55 62,700 lux
63 71,700 lux
Illumination by direct solar radiation and by skylight
A
Illumination by direct solar radiation.
B
Illumination by skylight, generated
by scattering of direct solar radiation
by air molecules and by turbidity
particles in the atmosphere.
C
No illumination by direct solar
radiation in the shadow area.
344 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Terrain reflection
Table 95. Reflection from different surfaces
Surfaces Amount of reflection

Forest 1% - 3%
Crop land 6% - 7%
Meadows 9% - 14%
Sand 18% - 31%
Concrete 25% - 35%
Rocks ~ 30%
Snow old 42% - 70%
Snow fresh 80% - 85%
Spectral reflection of different surfaces between 400 nm - 850 nm

The diagram on the left side shows the
spectral reflection of different surfaces.
It illustrates that water reflects less than
1% in the near infra-red spectral region.
It also shows that meadow like other
vegetation, reflects differing amounts
depending on the status of growth.
Back-lit and front-lit surfaces in frame images

Frame aerial photographs are always divided into two parts.
In one part, the visible surfaces of the objects are front-lit and
on the other part the visible surfaces are back-lit. The area of
the aerial photograph with the front-lit surfaces appear
brighter then the area with the back-lit surfaces. See
illustration on the left side.
Dodging printers or dodging SW is used to equalize the
different average brightness within the image.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 345

Hot Spot, specular reflection
Introduction
Hot Spot and specular reflection are two other important effects in aerial photography. Both
effects are well known from film-based frame aerial photography. It is also valid for digital frame
images. The effect appears in every frame if the sun elevation is higher than half the lens FOV.
Usually specular reflection and Hot Spot are not desired in aerial photographs. Therefore, the
user has to take care during flight planning and particularly flight execution, to avoid these
effects.
The main parameters to be taken into account during flight planning are:
Sun elevation
Flight line direction
Hot Spot appears only in the front-lit area of an image strip / aerial photograph. Specular reflec-
tion appears only in the back-lit area of an image strip / aerial photograph.
346 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Hot Spot
The Hot Spot depends on the following parameters:
Sun elevation
FOV of the lens in use.
Flight line direction (because the frame images are typically not square format)
Terrain texture (terrain roughness in sub-pixel range area)
Specular reflection
Specular reflection depends on the following parameters:
Sun elevationFOV of the lens in use.
Mirrorlike properties of the terrain
Avoiding Hot Spot and specular reflection

As mentioned above FOV, flight line direction and sun elevation must be taken into account to
avoid Hot Spot or specular reflection in the image.No Hot Spot or specular reflection (on flat ter-
rain) will occur if the sun elevation is lower than half FOV.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 347

Integration time (IT)

As explained in Table 92 on Page 343 the IT is similar to the term exposure time for film-based
image capture. A correct IT is essential to obtain digital image data in good quality.
IT depends on the following parameters

Terrain reflection
Sun elevation, Atmosphere, Aerosol/Haze, terrain type.
Optical systems
Lens aperture and transmission, filter transmission and bandwidth.
CCD chain
Pixel size, conversion gain, spectral sensitivity, resolution AD converter.
The parameters listed for the optical system and the CCD chain are given by the Leica RCD30
design. The parameters listed in the group Terrain response needs to be taken into account to
obtain data in good image quality. If for a certain terrain response the IT is too short the digital
image will be underexposed. This will result in a noisy image and a loss of detail in the areas of
low reflectance. If the IT is too long the image will be overexposed. In this case areas of high
reflectance will appear saturated (washed out) in the digital image.
In standard Leica RCD30 operation the IT is controlled automatically. But the user can also set
the IT manually in steps in the range from 1.25 ms to 20 ms.
Dependant factors for the IT

The brighter the scene the shorter the required IT
High sun elevation results in a short IT
High terrain reflection results in a short IT
Table 96. Examples of a scene at different sun elevation
Low sun elevation Medium sun elevation High sun elevation
Global illumination Global illumination Global illumination

20,000 lux 40,000 lux 80,000 lux
348 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Achieving maximum image quality with Leica RCD30
Determine correct exposure

For most survey flights ares, correct exposure is achieved by using the Leica FCMS Automatic
Exposure Control. This includes also correct use of the store function. Details about Auto IT
operation are given in section "Automatic integration time control" in Volume 1, Chapter 4 on
Page 87.
For some challenging areas e.g., around water bodies or areas with and without snow cover, the
automatic exposure control may requires adjustment to provide maximum image quality for that
type of ground. In those cases, either a correction factor is applied to the Auto IT setting or the
exposure setting is determined when flying over a representative area and the settings are then
fixed for flying the flight line or mission.
Preventing motion-induced image smear

Motion-induced image smear is the result of aircraft motion that occurs during the time when the
camera shutter is open. Angular motion can be the rotation of the aircraft (roll, pitch or yaw) due
to maneuvers or atmospheric turbulence. This motion is compensated by the Leica PAV80 Gyro-
stabilized camera mount. Motion-induced image smear is also be caused by the forward motion
of the aircraft in flight. This is compensated by the FMC device of the Leica RCD30.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 349

Flight preparation for imaging sensors
Determine the flight window by using the Sun Angles tool in Leica FPES
Proceed as follows
1. Select AOI or flight line
2. Click with Right Mouse button to open Quick Menu
3. Select Sun Angle tool
4. Enter the desired date for the photo flight

5. Set time offset to UTC
6. Check daylight saving, if required
7. Select the Lens
8. Define desired minimum and maximum sun elevation
9. Adjust the image quality factor if required.
As higher the factor as better the image quality. Factor 1x gives reasonable image data qual-
ity. List of correction factors for different conditions and terrain:
- To obtain best image data quality, increase by 2x.
- Overcast sky, increase up to 4x
- Low reflection ares (e.g. forest) increase up to 4x
- High reflection area (e.g. desert) reduced up to 2x.
10. Select TAB Elevation
The white window in the graphics represents the time range during the day where image data
with the desired quality can be recorded.
The green section in the graphic defines the time range(s) during the day where the sun elevation
is within the specified range.
350 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Flight Planning for imaging sensors

Important: For flight planning please take the following into account:
section "Important notes for the photo flight" in Volume 1, Chapter 4 on Page 53.
section "Flight recommendations and mandatory procedures" in Volume 1, Chapter 4 on
Page 53.
Planning parameters
GSD
Important: For direct digital image acquisition the term Photo Scale should never be taken as
an input parameter for flight planning. For digital imaging sensors all flight planning should be
based on GSD. For details please see Table 97 below.
Tip: Practice has proven the excellent Leica RCD30 image quality. For direct digital image
acquisition with Leica RCD30 a GSD twice the size of the pixel size on ground of scanned film
images can be used.
The average GSD for various maps scales is given in Table 97 below. For many applications the
map standard is less critical than the one given in Table 97.
Table 97. Average GSD for various map scales
Average GSD Map Scale Map standard Comparable film photographs
with x-y contour photo scale pixel size on

Leica RCD30 accuracy interval ground of
RMSE scanned film
3.5 - 7 cm 1: 500 0.125 m 0.25 m 1: 3,000 to 1: 5,500 2.5 - 5 cm
7 - 11 cm 1: 1000 0.25 m 0.5 m 1: 5,000 to 1: 8,000 5 - 7.5 cm
11 - 15 cm 1: 1,500 0.4 m 0.75 m 1: 6,500 to 1:10,000 7.5 - 10 cm
15 - 21 cm 1: 2,000 0.5 m 1m 1: 8,000 to 1: 11,000 10 - 15 cm
18 - 25 cm 1: 2,500 0.60 m 1.25 m 1: 8,500 to 1: 13,000 12.5 - 17.5 cm
21 - 35 cm 1: 5,000 1.25 m 2.5 m 1: 12,000 to 1: 18,000 15 - 25 cm
28 - 42 cm 1: 10,000 2.50 m 5m 1: 17,000 to 1: 27,000 20 - 30 cm
35 - 50 cm 1: 20,000 5m 10 m 1: 25,000 to 1: 35,000 25 - 35 cm
35 - 57 cm 1: 25,000 6.25 m 12.5 m 1: 28,000 to 1: 42,000 25 - 40 cm
35 - 70 cm 1: 50,000 12.5 m 20 m 1: 40,000 to 1: 60,000 25 - 50 cm
35 - 90 cm 1: 100,000 25 m 50 m 1: 60,000 to 1: 90,000 25 - 50 cm
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 351

Planning data overview

Table 98. Image size, FOV, b/h ratio for 50 mm and 80 mm focal length
Lens Image size FoV Base-height ratio
across along across along 60% 70% 80%

track track track track
NAG-D f=50mm 56.5 43.8 0.32 0.24 0.16
53.7 40.2
NAT-D f=80mm mm mm 37.1 28.2 0.20 0.15 0.10
Table 99. GSD, flying height and footprint size for 50 mm and 80 mm focal length
GSD Flying height Footprint

NAG-D f=50 mm NAT-D f= 80 mm across track along track
5 cm 417 m 667 m 448 m 335 m
10 cm 833 m 1,333m 896 m 671 m
15cm 1,250 m 2,000 m 1,343 m 1,006 m
20 cm 1,667 m 2,667 m 1,791 m 1,342 m
25 cm 2,083 m 3,333 m 2,239 m 1,677 m
30 cm 2,500 m 4,000 m 2,687 m 2,012 m
35 cm 2,917 m 4,667 m 3,135 m 2,348 m
40 cm 3,333 m 5,333 m 3,582 m 2,683 m
50 cm 4,167 m 6,667 m 4,478 m 3,354 m
60 cm 5,000 m 8,000 m 5,374 m 4,025 m
70 cm 5,833 m 9,333 m 6,269 m 4,696 m
80 cm 6,667 m 10,667 m 7,165 m 5,366 m
90 cm 7,500 m 12,000m 8,060 m 6,037 m
100 cm 8,333m 13,333 m 8,956 m 6,708 m
352 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Forward overlap
Typically the minimum desired forward overlap is 60%. When flying with 60% forward overlap
50% of all objects are on three photographs.
Sidelap
For Leica RCD30 flight plans the criteria for side lap are similar as for flight plans for film aerial
cameras. Side lap for different applications is listed below in Table 100, Table 101 and
Table 102.
If for flight execution a cross track deviation is accepted of more than a distance equal to 1% of
the swath width the minimum side lap given in the tables below must be increased accordingly.
Table 100. Side lap for Line Mapping, Ground Orthophotos and DSM generation
Terrain Minimum sidelap Average sidelap Cross strips

Figure 89
Figure 90
30 % 30 % No
Flat
15 % 15 % Yes
30 % 40 % No
Hilly terrain
15 % 40 % Yes
Highrise areas 30 % 50 % No
15 % 50 % Yes
Table 101. Side lap for True Orthophotos
Terrain Minimum sidelap Cross strips

DTM based flight planning Figure 89
Flat 60 % No
Hilly terrain 60 % No
Highrise areas 60 % No
Table 102. Side lap for 3D Model Extraction
Terrain Minimum sidelap Cross strips

between flight lines and between cross strips Figure 91
DTM based flight planning
Flat 60 % Yes
Hilly terrain 60 % Yes
Highrise areas 60 % Yes
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 353


For Leica RCD30 flight plans no restrictions need to be taken into account for flight line direc-
tion. But flight line direction can be required for various purposes:
to minimize flying time
to meet requirements for a particular project
for remote sensing applications
The flight lines should be in a direction which minimizes illumination effects. In general
illumination effects are minimized if the flight direction is aligned with the solar azimuth,
i.e. it is best to fly towards the sun or with the sun in the back. The illumination effects are
worst when flight direction and solar azimuth are perpendicular, i.e. the sun is to the right or
left side of the plane.
354 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Flight arrangements
Depending on the application the flight plan is made for one of the following flight arrange-
ments:
Block without cross strips
Block with cross strips
Corridor mapping
In all cases few Ground Control Points are recommended to be able to eliminate the datum defi-
ciencies and refraction errors during the Aerial Triangulation. It is strongly recommended to use
dual control points in each location to increase the reliability.
Block without cross strips

This arrangement is the preferred flight plan layout for applications like:
True orthophotos
Ground orthophotos
DSM generation
Remote sensing
The block can have any shape. Four 3D-Ground Control Points should be placed somewhere in
the corner areas of the block. An example is given in Figure 89 below.
Figure 89: Example Block layout without cross strips
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 355

Block with cross strips

This arrangement is the preferred flight plan layout for applications like:
Line Mapping. Stereo Feature extraction requires high pointing accuracy.
3D Model extraction. When the objective is to make all objects viewable from all sides.
The block can have any shape. At each corner a 3D-Ground Control Point should be placed such
that it is covered by the flight line as well as by the cross strip. Examples are given in Figure 90
and Figure 91 below.
Figure 90: Example Block with cross strips for Line Mapping
Figure 91: Example Block with cross strips for 3D Model extraction
356 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Corridor mapping
At each corner of a strip of the corridor two 3D-Ground Control Points should be placed such
that it is covered by the current flight line and by the flight line next in sequence. An example is
given in Figure 92 below.
Figure 92: Example Corridor Mapping
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 357

358 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Chapter 3 Leica FCMS - Introduction
Version 4.01-61 Oct / 19 / 2012 359

General
Leica FCMS tasks

At the heart of the Leica RCD30 operation is the Flight & Sensor Control Management System
(Leica FCMS). All aspects of the Leica RCD30 operation are conducted using this software.
Leica FCMS Software consists of various modules. Each one is licensed separately.
Main tasks of the Software module Sensor Control

Sensor control and operation
For manual system operation. Controls components and shows status on views.
Configuration management
Allows flexible system configuration.
System monitor
For in-flight error detection and recovery. Supervises the system and dataflow to detect mal-
function or operation out of limits.
Status data logger
Collects data for post flight error analysis.
Leica PAV80 option activation
Activates IPAS-Op and ComOp for the time the Leica PAV80 is operated with Leica
RCD30.
Main task of the Software module Flight Guidance

Flight guidance
Provides flight guidance information on various views for efficient survey flight.
Device control
Automatic sensor release and configuration. Automatic control of Leica PAV80.
Flight plan management
Monitors progress of project execution and provides in-flight quality control.
Main task of the module Remote Control

Locking Management
Operation of multiple user interfaces.
360 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Highlights of Leica FCMS

Leica FCMS has a fully integrated flight guidance module. This is a key element of the Software.
It cuts down the flying time as it takes over the following tasks during the survey flight:
Precision GNSS-supported flight navigation

Navigation and graphical guidance information is displayed during all phases of the survey
flight:
Approach to the mission area
During the turns
On the flight line
Both the sensor operator and the pilot can compare the aircraft position with the desired position
on their screens. The flight lines to be flown and the direction of approach can be freely selected.
But also an optimal route-finder algorithm can select the nearest flight line automatically. The
best flight path from the current position to the target is displayed. Wind speed and wind direc-
tion are taken into account.
Automatic sensor and mount control

During a flight plan controlled survey flight FCMS takes control of the Leica RCD30 and
releases the camera at the pre-planned positions. Additional release sequences can be released
manually at any time. The Leica PAV80/PAV30 gyro-stabilized mount is also controlled automat-
ically.
Monitoring the progress of project execution

For efficient photo flight it is important to know already in-flight which lines are not yet flown
and which lines needs to be re-flown due to various reasons e.g. clouds. Leica FCMS monitors
the project execution. It keeps track of the progress and supports in-flight evaluation. If desired,
previous flights are taken into account.
In-flight quality control

During the survey flight, Leica FCMS monitors various parameters such as GNSS quality, navi-
gation accuracy along the flight line, sensor status as well as other error conditions. If the survey
data are unusable, flight lines or parts of flight lines are marked accordingly. The user can also
manually mark unusable parts. This information is used for accurate in-flight or post-flight eval-
uation repetition.
Accurate repetition of specific flight sections

If a specific portion of a flight line is missed, Leica FCMS will exactly guide the pilot to the
missing parts. For a complete coverage of the project area, the missing part of the line can be
extended by a number of frames.
Flexible user log entries

This feature allows the user to make text entries into the log file during flight execution. The
entries are time tagged and passed along with the flight and image data to the flight evaluation
and data post processing step.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 361

Data logging for post flight evaluation

Post-flight mission analysis is essential to manage aerial survey projects, especially for large
projects if more than one aircraft is in use. All data required to evaluate flights are stored by
Leica FCMS during the flight execution.
362 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Leica FCMS, the optimal interface in the Leica work flow

Perfect integration of Hardware and Software into one system is the key for most effective work.
Leica Geosystems' proven integrated workflow starts with flight planning and ends with the
deliverable. With Leica FCMS the Leica RCD30 is tightly integrated in the entire workflow. This
increases productivity and cuts cost.
Figure 93: Work flow from flight planning to flight evaluation
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 363

GUI design
The operator communicates with the software through the Operator Interface. No mouse or key-
board is necessary. Leica FCMS features a graphical user interface with the following main fea-
tures:
clear icons on large buttons
see section "Figurative language on icons" in Volume 3, Chapter 3 on Page 364
simple touch screen interface
see section "User Interface" in Volume 3, Chapter 3 on Page 371
pre-defined system configurations
see section "Leica FCMS - Configuration" in Volume 3, Chapter 4 on Page 397
quick navigation within the menu-tree
see section "Navigation within the menu tree" in Volume 3, Chapter 3 on Page 373
on-line help
see section "Online help" in Volume 3, Chapter 3 on Page 375
Controls to group information

The graphical user interface ensures a uniform look and feel. During flight execution information
is provided to the user in a simplified form. Closely related information is displayed in controls.
A control is an area which displays standardized information. E.g. relevant information about the
line in execution is displayed in the line progress control. The controls are part of the different
selectable views. This ensures that the information always appears the same on all views. See
section "Controls" in Volume 3, Chapter 5 on Page 454.
Use of color to group information

For simpler identification information related to each other is displayed in equal color.
Examples:
Cyan is used as main color for the aircraft. Therefore, the aircraft symbol appears in cyan,
the aircrafts track over ground and the aircrafts altitude are displayed in a field with cyan
background or frame.
Red is used for the flight line. Therefore, the current flight line is displayed as a red line in
the graphics and the values for desired altitude and the target GS are displayed in a red
frame.
Yellow background is used for fix settings
Figurative language on icons

self-explanatory, easy to learn
same key figures are used in many icons
hot key buttons for quick change of view during flight execution
each component of the Leica RCD30 system has a unique symbol
well known symbols from other GUI are used in icons
364 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Key figures
Aircraft
Indicates flight and flight related data or activities.
Used in combination with flight line, heights and flight plan.
Sheet
Indicates data.
Used for flight plan and projects.
Examples
Red line
Indicates flight line.
Used in combination with flight line selection, project/filter and air-

craft.
Examples
Various shapes
Indicates system configuration.
Used in combination with manual configuration, other data set, etc.
Examples
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 365

Stylized terrain
Indicates image.
Used in combination functions to adjust image display.
Examples
Examples
Magnifying glass
Indicates view of details.
Used in combination with image

image,for
forzoom
zoomin/out
in/outand
andto
toshow
showmore
more
information.
Examples
Funnel
Indicates data filtering.
Used in combination with devices and actions.
Examples
Hand
Indicates manual actions.
Used in combination with other symbols.
Examples
366 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Trash Can
Indicates data deletion.
Used also in combination with data symbols.
Examples
Eye
Indicates visualization.
Used also in combination with other symbols.
Examples
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 367

Key figures for components of the Leica RCD30 system

Sensor symbol
Indicates information related to SH91/SH92 Sensor Head.
Used in combination to show next information, data filter etc.
Examples
Arrow with rotated circle

Indicates Inertial Measurement Unit (IMU).
Used also in combination with data filter.
Examples
Satellite - earth surface

Indicates Global Positioning System (GNSS).
Used also in combination with data filter.
Examples
Cylinder
Indicates Mass Memory (MM80).
Used also in combination with data filter and actions.
Examples
368 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Safe
Indicates internal memory of the system.
Used mainly in the data handling dialogues (upload, download,

delete).
Examples
Mount symbol (level and plummet)

Indicates Gyro-stabilized mount.
Used to display status or to set operational status or mount manually.
Examples
USB stick
Indicates external memory and transfer media like USB memory
stick.
Used in the data handling dialogues (upload, download, delete).

Examples
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 369

Icon types
Workflow
Examples
Enter data handling module. Enter configuration module.
Enter flight execution module. Return to previous menu.
Activity
Example
Start image data recording. Select to fly previous line.
Stop image data recording. Decrease value.
Change of view
Examples
Show Sensor Head status view. Show next sub-view.
Show Project view. Show Nose-up navigation view.
Button change
Examples
Change buttons on toolbar-display Change buttons on toolbar -display
buttons related to current view. buttons to adjust display of
images.
Change buttons on toolbar-display Change buttons on toolbar-display

buttons to select view. buttons to set filter to hide infor-
mation.
370 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

User Interface
General screen layout
Figure 94: Example screen layout
Title bar For name of view
View area To display information dialogs etc.
Status line For short help text or other messages

Toolbar Area for the icons
Each view has a title bar with the name of the view or dialog.
The content of the view area is according to the view or dialog.
In the status line, status or error messages as well as first help level texts are displayed.
On the bottom of the screen a bar with a maximum of 10 large icons is displayed. This icons
allow the user to control Leica FCMS.
Touch screen interface on OC52

On the bottom of the screen of the OC52 display, a bar with a maximum of 10 large touch sensi-
tive icons is displayed. This is the main touch interface area on the screen. All user interaction for
workflow commands, activities, change of views and button changes can be performed by touch-
ing the appropriate icon on the tool bar.
Beside the tool bar, additional areas on the screen are touch sensitive in some views. These addi-
tional touch sensitive areas enable user input shortcuts.
Examples:
to select an input field the user can touch the input area on the view
to display another view the user can touch the desired TAB on the screen
to show status of a sub-device the user can touch the corresponding control on the screen.
Figure 95: Examples of touch screen fields in different views
As an alternative to the [Next view] icon, the

TABs on top of the screen can be selected
directly.
As an alternative to using the [Up] or [Down]

icons to select a configuration sub-set, the
area of the desired sub-set can be touched on
the screen.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 371

As an alternative to using the [Tab left] or

[Tab right] icons to select an input field, the
desired input field can be touched on the
screen.
To display status views of Leica RCD30 sub-

systems touch the corresponding control.
Alternatively the selection can be made by

using the icons on the toolbar. Select
[Change of view], [System], [More],
[Sensor] etc.
Direct selection by touch and pan of graphics

Selection of flight lines by touch is possible in the graphics in the North-Up and in the In-flight
Evaluation view. Selection by touch is also possible in listings. e.g. Configurations.
The graphics in the North-Up and in the In-flight Evaluation view can be panned by touching the
graphics and dragging it with the finger
Hard key interface on OC50

On the bottom of the housing of the OC50 10 hardware keys are placed below the screen. This is
the main interface. All user interaction for workflow commands, activities, change of views and
button changes can be performed by touching the appropriate hardware key located below the
icon displayed on the Leica FCMS tool bar.
Figure 96: Hardware keys on OC50 for FCMS control
Additional hardware keys are located on the

housing on the left side of the screen. These
keys enable user input shortcuts. E.g. In 1st
level help mode the key located by the control
can be confirmed to display the 1st level help
text in the status line.
372 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Navigation within the menu tree

The user interface is designed to minimize the complexity of the system. Therefore, the tasks are
organized into just a few menus and each menu tree has only a few levels. The menu tree is just
the internal skeleton of the software. To use the system, the user has not necessarily to memorize
it. The user interface allows for quick navigation within the menu tree.
In menu Flight hot-key buttons allow for fast changes of views.
In menu Flight direct links between nodes in Flight to Configuration are implemented.
See section "Navigation within the menu tree in flight execution" in Volume 3, Chapter 3 on
Page 373.
Navigation within the menu tree in flight execution

During fight execution different processes (sub-programs) are running simultaneously. These dif-
ferent processes control:
Sensor and sensor sub-systems such as GNSS-IMU, Mount, etc.
Flight guidance based on GNSS and flight plan
Thumbnail-Images displayed on the real-time view
Project management - In-flight evaluation
Status of each process is shown on the operator interface. Therefore, the user can select different
views:
Sensor status
Flight guidance - Nose-up, North-up, In-line, 3D view
Real-time view
In-flight evaluation
From the sensor status view other views can be selected showing the status of sensor sub-systems
such as GNSS-IMU or Mass Memory.
Select the button [View] on the toolbar of the operator interface to select another view. This is
like switching from one process to another.
In terms of software design this is similar to horizontal navigation in the menu tree.
Select the button [More buttons] to change the toolbar. This is to show buttons to control work-
flow, confirm activities or to show a status view of a sub-system.
In terms of software design this is similar to vertical navigation in the menu tree.
Illustration see Figure 97, Illustration of menu tree during flight execution in Volume 3, Chap-
ter 3 on Page 374.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 373

Figure 97: Illustration of menu tree during flight execution
Navigation within the menu tree to reach Configuration
Menu Configuration
Leica RCD30 configuration allows for the quick adaptation of the Leica RCD30 for different
applications. In menu Configuration the user can predefine configuration sets as required for
the various applications. Unlike in menu Flight the Leica RCD30 sub-systems like sensor or
mount are not in a powered state in menu Configuration.
Menu Flight
Links from the flight menu tree to the configuration menu tree are implemented to enable quick
changes of the Leica RCD30 configuration during flight without the need to quit Flight and
select Configuration from the FCMS main menu. Unlike in menu Configuration the Leica
RCD30 sub-systems like GNSS/IMU, sensor and mount are in a powered state and initialized in
menu Flight. Therefore the global parameter Installation cannot be changed. Because chang-
ing the installation parameters requires re-initialization, which is performed by the system only
during the start-up of Flight.
Figure 98: Illustration of menu tree during configuration
374 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Online help
Online help can be selected from any menu level at any time. The 'Help' button is part of the but-
ton bar on each view. The online help facility consists of two levels:
First help level gives a short description of each button on the status line.
Second help level allows browsing of Leica RCD30 documentation.
Note: Entering help does not interrupt operation of the sensor. For example, if the recording of
data was activated, this status remains the same even if the user enters help.
First help level- short description

Select [Help] to activate first help level.
Select any button or control to display the corresponding help text in the status line.
Figure 99: Example view first help level
The Green background of the status line indicates that

first help level is activated.
In this mode, just touch any button or control to get a short
description of it on the status line.
Select [Help Return] to quit help level and to return to normal operation.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 375

Second help level - Leica RCD30 documentation

Note: Entering second level help is only possible from first level help. It does not interrupt
operation of the sensor. For example, if the recording of data was activated, this status remains
the same even if the user enters second level help.
Use [Left arrow] and [Right arrow] to jump to previous or next section of the text.
Use [Scroll up] and [Scroll down] to scroll smoothly in the text.
Use [Fast scroll up] and [Fast scroll down] to scroll pages in the text.
Use [Home] to jump to table of content of the Leica RCD30 documentation).
Select [Help-Return] to leave help level.
376 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Icon reference list

Note: Leica FCMS is designed to support a large variety of sensors. This reference list contains
all icons used in Leica FCMS. Therefore, some of the icons might not be used for the sensors in
use.
Most frequently used icons

Name 001-File
Type Workflow
Purpose Enter data handling module - file operations, data upload and download.
Name 002-Flight/Sensor Start-Stop

Type Workflow
Purpose Enter flight execution module.
Name 004-Configuration
Type Workflow
Purpose Enter configuration module. (When selected from main menu.)
Enter configuration dialog to current view. (When selected within flight execution.)
Name 134-End
Type Workflow
Purpose Exit Flight.
Quit FCMS and shutdown Leica RCD30 system.
Name 031-Return
Type Workflow
Purpose Return to previous menu. Quit or cancel. Appropriate message box appears.
Name 010-More buttons

Type Button change
Purpose Change buttons on toolbar - display buttons related to current view.
Name 011-Annotation
Type Workflow - Activity
Purpose Enter module to manage text for log file entries.
Generate a log file entry. Highlighted text is stored with a time tag in the log file.
Name 013-Terrain Reference Heights

Type Workflow
Purpose Enter height setting dialog
Name 111-Manual configuration

Type Workflow
Purpose Enter manual configuration dialog.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 377

Name 005-Service
Type Workflow
Purpose Enter service level.
Start system recovery
Icons for the on-line help

Name 006-Help
Type Activity
Purpose Activate first help level to display short help text in status line.
Name 158-Help detail

Type Workflow
Purpose Enter second help level to browse the Leica RCD30 documentation.
Name 159-Help return

Type Workflow
Purpose Return from help, first or second level.
Name 094-Home
Type Activity
Purpose Jump to table of content in Leica RCD30 documentation.
378 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Icons to control sensor release and integration time control

Name 145-Start/Stop recording
Type Workflow
Purpose Enter sensor release/sensor stop level.
Name 145-Start/Stop recording

Type Workflow
Purpose Enter sensor release/sensor stop level.
Name 008-Start recording

Type Activity
Purpose Start image data recording
Name 053-Single release

Type Activity
Purpose Release a single frame image
Name 072-Stop recording

Type Activity
Purpose Stop image data recording.
Name 185-Shutter Open

Type Activity
Purpose Open the shutter of the Leica ALS Laser Scanner.
Name 186-Shutter Close

Type Activity
Purpose Close the shutter of the Leica ALS Laser Scanner.
Name 012-Application class

Type Workflow
Purpose Enter module to select/define application class or to freeze/unfreeze integration time.
Name 161-Automatic
Type Activity
Purpose Set integration time control to automatic mode.
Name 162-Store
Type Activity
Purpose Store current terrain reflectance. Use stored value to adjust integration time.
Name 163-P Reset

Type Activity
Purpose Reset Histogram. Restart control loop of automatic integration time control.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 379

Name 051-Quality Error

Type Activity
Purpose Start marking a section on a line. (E.g. data are useless due to clouds)
Name 052-Quality Cancel

Type Activity
Purpose Stop marking a section on a line. (Because data are not any more useless)
380 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Icons to change views during flight execution

Name 009-Select View
Type Button change
Purpose Change buttons on toolbar - display buttons to select view.
Name 016-North-up View

Type Change of view
Purpose Show North-up navigation view.
Name 015-Nose-up View

Type Change of view
Purpose Show Nose-up navigation view
Name 017-In-line View

Type Change of view
Purpose Show In-line navigation view.
Name 175-3D-Navigation
Type Change of view
Purpose Show 3D-navigation view.
Name 019-Project View

Type Change of view
Purpose Show Project view.
Name 074-Text
Type Change of view
Purpose Show Project data alphanumerically.
Name 075-Graphic
Type Change of view
Purpose Show Project data graphically.
Name 018-Real-time view

Type Change of view
Purpose Show real-time view.
Toggle Real-time view between full screen image view and image view with controls.
Name 174-System
Type Change of view
Purpose Show System status view.
Name 088-Sensor Head

Type Change of view
Purpose Show Sensor status view.
Name 090-IMU
Type Change of view
Purpose Show GNSS-IMU system status view.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 381

Name 091-GNSS
Type Change of view
Purpose Show GNSS status view.
Name 089-Mass Memory

Type Change of view
Purpose Show Mass Memory status view.
Name 055-PAV
Type Change of view
Purpose Show Gyro Stabilized Mount status view.
Name 087-Histograms
Type Change of view
Purpose Show histogram view.
Name 078-Log Data

Type Change of view
Purpose Show log data.
382 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Icons to scroll in list

Name 023-Fast scroll up
Type Activity
Purpose Scroll up fast in list.
Name 024-Scroll up
Type Activity
Purpose Scroll up in list.
Name 025-Scroll down

Type Activity
Purpose Scroll down in list.
Name 026-Fast scroll down

Type Activity
Purpose Scroll down fast in list.
Icons to select input fields

Name 027-TAB left
Type Activity
Purpose Select previous input field in view.
Name 028-TAB right

Type Activity
Purpose Select next input field in view.
Icons to the Mass Memory

Name 157-MM Remove
Type Activity
Purpose Start FCMS controlled remove of mass memories.
Name 126-MM Swap

Type Activity
Purpose Start FCMS controlled in-flight swapping of mass memories.
Name 089-Mass Memory

Type Activity
Purpose Prepare Mass Memories for joint operation
Name 127-Twin Mass Memory

Type Activity
Purpose Prepare Mass Memorie(s) for single operation
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 383

Icons to enter values

Name 042-Large increase
Type Activity
Purpose Increase value in input field in large steps.
Name 043-increase
Type Activity
Purpose Increase value in input field in steps.
Name 044-decrease
Type Activity
Purpose Decrease value in input field in steps.
Name 045-Large decrease

Type Activity
Purpose Decrease value in input field in large steps.
Name 133-Default set

Type Activity
Purpose Restore default values
Input and message control icons

Name 164-Accept
Type Activity
Purpose Accept message, changes etc.
Name 155-Cancel
Type Activity
Purpose Cancel changes - restore previous settings.
Name 165-Save
Type Activity
Purpose Accept changes and save.
Name 166-Save as
Type Activity
Purpose Accept changes and save as new data set.
384 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Icons to select / unselect data

Name 029-Select
Type Activity
Purpose Select data at cursor position.
Name 041-Select all

Type Activity
Purpose Select all data listed.
Name 030-Deselect
Type Activity
Purpose Deselect data at cursor position.
Name 107-Deselect all

Type Activity
Purpose Deselect all selected data
Icons to edit / create data

Name 104-Edit
Type Workflow
Purpose Enter dialog to edit selected data set.
Name 105-New
Type Workflow
Purpose Enter dialog to create new data set.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 385

Icons for execution of planned flights

Name 007-Select Project
Type Change of view
Purpose Display project listing for project/flight plan selection.
Name 022-Plan line more

Type Button Change
Purpose Change buttons on toolbar - display buttons to select flight lines.
Name 035-Previous line

Type Activity
Purpose Select to fly previous line.
Name 036-Next line

Type Activity
Purpose Select to fly next line
Name 034-GOTO line

Type Workflow
Purpose List lines for selection of the line to be flown next
Name 037-Part line

Type Workflow
Purpose Shorten or extend the line at line start or line end point.
Name 038-Reverse line

Type Activity
Purpose Reverse direction of approach to next line
Name 032-Abort
Type Activity
Purpose If flying along a line: Abort line execution
If not flying along a line: End project execution.
Name 039-Recompute
Type Activity
Purpose Search for closest line
Name 056-Recalc
Type Activity
Purpose New computation of optimum flight path to next line.
Name 171-Execute part

Type Activity
Purpose Execute only part of line
386 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Name 172-Execute whole

Type Activity
Purpose Execute whole line.
Icons to adjust the image displayed on the real-time view

Name 061-Adjust image
Type Button change
Purpose Change buttons on toolbar - display buttons to adjust image.
Name 062-Decrease brightness

Type Activity
Purpose Decrease displayed brightness of image.
Name 063-Increase brightness

Type Activity
Purpose Increase displayed brightness of image.
Name 064-Decrease contrast

Type Activity
Purpose Decrease displayed contrast of image.
Name 065-Increase contrast

Type Activity
Purpose Increase displayed contrast of image.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 387

More icons
Name 120-Previous configuration set
Type Activity
Purpose Display previous configuration set.
Name 121-Next configuration set

Type Activity
Purpose Display next configuration set.
Name 151-Next ADS status view

Type Change of view
Purpose Show next sensor status sub-view.
Name 154-Next view

Type Change of view
Purpose Show next sub-view, wrap from last sub-view to first sub-view.
Name 069-Arrow down

Type Activity
Purpose Select section below, or pan graphics
Name 068-Arrow up
Type Activity
Purpose Select section above, or pan graphics
Name 070-Arrow left

Type Activity
Purpose Jump to previous item, section etc. Or pan graphics
Name 071-Arrow right

Type Activity
Purpose Jump to next item, section, continue in process etc. Or pan graphics
Name 097-Previous error warning

Type Activity
Purpose Jump to previous warning / error log file entry when browsing the logged data.
Name 098-Next error warning

Type Activity
Purpose Jump to next warning / error log file entry when browsing the logged data.
Name 108-Language
Type View change
Purpose Enter language selection dialog.
388 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Name 182-AutoConfig
Type Activity
Purpose Execute automatic configuration activity.
Name 183-RGB->NIR
Type Activity
Purpose Toggle to display either RBG or NIR images.
Name 184-R-G-B-N
Type Activity
Purpose Toggle to display R, B, G or NIR band.
Name 122-Detail
Type View change
Purpose Enter dialog displaying more details.
Icons to arrange the background maps

Name 112-MapOrder
Type View change
Purpose Enter dialog to arrange the order of the background maps for Operator and for Pilot.
Name 117-ItemMoveUp
Type Activity
Purpose Move the highlighted item up in the list.
Name 18-ItemMoveDown
Type Activity
Purpose Move the highlighted item up in the list.
Name 123-LR column

Type Activity
Purpose Set focus to next column. (Wraps around from most right to most left column).
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 389

Icons to zoom graphical information

Name 057-Zoom out
Type Activity
Purpose Zoom out.
Name 073-More zoom

Type Button change
Purpose Change buttons on toolbar - display buttons to shift / zoom graphical information.
Name 058-Zoom in
Type Activity
Purpose Zoom in.
Name 092-Zoom wrap

Type Activity
Purpose Change to next zoom step, wrap from maximum zoom to minimum zoom.
Name 066-Zoom optimum

Type Activity
Purpose Scale adjustment to display the whole project in this view.
Name 170-Center AC
Type Activity
Purpose Pan center of viewing area to aircraft.
Icons to show or hide data in graphical or alphanumerical views

Name 083-Show lines with one flight
Type Activity
Purpose Show flight lines completed in one execution.
Name 083A-Hide lines with one flight

Type Activity
Purpose Hide flight lines completed in one execution.
Name 084-Show multi flights

Type Activity
Purpose Show flight lines completed in more than one execution.
Name 084A-Hide multi flights

Type Activity
Purpose Hide flight lines completed in more than one execution.
Name 129-Show warned flights

Type Activity
Purpose Show flight lines flown with warnings.
390 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Name 129A-Hide warned flights

Type Activity
Purpose Hide flight lines flown with warnings.
Name 130-Show erroueous flights

Type Activity
Purpose Show flight lines flown with error condition.
Name 130A-Hide erroueous flights

Type Activity
Purpose Hide flight lines flown with error condition.
Name 086-Show not flown flights

Type Activity
Purpose Show flight lines not yet flown.
Name 086A-Hide not flown flights

Type Activity
Purpose Hide flight lines not yet flown.
Name 168-Show manual flights

Type Activity
Purpose Show non-planned manually released flight lines.
Name 168A-Hide manual flights

Type Activity
Purpose Hide non-planned manually released flight lines.
Name 079-Show planning

Type Activity
Purpose Show flight planning.
Name 168A-Hide planning

Type Activity
Purpose Hide flight planning
Name 169-Show path

Type Activity
Purpose Show flight path.
Name 169A-Hide path

Type Activity
Purpose Hide flight path.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 391

Icons to filter data when browsing log data

Name 076-Set filter
Type Button change
Purpose Change buttons on toolbar - display buttons to set filter to hide information.
Name 077-Remove filter

Type Activity
Purpose Remove all filters - show all information.
Name 085-Filter user actions

Type Activity
Purpose Set filter: show logged user actions.
Name 124-Filter Control Unit

Type Activity
Purpose Set filter: show logged Control Unit status data.
Name 100-Filter Sensor Head

Type Activity
Purpose Set filter: show logged sensor status data.
Name 101-Filter Mass Memory

Type Activity
Purpose Set filter: show logged Mass Memory status data.
Name 102-Filter IMU

Type Activity
Purpose Set filter: show logged GNSS-IMU status data.
Name 103-Filter GNSS

Type Activity
Purpose Set filter: show logged GNSS status data.
Name 081-Filter warnings/errors

Type Activity
Purpose Set filter: show logged warnings and errors.
Name 099-Date/time
Type Activity
Purpose Seek in the log database the entry closest to the defined date and time.
Name 095-Remove date/time

Type Activity
Purpose Seek in the log database the latest log data entry.
392 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Icons to copy data

Name 137-Upload selected
Type Activity
Purpose Upload selected data to system.
Name 135-Download selected

Type Activity
Purpose Download selected to external memory device.
Name 050-Download log data

Type Activity
Purpose Download system log data to external memory device.
Icons in service area

Name 047-SW-Upload
Type Workflow
Purpose Enter dialog to upload new firmware, software releases and modules.

Type Activity
Purpose Download log data to external memory device.
Name 005-Service
Type Workflow
Purpose Upload special configuration
Name 173-License
Type Workflow
Purpose Upload or check license.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 393

Icons to delete data

Name 106-Delete
Type Workflow
Purpose Enter data delete level.
Name 49-Delete MM
Type Workflow
Purpose Enter dialog to delete data on Mass Memory
Name 138-Delete external

Type Workflow
Purpose Enter dialog to delete data on external memory device.
Name 139-Delete internal

Type Workflow
Purpose Enter dialog to delete data on internal memory of system.
Name 40-Delete selected

Type Activity
Purpose Delete selected data.
Name 167-Delete configuration

Type Activity
Purpose Delete highlighted configuration set.
Name 093-Delete annotation

Type Activity
Purpose Delete highlighted annotation text line from the text list.
Name 140-Delete flights

Type Workflow
Purpose Enter dialog to select flights to delete it from the flight plan database.
Name 142-Delete projects

Type Workflow
Purpose Enter dialog to select projects to delete it from the flight plan database.
Name 144-Delete maps

Type Workflow
Purpose Enter dialog to select maps to delete it from the internal memory.
394 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Icons for stabilized mount

Name 055-PAV
Type Change of view
Purpose Show Gyro-stabilized Mount status view.
Name 008-Start
Type Activity
Purpose Start self test
Name 178-PAV-Auto
Type Activity
Purpose Set operational mode of Gyro-stabilized Mount to AUTO
Name 179-PAV-Auto
Type Activity
Purpose Set operational mode of Gyro-stabilized Mount to OFF
Name 176-ListWarning
Type Change of view
Purpose Show logged warnings and errors
Name 177-ListPAV
Type Change of view
Purpose Show logged mount performance data.
Name 078-Log Data

Type Change of view
Purpose Show log data.

Type Activity
Purpose Download mount log data to external memory device.
Name 164-Accept
Type Activity
Purpose Move mount to desired position
Name 165-Save
Type Activity
Purpose Store current attitude angle as maximum range.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 395

396 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Chapter 4 Leica FCMS - Configuration
Version 4.01-61 Oct / 19 / 2012 397

About configuration
Configuration data base
Overview
All configurable parameters are stored in a configuration data base. From the users point the
parameters are grouped as given in Table 103:
Table 103. Overview configurable parameters
Scope Main Group Group Sub-Group

Configuration Set Sensor & Height Sensor
See page 446
Height
System Hardware Primary Sensor
See page 404
Secondary Sensor
GNSS/IMU System
Multi-sensor configuration
Global 1 Flight & Release Guidance Project
See page 424 Guidance Approach
Time Zone
Installation
Real-time view
Global 2 Units
See page 440
Views
Maps
Advanced
See page 445.
The configuration of the Leica RCD30 system is given by a Sensor and height configuration set
and the Global configuration consisting of Hardware, Global 1, Global 2 and Advanced.
Leica RCD30 configuration sets allow for the quick adaptation of the Leica RCD30 for different
applications. Just select a configuration set and all relevant configuration parameters for an appli-
cation are set in the Leica RCD30 system.
398 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Data base structure

Configuration of sensor and height parameters
Sensor and height configuration parameters are stored in records in the main list of the Leica
RCD30 configuration database. The number of records is not limited. A record is called a
Sensor & height configuration set. Each configuration set in the main list contains fields
with links to records in sub-lists of the Leica RCD30 Sensor & height configuration data-
base. A sub-list contains closely related configuration parameters. Examples of sub-lists:
sub-list with records for Sensor Head configuration, sub-list with records for Application
classes etc. The number of records in a sub-list is not limited. A record in a sub-list is called
a configuration sub-set.
Configuration of global parameters
Additionally global configuration sub-lists are defined in the system. Global sub-lists con-
tain system parameters with a scope not necessarily limited to an application. Examples of
global sub-lists: Sub-list with records for installation parameters, sub-list with records for
time zone etc. This sub-lists allows storing of different configurations to enable a quick and
convenient change of configuration parameters. The global configuration contains links to
records in global configuration sub-lists.
Figure 100: Explanation Leica RCD30 configuration database
Note: To change the Sensor Head configuration typically another Sensor & height configu-
ration set is selected.
To change the Time Zone the link in the global configuration to the record in the global sub-list
Time Zone is changed.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 399

Configuration sets
Select [Configuration] from the FCMS main menu to enter Leica RCD30 configuration dialog
view.
Figure 101: Example Main Configuration dialog
The topmost on the list is the Current configuration set.

The origin of this configuration set is displayed in the
right most column.
The next group of sets in the listing is the User defined
sets if such sets have been defined.
The last group of sets in the listing is the Pre-defined
sets.
Selection can also be made by touching the desired row.
Use [Scroll Up] or [Scroll Down] to select the desired configuration set.
The selected configuration set is marked with the highlighted bar.
Select [Configuration] to enter configuration dialog to configure the highlighted configuration

set.
Select [Delete Configuration] to delete the highlighted configuration set. A message window will
pop up to confirm deletion.
Pre-defined configurations cannot be deleted. An appropriate message will appear.
Select [Return] to load the highlighted configuration set and to return from dialog.
400 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Pre-defined configuration sets

This icon shown on the left-most column of the configuration set listing indicates a
set of type Pre-defined.
Several pre-defined configuration sets are delivered with the system. These sets can be selected
to load to the system. These sets can also be selected for editing to save as a User defined set.
The pre-defined sets cannot be deleted.
Note: A description of the pre-defined configuration data sets is given in the appendix to the
Leica FCMS release notes.
User defined configuration sets

This icon shown on the left most column of the configuration set listing indicates a
set of type User defined.
Any number of configuration sets can be defined by the user. To create a new set, an existing set
is selected, edited and stored under a new name. The existing set can be either a pre-defined or a
user defined set already defined.
Current configuration set

This icon shown on the left most column of the configuration set listing indicates
that this set is the Current configuration.
If a configuration set of type Pre-defined or User defined is selected to be used for system
configuration the set is duplicated and replaces the previous Current configuration set in the
configuration set listing. The origin of this set is displayed on the right most column of the con-
figuration set listing.
The Current configuration set can be selected during configuration just like a Pre-defined or
User defined set. This set can then be edited and saved as User defined. It cannot be deleted.
If changes are made to the system configuration during flight execution via a direct link to a low
level configuration node, the changes affect the Current configuration set. See section "Naviga-
tion within the menu tree" in Volume 3, Chapter 3 on Page 373. The modification will be indi-
cated on the right most column of the configuration set listing. The set of origin will not be
affected.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 401

Configuration
To enter the configuration dialog from the FCMS main menu proceed as follows:
1. select [Configuration]
In manual configuration dialog a summarized overview of the parameters of the selected config-
uration set is given. This is also the entry point for changing, editing and creating configuration
sub-sets.
Figure 102: Example of Configuration dialog for Hardware parameters

the Hardware.
A sub-set can also be selected by touching the desired
area.
Figure 103: Example of Configuration dialog for Sensor & Height parameters

each sub-set.
area.
Figure 104: Example of Configuration dialog for Global 1 parameters

each sub-set.
area.
402 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

of the selected sub-set.
Use [Next view] to display other views for the current configuration set.
On the OI40 you can also touch the TABs to change views.
Use [Arrow up] and [Arrow down] to select another sub-set.

On the OI40 you can also touch to the area to select a sub-set.
Select [Configuration] to show details of the selected sub-set and to enter configuration dialog for
the sub-set.
Select [Delete Configuration] to delete the selected configuration sub-set.

A message window will pop up to confirm deletion.
Pre-defined configuration sub-sets cannot be deleted. An appropriate message will appear.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 403

System configuration: Hardware

Important: Always perform a system check after a hardware configuration change was made.
Hardware configuration in Leica FCMS

Leica Geosystems Flight and Sensor Control Management System Leica FCMS supports a large
variety of sensors and hardware including multi-sensors systems and simulation mode. After
installation the parameters given in Table 104 and operational modes have to be configured in
Leica FCMS.
Table 104. Parameters Hardware
Parameter Setting
Primary Sensor Configuration See Table 105
Secondary Sensor Configuration None,
GNSS-IMU Configuration IPAS, Simulator, Simulator + IPAS
Sensor and GNSS configuration sets for different sensors

Table 105. Overview of configuration sets for various sensor systems
Sensor system Name of pre-defined Name of pre- Comment

description sensor configuration set defined GNSS
in Leica FCMS configuration
set
RCD30
RCD30
RCD30 PavSim
Ground test of any According to the system Simulator with ALS by FCMS command
sensor system to be tested IPAS Frame by IPAS event
Desktop simulation None Simulator None
404 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Enter Hardware Configuration

Confirm [Next view] to display configuration of parameters Hardware.
Figure 105: Example of main configuration dialog TAB Hardware
In the main configuration dialog a summarized overview

of the parameters of the selected configuration is given.
This is also the entry point for changing, editing and creat-
ing configuration sub-sets.
The dialog shows an overview of the selected hardware:
- Primary sensor system
- Secondary sensors system
- GNSS system
Use [Up] or [Down] to select another sub-set field.
On the OC52 you can also touch on the area to select another sub-set field
If the predefined sets matches select [Return] to open the dialog for Save, Save as or Cancel.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 405

Sensor configuration
Parameter description
Note: Some settings may not be applicable for certain sensor types
Table 106. Sensor configuration parameters
Parameter Sensor type Setting Remarks

Sensor type All select from list Select sensor type according to
Table 105 on Page 404.
Sensor generates MEP RC30 Yes If the frame sensor sends a mid
RCD30 No exposure pulse back to the IPAS
RCD100 input event port select Yes.
RCD105 FCMS checks that the pulse is
received and issues a warning if
it is missing.
FCMS also uses the pulses time
to store the frames position
accurately in the flight plan
database.
Generates Release All Yes Single sensor system: always
Feedback No Yes
Multi-sensor system: exactly one
sensor Yes, all others No
MM mode ADS80 select from list Only available for the Leica
RCD30 ADS80 and Leica RCD30
Minimum Cycle Time sensor specific Minimal time between frame
releases. Set this value to the time
the frame sensor needs after a
release to be ready for a next
release.
Sensor Port Settings: COM port setting specifies the port used for the
camera communication protocol
Mount All Mount type Defines mount type.
Use PAV80 Sim for simulation
only
COM port settings Defines the port used for the PAV
communication (COM OP)
Port setting for simulation: None
Configuration of parameters
2. select TAB Hardware
406 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Use [Arrow up] and [Arrow down] to highlight the sub-set Primary Sensor or Secondary Sen-
sor
Select [Configuration] to enter configuration dialog for the sub-set.
Figure 106: Example of Hardware Configuration dialog for Sensor configuration

the sensor configuration.
The fields displayed depend on the sensor type
Only advanced users shall make sensor configurations.
A description of typical settings for the various sensor

systems starts at paragraph Configuration of Primary
Sensor on Page 408.
Select [Default] to restore default values.
Select [+] button to increment a value or to toggle a parameter.

Use button with small [+] to increment in small steps.
Use button with large [+] to increment in large steps.
Select [-] button to decrement value.

Use button with small [-] to decrement in small steps.
Use button with large [-] to decrement in large steps.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 407

Configuration of Primary Sensor

The Primary Sensor has to be set to Leica RCD30 and the parameters defined in Table 106 on
Page 406 have to be configured by the user.
Mount type
A description of the parameters is given in Table 106 on Page 406.
A description how to enter the dialog and make the settings is given in Configuration of param-
eters on Page 406.
Typical setting RCD30

Select this type to operate a Leica RCD30.
Generates frame feedback: Yes

Parameter MM Mode defines Mass Memory operational mode. It can be set to:
Joint operation
Single operation
Backup operation
Select the type of the mount which is installed with the ADS80.
Do only select for training and test purposes PAV80 sim
Configuration of Primary Sensor for Leica RCD30 multi head systems are given in section
"Multiple Camera Heads Systems" in Volume 2, Chapter 6 on Page 233.
Configuration of the mount

Select the type of the mount which is installed with the Leica RCD30. Do only select for training
and test purposes PAV80 sim.
To make configurations on the Leica PAV80 select [Mount] from the Leica FCMS main menu.
Details about configuration of the Leica PAV80 are given in the Leica PAV80 Documentation.
Document code 764112.
408 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Configuration of MM mode
The MM mode is a configuration parameter of the Primary Sensor type Leica RCD30
To configuration the MM mode select from Configuration -> Manual configuration the
TAB Hardware and proceed as follows:
1. Select sub-set Primary Sensor
2. Select configuration set RCD30
Select [Configuration] enter the configuration dialog for the Leica RCD30 configuration set.
Use [Tab Left] or [Tab Right] to select MM mode.
Select [+] button to increase a value or to toggle a parameter.

Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 409

Configuration of Secondary Sensor

The secondary sensor defines the 2nd sensors type if any is connected to the Leica RCD30.
Note: This is a legacy option and not any more supported for new setups or new sensor systems
combinations.
Configuration of parameter Secondary Sensor
To configuration the Secondary Sensor select the TAB Hardware and proceed as fol-
lows:
1. Select sub-set Secondary Sensor
2. Select desired sensor type
Select [Configuration] enter the configuration dialog.
Figure 107: Example of Secondary Sensor Configuration dialog
Use [Tab Left] or [Tab Right] to select desired input parameter.


410 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Configuration of GNSS/IMU System

The GNSS/IMU system is embedded into the Leica RCD30.
Table 107. Receiver configuration parameters

System type Select from list Select system type
Mode Master For IPAS or IPAS Sim only
Slave In this mode IPAS is not configured
System generates PPS Yes Only applicable for NMEA. If YES, FCMS
No expects and uses the PPS signals; a warning is
issued if there is no PPS signal.
LAN IP Address Typical During configuration the system browses the
10.60.135.4 network to detect all available IPAS systems.
Port Master Used by IPAS controller software
Slave1 Used for ALS DL or ADS/RCD MMAgent
Slave2 Default for FCMS. Do not change it unless
advised by Leica support.
Slave3 Used for RCD100 or for frame camera attached
to ALS
Slave4 Used for RCD30 in Slave mode
Slave5 not used
MEP Event Channel 0 to 3 IPAS supports event channel 0 to 3. FCMS
monitors one of these channels. Select in FCMS
the same event channel as configured in IPAS.
In case of a multi- sensor system set the event
channel of the sensor which should be supervised
by Leica FCMS.
In case of a configuration ALS with attached
frame camera, the default connector on the
System Controller is Aux 1. In this case in FCMS
Event Channel #2 has to be configured.
RS232 Port Settings COM port setting Make sure the settings match with the NMEA
source port settings.
Accuracy thresholds Default or Only advanced users shall make user settings for
for real-time solution User settings Roll&Pitch, Heading, Position and Velocity RMS
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 411

1. Select [Configuration]
2. Select TAB Hardware
3. Use [Arrow up] and [Arrow down] to highlight the sub-set GNSS/IMU
Figure 108: Example of dialog for GNSS-IMU system configuration

the GNSS-IMU system configuration.
The active fields depend on the Receiver type

In case of IPAS the IP address and the Port has to be set.
For this the IPAS system must be connected and powered.
Select [Manual Configuration] to open a dialog to make user settings for the accuracy thresholds.
This button is only active, if the content of the field Accuracy Threshold is set to User setting.
Only very advanced users shall change the default settings.



412 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Typical setting SPAN (LAN)

This option is not available in the FCMS desktop simulation.
Select this type to use an SPAN system as a position source through a network connection. The
editable fields are "LAN IP Address" and Port. Typically there is only one system with the
address 10.60.135.5 available. The Port is typically Client 1.
Typical setting Simulator

Used to run FCMS simulation on a desktop computer
Select this type to use static default values for all position parameters. If the application "Flight-
Sim" is running, FCMS receives position information and a flight can be simulated.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 413

Typical setting Simulator with SPAN
Used for ground test of a sensor system.

.If the Leica RCD30 sensor system is equipped with a GNSS/IMU system SPAN select Simula-
tor SPAN
Select this type to use static default values for all position parameters. If the application "Flight-
Sim" is running, FCMS receives position information and a flight can be simulated.
414 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

FCMS multi-sensor configuration

A multi-sensor system consist of a Master system with Leica FCMS and a Slave system with
Leica FCMS. The Leica FCMS of both systems communicate over a network connection (TCP/
IP). The Master IP address is broadcast on the network and can be automatically detected by the
slave. Up to six slave systems can be attached. The master system provides flight guidance func-
tionality and automatic sensor release to both systems.
Leica ALS70 combined with a Leica RCD30 is an example of a multi-sensor system. Both sen-
sors are controlled by the dedicated FCMS sensor control modules. In this multi-sensor setup the
Leica ALS70 has to be configured as primary sensor of the master system and the Leica RCD30
has to be configured as primary sensor of the slave system. Licensing of the Leica FCMS mod-
ules has to be as follows:
Master system: ALS sensor control, Flight guidance and Remote Control
Slave system: RCD sensor control
Table 108. Multi-sensor type settings

Multi- sensor type None No parameters
Master No parameters
Slave IP address of the Master and Port
LAN IP address IP address
Port 1 to 6
Look and feel of FCMS Master and of FCMS Slave

GUI object Master system Slave system
Title bar Blue Black
Toolbar Grey Black
The Leica FCMS of the master system appears unchanged. The GUI is as for Leica FCMS.
Figure 109: Example Main menu
Master system Slave system
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 415

2. Select TAB Hardware
3. Use [Arrow up] and [Arrow down] to highlight the sub-set FCMS multi-sensor config.
Figure 110: Example of dialog for FCMS multi-sensor configuration
In this dialog the configuration can be set for multi-sensor

systems.
The active fields depend on the multi-sensor type.
Use [Man Config] to enter a advanced setting dialog.
Use [Default] to reset settings to typical parameters


416 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Configuration example: Multi-sensor system Leica ALS and Leica RCD30

Note: In a multi-sensor setup some components are shared by the sensor systems. See
Table 110. This has an impact to the primary and GNSS/IMU configuration. Details are given in
Figure 111 and following figures.
Table 109. Setup of Leica ALS70
Component Remark
GNSS/IMU system Leica IPAS20 embedded
Operator interface OC52
Pilot Interface OC50, GI40
FCMS licensing FCMS sensor control ALS
FCMS flight guidance
FCMS remote control
Table 110. Setup of Leica RCD30
Component Remark
GNSS/IMU system none- GNSS/IMU system of Leica ALS70 system is shared
Operator interface none- OC52 of Leica ALS70 is shared
Pilot Interface none
FCMS licensing FCMS sensor control RCD
Settings on FCMS master system
Figure 111: Master: Leica ALS70 FCMS Multi-sensor configuration
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 417

Figure 112: Master: Leica ALS70 Primary sensor configuration
Select for the hardware setup Leica ALS70 + Leica PAV80 + Leica RCD30 the predefined set
ALS+RCD30
Important: Parameter Generate Frame Feedback has to be set to NO
Figure 113: Master: Leica ALS70 GNSS/IMU configuration
The settings are equal to Leica ALS70 single system.
418 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Figure 114: Master: Leica ALS70 Installation configuration
The settings are equal to Leica ALS70 single system.
Figure 115: Master: Leica ALS70 Advanced settings
Important: Disable IPAS events. Set it to True
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 419

Settings on FCMS slave system
Figure 116: Slave: Leica RCD30 FCMS Multi-sensor configuration
Important: Restart the system after this setting was made
Figure 117: Slave: Leica RCD30 Primary sensor configuration
According to operational preferences, the MM mode setting can be also Backup.

Important: Even if the mount Leica PAV80 is used set the Mount for the Slave to None,
because the mount is controlled by the Master system.
420 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Figure 118: Slave: Leica RCD30 GNSS/IMU configuration
This setting connects the slave system to the GNSS/IMU system of the master.
Important: Set mod to Slave and the port to Slave 4 to ensure GNSS/IMU is not configured
by the slave and a free port is used for the communication.
Figure 119: Slave: Leica RCD30 installation configuration
Important: Select the parameter IMU Type to be CH6x with ALS 50mm or CH6x with
ALS 80mmrespectively to ensure that internal parameters are passed correctly. In case the Leica
RCD30 is revers installed, the user frame parameter for the Leica RCD30 has to corectely set.
See Figure 120, Slave: Leica RCD30 Advanced System Installation, if Master is 180 rotated
The settings for Offset Reference to GNSS antenna are just dummy on the slave. The setting of
the master are taken.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 421

Figure 120: Slave: Leica RCD30 Advanced System Installation, if Master is 180 rotated
Important: Kappa of Reference to User has to be set to 180 on the Slave

The settings for Offset Reference to GNSS antenna are just dummy on the slave. The setting of
the master are taken. t
422 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

System configuration: Software
General
Confirm [Next view] to display configuration of parameters Global 1 or Global 2.

The dialog shows an overview of the group Global 1:
- Flight release
- Time Zone
- Installation
- Real-time view

The dialog shows an overview of the group Global 2:
- Unit
Use [Up] and [Down] to select another sub-set field.

Select [Return] to open dialog for Save, Cancel
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 423

Overview configuration of Global 1 parameters

An overview of the parameters in this configuration group is given in Table 111.
Group Sub-Group
Flight & Release Guidance Project
Guidance Approach
Time Zone
Installation
Real-time view
424 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Configuration of Flight Guidance & Sensor Release
Introduction
During a flight plan controlled flight Leica FCMS calculates the optimal approach from the posi-
tion of the aircraft to the start of the line. The user can set various parameters to influence the cal-
culation. See Figure 124 below. The settings are made in the dialogs described in the following
sections of this paragraph.
Pre-configurations are delivered for different aircraft classes. See Table 112 on Page 425.
Figure 124: Illustration of lateral distances for approach and on the line
Names of pre-configured Flight Release configuration sets

below:
Table 112. Naming conventions in pre-configured Flight Release sets
Name Description
Slow AC Parameters suitable for aircraft flying at 70 kts to 120 kts
Standard AC Parameters suitable for aircraft flying at 110 kts to 170 kts
Fast AC Parameters suitable for aircraft flying at 150 kts to 250 kts
Very fast AC Parameters suitable for aircraft flying at 200 kts to 400 kts
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 425

Flight Release configuration
To enter this dialog from the FCMS main menu proceed as follows:
2. Select TAB Global 1
3. Use [Arrow up] and [Arrow down] to highlight the sub-set Flight Release
Select [Configuration] to enter configuration dialog for the sub-set.
Flight Guidance & Sensors Release configuration is split into the following dialogs selectable in
TABs:
Guidance Project
Guidance Approach


Configuration of Guidance Project
Figure 125: Example of Guidance Project dialog
Details about data displayed on the map layer in Leica

FCMS are given in section "Introduction to the use of
maps in Leica FCMS flight guidance" in Volume 3,
An explanation of the other parameters and settings is

given in Table 113.
426 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Select [Map Order] to open the Maps configuration dialog to define which maps will be
selected by Leica FCMS for display on the map layer. See section "Configuration of global
parameters Maps" in Volume 3, Chapter 4 on Page 443.
Table 113. Parameters Guidance Project

Flight plan Auto search for During flight execution Leica FCMS suggests the next
execution nearest route approach to the closest line within the project. Leica FCMS
selects the line direction.
Any time the user can select a different line or direction of
approach.
Nearest line, During flight execution Leica FCMS suggests the next
flown in planned approach to the closest line within the project. The line
direction direction is as planned.
approach.
Nearest line, During flight execution Leica FCMS suggests the next
flown reverse to approach to the closest line within the project. The line
planning direction is reverse to the planning.
approach.
Planned sequence, During flight execution Leica FCMS suggests the next
planned line approach to the line next in sequence. The line direction is as
direction planned.
The line sequence is defined in FPES during flight planning.
approach.
Planned sequence, During flight execution Leica FCMS suggests the next
shortest line approach to the line next in sequence. Leica FCMS selects
approach the line direction.
The line sequence is defined in Leica FPES during flight
planning. Any time the user can select a different line or
direction of approach.
Reverse sequence, During flight execution Leica FCMS suggests the next
reverse line approach to the line next in reverse sequence. The line
direction direction is reverse to the planning.
The line sequence is defined in FPES during flight planning.
approach.
Reverse sequence, During flight execution Leica FCMS suggests the next
shortest line approach to the line next in reverse sequence. Leica FCMS
approach selects the line direction.
The sequence is defined in FPES during flight planning.
approach.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 427

Table 113. Parameters Guidance Project

Target ALT MSL The desired altitude in the Flying altitude control shows an
height ALT MSL value to maintain a flight at constant flying height
mode above mean see level. The reference value is derived from
the flight plan.
This mode is typically used for fix wing aircraft. See
Figure 126, Illustration of target height mode ALT MSL in
ALT AGL The desired altitude in the Flying altitude control shows an
ALT MSL value to maintain a flight at constant flying height
above ground level. The reference values are either taken
from the flight plan if a DTM was used. This mode is
typically used with LiDAR for corridor mapping with
Helicopters.
Figure 126, Illustration of target height mode ALT MSL in
Show map Uncheck No data are displayed on the map layer
layer
Checked Bitmap maps, the vector data, location of Ground Control
Points and GNSS ground reference stations are displayed
independently on the Operator and Pilot interface. Each data
type can be individually checked.
Bitmap maps have to be uploaded to the airborne system.

See section "Upload maps" in Volume 1, Chapter 4 on Page
77.
DTM data have to be installed on the airborne system. See

section "SRTM data installation" in Volume 1, Chapter 3 on
Page 43.
All other map layer data are uploaded to the airborne system
with the flight plan. This data are the Graphic elements
and/or Ground control points added to the project during
flight planning in Leica FPES.
Show local Check If checked local coordinates are displayed in the position
coordinates Uncheck control. See section "Position control" in Volume 3, Chapter
if available 5 on Page 462. Local coordinates are available if the flight
plan was made in local coordinates or if a map with local
coordinates is loaded by Leica FCMS.
428 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Figure 126: Illustration of target height mode ALT MSL
Figure 127: Illustration of target height mode ALT AGL
Important: ALT AGL mode works only if a DTM was used during flight planning in Leica
FPES0. This mode is typically only used for specific LIDAR missions.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 429

Configuration of Guidance Approach
Figure 128: Example of Guidance Approach dialog
An explanation of the parameters and settings is given in

Table 114.
Figure 129: Illustration of lateral distances for approach and on the line
Figure 130: FCMS control of Leica PAV80 stabilization mode
430 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Table 114. Parameters Guidance Approach

Lateral deviation Typical range If the lateral deviation from the ideal course exceeds the
1000 m to 2500 specified value a new ideal course is calculated from the
m. current position of the aircraft.
See Table 116 The faster the aircraft the larger the distance should be. If
a pilot is not experienced to fly with Leica FCMS flight
guidance, this value should be set to a larger number than
usual.
Illustration of parameter see Figure 129 on Page 430.
Desired bank Typical value Leica FCMS calculates the turns according to the desired
angle 15 to 25, for bank angle. See section "Turns" in Volume 3, Chapter 2
deeply coupled on Page 340.
systems U- If the system provides a deeply coupled real-time solution
turns up to 45 a corresponding icon is displayed on the GNSS control.
Short turn / Short turn In this case the last turn is calculated as all other turns
Smooth turn is typically during approach. The desired bank angle is taken for
selected if calculation.
wind is taken
into account
Smooth turn is In this case the last turn is calculated differently than the
typically other turns during approach. The turn starts at the desired
selected if wind bank angle and becomes smoother the closer the IP is. The
is not taken graphic in the view illustrates the smooth turn.
into account A smooth turn allows corrections during final approach
without the danger of exceeding the maximum bank angle.
Switch view Typically 15 Flying time left to the IP along suggested flight when
before IP seconds FCMS switches to the In-line navigation view. The In-line
navigation view allows a more precise final approach.
IP Typically 20 to A certain time (in seconds) ahead of the first release point
(Initial Point) 60 seconds on the flight line, Leica FCMS computes a fictitious IP
See Table 116 along the direction of approach. See illustration in
Figure 129 on Page 430.
PAV IP Typically 10 to A certain time (in seconds) ahead of the first release point
20 seconds. on the flight line, FCMS switches the PAV to operational
See Table 116 mode ON-AUTO. See illustration in Figure on Page 434.
Wind No (cross) No wind is taken into account to calculate the suggested
flight path.
Set User setting for wind direction and wind speed are taken
into account to calculate the suggested flight path.
Auto Requires GNSS/IMU system! FCMS detects wind
direction and wind speed automatically. The results are
taken into account to calculate the suggested flight path.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 431

Table 114. Parameters Guidance Approach

Magnetic OFF/True Directions are displayed true north.
variation North
Auto/ Var Leica FCMS applies the magnetic variation for a line by
Model using the US/UK World Magnetic Model for 2010-2015.
Details to the magnetic model see:
http://www.ngdc.noaa.gov/seg/WMM/.
User Def User input of magnetic variation
Configuration of Sensor Release and Control
Figure 131: Example of Sensor Release Control dialog
An explanation of the parameters and settings is given in

Table 115.
Table 115. Parameters Sensor release control

Lateral warning Typical value If this lateral distance is exceeded when flying along the
75 m - 150 m line, the aircraft points to the grey warning bar in the line
See Table 116 deviation control which is displayed on the In-line
navigation view. See illustration in Figure 129 on
Page 430.
Lateral release Typical value If the specified permissible lateral deviation is exceeded
shut-off 200 m - 400m when flying along a line, the aircraft points to the solid bar
See Table 116 in the line deviation control which is displayed on the In-
line navigation view.
The sensor release is blocked. No image data will be
recorded as long as the deviation is exceeded.
See illustration in Figure 129 on Page 430.
Vertical warning Typical value If this vertical distance is exceeded, the actual altitude is
100 m displayed in the area of one of the grey warning bars
which are displayed on the Flying altitude control.
432 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Table 115. Parameters Sensor release control

Vertical release Typical value If this vertical distance is exceeded, the actual altitude is
shut off 300 m displayed in the area of one of the black bars which are
displayed on the Flying altitude control.
The sensor release is blocked. No image data will be
recorded as long as the deviation is exceeded.
Additional frames Typical value If only a missed part in a flight line is repeated, Leica
in repeat 1 to 3 FCMS extends for the re-flight the repeated segment of
the line by a number of frames. This is to avoid data gaps.
The safety factor is used to adjust the overlap of the line
segment. The higher the number of frames the longer the
overlapping section of the line segments.
Sensor release Auto In mode Auto the Sensor is released according to the
mode events defined in the flight planning.
Inactive In mode Inactive all planned release events are
suppressed. The Sensor configuration is set according to
the flight planning or to user actions.
If the user toggles the mode back to Auto on an
observation period, image data recording starts until the
end of the observation period or until the sensor mode is
reset to inactive.
PAV80 mode AUTO In this mode Leica FCMS controls the stabilization mode
of the PAV80 by software commands during project
execution. Leica FCMS commands the PAV80 to switch
OFF stabilization during approach and turns. FCMS
commands the PAV80 to switch ON stabilization when
flying along a flight line from the point defined by the
parameter PAV initialization time till the end of the
flight line. See illustration in Figure 130 on Page 430.
ON-AUTO This setting is to override Leica FCMS. The PAV80
operational mode is set to ON during the entire flight.
A warning message will be displayed in the status line.
OFF- This setting is to override Leica FCMS. The PAV80
MANUAL operational mode is set to OFF during the entire flight.
A warning message will be displayed in the status line.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 433

Summary of Flight Guidance & Sensor Release settings

Table 116. Typical configuration settings for various aircraft types
Parameter Parameter Slow aircraft Standard Fast Very fast

Group aircraft aircraft aircraft
Guidance Flight plan Auto search Auto search Auto search Auto search
Project execution for nearest for nearest for nearest for nearest
route route route route
Guidance Lateral warning 1000 m 1250 m 1500 m 2500 m
Approach
Desired bank 27 27 27 27
Turn smooth smooth smooth short
Switch view 20 sec 20 sec 20 sec 20 sec

before IP
IP 25 sec 30 sec 40 sec 60 sec
PAV IP 15 sec 15 sec 20 sec 20 sec
Magnetic Auto Auto Auto Auto

variation
Wind Auto Auto Auto Auto
Sensor Lateral warning 75 m 75 m 100 m 150 m

release
control Lateral release 200 m 250 m 300 m 400 m
shut off
Vertical warning 100 m 100 m 100 m 100 m
Vertical release 300 m 300 m 300 m 300 m

shut off
Safety factor in 2x 2x 2x 2x
repeat
Sensor release AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO

mode
PAV80 AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO

operational
mode
Note: The parameter desired bank angle is used by Leica FCMS to compute the radius in the
turn sections of the suggested flight path. If the aircraft is flown with a bank angle equal to the
desired bank angle the FCMS turn radius matches with the aircrafts turn radius. Wheter the
turn radius matches in a real flight depends on the aerodynamic characteristics of the aircraft. If
the turn radius does not match, adjust in Leica FCMS configuration the desired bank angle. To
adjust increase or decrease the value until the turn radius flown with the aircraft at desired bank
angle is coincident with the flight path suggested by Leica FCMS.
434 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Configuration of parameter Time zone
2. Select TAB Global 1
3. Use [Arrow up] and [Arrow down] to highlight the sub-set Time Zone
All time zones are pre-defined.

Daylight saving is handled by the operating system.
Figure 133: Example of Time Zone dialog
Select Configuration to display a time zone graphic. This

is for information purposes only. No user settings can be
made in this dialog.
Select [Return] to close dialog
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 435

Configuration of global parameter Installation

Important: Store the installation parameter with a unique name to reduce mistakes. Use the
aircraft registration number (also called tail number) as a name to save the installation param-
eters.
2. Change view to Global 1
3. Use [Arrow up] and [Arrow down] to highlight the sub-set Installation
Use [Previous Configuration set] or [Next Configuration Set] to select one of the records stored
in the configuration data base.
If the record matches:

If no desired configuration is stored in the configuration database:

Select [Configuration] to enter Installation Parameter dialog to edit the current record or to cre-
ate a new record.

IMU type. For not pre-defined IMU types see section
"Configuration if IMU type is not pre-defined for the
Sensor type" in Volume 3, Chapter 4 on Page 437.
Offset Reference to GNSS antenna as measured fol-
lowing the instructions given in section "How to
determine the antenna offset vector" in Volume 2,
mum aircraft speed.

436 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012



Use the aircraft registration number (also called tail number) as a name to save the installation
parameters.
Configuration if IMU type is not pre-defined for the Sensor type

Caution: Only make settings in the advanced system installation parameter dialog if the IMU
type is not pre-defined in the Leica FCMS database or the if the aircraft installation was not
according to the rules given in section "Orientation of sensor and mount" in Volume 4, Chapter 2
on Page 530
Use [Manual Configuration] to enter advanced installation parameter dialog.
Figure 135: Example of Advanced System Installation Parameters dialog

Offset Reference to GNSS antenna. This is the same
offset as in dialog Figure 134.
Offset Reference to IMU. The offset depends on the
IMU type and sensor type. See Table 117 below.
Rotation Reference to aircraft.
Rotation Reference to IMU. This depends on the
IMU mounting. Average accuracy is sufficient. High
accurate rotation parameters are applied in the
Origin of the reference as well as the GNSS/IMU data post -processing step.
orientation of the axis are shown in the
illustration placed in the lower part of Offset and rotations Reference to user
the view.
Table 117. Offsets and rotation Reference to IMU and Reference to user
IMU type Offset x Offset y Offset z Rotation Rotation Rotation

User def. Contact Leica Geosystems Airborne Sensor Customer Support
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 437

Configuration of global parameter Real-time view
3. Use [Arrow up] and [Arrow down] to highlight the sub-set Real-time view
If the set matches:


Select [Configuration] to enter Real-time view configuration dialog to edit the current record or
to create a new record.
Figure 136: Example of Real-time view dialog
In this dialog the following can be set:

- default real-time view
- default displayed brightness
- default displayed contrast

438 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012


Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 439

Configuration of Global 2 parameters

An overview of the parameters in this configuration group is given in Table 118.
Group Remarks
Units Predefined sets with definition of units for operator and pilot
Views User definable default views for operator and pilot
Maps User definable map order for background map selection by Leica FCMS
during flight execution.
440 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Configuration of global parameters Units
3. Use [Arrow up] and [Arrow down] to highlight the sub-set Units
If the set matches:

Table 119. Predefined unit configuration sets
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 441

Configuration of global parameters Views
3. Use [Arrow up] and [Arrow down] to highlight the sub-set Views
If the set matches:


Select [Configuration] to enter View Configuration dialog to edit the current record or to create
a new record.
Figure 138: Example of View configuration dialog
In this dialog the following can be set independently for

the operator and the pilot:
- default view during approaches and turns
- default view on the line
Check Optimized for the pilot to activate simplified

controls and toolbar for the pilot. If this option is checked
the pilots access to Leica FCMS is limited to flight
guidance related configuration and operation only.
Use [Tab Left] or [Tab Right] to move the focus to the desired view.
Select [+] to check the desired view per group.
442 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Configuration of global parameters Maps
Introduction to the use of maps in Leica FCMS flight guidance

During a flight Leica FCMS can display a map layer on the following views
North-up
Nose-up
Project
The data can be either

Bitmap Maps
Bitmap of DTM data
Leica FCMS generates Elevation Encoded bitmap or Shaded Relief bitmaps
Vector Maps
Ground Control Points
GNSS ground reference stations
The type of background data which is displayed during flight is configured in the dialog Config-
uration of Guidance Project. See section section "Flight Release configuration" in Volume 3,
Bitmap maps are uploaded by the user to the system in the FCMS File Menu. The procedure is
similar as for flight plans. Bitmap maps have to be georeferenced and the map projection has to
be assigned in Leica FPES10 beforehand.
SRTM DTM data are uploaded to the airborne system by using the installer provided by Leica
Geosystems. Installer and data are available as Article #780511 World wide SRTM data. Dur-
ing installing the user can select the regions to be installed. From SRTM DTM data Leica FCMS
generates automatically two types of bitmaps
Elevation Encoded bitmaps.
Shaded Relief bitmaps.
Graphical data like vector maps, GCP and location of GNSS reference stations are imported
and used with the flight planning. All data assigned to the project during flight planning in Leica
FPES become part of the Project. This data are exported with the flight plans to the *.FPD file
and uploaded when uploading the flight planning.
During flight execution Leica FCMS determines the geographic extend of the area displayed in
the selected view and loads automatically a map which covers this area. Leica FCMS checks and
selects the map based on the order the user has defined in the Maps configuration dialog.
In the Maps configuration dialog the user can
Define the order of the maps independent for operator and pilot.
Uncheck a map. In this case Leica FCMS will skip this map during automatic selection
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 443

3. Use [Arrow up] and [Arrow down] to highlight the sub-set Maps
Select [Configuration] to enter Map Configuration dialog.
Figure 139: Example of Map configuration dialog
In this dialog the following can be set independently for

the operator and the pilot:
The order Leica FCMS selects the map for display
The top item in the list is the first item which is
checked by Leica FCMS
Make a map active or inactive
For safety reasons DTM-ElevationEncoded maps
generated by Leica FCMS are not color coded for
display on the Pilot interface.
Use [Next Column] to move the focus to the desired user.
Use [Up] and [Down] to highlight another map.

Select [Move up] or [Move down] to define the map order.
Select [Select] to make a map active or [Deselect] to make a map inactive.
Select [Delete] to delete a map from the list.
Select [Return] to open dialog for Save or Cancel.
444 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Configuration Advanced
2. Change view to TAB Advanced
Figure 140: Example of Global Advanced dialog
In this dialog advanced configurations can be made.

Only make settings according to instruction given in the
Leica RCD30 documentation or by Leica Geosystems
Customer Support. Parameters see Table 120,
Parameters Advanced in Volume 3, Chapter 4 on
Page 445 or if advised by Leica Geosystems Customer
support.
Use [Arrow Up] or [Arrow down] to set the focus to ALS connection to ADS
Select [+] or [-] to enable the desired COM line
Table 120. Parameters Advanced

Release signals Enable Enabled by default
from FCMS to Disable Do not disable this feature, except Leica Geosystems Cus-
IPAS tomer Support personnel request this from you.
Extended status Enable Disabled by default
logging Disable Do not enable this feature, except Leica Geosystems Cus-
tomer Support personnel request this from you.
Display GNSS Enable Enabled by default
error message Disable If disabled GNSS error messages will only be displayed in
window the status line.
Beta features Enable Disabled by default
Disable Do only enable this feature if you have signed a Beta test
agreement with Leica Geosystems.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 445

Sensor configuration: Overview

An overview of the parameters in this configuration group is given in Table 121:
Sensor configuration
The following parameters can be configured for Leica RCD30. Some parameters and final set-
ting can only be made in-flight.
Table 122. Leica RCD30 configuration parameters

Integration time control Program Preferred selection, applicable for all
applications.
Shutter speed priority Used if the images shall be taken at a
specific shutter speed.
Aperture priority Used if the images shall be taken with
a specific aperture.
Manual Manual setting of IT/shutter speed
Number of Auto IT 3 to 10 Number of photographs taken during
adjustments shots an exposure test sequence. Such a
sequence is released either
automatically by FCMS before the
line starts or manually by the user
any time when not flying along a
line.
Adjustment along the line Yes The Auto IT control loop adjusts
along the line the setting for each
photograph, if required
No All photographs along a line are
taken with the same setting.
Pre-set shutter speed / IT 1/50 to 1/1000 Setting is computed in-flight by
FCMS if integration time control is
set Auto.
User configurable parameter if
integration time control is set
Manual.
Aperture (2.8),4.0, 5.6, 8.0, (11) Range depends on lens
Shutter / IT correction - 3/3 to + 3/3 User setting if integration time
control is set Auto.
2. change view to Sensor & Height
3. select desired configuration set
446 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

5. select sub-set field Sensor
If the set matches:


Select [Configuration] to enter Height configuration dialog to edit the current record or to create a
new record.
Figure 141: Example of RCD configuration dialog
An overview of the settings is given in Table 122 on

Page 446.
Figure 142: Example of in-flight RCD configuration dialog
An overview of the settings is given in Table 122 on

Page 446.
Some configuration parameters depend on values only
available in-flight. Details see
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 447



Select [Heights] to switch the dialog to configure the Terrain reference height. See section "Con-
figuration of Height, Altitude and GSD" in Volume 3, Chapter 4 on Page 449.
448 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Configuration of Height, Altitude and GSD

Note: These parameters must only be configured by the user if a non-planned line is flown. For
planned lines the parameters Height, Altitude and GSD are part of the flight plan and loaded by
FCMS if a line is selected for execution and if the configuration source is set to Flight Plan.
2. Select desired Application/Description set
4. Change view to Sensor & Height tab
5. Select sub-set field Heights
If the set matches:


new record.
Figure 143: Example of Height, Altitude and GSD configuration dialog
In this dialog, all relevant heights and altitudes can be set.

Related parameters are linked. After input the system re-
computes related parameters
Example:
Note: Depending on the topography it might be required to set height and altitude different for
each line. Therefore, during flight execution the Height, Altitude configuration dialog can be
accessed directly from the Flight main tool bar as well.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 449



Select [Sensor Head] to switch to dialog to configure Sensor Head. See section "Sensor configu-
ration: Overview" in Volume 3, Chapter 4 on Page 446.
Table 123. Computation of adapted parameters
Input Adapted parameters Fixed or unchanged parameters

Terrain height Altitude GSD, Flying Height
GSD Flying height, Altitude Terrain height
Flying height GSD, Altitude Terrain height
Altitude Flying height, GSD Terrain height
If the set matches:

450 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012


new record.
6.
If the set matches:


new record.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 451

452 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Chapter 5 Leica FCMS - Flight Execution
Version 4.01-61 Oct / 19 / 2012 453

Basic layout of navigation view during flight execution
Views
Different views can be selected during flight execution. See section "Views during flight execu-
tion" in Volume 3, Chapter 5 on Page 480. The views are composed of controls.
Controls
What is a control
A control is an area on a view which shows data relevant during flight execution
System controls
Information about the hardware like Sensor, Memory, GNSS etc.
Flight guidance controls
Information to navigate.
General controls
Information about the project, Zoom factor of graphic displays etc.
Figure 144: Controls on the navigation views
Figure 145: Controls on the 3-D navigation view
454 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

For details see:

Project control see section "Project control" in Volume 3, Chapter 5 on Page 475
Sensor control see section "Sensor control" in Volume 3, Chapter 5 on Page 456
Project progress control section "Project progress control" in Volume 3, Chapter 5 on Page
476
Memory control see section "Memory control" in Volume 3, Chapter 5 on Page 458
GNSS control see section "GNSS control" in Volume 3, Chapter 5 on Page 459
Wind control, Track and line direction control, Position control see section "Views during
flight execution" in Volume 3, Chapter 5 on Page 480
Nose-up navigation control, North-up navigation control, In-line navigation control, 3-D
Navigation control and Real-time view control see section "Views during flight execution" in
Flying altitude control see section "Flying altitude control" in Volume 3, Chapter 5 on Page 471
Aircraft to target control see section "Views during flight execution" in Volume 3, Chapter 5 on
Page 480
Line progress control see section "Views during flight execution" in Volume 3, Chapter 5 on
Page 480
Speed control see section "Speed control" in Volume 3, Chapter 5 on Page 474
Figure 146: Controls on the in-flight evaluation views
For details see:

Project control see section "Project control" in Volume 3, Chapter 5 on Page 475
Project progress control section "Project progress control" in Volume 3, Chapter 5 on Page 476
Data filter control see section "Data filter control" in Volume 3, Chapter 5 on Page 476
Line detail control see section "Line detail control" in Volume 3, Chapter 5 on Page 477
Project area control see section "Project area control" in Volume 3, Chapter 5 on Page 476
Graphic in-flight evaluation control see section "Graphic in-flight evaluation control" in Vol-
Alphanumeric in-flight evaluation control see section "Alphanumeric in-flight evaluation con-
trol" in Volume 3, Chapter 5 on Page 479
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 455

System controls
Take-Off control
The Take-Off control gives information about the status of the system during start-up, whether it
is ready or not for take off.
Figure 147: Example of Take-Off control
As long as the system is not ready for the flight an hour glass
symbol is displayed on the upper right side of the control.
The hour glass is replaced by a check mark symbol if all
components of the system are ready. After remaining in this state
for a few seconds the Take-Off control is replaced by the Sensor
control.
Sensor control
The Sensor control gives information about the Leica RCD30 system. It displays:
Camera identifier (Camera 1 or 2)
Camera image counter (Four digits)
Shutter time (Time used for the last or associated photograph)
Gain setting (Value used for the last or associated photograph)
Operational mode of shutter time / IT control (Automatic or Manual)
User applied exposure time corrections (only if in mode Automatic exposure time control)
Under and over exposure warning symbols
Graphic showing histogram classes of an image
Red flashing spot during the time a series of photographs is fired
Turning hourglass during the time the Automatic integration time control fires photographs
to adjusts the shutter time / IT and the Gain
Figure 148: Examples of Sensor control
1 = Camera identifier (camera #1)

1/1000 shutter time
4.0 diapragm size setting
A on white background: operational status is Automatic
integration time control
Red flashing spot = release sequence ongoing
Graphics with bars = histogram classes of current photograph
456 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

ST on yellow background in the icon on the lower left corner

indicates that the settings adjusted by the automatic integration
time control are frozen.
Diaphragm with black center and warning symbol on the

lower left corner indicates that the images are underexposed.
The image quality will be poor.
The graphics shows only bars for the histogram classes with low
integration. (Bars mainly shown on the left side within the
range).
Diaphragm with white center and warning symbol on the

lower left corner indicates that the images are overexposed.
The image quality will be poor.
The graphics shows only bars for the histogram classes with high
integration. (Bars mainly shown on the left side within the
range).
Value displayed on the right side of the AutoIT icon on the

lower left corner (in this example +3/3) indicates that the user
has applied an exposure time correction.
+ correction results in a brighter image.
- correction results in darker image
Turning hourglass on the upper right side of the control

This indicates that the Automatic Integration Time control loop
is adjusting the exposure settings (Gain and Shutter time).
Diaphragm with yellow center and hand symbol on the

right side displayed on the lower left corner
This indicates that the user has manually set the exposure
settings (Shutter speed and diaphragm size).
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 457

Memory control
The memory control graphically displays the usage rate of the memory. At the upper right, in
magenta font numerical information is displayed about available mass memory space and the
estimated recording time left. At the lower right, in black font used mass memory space and
current sum of recording time is displayed.
Note: Available disk space is the space which could be allocated during memory initialization
after [Flight] was selected or the MM was changed.
Figure 149: Example of Memory control
Joint operation
The icon displayed on the left side in the control shows a large
barrel. This indicates MM mode Joint operation
This is the case, if two MM30 are inserted into the MM30 slotc
in the CC3x and the system is configured for joint operation.
Single operation
The icon displayed on the left side in the control shows a small
barrel. This indicates MM mode Single operation
This is the case, if one MM30 is inserted into the Camera
Controller and FCMS is configured for single operation.
Backup operation
The icon displayed on the left side in the control shows two
small barrels, below one funnel is a lock icon displayed. This
indicates MM mode Backup operation
This is the case, if two MM30 are inserted into the MM30 slots
in the Camera Controller and the system is configured for
backup operation.
458 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

GNSS control
The GNSS control shows status of the GNSS receiver, the number of satellites in view and the
HDOP and PDOP value
Figure 150: Example of GNSS control
Navigation mode is in 3D quality

Currently 8 satellites are in view
PDOP is 2.1
Pitch and Roll is given for the sensors aircraft frame.

If the aircraft rolls from horizontal counter-clockwise the roll value becomes negative.If the air-
craft nose is lower than level the pitch value is negative.
The warning symbol displayed on the lower left side indicates

that the GNSS/IMU system is not yet in mode Full Navigation.
The deeply coupled symbol appears on the lower left indicates

that the GNSS/IMU hardware is capable to provide for
navigation a deeply coupled real-time solution.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 459

Flight guidance controls
General
An overview of the location of the controls on the views is given in Figure , Basic layout of nav-
igation view during flight execution in Volume 3, Chapter 5 on Page 454
Color codes
Information displayed on different controls but related to each other is shown in the same color
Table 124. Color codes in the flight guidance controls
Color Relationship Examples

Red Information Line direction is displayed in a red frame
about the current
Target GS is displayed in a red frame
line
Desired altitude is displayed in a red frame
In the graphics the line in execution is displayed solid red
Cyan Information Current track is displayed in a cyan frame
about the aircraft
Target GS is displayed on cyan background
Desired altitude is displayed on cyan background
Blue Information Suggested flight path is displayed in blue

about the line to
be flown next
Line length is displayed in blue font
Execution time of the line is displayed in blue font
The bearing to the next line is displayed in a blue frame.
In the graphics the next line is displayed solid blue
Table 125. Color codes in the graphical presentation showing the line status
Line Status Line label Line representation

North-up view Nose-up view In-flight eval.
Successfully flown Green Dotted grey line Green line
Flown with warnings Orange Dotted grey line Warning part

orange
Flown with errors Red Dotted grey line Warning part red
Flown but user set Black Thin black line Not recorded part
recording OFF thick black
Not yet flown Black Thin black line Thin black line
Next line Blue Thick blue line Thick blue line
Line in execution Red Thick red line Thick red line
460 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Wind control
The wind control shows wind direction, wind speed and wind direction relative to the aircraft.
Note: The wind control is only displayed if Leica FCMS is configured to take wind into
account. Configuration see section "Configuration of Guidance Approach" in Volume 3, Chapter
4 on Page 430.
The wind direction is defined according to definitions in weather reports.
The yellow background indicates user setting of the parameters
Wind direction is 176 (Wind is coming from South)
Wind speed is 14 kts
The grey background indicates automatic wind detection by Leica FCMS.

The red triangle indicates the wind direction relative to the aircraft.
The aircraft is slightly rotated to the left. The rotation angle is equal the angle
between the aircrafts heading and the aircrafts track.
Note: If the wind Icon is displayed without any numbers, theres either too little wind or FCMS
needs more time to complete the wind direction or wind speed calculation.
Track and line direction control

The track and line direction control shows current track in a cyan frame and the line direction in
a red frame.
Important: A flight line must be selected for the line direction control to display information.
For a non-planned line only the track information is displayed.
Important: All directions are in true north by default.
Shown in cyan frame: current track 031.1
Shown in red frame: line direction 026.1
Track and line direction are displayed in True North
The horse shoe symbol displayed on the left side of each frame
indicates that track and line direction are displayed with
magnetic variation. See section "Configuration of Guidance
Approach" in Volume 3, Chapter 4 on Page 430.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 461

Track deviation control

The track deviation control shows the aircrafts deviation from the suggested flight path. Units
are shown in the control.
Important: A flight line must be selected previously so that track deviation can display infor-
mation.
The aircraft position is about 1,000 m

left of the suggested flight path.
The aircraft position is perfectly on
the suggested flight path
The aircraft position is about 500 m
right of the suggested flight path.
Configuration of the track deviation control see section "Configuration of Guidance Approach"
Position control
The position control shows current position, Sun elevation and time in UTC
Example: Position is displayed in
WGS84 coordinates.
Example: Position is displayed in

local coordinates.
Configuration of display of Position control to display the position either in WGS84 or in local
coordinates see section "Configuration of Guidance Project" in Volume 3, Chapter 4 on Page
426.
Local coordinates can be displayed by Leica FCMS if transformation parameters from WGS84 to
local coordinates are available. This is the case, if either the flight plan was made in Leica
FPES10.1 or later in local coordinates or if a map with local coordinates is displayed in the map
layer. If both is the case Leica FCMS always applies the transformation valid for the flight plan.
462 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

North-up navigation control

This control is the key element of the North-up view. See section "North-up view" in Volume 3,
Chapter 5 on Page 490. The examples below show the North-up control surrounded by the wind
control, the track and line direction control, the track deviation control and the position control.
Figure 151: Example of North-up navigation control
This control displays a project overview in North-up

orientation. Flight guidance information is optimized for
approaches and turns. The example on the left shows the
control during approach to the line.
The detail below shows the suggested approach to the IP.
The line approach is opposite to the planned direction.
The example on the left shows the control during line

execution. The next line (blue) is already pre-selected.
The detail below shows the aircraft along the line (red),
the suggested flight path to the next line which will be
approached in the planned direction.
The line direction according to the flight planning is indicated by a fork at the starting point of a
line. The line label is displayed at the same side of the line. The examples above show, that a line
can be flown in either direction, as planned or in the opposite direction.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 463

Nose-up navigation control

This control is the key element of the Nose-up view. See section "Nose-up view" in Volume 3,
Chapter 5 on Page 489. The examples below show the Nose-up navigation control surrounded by
the wind control, the track and line direction control, the track deviation control and the position
control.
Figure 152: Example of Nose-up navigation control
This control is optimized for the pilot. It provides graphic

flight guidance information during approaches and turns.
The orientation is Nose-up. North direction is indicated
on the lower right corner of the control.
The example on the left shows the aircraft position on the

right side of the optimal approach path. The lateral
deviation is about 400m.
The optimum approach path will require a right turn. The
aircraft is already close to that turn. A cross bar indicates
the transition point from the straight flight path to the turn
part of the optimum approach.
The pilot should start the turn just before the cross bar
passes the nose of the aircraft icon.
The example on the left shows the aircraft already close to

the IP. The aircraft position is on the right side of the
optimum flight path. The lateral deviation is about 100 m.
A fictive line is displayed in thin blue. This is the

extension of the flight line towards IP and approach. This
line is an aid for the pilot during the final approach to the
IP. It allows to identify whether the aircraft is on the left
side or right side of the line.
The example on the left shows the nose-up navigation

control with the track deviation control.
The aircraft flies perfectly along the suggested flight path.

The track deviation control shows no lateral deviation.
464 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Line deviation control

The line deviation control shows the lateral deviation of the line from the aircrafts current posi-
tion. Units are shown in the control. This control is part of the in-line navigation control. For
more information see section "In-line navigation control" in Volume 3, Chapter 5 on Page 465.
Important: A flight line must be selected previously so that the line deviation control can
display information.
The deviation is -22m

Seen from the aircraft position the
line is 22m on the right side.
Seen from the planned line position,
the aircraft is 22m on the left side.
Configuration of the line deviation control see section "Configuration of Sensor Release and
Control" in Volume 3, Chapter 4 on Page 432.
In-line navigation control

This control is the key element of the In-line view. See section "In-line view" in Volume 3, Chap-
ter 5 on Page 492. The examples below show the In-line navigation control surrounded by the
wind control, the track and line direction control and the position control. The line deviation con-
trol is incorporated.
The in-line navigation control is optimized for the pilot. It provides graphic flight guidance infor-
mation during line execution.
Figure 153: Example of In-line navigation control
This control is optimized for the pilot. It provides graphic

flight guidance information during line execution.
The example on the left shows the aircraft position just

before reaching the IP. Also the PAV IP is just ahead in
time.
The red line with the circle shows relative position and
direction of the line to be executed.
The planned line is 59 m to the right side of the aircrafts

position. The offset is still tolerable. It is in the white
range.
The difference of true track and line direction is about
2.6
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 465

The example on the left shows a typical final approach to

the line. The aircraft is flying the final turn to the IP.
The line is about 188 m to the left side of the aircraft. The
offset is in the warning range.
The difference between the true track and the line

direction is 20.5.
The example to the left shows the approach to the line

with a large lateral offset.
The line is about 882 m on the left side of the aircraft. The
offset is in the release shut-off range.
The difference between the true track and the line

direction is 38.6.
The example on the left shows the approach to the line if

the line direction is opposite to the current track.
The line is about 3147 m to the right side of the aircraft.
The relative position of the line to the aircraft is shown in

the Aircraft to target control. See Aircraft to target
control on Page 472.
466 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

3-D Navigation control

This control is the key element of the 3-D Navigation view. It provides graphic and numeric
information for flight guidance. See section "3-D Navigation view" in Volume 3, Chapter 5 on
Page 493.
Figure 154: Layout of the 3D navigation control
Bank indicator and Pitch indicator: display of

information provided by the IPAS system.
Track and line deviation indicator
During approached and turns: displays the
deviation from the suggested flight path.
Along the line: displays the deviation to the line.
Height deviation indicator: displays desired
ALT MSL. Similar as the flying altitude control
Ground speed indicator: displays the current
and target GS. Similar as the speed control.
Important: Bank and pitch indicator are only displayed if the IPAS system is in the mode 'Full
Navigation'. If the sensor mount is installed with an attitude angle, the pitch information will be
different to the aircraft's pitch.
3-D Navigation control during approach

During this phase of the photo flight the control appears mainly in blue color. The target dot is
displayed in blue as well.
Figure 155: Example 1 of 3-D Navigation control during approach and turns
The 3D line indicator (tunnel) appears

symmetrically. This is the case if the
approach direction is a straight line
The ground speed indicator shows a GS of
156 kts.
The bank indicator show a roll angle of
zero.
The pitch indicator shows a pitch value of
zero.
The track and line deviation indicator shows a deviation of +2m. The value is displayed on
white background which indicates that the deviation can be ignored. The limit can be con-
figured in Leica FCMS.
The height deviation indicator shows a deviation of 0 ft. This is the case if the aircraft is fly-
ing at desired altitude. The value is displayed on white background. This is the case if the
deviation can be ignored.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 467

Figure 156: Example 2 of 3-D Navigation control during approach and turns
The 3D line indicator appears as a tube

turned to the right side. This is the case if
the aircraft should fly a right turn during
the approach. The turn will end if the air-
craft's heading is 271.
The ground speed indicator shows a GS of
111 kts.
The bank indicator displays a roll angle of
zero.
The pitch indicator displays a pitch angle of zero. The aircraft is levelled.
The track and line deviation indicator shows a deviation of -8m. The value is displayed on
The height deviation indicator shows a deviation of -427ft. The value is displayed on grey
background which indicates that the deviation should be corrected. The limit can be config-
ured in Leica FCMS.
Figure 157: Example3 of 3-D Navigation control during approach and turns
The 3D line indicator appears as a tube

turned to the left side. This is the case if the
aircraft should fly a left turn during the
approach. The turn will end if the aircraft's
heading is 257.
The ground speed indicator shows a target
GS of 180 kts and a aircraft GS of 175 kts.
about -14. The aircraft is turning left.
The pitch indicator displays a pitch angle of about +4. The aircraft is climbing.
The track and line deviation indicator shows a deviation of +246m. The value is displayed
on white background which indicates that the deviation can be ignored. The limit can be
configured in Leica FCMS.
The height deviation indicator shows a deviation of -627ft. The value is displayed on grey
background which indicates that the deviation should be corrected. The limit can be config-
ured in Leica FCMS.
468 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

3-D Navigation control along the line

During this phase of the photo flight the control appears mainly in grey/black color. The target
dot is displayed in black and if recording is ON it is displayed in red.
Figure 158: Example 1 of 3-D Navigation control along the line
The 3D line indicator (tube) appears sym-

metrically. This is the case if the planned
flight line is a straight line.
The height deviation indicator shows a
deviation of 0 ft. White background indi-
cates that the deviation can be ignored.
Grey background indicates that the devia-
tion should be corrected. Black back-
ground indicates that it is out of limit. The
limits can be configured in Leica FCMS.
The bank indicator displays a roll angle of 0.

The pitch indicator displays a pitch angle of 0.
The aircraft is on the final approach to the line. The sensor is not recording. The target dot is
displayed in black.
The track and line deviation indicator shows a deviation of +1m. The value is displayed on
The ground speed indicator shows an aircraft GS of 201 kts.
Figure 159: Example 2 of 3-D Navigation control along the line
The 3D line indicator appears twisted to

the left. This is the case if the aircraft track
is not aligned with the line direction.
The ground speed indicator shows an air-
craft GS of 125 kts.
The track correction would be 3.6 to the
left
The pitch indicator displays a pitch angle
of 0.
The bank indicator displays a roll angle of 0.

The sensor is recording. The target dot is displayed in red.
The track and line deviation indicator shows a deviation of -17m. The value is displayed on
The height deviation indicator shows a deviation of -427 ft. Grey background indicates that
the deviation should be corrected. The limits can be configured in Leica FCMS.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 469

Figure 160: Example3 of 3-D Navigation control along the line
The 3D line indicator appears twisted to

the left. This is the case if the aircraft track
is not aligned with the line direction.
The ground speed indicator shows a target
GS of 180 kts and an aircraft GS of 175
kts.
The track correction should be 2.2 to the
left
about +3.
The sensor is recording. The target dot is displayed in red.

The pitch indicator displays a pitch angle of about +2.
The track and line deviation indicator shows a deviation of +6 m. The value is displayed on
The height deviation indicator shows a deviation of -326 ft. White background indicates that
the deviation can be ignored. The limits can be configured in Leica FCMS.
Real-time view control

This control is the key element of the Real-time view. See section "Real-time view" in Volume 3,
Figure 161: Example of real-time view control
The Real-time view control displays thumbnail images.
During flight execution the real-time view allows to

compare the track of a flight line with the position of the
flight line on a map. In case the transformation parameters
have been wrongly set during flight planning the track of
the flight line will not coincide with the flight line on the
map.
The real-time view is for checking purposes only.
470 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Flying altitude control

Important: The flying altitude control shows as desired altitude always ALT MSL regardless of
the target height mode configuration. See section "Configuration of Guidance Project" in
Important: All altitude data are referenced to ellipsoidal height WGS84.
Desired altitude
Target height mode: ALT MSL - flying at constant altitude
The desired altitude for the flight line is taken from the flight plan or in case of manual oper-
ation of the Leica RCD30 it is taken from the Height, Altitude and GSD configuration.
Target height mode: ALT AGL - following terrain mode
When flying along the line the desired altitude is permanently updated according to the
height profile stored in the flight plan.
The flying altitude control shows the desired altitude in a red frame. The background color
depends on the target Height mode configuration. In case of ALT MSL the background color is
yellow. In case of ALT AGL the background color is grey.
The current altitude is shown on a cyan background. The current altitude source depends on the
target Height mode configuration. In case of ALT MSL the source is the GNSS. The mode ALT
AGL is implemented as option for the Leica ALS60. In this case the source is the ALS60 LIDAR
data.
The difference between the desired and current altitude is shown in black. The vertical bar in the
center of the control indicates in grey the vertical warning and in black the vertical release shut-
off range. See configuration in section "Configuration of Sensor Release and Control" in Volume
Figure 162: Example of Flying altitude control
Current flying altitude is 3,940 ft.

Desired flying altitude is 6,490 ft. (ALT MSL)
The aircraft should climb 2,550 ft.
The aircraft altitude indicator points to the black range. That is,
the aircraft is flying outside the specified vertical sensor release
range.
Current flying altitude is 6,890 ft.

Desired flying altitude is 6,490 ft. (ALD AGL)
The aircraft should descend 400 ft.
The aircraft altitude indicator points to the white range. That is,
the aircraft is flying within the specified sensor release tolerance.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 471

Aircraft to target control

This control shows the relative position of the next line to the aircraft.
The information displayed depends on the line status:

If no line is selected the control displays no information.
If a line is selected the information is displayed as given in Figure 163 below.
If the IP is passed the information given in the control is valid for the pre-selected next line.
Figure 163: Example of Aircraft to target control
The orientation is Nose-up.

North direction is indicated in the upper right section.
The relative position of the IP to the aircraft and the Line

direction relative to the aircraft is graphically displayed.
The x- and y-offsets to the IP are numerically displayed.
The Bearing to the IP is displayed in degrees.
The information is valid for the line labeled (numbered) A03
Line progress control

Note: A flight line must be selected that the line progress control can display full information.
For a non-planned line the line progress control shows only limited information.
The line progress control provides information about progress in line execution. The information
is color coded. See also section "Color codes in the flight guidance controls" in Volume 3, Chap-
ter 5 on Page 460.
Note: Leica FCMS can be configured to display the Line progress control optimized for the
pilot. In this case only the time and the distance to IP or line start respectively and the time and
distance to the line end will be displayed. How to configure see section "Configuration of global
parameters Units" in Volume 3, Chapter 4 on Page 441.
Figure 164: Example of Line progress control. Aircraft position before IP
Red: Time required to fly from current position along the

suggested flight path to the end of the line. Length of suggested
flight path.
Blue: Time needed to fly at current GS along the line. Line
length.
Red: Number of frames to be taken on the line.
Black: Time required to fly from current position along the
suggested flight path to the IP. Length of suggested flight path.
472 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Figure 165: Example of Line progress control. Aircraft position between IP and line start
Red: Time required to fly from current position to the end of the
line. Distance from current position to the end of the line.
Red: Number of frames to be taken on the line.
Black: Time required to fly from current position along the
suggested flight path to the IP. Length of suggested flight path.
Cyan triangle: Indicates aircraft position before IP.
Figure 166: Example of Line progress control. Aircraft position between line start and line end
Red: Time required to fly from current position to the end of the
line. Distance from current position to the end of the line.
Red: Remaining frames to complete the line.

Black: Amount of frames taken along the line.
Cyan triangle: Indicates aircraft position along the line.
Figure 167: Example of Line progress control. No Flight line selected
No information displayed because no line is selected.
Figure 168: Example of Line progress control. No flight line, manual release
Black: Time and distance flown since release start.
Black: Amount of frames fired since release start.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 473

Speed control
Important: The speed control shows only correct data if height, altitude and GSD are correctly
configured. For manual operation the configuration has to be made by the user in the Height,
altitude and GSD dialog. If a planned flight line is selected the data are taken from the flight plan
and automatically configured by Leica FCMS.
The speed control shows the target GS for the line in a red frame. Additionally it shows informa-
tion which depends on the flight status, whether the aircraft is on the approach to a line or flying
along the line. All this aircraft speed information is shown on a cyan background.
Speed control for frame sensor

In this configuration the speed control displays the current GS and the maximum GS. The maxi-
mum GS is computed in-flight by Leica FCMS based on the shortest base length on a line and the
shortest cycle time of the Leica RCD30.
Important: To avoid lost photographs along the line do not exceed the maximum GS
Note: Depending on the aircraft type and the GSD of the photographs, the indicated maximum
GS can be faster than the aircraft is able to fly. The indicated maximum GS just gives the GS
limit which shall not be exceeded. With a frame sensors it is always possible without restrictions
to fly along the line slower than the maximum GS.
Examples of speed control for frame sensor

Line is selected, the aircraft Current GS is 156 kts
is approaching the line Maximum speed is 230 kts
Line is selected, the aircraft The green check mark

is flying along the line indicates that the current GS
is less than 90% of the
maximum GS of 210 kts.
Line is selected, the aircraft A parachute indicates that the
is flying along the line current GS which is 150 kts is
within 90% and 99 % of the
maximum GS which is 158kts
Line is selected, the aircraft Warning: current GS of 154
is flying along the line kts exceeds the limit for GS
which is 151 kts.
For GS warnings on the GI40 see section "Error information on the GI40 along the flight line" in
474 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Controls with project related information
Project control

The project control gives an overview which Project, which Flight Plan of the Project and which
Flight Line of the Flight Plan is selected to be flown.
Also the number of the flight execution for the selected project is shown.
Figure 169: Example of Project control
The project name is St.Gallen

The flight plan name is Rheintal-E
The line label is REA001
The line number is 027
The project St.Gallen is flown the 2nd time: Flight number 002
If during a flight plan controlled flight the sensor is manually released by the user, Leica FCMS
adds to the project a non-planned flight plan to store the manually released flight line.
Manually controlled flight

This is the case if no Project is selected. If the Leica RCD30 is released either manually or exter-
nally by ASCOT, Leica FCMS stores the release information in a dummy project. For each
Flight such a dummy project is created by Leica FCMS. It stores information about all manu-
ally released flight lines taken during the period of start Flight till quit Flight.
The name of the unplanned project is generated in the format: YearMonthDayHHMMSS

A dummy planning consists of a 'non-planned Project' with a Non-planned Flight Plan. Each
release sequence generates a line. The line number starts with 1 and is increase for each line.
Figure 170: Examples of Project control
The project name is Unplanned 20060104150803

It was generated by the Leica FCMS to store information for
manually released lines if no project is loaded.
The flight line label is UL001
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 475

Project progress control

The project progress control shows information about the progress in the project execution.
In case of line or LIDAR sensors it shows the amount of memory in GB. In case of a frame
sensor it shows the numbers of frames.
Figure 171: Example of project progress control
Number of remaining and number of flown lines.

Length of remaining and length of flown lines.
Approximate amount of remaining and taken image data.
Data filter control

The data filter control shows the user settings for data to be displayed in the graphic or numeric
in-flight evaluation controls. See Graphic in-flight evaluation control on Page 478 and
Alphanumeric in-flight evaluation control on Page 479.
Figure 172: Example of Project control
The selections are:

flown lines / multiple flown lines / lines not flown / planning
Line flown with errors / warnings / manual released / flight path
Project area control

This control displays a thumbnail display of the whole project area and a red frame indicating the
area displayed on graphic views.
Figure 173: Example of Project area control
.
The orientation is North-up.
476 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Line detail control

This control displays details relevant to the highlighted data when the user browses project data
in the alphanumeric project view control.
Figure 174: Example of line detail control
Date and UTC time of line execution. If a line is flown multiple

times the date and time of the last execution is displayed.
The line in the example was flown once and was completed.
If a line is not completed the appropriate detail information is

displayed in the control: e.g. length of missed parts, number
multiple partly flights.
For lines flown with warnings or errors detailed information

about the errors are displayed in the control. See Table 126.
Table 126. Status icons used in Figure 174 and Figure 176
Status Warning and error information
Icon Description Icon Description
Line currently in execution Navigation, deviation exceeded warning
or release shut off distances, or speed
Line flown once Mount out off limits
Line flown multiple times GNSS constellation out of limits
Line flown with warnings Underexposure warning
Line flown with errors Overexposure warning
System configuration failed
Mass Memory - data recording error
IMU error
Temperature error
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 477

Graphic in-flight evaluation control

This control is the key element of the In-flight evaluation graphic view. See section "Project sta-
tus views for in-flight evaluation" in Volume 3, Chapter 5 on Page 498.
Figure 175: Example of graphic in-flight evaluation control
This control provides a graphic

project overview for in-flight
evaluation and control of
project execution. The
orientation is North-up.
The displayed data depend on

the user settings. See Data
filter control on Page 476.
The color codes are given below in Table 127

Table 127. Color codes in the graphical presentation showing the line status
Color Line status Representation is the graphics
Green Successfully flown The whole line is green.
Orange Flown with warnings The part of the line flown with warnings is orange.
Red Flown with errors The part of the line flown with errors is red.
Line in execution The whole line is red.
Additionally a fictive line is displayed. This thin red line
is the extension of the flight line to the IP (black square).
Blue Next line The whole line is blue.

Additionally a fictive line is displayed. This thin blue
line is the extension of the flight line towards the IP
(black square) and approach.
Black Recording was The part of the line flown with recording OFF is black.
manually set OFF
Not yet flown Thin black line
Flight path Thin black line
478 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Alphanumeric in-flight evaluation control

This control is the key element of the In-flight evaluation alphanumeric view. See section "Proj-
ect status views for in-flight evaluation" in Volume 3, Chapter 5 on Page 498.
Figure 176: Example of alphanumeric in-flight evaluation control
This control lists for each line

- flight plan name
- line number
- line label.
- status information (shown
with icons)
- the maximum deviation of the
flown line to the planned line
horizontal and vertical.
The displayed data depend on

the user settings. See Data
filter control on Page 476.
Table 128. Status icons used in Figure 174 and Figure 176
Status Warning and error information
Icon Description Icon Description
Line currently in execution Navigation, deviation exceeded warning
or release shut off distances.
Line flown once Mount out of limits
Line flown multiple times GNSS constellation out of limits
Line flown with warnings Sensor system error
Line flown with errors
no icon Line not yet flown
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 479

Views during flight execution

During flight execution several views can be selected. This will not have any influence on the
sensor operation, e.g. if the sensor is recording, changing the view will not stop it. The different
views allow the user to have preferred specific information displayed.
Select [Select View] to display buttons to select view.
Leica FCMS views for flight navigation and project management

Table 129. Flight guidance and project status views selectable during flight execution
View Icon Configuration Toggle view Icon Configuration

Nose-up Flight guidance No sub-view Flight guidance
and sensor release
control
configuration.
North-up Flight guidance No sub-view Flight guidance
and sensor release
control
configuration.
In-line Flight guidance No sub-view Flight guidance
and sensor release
control
configuration.
3-D Flight guidance No sub-view Flight guidance
navigation and sensor release
control
configuration.
Project No Graphic view No
Alphanumeric No
view
480 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Leica FCMS views for Leica RCD30

Table 130. Sensor status views selectable during flight execution
View Icon Configuration Sub-view Icon Configuration

Sensor status Main GNSS Status No configuration
configuration
GNSS-IMU No configuration
Status during flight
Mass Memory No configuration

status
Sensor Status Sensor

configuration
Mount Status Mount

configuration
Thumbnails and No configuration

histogram class
Real-time Real-time view View with

view configuration controls
Real-time view
full screen
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 481

Sensor status views
Main system status view

This view is displayed by default after starting-up flight execution. It gives an overview of the
main subsystems. It is also the entry point to select views to display detailed data of the Leica
RCD30 sub-systems such as Sensor, GNSS-IMU, GNSS or Memory.
To display this view from flight menu proceed as follows.
Select [Sensor System] to display sensor system status view.
Figure 177: Example of System Status view
This view gives an overview of the sensor system and the

main sub-systems.
Memory and GNSS control are displayed on the upper left
and center. In the area below this controls the status of the
system memory as well as the date and time of the system
is displayed.
On the right side, the Sensor specific controls are
displayed.
Select [Configuration] to enter main configuration dialog.

See section "Navigation within the menu tree" in Volume 3, Chapter 3 on Page 373.
Selection of sub-system status views

Select [More buttons] to select views for more detailed information about Leica RCD30 sub-sys-
tems. Views of the following sub-systems can be displayed:
GNSS, GNSS-IMU, Memory and Sensor.
482 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

GNSS status view

To display this view from flight menu proceed as follows:
Select [Sensor System] to display Leica RCD30 system status view.
tems.
Select [GNSS] to display GNSS status view.

Also, the GNSS control can be touched to display GNSS status view.
Figure 178: Example of GNSS Status view
The GNSS status view shows current values for position,

altitude, speed over ground, track over ground, date and
time. The lower section lists for every satellite in view the
satellite number, its status, azimuth and elevation angles
and the signal to noise ratios for both of the frequency
bands.
At the upper right a sky plot is displayed which
graphically displays the positions of the satellites in view
as well as the sun.
If display local coordinates is activated and if transformation parameters are available to trans-
form from WGS84 to local coordinates, local coordinates are displayed on this view in addition
to WGS84 coordinates. The name of the transformation is also displayed on this view.
Select [Filter Warning/errors] to show logged warnings and errors for the GNSS.
Select [Filter GNSS] to show logged status data for the GNSS.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 483

GNSS-IMU status view

tems.
Select [IMU] to display GNSS-IMU status view.
Figure 179: Example of GNSS-IMU Status view
The GNSS-IMU status view displays all position and

attitude information provided by the SPAN system.
On the lower left side the operational status of the SPAN
is displayed. All lights should be green during the flight
mission.
As the attitude information is coupled to the GNSS
information GNSS data are also displayed in the GNSS-
IMU view.
A sky plot on the upper right graphically displays the
positions of the satellites in view.
Gimbal status: OFF = no data available from mount

Available = data received from mount, but not used, because GNSS/IMU real-
time solution not yet available. (Status on ground)
ON = data received from mount. Aircraft frame available, computed
based on real-time solution and gimbal data. (Status in-flight)
If display local coordinates is activated and if transformation parameters are available to trans-
form from WGS84 to local coordinates, local coordinates are displayed on this view in addition
to WGS84 coordinates. The name of the transformation is also displayed on this view
Select [Filter Warning/errors] to show logged warnings and errors for the GNSS-IMU.
Select [Filter IMU] to show logged status data for the GNSS-IMU.
484 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Mass Memory status view

tems.
Select [Mass Memory] to display Mass Memory status view.
Figure 180: Example of Mass Memory Status view
The Mass Memory status view displays information about dataflow from the GNSS-IMU sys-
tem, the panchromatic CCD lines and the CCD of the spectral bands. The Sensor control, as well
as the Mass Memory control, are displayed on the upper part of the view
Select [Filter Warning/errors] to show logged warnings and errors for Mass Memory.
Select [Filter Mass Memory] to show logged status data of the Mass Memory.
Select [MM swap] to change in-flight the Mass Memories. Icon only active if Image data record-
ing is not ON. How to proceed see section "In-flight swapping of Mass Memories" in Volume 1,
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 485

Mount status view

tems.
Select [Mount] to display Mount status view.
Figure 181: Example of Mount Status view
The Mount status view displays information about the

gyro-stabilized sensor mount. Details can be found in the
corresponding device documentation.
Select [Mount mode] to toggle mount stabilization OFF or ON respectively
Select [Log data] to display logged status data of the Mount.
486 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Thumbnail and Histogram class view

This view display thumbnails. To each thumbnail a sensor control is displayed. The sensor con-
trol shows the metadata to the thumbnail like exposure data and histogram classes.
The user can select to display on the view either data for:
Camera 1
Camera 2
Camera 1 and camera 2
Three zoom levels can be selected. This allows to display at the same time either
two thumbnails with corresponding sensor controls
six thumbnails with corresponding sensor controls
12 thumbnails
The latest thumbnail is framed in white color.
If data for two cameras are displayed on the view, the view is split vertically. Data for camera 1
are displayed on the left side and data for camera 2 are displayed on the right side.
tems.
Select [Histograms] to display thumbnails and histogram classes
If camera 1 or camera 2 is selected the view shows six

half three thumbnails with corresponding sensor controls
for camera 1 and on the right half three thumbnails with
corresponding sensor controls for camera 2.
The dark grey areas in the example will be replaced in-

flight by the thumbnails.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 487

If camera 1 or camera 2 is selected the view shows two

half one thumbnail with the corresponding sensor control
for camera 1 and on the right half one thumbnail with the
corresponding sensor control for camera 2.
The dark grey areas in the example will be replaced in-

If camera 1 or camera 2 is selected the view shows twelve

thumbnails.
half six thumbnails for camera 1 and on the right half six
thumbnails for camera 2.
The dark grey areas in the example will be replaces in-

Select [Sensor next] to toggle and wrap the view to display data either for
Camera 1 or for Camera 2 or for Camera 1 and 2.
Select [Zoom wrap] to display different size and number of thumbnails.

One or four thumbnails can be displayed for Camera 1 or for Camera 2.
If Camera 1 and 2 is selected two thumbnails can be displayed for each camera.
Select [A-ST] to enter RCD configuration.
Use icon with - to decrease the display contrast of the thumbnail.
Use icon with + to increase the display contrast of the thumbnail.
Use icon with - to decrease the display brightness of the thumbnail.
Use icon with + to increase the display brightness of the thumbnail.
488 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Flight guidance views
Nose-up view
Note: A license for the FCMS module Flight Guidance is required to get flight guidance infor-
mation displayed. If a project and a next flight line is selected full information is displayed. For a
non-planned line the view shows only limited information.

Select [Nose-up view] to display navigation data.
Figure 185: Example of Nose-up view
This view is optimized for the pilot. It provides graphic

flight guidance information during approaches and turns.
The orientation is nose-up. North direction is indicated on
the lower right corner of the Nose-up navigation control.
A description of the controls displayed on this view is
given in Basic layout of navigation view during flight
execution on Page 454, System controls on Page 456,
Flight guidance controls on Page 460 and in Controls
with project related information on Page 475.
ter 4 on Page 425.
Confirm [More buttons] to display the secondary toolbar with the following additional buttons:
Select [Recompute] to compute new optimum flight path to next line.
Select [Zoom -] or [Zoom +] to zoom-out/out the graphics in the Nose-up navigation control.
Select [Abort] to abort line execution or the close the project respectively. If the IP is passed the
line execution is aborted, during approach and turns the project is closed.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 489

North-up view

Select [North-up view] to display navigation data.
Figure 186: Example of North-up view
This view displays a project overview in north-up orienta-

tion. Flight guidance information is optimized for
approaches and turns.
In the North-up view lines can be selected by touching the line and the graphic content can be
panned by touching the graphics and dragging it with the finger.
ter 4 on Page 425.
Select [Recompute] to compute new optimum flight path to the next line.
Select [Zoom -] or [Zoom +] to zoom-out/out the graphics in the Nose-up navigation control.
490 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Select [Zoom-more] to display another secondary toolbar.
After [Zoom -more] additionally the following buttons can be selected:

Use [Left arrow] and [Right arrow] to pan the graphic in the north-up navigation control to left or
right.
The graphic content can also be panned by touching the graphic and draging it with the finger.
Use [Up arrow] and [Down arrow] to pan the graphic in the north-up navigation control up or
down.
Select [Zoom optimum] for automatic scale adjustment. The whole project area will be displayed
on the Nose-up navigation control.
Select [Aircraft center] to pan automatically such that the aircraft is displayed in the center of the
Nose-up navigation control.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 491

In-line view

Select [In-line view] to display navigation data.
Figure 187: Example of In-line view


ter 4 on Page 425.
492 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

3-D Navigation view

The 3-D Navigation view is useful when executing the flight plan in the target height mode Con-
stant ALT-AGL. A mission intended for flying at constant ALT-AGL must be planned on Leica
FPES for an equal terrain height along the line. A DEM has to be loaded in Leica FPES, but not
taken into account for computation. The resulting flight plan will have height information for
each waypoint along the flight line. The waypoints are used by Leica FCMS to display the navi-
gation information.

Select [3-D Navigation view] to display navigation data.
Figure 188: Example of 3-D Navigation view


If the toolbar is optimized for the Pilot select [Return] to display the main tool bar.
ter 4 on Page 425.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 493

Flight Guidance information on the GI40

The GI40 provides flight guidance information during approach and turns as well as when flying
along the line. Also error messages are displayed. The content of the display of the GI40 changes
accordingly.
Guidance information on the GI40 during approach

Important: This phase is indicated on the GI40 by red illuminated LEDs located on the right
side of the inscription BRG and on the left side of the inscription IP
The flight guidance information is similar to the information given on the Nose-up or North-up
views.
Figure 189: General layout of GI40 during approach
Line direction Turn information. Desired line altitude

Bearing from the Time to fly straight at the given track. Time required to fly
aircrafts position Aircrafts deviation from the suggested flight path. along the suggested
to the IP Climb or descend information. flight path to the IP.
Table 131. Flight guidance information

Suggested flight path Track and time information
Straight line Desired track over ground, time to fly this track.
Turn Make a turn till the given heading, make left or right turn.
Note: During approach the area for guidance information shows in an alternative sequence
either track and time information or information about the deviation from the suggested
approach path.
The time information is either >99 min. or the actual value which decrements in 1 minute steps
for the range from 99 min. to 1 min. and in 1 sec. steps for the range of 60 sec. to 1 sec.
The range for the deviation is scaled according to the flight guidance configuration. See section
"Configuration of Flight Guidance & Sensor Release" in Volume 3, Chapter 4 on Page 425. The
graphics coincide with the track deviation control. See section "Track deviation control" in Vol-
Figure 190: GI40 examples during approaches
Line direction is 203 Des. altitude 7806 ft.

Bearing is 116 Time to IP is not
defined, > 99 min.
The aircraft should fly straight with a track over
ground of 012 for > than 99 minutes.
The arrow pointing down indicates that the
aircraft should descend to the desired line
altitude.
494 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012


Bearing is 021 Time to IP 6 min. 50 sec
ground of 012 for 4 minutes.
The arrow pointing up indicates that the aircraft
should climb to the desired line altitude.

The aircraft should fly a right turn till the
heading is 357.
altitude.

ground of 012 for 18 seconds.
The vertical line in the center indicates that the
aircraft is at the desired line altitude.

The aircraft should fly a right turn till the
heading is 203. The square on the right side of
the arrow indicates that this is the final turn to
the IP.
altitude.
In an alternative sequence to the turn and track information as shown in the examples above, the
deviation from the suggested approach path is displayed on the GI40.

The aircraft is on the right side of the suggested
approach path.

The aircraft has no deviation from the suggested
approach path.
The aircraft is a large amount on the left side of
the suggested approach path.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 495

Guidance information on the GI40 along the flight line

Important: This phase is indicated on the GI40 by the red illuminated LEDs located on the
right side of the inscription DIF and on the left side of the inscription END.
Figure 191: General layout of GI40 during line execution
Line direction. The lateral deviation of the line from the aircrafts Desired line altitude.
Difference of true current position. Time required to
track to line Sensor status, if OFF. complete the line.
direction. Climb or descend information.
Note: Along the flight line the area for flight guidance information shows similar information as
the line deviation control. The range for the deviation is scaled according to the sensor release
configuration. See section "Configuration of Flight Guidance & Sensor Release" in Volume 3,
Chapter 4 on Page 425. The graphics coincide with the line deviation control. See section "Line
deviation control" in Volume 3, Chapter 5 on Page 465.
Figure 192: GI40 examples during line execution

Difference is 00 Time to end 3min 34sec
The line is perfectly below the aircraft.

The line is slightly on the left side of the aircraft,
but within the tolerance.

The line is on the left side of the aircraft. The
offset is within the warning tolerance.

Difference is -12 Time to end 1min 12sec
The line is on the far left side of the aircraft in
the release shut off area. The broken vertical line
in the center indicates that data recording is
interrupted.
The line is slightly on the left side of the aircraft.
but within the tolerance.
The aircraft should descend to desired altitude.
496 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Error information on the GI40 along the flight line
Figure 193: GI40 error examples during line execution

Difference is 00 Time to end 1min. 42sec
The aircraft is flying too fast. GS should be
reduced by 28 kts.

The aircraft is flying slow. GS could be increased
by 42 kts.

A fatal error occurred on the Leica RCD30
system. At the same time an error message with
trouble shooting options is displayed on the
OI40.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 497

Project status views for in-flight evaluation
Graphic and alphanumeric in-flight evaluation

Note: A license for FCMS module Flight Guidance is required to get flight guidance infor-
To display this views from flight menu proceed as follows:

Select [Project view] to display project data.
Note: Project data is displayed either graphically or numerically. To toggle select the corre-
sponding icon which is displayed on the toolbar alternatively.
In-flight evaluation - graphic view

Select [Graphic] to display project data graphically.
Figure 194: Example of In-flight evaluation - graphic view
This view provides a graphic project overview for in-

flight evaluation and control of project execution. The
orientation is North-up.

execution on Page 454 and in Controls with project
related information on Page 475.
In the In-flight evaluation view lines can be selected by touching the line and the graphic content
can be panned by touching the graphics and draging it with the finger.
According to the configuration of the map layer for the Operator additional information like
vector maps, GCP and GNSS reference station locations and bitmap maps or Elevation encoded
or Shaded Relief DTM information might be displayed as background.
Footprint of flight lines are displayed if SRTM DTM data are installed for the displayed area.
Map layer configuration see section "Configuration of Guidance Project" in Volume 3, Chapter 4
on Page 426.
498 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Examples see section "Backdrop maps during flight execution" in Volume 3, Chapter 5 on Page
503.
Select [Set filer] to display a secondary toolbar to set/reset filters to hide/show information.
Figure 195: Filters to query project and flight data
Show lines Show lines Show lines Show lines Show lines Show lines Show Show flight
flown once flown not yet flown with flown with manually planning path
multiple flown errors warnings released
Hide lines Hide lines Hide lines Hide lines Hide lines Hide lines Hide Hide flight
flown once flown not yet flown with flown with manually planning path
multiple flown errors warnings released
From the main view toolbar select [Zoom-more] to display a secondary toolbar.
After [Zoom-more] additionally the following buttons can be selected:

Use [Left arrow] and [Right arrow] to pan the graphics in the graphic in-flight evaluation control
to left or right
The graphic content can also be panned by touching the graphic and draging it with the finger..
Use [Up arrow] and [Down arrow] to pan the graphics in the graphic in-flight evaluation control
up or down.
Select [Zoom -] or [Zoom +] to zoom-out/out the graphics in the graphic in-flight evaluation con-
trol.
Select [Zoom optimum] for automatic scale adjustment. The whole project area will be displayed
on the graphic in-flight evaluation control.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 499

Select [Aircraft center] to pan automatically such that the aircraft is displayed in the center of the
graphic in-flight evaluation control.
In-flight evaluation - alphanumeric view

Select [Text] to display project data alphanumerically.
Figure 196: Example of In-flight evaluation - alphanumeric view
This view is for in-flights evaluation. It lists for each

flight line the most relevant data.
execution on Page 454 and in Controls with project
related information on Page 475.
Select [Log data] to browse log data.
Select [Fast scroll up] or [Fast scroll down] to browse the list page by page.
Select [Scroll up] or [Scroll down] to move the highlighted bar in the list.
Select [Set filer] to display a secondary toolbar to set/reset filters to hide/show information.
The settings are given in Figure 195, Filters to query project and flight data in Volume 3, Chap-
ter 5 on Page 499.
500 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Real-time view
The Real-time view displays the videoWebCamThumbnail images. It can be displayed with
controls located on the left side and on the right side or alternatively without controls as full
screen Real-time view.One large or four smaller thumbnails can be displayed.
The magnification of the videoWebCam image can be set in steps by using the Zoom buttons.
The zoom steps are given in the section section "Real-time view" in Volume 1, Chapter 7 on Page
136. The zoom steps wrap around from the narrowest angle to the widest angle.

Select [Real-time view] to display video image.
Figure 197: Example of Real-time view
Real-time view with controls during approachReal-time view with controls on the line
Select [Configuration] to configure the Real-time view. See section "Configuration of global
parameter Real-time view" in Volume 3, Chapter 4 on Page 438.
Select [More buttons] to display more buttons related to Real-time view.
After [More buttons] the following buttons can be selected:

Toggle button [Real-time view] to switch from full screen Real-time view to Real-time view with
controls.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 501

Select [Zoom wrap] to toggle between display of one or four thumbnails.
Use icon with - to decrease the contrast of the video image.
Use icon with + to increase the contrast of the video image.
Use icon with - to decrease the brightness of the video image.
Use icon with + to increase the brightness of the video image.
502 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Backdrop maps during flight execution

During a flight Leica FCMS can display a map layer on the following views:
North-up
Nose-up
Project
An introduction to the use of maps is given in section "Introduction to the use of maps in Leica
FCMS flight guidance" in Volume 3, Chapter 4 on Page 443.
On instructions on how to
Upload vector map data see section "Upload projects with flight plans and graphical data" in
Upload bitmap maps see section "Upload maps" in Volume 1, Chapter 4 on Page 77.
Install DTM data see section "SRTM data installation" in Volume 1, Chapter 3 on Page 43.
Define which map Leica FCMS selects for display see section "Configuration of global
parameters Maps" in Volume 3, Chapter 4 on Page 443.
Define the content which Leica FCMS displays on the map layer see section "Configuration
of Guidance Project" in Volume 3, Chapter 4 on Page 426.
Figure 198: Examples of views with data displayed on the map layer
North-up view with vector data North-up view with ElevationEncoded bitmap
Nose-up view with bitmap Map Nose-up view with Shaded Relief bitmap
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 503

Figure 199: Examples of views with map layer displayed
Project Status view with Shaded Relief bitmap Project Status view with ElevationEncoded
bitmap and real-time coverage
Nose-up view with ElevationEncoded bitmap

ElevationEncoded maps generated by Leica
FCMS are color coded, if displayed on the
Operator interface. Color coding see Table 132.
For safety reasons ElevationEncoded maps

are not color coded, if displayed on the Pilot
interface. Coding see Table 133
The example on the left side shows that the path

of the shortest approach passes terrain which is
- according to SRTM DTM data - close or
above the current flying height of the aircraft.
Table 132. Color coding of SRTM DTM data if displayed on the Operator interface
Height range in displayed image

Color code
minimum height maximum height
Black to white Any height from lowest terrain up 300 m (985 ft) below the aircraft
to 300 m (985 ft) below the aircraft
Yellow 300 m (985 ft) below the aircraft 100 m (330 ft) below the aircraft
Light red 100 m (330 ft) below the aircraft Any height above the aircraft
Table 133. Coding of SRTM DTM data if displayed on the Pilot interface
Color code Terrain height Remarks

Black Lowest terrain in displayed image Can be any height in the range from below the
current aircraft flying height to above the
White Highest terrain in displayed image current aircraft flying height
504 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Annotation - user log file entries during flight

This feature allows to make user text entries into the log file during flight execution. The entries
are time tagged. The log file is part of the data which is passed along with the image data to the
data post processing step.
The text for log file entries is selected by the user from a list. This list can contain an unlimited
number of text lines. Each line can be up to 80 characters long. The user can enter new text lines
to the list. Also he can edit an existing text line in the list or he can delete a text line. Each text
line has a preceding ID. The text list is sorted by the text line identifiers. The identifier is not part
of the text line and therefore will not become part of the log file entry.
Select [Annotation] from main menu to enter annotation dialog.
Figure 200: Example of Annotation dialog
To make a log file entry select from the list of text lines
the desired line. Multiple log file entries are made line by
line.
Select [Fast scroll up] or [Fast scroll down] to browse the list page wise.
Select [Scroll up] or [Scroll down] to move the high lighted bar in the list.
Select [Edit] to modify the high lighted text line.
Select [New] to enter a new text line.
Select [Delete Annotation] to delete the high lighted text line from the list.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 505

Select [Annotation] to generate a log file entry. The high lighted text is copied with a time tag into
the log file.
Select [Return] to return to main level, load settings and to exit from dialog.
Edit or create annotation text

First step
Edit or enter text group ID.
FCMS sorts the annotation text lines by the text group ID.
See Figure 200 on Page 505.
Select [Accept] to accept.

Edit: Assign changed group ID to selected annotation element.
New: Assign group ID to new annotation element.
Select [Cancel] to continue.

Edit: Rejects changes and leaves text as before.
New: No new entry with annotation text is being created.
Second step
Edit existing text or enter new text.
Select [Accept] to accept.

Edit: Assigns changed text to selected annotation text.
New: Store new text in list.
Select [Cancel] to abort.

Edit: Rejects changes and leaves text as before.
New: No new entry with annotation text is being created.
506 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Browsing of logged status data

Log data can be browsed either from Flight menu or from Service menu.
If the browser is started from the Flight menu only data related to the current flight are listed in
the browser.
If the browser is started from the Service menu all data stored in the log data base can be
browsed.
Start browser from Flight menu

Select [Select View] from flight main tool bar to display buttons to select view.
Select [ADS System] to display Leica RCD30 system status view.
Select [More buttons] from Leica RCD30 system status view.
Start browser from Service menu

Select [Service] from FCMS main menu.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 507

Browsing log data
Figure 201: Example of Log Data view
The Log data view displays the status information

logged during system operation:
Change of operation status
Warnings
Errors
User interactions
etc.
Select [Fast scroll up] or [Fast scroll down] to browse the data page wise.
Select [Scroll up] or [Scroll down] to browse the data.
Select [Previous warning / error] or [Next warning / error] to jump in the logged data to previous
or next error warning.
Seek in the log database the entry closest to the defined date and time.
Seek in the log database the latest log data entry.
Select [Set filter] to change buttons on toolbar to set filters to query log data.
Selectable filters see Figure 202 below.
Figure 202: Filters to query logged data
Show logged Show logged Show logged Show logged Show logged Show logged Remove all
Sensor status Mass IMU status GNSS status user warnings / filters
Memory interactions errors
status
508 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Installation Information
This document contains important information for the aircraft

installer.
Please read carefully through before you prepare and aircraft for
system installation.

510 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Leica RCD30 Installation Information Leica RCD30 Documentation Volume - 4
Chapter 1 About Installation Information
Version 4.01-61 Oct / 19 / 2012 511

Volume 4 Leica RCD30 Installation Information
Chapter 1 About Installation Information
Scope of document
Installation Information contains important information about installation of the Leica RCD30
into an aircraft.
General note on aircraft for airborne sensing
Leica Geosystems installation policy
List of tasks to be performed by the installer
Conditions to be fulfilled for sensor installation
Installation guidelines, data and installation drawings
Environmental qualification forms
Note: Electrical data, environmental condition, weight and part numbers for all parts is given in
section "Technical Data" in Volume 1, Chapter 7 on Page 133
Structure of this volume

Chapter 2 Aircraft Installation Information gives important general installation information,
installation guidelines for each device as well as installation data and drawings
Chapter 3 Installation Questionnaire helps to collect customers specific dimensions and param-
eter requested for installation.
General
See section section "Product identification" in Volume 1, Chapter 1 on Page 2
Abbreviations
See section "Abbreviations" in Volume 1, Chapter 1 on Page 3
Meaning of symbols
See section "Meaning of symbols" in Volume 1, Chapter 1 on Page 5

Documents Other volumes of the Leica RCD30 Documentation

See section "Where to get assistance and training" in Volume 1, Chapter 1 on Page 6
512 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Chapter 2 Aircraft Installation Information
Version 4.01-61 Oct / 19 / 2012 513

Leica Geosystems company profile

Leica Geosystems has decades of experience in manufacturing airborne cameras
Overview of historic Leica Geosystems Airborne Sensors
The optical-mechanical era: 1935 1968
Wild RC5a Wild RC7 Wild RC8 Wild RC9
The electronic, microprocessor and multiprocessor era: 1968 1993
Electronic Wild RC10 Microprocessor Wild RC10A Multiprocessor Wild RC20
Todays Airborne Sensors

Leica ADS80 Airborne Digital Sensor, Leica ALS70 Airborne Laser Scanner, Leica RCD30
Digital Camera System and related software.
The activities of Leica Geosystems covers the whole range from product development and manu-
facture through marketing and sales to services such as installation by the user, user training, sys-
tems support and integration.
Leica RCD30 medium format airborne camera
The Leica RCD30 Series of medium format aerial cameras sets a new standard in what can be
expected from this type of digital frame cameras. A single camera head delivers co-registered,
direct-georeferenced multi-spectral RGBN imagery at a pixel size of 6 microns. Mechanical For-
ward Motion Compensation (FMC) along two axes provides sharpest images and 50mm and a 80
mm ruggedized and thermal stabilized lens systems are available. In-flight exchangeable mass
memories are available with SSD and a capacity of 256GB, 512GB and 1TB. The Leica RCD30
series modular concept enables single and multi-head standalone configurations as well as full
integration to Leica ALS70 and other third party sensors. All components of the Leica RCD30
Series aerial camera system are built to highest reliability and conforming to ISO 7137, RTCA
DO-160-F, EUROCAE-14E and FAR23.561.
514 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

General note on aircraft for airborne sensing
To be taken into account when choosing a survey aircraft

The choice of aircraft for airborne sensing depends mainly on the following parameters:
Type of sensor
Mission profiles
Costs
Type of sensor
The following main parameters have to be taken into account:
Space required by the sensor for installation in the aircraft
Power consumption by the sensor during operation
Operation limits given by the sensor for GS
The Leica sensors Leica ADS80, Leica ALS70 and Leica RCD30 standalone require similar
space for installation of the sensor or camera with mount respectively. That is, if an aircraft was
already used for one of the sensors it can normally be easily adopted to one of the other sensors.
Power consumption is slightly higher for Leica ADS80 and Leica ALS70 than it is for a Leica
RCD30.
Mission profile
An overview of parameters to be taken into account are given below in Table 134. The column
Preferences contains general statements to be taken into account. Please note that the listing
comprises the main parameters but it is not complete.
Table 134. Characteristics of aircraft depending on mission profile
Parameter Preferences
Average ferry time For long ferries the preferred aircraft features fast cruise speed.
For short ferries the cruise speed of an airplane is not a relevant
factor.
Typical project area size For large project areas a fast aircraft is preferred where for small
projects the speed of the aircraft is not a relevant factor.
Typical flying height for High altitude projects require an aircraft with a high service ceiling.
projects The aircraft should also climb fast and feature fast speed. Also a
pressurized cabin is preferred for this type of missions. When
operating non-pressurized aircraft at altitudes above 10,000 ft.
AMSL the crew needs oxygen masks.
Low altitude projects require an aircraft with low stall speed limit.
Larger mapping companies usually own several aircraft with different characteristics. The choice
of aircraft depends on the mission profile. The aircraft is selected to match the requirements
given by the mission.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 515

Costs
An overview of the main cost drivers is given in Table 135 below. The cost drivers for invest-
ment and operation are not only related to survey aircrafts. Whereas the cost drivers listed
under aircraft modification etc. are fully related to survey aircraft.
Table 135. Cost drivers for survey aircrafts
Costs Cost drivers

Investment Twin engine aircraft are typically more expensive than
single engine aircraft.
Aircrafts with turbine engines are more expensive than
aircraft with piston engines.
Aircraft with pressurized cabins are more expensive than
aircraft with non-pressurized cabins.
Aircraft modification for sensor Modification kit
installation and aircraft power Modification kits are designed by the manufacturers of the
adaptation to meet sensor power survey aircraft themselves or by specialized aircraft
requirement. modification companies. If such a kit is already designed it
is typically cheaper than if it needs to be designed.
Certification
Once a modification kit is designed, it needs to be officially
certified by the official Flight Authority (e.g. the FAA in
USA) in order to receive what is called an STC
(supplementary transport certificate) before at all being
allowed to be used for the modification of an aircraft into a
survey aircraft. If an STC is already available typically the
cost driving certification is not required any more.
Optical window
An optical window is a cost driver and it is required for a
pressurized aircraft. It is optional for a non-pressurized
aircraft.
Operation Many factors can be cost drivers:
Engine type, number of engines
Aircraft type
Cockpit equipment
Distance to service centers
How good the aircraft characteristics matches the mis-
sion profile.
Basically any type of aircraft can be modified for installation of an Leica RCD30, the sole ques-
tion being the amount of effort needed to design and to get an official certification of the installa-
tion by the official Aeronautical Flight Authorities (like the FAA in USA).
Leica Geosystems will neither design aircraft modification for installing a sensor on board of a
survey aircraft, nor will perform any modification of such aircraft. Details about Leica Geosys-
tems installation policy and responsibility is given in section "Optical Windows" in Volume 4,
Aircraft manufacturers as well as specialized aircraft modification companies can provide a list
of their designed & certified camera provision. See e.g. http://www.butlernational.com/stc.htm
516 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Typical survey aircraft

Survey aircraft typically have the following main characteristics
STOL type (Short Take-off and Landing)
Single or twin engine
Small size (up to eight people)
Low Stall Speed (depends on mission profile)
Service ceiling: at least 20,000 ft. up to 30,000 ft.
Either non-pressurized or pressurized (depends on mission profile)
Survey modification kit available
Table 136. Examples of fix wing aircraft where Leica sensors is or was installed
Manufacturer Model Cabin Engine type Engine number

Antonov An2 Non-pressurized Piston Single
An30 Pressurized Turboprop Twin
Beechcraft King Air B200 Pressurized Turboprop Twin
King Air 350 Pressurized Turboprop Twin
Casa 212C Aviocar Non-pressurized Turboprop Twin
Cessna 404 Conquest Pressurized Turboprop Twin
441 Conquest II Pressurized Turboprop Twin
421 Golden Eagle Pressurized Piston Twin
310T Non-pressurized Piston Twin
310R Non-pressurized Turboprop Twin
210 Non-pressurized Piston Single
Caravan Non-pressurized Turboprop Single
De Havilland DHC-C Twin Otter Non-pressurized Turboprop Twin
Gates Learjet 25C Pressurized Jet Twin
Learjet 23 Pressurized Jet Twin
Pilatus Turbo Porter PC-6 Non-pressurized Turboprop Single
Piper Cheyenne II Pressurized Turboprop Twin
Navajo Chieftain Non-pressurized Piston Twin
PA31/350 Non-pressurized Piston Twin
Aztec Non-pressurized Piston Twin
Rockwell Int. Aerocommander 840 Pressurized Turboprop Twin
Note: There is a large number of aircraft being used for airborne sensing. The aircraft listed in
Table 136 above are just examples.
0
Table 137. Examples of rotary aircraft where Leica RCD30 is or was installed
Manufacturer Model Cabin Engine type Engine number

Bell 427 Non-pressurized Turbine Twin
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 517

Optical Windows
Introduction
High quality optical windows are required for Leica Leica RCD30 installations in pressurized
aircraft. Leica Geosystems recommends the use of optical windows also in non-pressurized air-
craft to reduce the influence of temperature and humidity variations on the sensor system.
Optical windows should be distortion free, coated optical windows especially designed for map-
ping photography, which do not diminish the high optical quality of the Leica Geosystems lens
cones. Optical windows should be delivered with a calibration certificate. Leica Geosystems
does not provide optical windows or the installation thereof into any type of aircraft, because this
requires modifications to the aircraft, for which Leica Geosystems is not authorized.
Based on the enclosed sensor installation drawings, the typical technical specifications below
and the aircraft parameters (maximum altitude, cabin pressure, etc.), it is possible for the manu-
facturers of Optical windows to determine size and thickness of the required window. Responsi-
bility for the definition and production of the optical window lies with the manufacturer thereof
and the owner of the aircraft. Responsibility for building optical windows into an aircraft is the
responsibility of the owner of the aircraft or the aircraft modification services company desig-
nated by the owner of the aircraft.
Typical technical specifications

Glass type
Schott: BK7 or OHARA: S-BSL7 grade A, high quality, high transmission optical glass
Specific weight ________________ 2.51 g/cm3
Coefficient of linear expansion __ 7.1 x 10-6 / K
Youngs modulus e _____________ 81.4 GPa (11.8 x 106 psi)
Poisson ratio 0.206
Torsion modulus g _____________ 32MPa (32 N/mm2)
Ultimate tensile strength _______ 34.2 MPa (4960 psi)
Bulk modulus _________________ 33.8 GPa (4.9 x 106 psi)
Geometry
Normal incident ray____________ deviation max. 5
local variation max. + 2 (diameter of 25 mm)
Antireflection coating
AR coating ____________________ broadband coating 420nm to 900nm on both sides
Standards
Canada_______________________ ICAS (1982)
USA__________________________ Military MIL-W-1366F (1975)
518 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Leica Geosystems Sensor Installation Policy
Sensor and GNSS installations

Airborne sensor systems are not considered an integral part of the aircraft. These sensors are
removable carry-on type of equipment, which includes interchangeable modules. Therefore,
they are not classified as integrated avionics equipment, which has to be certified by national or
international aircraft safety authorities.
Environment and Standards

The Leica RCD30 Airborne Digital Sensor qualifies to the standards given in section "Applied
standards" in Volume 1, Chapter 7 on Page 142. Details see General information for mount and
sensor installation on Page 527 and section "Environmental qualification forms" in Volume 4,
Responsibility for adequate power supply

Important: It is the aircraft owners responsibility to ensure that enough power is available to
operate the sensor components which he has chosen to install in the aircraft. It is the aircraft
owners responsibility to ensure that the power consumption of the installed sensor system
components does not jeopardize the safe operation of the aircraft and that adequate circuit
breakers are installed. The power requirements are defined in section "Electrical" in Volume 1,
Aircraft modifications
Important: Aircraft modifications involve changes to structure of the aircraft. In this case, the
strict regulations governing these activities have be followed. Normally modifications to the
fuselage have to be certified by the FAA or national aviation associations. This is also valid for
changes to an already certified aircraft modification.
Responsibility for aircraft modifications

Important: The responsibility to have aircraft modifications certified lies either with the
manufacturer of the aircraft or the specialized contractors or subcontractors of such special
modifications.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 519

Main tasks to be performed by the installer

Installation of the GNSS antenna on the fuselage of the aircraft.
Prepare aircraft, provide required adapter plates and adequate fixing screws for installation
of all components of the Leica RCD30 system. In particular:
Camera with mount, Camera Controller, Interface Stand with Operator Interface, OC50 for
Pilot and Guidance Indicator.
Prepare aircraft to provide adequate power, fuse protection and chassis ground connections
to operate the Leica RCD30 system.
Adapt the open ended power cable to conform to the aircrafts power connectors.
Install looming of the Leica RCD30 system if it is required to place them in protected chan-
nels.
Weight and balance calculations.
Installation tasks to be performed by the user

The installation tasks to be performed for and by the user are described in section "Installing the
System" in Volume 1, Chapter 3 on Page 17.
Leica Geosystems installation support

Leica Geosystems does not have the expertise or the authorization to carry out aircraft modifica-
tions, but it is in Leica Geosystems interest that these modifications fulfill the customers' speci-
fications and requirements concerning the optimal use of the aerial sensor system purchased.
Leica Geosystems can provide consulting and checking services for sensor installations. If the
installation of the sensor was based on Leica Geosystems' installation drawings, the Leica Geo-
systems expert will check and confirm that the sensor holes are adequate for unrestricted use of
the Leica RCD30. The Leica Geosystems expert will not undertake any modification of the air-
craft structure or interior modifications made for the sensor installation. The Leica Geosystems
expert is not qualified to comment on the airworthiness of modifications, which should be certi-
fied by the appropriate body.
520 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Leica Geosystems installation questionnaire

This questionnaire is for customers or manufacturers who would like to profit from Leica Geo-
systems installation analysis support. Based on completed questionnaire Leica Geosystems helps
aircraft manufacturers assess the cost and the risk involved in an aircraft modification, be it a
new aircraft or an already modified aircraft.
For this questionnaire see section "Installation Questionnaire" in Volume 4, Chapter 3 on Page
581.
Leica Geosystems installation drawings

Installation drawings found in this documentation are valid for normal installation. That is:
no optical window
full rotation range of mount in Pitch, Roll and Drift.
For all other cases Leica Geosystems can provide assistance based on the information collected
in the installation questionnaire. See Volume 4, Chapter 3, Page 581.
It is the customers' responsibility or that of the companies or institutions which he has desig-
nated, to warrant a perfect aircraft modification according to the drawings provided by Leica
Geosystems.
References
Available upon request from Leica Geosystems.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 521

Main installation data for Leica RCD30
Overview airborne sensing system with Leica RCD30

1 GNSS Satellites
4 GNSS ground reference station
Overview Leica RCD30 Standalone System

1 Pod with CH61 or CH62 and IMU
3 CC32 Control Unit
5 OC50 for Pilot
522 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Environmental qualification forms
Environmental qualification form Leica RCD30
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 523

Environmental qualification form Leica PAV80
524 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Environmental qualification form OC52
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 525

Environmental qualification form OC50,GI40,IS40
526 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

General information for mount and sensor installation

Safety information for handling the Leica PAV80
Danger: Keep off any part of your body parts from areas indicated with this symbol.
To protect you from dangerous areas do never power on the Leica PAV80 if no sensor is
installed.
Caution: Always use the folding handles to carry the Leica PAV80.
Do never carry the Leica PAV80 by holding it inside the sensor hole!
Caution: Always remove the sensor from the Leica PAV80 before you carry the mount.

A handle can break. Because each handle is
designed for a maximum load of 50 kg.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 527

Purpose of the installation drawings and tables

This installation documentation is designed for use of the Leica RCD30 in normal aerial survey-
ing conditions. The installation drawings and tables specify:
the minimum dimensions of the required space below the fixing plane of the mount, for a
given installation height
the optically required opening in the plane of the fuselage bottom hole, including camera
centering, for a given in installation height
the overall dimensions of the Camera over the fixing plane.
Based on these dimensions, the installer should foresee a minimum clearance to the aircraft walls
or any other aircraft structures, so that both dynamic functionality (e.g. range for mount rota-
tions) and convenient manual access to the sensor controls (e.g. panels, cables) are fulfilled.
This documentation is restricted to the case with:
standard sensor rotation range of Leica PAV80. section "Limitation of Leica PAV80 rota-
tion" in Volume 4, Chapter 2 on Page 530
without optical window
For installation with optical window and/or limited sensor rotation range, see section "Condi-
tions to be fulfilled for mount and camera installation" below.
Conditions to be fulfilled for mount and camera installation

Important: The following requirements should be satisfied under all circumstances:
Clearance for the camera pod to the port slide (or optical window): the supporting ring of the
camera pod should have a minimum clearance to the port slide (or optical window), when
the mount is rotated in pitch/roll/drift
Clearance in the bottom hole: the camera pod should not collide with the walls inside the
bottom hole or hatch, when rotated in pitch/roll/drift
Clearance for camera pod and mount to the aircraft walls or hatch: the camera pod part
above the mount fixing plane should not collide with aircraft structures when the mount
rotates in pitch/roll/drift
Easy access to all camera mount and control unit controls
Optically required field not vignetted: the optical field in the plane of the fuselage bottom
hole should not be vignetted. This field takes into account the image format of the sensor
If no Leica PAV80 is used install the Camera Head on a mounting plate with shock absorb-
ers. The shock absorbers shall have a resonance frequency of <20 Hz.
Stiff and vibrating-free mounting of the Leica PAV80

Important: Aircraft floor, adapter plates, spacers and any other elements below the Leica
PAV80 has to be stiff such that this elements do not vibrate during operation. Rigid contact is
specially required at the location of the vibration dampers of the Leica PAV80.
528 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Installation of the Leica PAV80 directly on the aircraft floor

This case applies for aircraft with a relatively thin floor. Depending on the floor thickness, it may
be necessary to lift the whole mount with camera pod by adequate spacers to ensure the clearance
to the port slide (or optical window).
Installation of the Leica PAV80 in a hatch

This case applies for aircraft with a relative large floor thickness. A clearance is required for the
Leica PAV80 in the hatch to allow free rotation of the sensor.
Installation in conjunction with an Optical Window

In this case, the additional thickness of the customer-specific optical window has also to be con-
sidered (also the optical refraction).
If the dimensions of the optical window are insufficient, the rotation range of the Leica PAV80
may be restricted, which in turn limits the usable range of the gyro-stabilized mount. See section
"Limitation of Leica PAV80 rotation" in Volume 4, Chapter 2 on Page 530.
Leica Geosystems can assist in the evaluation of the possibilities for installation. Detailed infor-
mation about aircraft specific dimensions and other parameters required for the installation study
are collected in the questionnaire (see Volume 4, Chapter 3, Page 582).
Important: Drawings given in this volume are not valid for installation with optical window.
Ideal position of CH61/CH62 in the aircraft

The Camera should be installed where it will be subjected to a minimum of slipstream and turbu-
lence.
Caution: Under no circumstances may it be placed in the exhaust flow of the aircraft engine(s).
Airflow for cooling purposes

On the upper part of the camera pod there are various airflow inlets.
Important: The space in front of the airflow inlets should not be obstructed. Install the camera
pod with a minimum space of 20 cm to walls.
Camera direction of CH61/CH62

The camera must point in the flight direction to ensure proper FMC-operation. This is the case, if
the camera pod is installed according to flight direction given in the drawings. See Drawing 26,
Side view Leica PAV80 with Leica RCD30 camera pod in Volume 4, Chapter 2 on Page 541
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 529

Compensation of aircraft attitude angle

If the typical aircraft attitude during photo flight is other than zero, a wedge-shaped intermediate
placed between fixing plane and Leica PAV80 should compensate the attitude angle. This allows
use of the full rotation range of the mount during operation.
Note: The Leica PAV80 maximum pitch stabilization range is -8 to +6. Due to this extended
and asymmetrically stabilization range a compensation of the aircraft attitude angle might not be
required.
Orientation of sensor and mount

Important: The camera and mount co-ordinate systems should be perfectly aligned with the
aircraft co-ordinate system. See Drawing 22 below.
The accuracy of the alignment should be within 0.2or e.g. 2 mm respectively if measured over
the longer edge of the Leica PAV80 base plate.
Drawing 22: Orientation of sensor mount Leica PAV80
Important: Care must be taken to ensure that the mount is in contact with the floor or hatch at
the fixing points and below the vibration dampers. This is essential to ensure that the vibration
dampers and the sensor stabilization can fulfill their intended functions. (The location of the
vibration dampers is indicated by four green circles in section "Leica PAV80 top view and side
view" in Volume 4, Chapter 2 on Page 539)
Limitation of Leica PAV80 rotation

The confined space of a small aircraft sometimes imposes restrictions on the installation of an
airborne sensor system. Obstacles such as structural elements or narrow sensor ports may
allow only a limited amount of sensor motion and precautions must be taken to maintain the full
rotations of the sensor head mount. If not otherwise specified, the mechanical stops and electrical
limit switches for pitch, roll and drift are adjusted to the maximum rotations:
Table 138. Leica PAV80 maximum rotations
With standard protection cover, With low height protection cover,

Article #764123 Article #775989, used for ALS70, ALS60
and ALS50-II installation
Pitch -8 to + 6 +/- 5
Roll +/- 7 +/- 5
Drift +/- 30 +/- 30 (ALS60/50 = +/- 20)
530 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Smaller values can be configured in software. See Leica PAV80 documentation, User Manual,
section Leica PAV80 Configuration and section Manual stabilization range configuration.
Also stop bolts can be used to limit the range mechanically. See Leica PAV80 documentation,
Technical Reference Manual, section Mechanical limitation of the rotation ranges by stop bolts.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 531

Details about the installation drawings and more recommendations

Drawings and further details see:
Drawing 26, Side view Leica PAV80 with Leica RCD30 camera pod in Volume 4, Chapter
2 on Page 541
Drawing 26, Side view Leica PAV80 with Leica RCD30 camera pod in Volume 4, Chapter
2 on Page 541
Drawing 27, Front view Leica PAV80 with Leica RCD30 camera pod in Volume 4, Chap-
ter 2 on Page 542.
All drawings and tables apply only for installation without optical window. For optical window
see section "Optical Windows" in Volume 4, Chapter 2 on Page 518.
The schematic view in shows a vertical section across the camera pod. Two parameters are essen-
tial for the sensor head installation in conjunction to the drawings, namely the planes:
F and N
1. F corresponds to the fixing plane of the Leica PAV80 mount, the Leica PAV80 being
mounted either directly on the aircraft floor or on any other fixing surface in a hatch
2. N corresponds to the highest position allowed above the port slide or of a possible optical
window
to avoid an unnecessarily large dimensioning of the fuselage bottom hole (or optical win-
dow), the distance FN should, whenever possible, be equal to the FN minimal specified in
the drawings. See case A in the drawings.
Tip: Remember that for each 1 cm increase of the installation height FN, the required bottom
hole or optical window increases by 1.8 cm.
for the specified minimal installation height FN, a minimal clearance of 10 mm remains
between the lowest position of the supporting ring of the Camera Pod and the plane N, for
lens cone maximum rotations of the Leica PAV80
if the aircraft floor thickness is smaller than FN minimum, the whole sensor (with mount)
should be elevated by adequate spacers until the installation height FN minimum (or until
the above specified minimum clearance 6 mm for the lens cone feet) is obtained
if the aircraft floor thickness is larger than FN minimum, the bottom hole dimension must
be larger. The dimensions are given in the drawings for different installation heights. For
intermediate values, an interpolation is possible.
The schematic cross-section in Drawing 24, Leica PAV80 top view and side view in Vol-
ume 4, Chapter 2 on Page 539 also shows the Leica PAV80 Mount axis for Pitch and Roll =
D. This point is important in GNSS-IMU data post processing, in combination with the posi-
tion of the GNSS antenna. See Installation of GNSS antenna on Page 568.
532 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Drawing 23: Cross section of Leica RCD30 Single Camera Pod
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 533

Table 139. Height of Leica RCD30 in Single Camera Pod with different lenses

Leica RCD30
IP Image plane (CCD plane) 9.8
Single Camera Head, f = 50 mm 0 0 -119.7
Single Camera Head, f = 80 mm 0 0 -80
M Supporting ring of Leica RCD30 Pod -168.2
with Leica RCD30 adapter ring
Q Fixing plane of Leica RCD30 on 168.5
adapter ring
N Upper side of optical window or of port -d
slide
O Lower side of optical window -d
Note: Distance F to N (installation height) is given in section "Minimum dimension for

maximum mount rotation" in Volume 4, Chapter 2 on Page 540, in Drawing 26, Side view
Leica PAV80 with Leica RCD30 camera pod in Volume 4, Chapter 2 on Page 541 and in
section "Front view Leica PAV80 with Leica RCD30 camera pod" in Volume 4, Chapter 2 on
Page 542.
Figure 203: Coordinate system for Drawing 23 and Table 139
534 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Table 140. Height of Leica RCD30 Camera Heads in Oblique Trio Camera Pod

Drawing 23 z [mm]
Nadir Camera Head, f = 50 mm -140.8
Forward and backward Camera Heads, f = 80 mm -96.5
with Leica RCD30 Oblique Trio Camera Pod
Q Fixing plane of Leica RCD30 on adapter ring 168.5
N Upper side of optical window or of port slide -d
O Lower side of optical window -(d+e)
Table 141. Height of Leica RCD30 Camera Heads in Oblique Penta Camera Pod

Drawing 23 z [mm]
Nadir Camera Head, f = 50 mm -140.8
Forward, Backward, Left and Right Camera Heads, f = 50 mm -129.5
with Leica RCD30 Oblique Penta Camera Pod
Q Fixing plane of Leica RCD30 on adapter ring 168.5
N Upper side of optical window or of port slide -d
O Lower side of optical window -(d+e)
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 535

Securing the sensor mount to the aircraft floor or hatch

Important: The securing of the sensor equipment to the aircraft structure should comply with
aeronautic standards. Leica Geosystems uses as guidelines the standards referenced in section
"Applied standards" in Volume 1, Chapter 7 on Page 142.
This standard specifies:

the crash safety test verifies that certain equipment will not detach from its mountings or
separate in a manner that presents a hazard during emergency landing. It applies to equip-
ment installed in compartments or other areas of the aircraft where equipment detached du-
ring emergency landing could present a hazard to occupants, fuel systems or emergency
evacuation equipment
load for crash safety impulse sustained
Concerning the securing of the sensor mount to the aircraft, the crash safety requires:
robustness of the 4 fixing screws for the sensor mount (or spacer for Leica PAV80):
Leica PAV80, Article #764110, standard for Leica ADS80, Leica RCD30
For a maximum weight of up to 110 kg (the Leica PAV80 and the Sensor to be inserted into
Leica PAV80), this is equivalent for crash safety to maximum tensile strengths of approxi-
mately 600 kg per fixing screw. This requires e.g. M8 steel screws according to ISO stan-
dards (with nominal diameter of 8 mm), for securing the Leica PAV80 (or its spacer) to the
aircraft structure
Leica PAV80 heavy load, Article #775990, required for Leica ALS50II, ALS60, ALS70
For a maximum weight of up to 145 kg (the Leica PAV80 and the Sensor to be inserted into
Leica PAV80), this is equivalent for crash safety to maximum tensile strengths of approxi-
mately 750 kg per fixing screw. This requires e.g. M8 steel screws according to ISO stan-
dards (with nominal diameter of 8 mm), for securing the Leica PAV80 (or its spacer) to the
aircraft structure
robustness of the fixing structure of the aircraft, to resist the possible strain, stress and shear-
ing strengths. Great attention has to be paid to robust structures of the aircraft!
Chassis ground connection between mount and aircraft structure

Caution: For safety reasons, an efficient chassis ground connection between the base plate of
the sensor mount Leica PAV80 and the aircraft structure has to be fulfilled.
The areas surrounding the screw holes on the Leica PAV80 base plate are conductive. If the Leica
PAV80 is secured by metallic screws direct to the aircraft structure, chassis ground connection is
satisfactorily. If the Leica PAV80 is secured on a non-metallic intermediate fixing plate, a ground
strap has to connect the conductive area on the Leica PAV80 base plate with electrically conduc-
tive metallic aircraft structures.
536 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Adapter plates and spacers

Important: Adapter plates, spacers and any other elements below the Leica PAV80 has to be
stiff such that this elements do not vibrate during operation. Rigid contact is specially required at
the location of the vibration dampers of the Leica PAV80
Plates for height adaptation

Plates for height adaptation may be required to lift the mount in order to obtain the minimum
clearance from Sensor Head supporting ring to the inside of the port slide or optical window.
Such adapter plates are not delivered by Leica Geosystems; they are to be provided by the autho-
rized aircraft installer.
For this purpose at least two stiff strips or rails are required; they should be fixed in the longitudi-
nal direction under the base plate of the PAV80.
Important: The base plate of the Leica PAV80 should be in direct contact with such adapter
rails. Rigid contact is specially required at the location of the vibration dampers of the Leica
PAV80. The location of the vibration dampers is indicated by four green circles in section "Leica
PAV80 top view and side view" in Volume 4, Chapter 2 on Page 539.
If this condition is not fulfilled, deformations of the base plate may result and strong turbulence
or hard landings may disturb the stabilization functionality of the Leica PAV80.
Spacer #764119 for height adaptation
Leica Geosystems spacer part #764119 is a robust adapter frame with a height of 150 mm. It can
be used instead of or in addition to an adapter plate as described above. It is fixed under the Leica
PAV80 base plate.
Alternate installation with RC30 with 8.8/4 SAGA-F lens cone

Once the f = 88 mm lens cone is optimally installed, the use of longer lens cones or of Leica
RCD30 pod requires the insertion of the Leica PAV80 specific spacer part #764119. This robust
adapter frame, with a height of 150 mm, is fixed under the Leica PAV80 to ensure its correct ver-
tical placement when changing from f= 88 mm to longer lens cones or to Leica RCD30 pod.
Installation if previously a Leica PAV30 was installed

The mounting holes are at the same location for Leica PAV80 and Leica PAV30. Therefore the
Leica PAV80 has the same location of the fixing screws. Existing fixation holes in the aircraft
floor for the earlier camera mount PAV30 are still usable to fix the PAV80.
Adapter plate PAV10 to Leica PAV80

Existing fixation holes in the aircraft floor for the earlier camera mount PAV10 are still usable to
fix the Leica PAV80, by means of an Adapter plate PAV10 > PAV20/30/80.
To manufacture such an adapter plate please use Drawing 34, # 438825, Adapter Plate PAV10 to
PAV30/PAV80 in Volume 4, Chapter 2 on Page 550.
An adapter plate manufactured according to this drawing has the corresponding fixation holes for
both mounts. Its thickness (40 mm) should be taken in account in the installation height of the
camera (FN).
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 537

Installation data Leica PAV80 with Leica RCD30 pod

Summary Leica PAV80 base plate
Material Aluminium EN AW-5083-H 111
Thickness 6 mm at the mounting screw holes.
Fixing holes 4 x 11 mm diameter for M8 - M10 screws, location see section "Leica PAV80
top view and side view" in Volume 4, Chapter 2 on Page 539.
Chassis ground See Chassis ground connection Leica PAV80 and Spacer on Page 539.
Drawings See following pages. Units in drawings: mm
Cables See section "Overview cabling" in Volume 4, Chapter 2 on Page 572.
Shock absorber GKE1011-01/4-M8
Meets safety requirements UL-94V0 & UL94H0.
To meet crash safety standards physical security elements are implemented
in the Leica PAV80
Caution: INSTALLATION NOTES: Follow all applicable rules for installation in aircraft. Use
FAA AC 43.13-1B and FAA AC 43.13 2A and Aircraft Manufactureres Recommendations for
installation guidance.
Tolerances
Note: During installation in the aircraft it is difficult to define the position of the center of the
optical required field (this is O in Drawing 25, Plan view as illustration to Table 142 in
Volume 4, Chapter 2 on Page 540) on the fixing plane on the aircraft for Leica PAV80 .
Therefore for the dimensions of the required optical field a radial safety margin of 10 mm is
included in ,
Airflow for cooling purposes Leica RCD30 pod

The space in front of the airflow inlets
and outlets should not be obstructed.
Install the Leica RCD30 pod with a
minimum space of 200 mm to walls.
538 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Chassis ground connection Leica PAV80 and Spacer

Conductive areas on chassis The surrounding areas of the screw holes on the PAV80
base plate as well as of the Spacer are conductive.
Ground strap Use a similar type ground strap as provided with the
camera system, if required for Leica PAV80.
Drawings See following pages.
Photo on the left side shows the conductive area
surrounding a screw hole on Leica PAV80 base plate.
The conductive areas surrounding the screw holes on
the spacer are similar.
Drawing 24: Leica PAV80 top view and side view
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 539

Dimensions of bottom hole for different installation heights

Table 142. Minimum dimension for maximum mount rotation
Case A Case B Case C

Distance F -N [mm] 250 280 310
ex [mm] 8 8.5 9
Eccentricity O to C
ey [mm] 0 0 0
Circular shape diameter [mm] center O 341 391 442
Rectangular shape length x [mm] 341 391 442

width y 358 410 465
Drawing 25: Plan view as illustration to Table 142
C= optical axis for roll, pitch and drift
O = center of required optical field
F= PAV80 fixing plane
N = highest position of slide to the aircraft

port
540 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Drawing 26: Side view Leica PAV80 with Leica RCD30 camera pod
Tolerances for bottom hole dimensions see section "" in Volume 4, Chapter 2 on Page 538.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 541

Drawing 27: Front view Leica PAV80 with Leica RCD30 camera pod
Tolerances for bottom hole dimensions see section "" in Volume 4, Chapter 2 on Page 538.
542 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Dimensions of bottom hole for Leica RCD30 Oblique Trio Pod

Case D Case E
Distance F -N [mm] 270 300
Circular shape diameter [mm] center O 1172 1302
Rectangular shape length x [mm] 1040 1172

width y 1172 1302
Drawing 28: Cross section of Leica RCD30 Oblique Trio Pod
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 543

Drawing 29: Side view Leica PAV80 with Leica RCD30 Oblique Trio pod
544 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Drawing 30: Front view Leica PAV80 with Leica RCD30 Oblique Trio pod
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 545

Dimensions of bottom hole for Leica RCD30 Oblique Penta Pod

Case D Case E
Distance F -N [mm] 270 300
Circular shape diameter [mm] center O 1166 1314
Rectangular shape length x [mm] 1139 1286

width y 1166 1314
Drawing 31: Cross section of Leica RCD30 Oblique Penta Pod
546 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Drawing 32: Side view Leica PAV80 with Leica RCD30 Oblique Penta pod
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 547

Drawing 33: Front view Leica PAV80 with Leica RCD30 Oblique Penta pod
548 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Installation data for spacer for height adaptation of Leica PAV80

Summary Spacer # 764119 base plate
Material Aluminium EN AW-6082
Fixing holes 4 x 11 mm diameter for M8 - M10 screws, location as for Leica PAV80. See
top side Drawing 24, Leica PAV80 top view and side view in Volume 4, Chapter 2
on Page 539.
Fixing holes 4 x 11 mm diameter for M8 - M10 screws, location as for Leica PAV80. See
bottom side Drawing 24, Leica PAV80 top view and side view in Volume 4, Chapter 2
on Page 539.
Size Length and width as for Leica PAV80 base plate. See Drawing 24, Leica
PAV80 top view and side view in Volume 4, Chapter 2 on Page 539
Height 150 mm
Figure 204: Spacer
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 549

Installation drawings for adapter plates
Drawing 34: # 438825, Adapter Plate PAV10 to PAV30/PAV80
Note: This adapter plate is not available from Leica Geosystems. If such an adapter plate is
required the installer should manufacture it according to the drawing.
550 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Installation of CH6x without Pod and Leica PAV80

Summary mounting plate on CH61 or CH62
Material Stainless Steel 1.4057
Fixing holes 4 x 5 mm diameter for M4 screws. See Drawing 35, CH61/CH62 in
Size See Drawing 35, CH61/CH62 in Volume 4, Chapter 2 on Page 551. and
Drawing 36, CH61/CH62 with NAG-D 50mm and NAT-D 80mm in
Important: Install the Camera head on a mounting plate with shock absorbers. The shock
absorbers shall have a resonance frequency of <20 Hz..
Drawing 35: CH61/CH62
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 551

Drawing 36: CH61/CH62 with NAG-D 50mm and NAT-D 80mm
552 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Installation of CC31/32
Installation on the aircraft floor

Important: The CC31/32 should always be installed on the base plate with the dampers to
absorb aircraft vibrations. This will ensure the optimal performance of the CC3x.
Installation in a rack
Install the CC31/32 as it is in the rack.
Important: Be sure the rack is mounted on the dampers and that the dampers are adapted to the
total weight of the rack.
Ideal position of CC31/32 in aircraft

The CC3x should be installed where it will be easy to exchange the mass memory during opera-
tion. User access to the front panel is needed for operation. User access to the rear is needed to
connect the cables.The front panel should be visible to read messages during start-up.
Space required at the rear to connect the cables

At the rear a minimum of 16 cm space to a wall is required for connected cables.

Airflow inlets are at the front side and airflow outlets are at the rear side of the CC31/32. Cooling
fans are located inside of the CC31/32.
Important: The space behind the airflow inlets should not be obstructed. Install the CC3x with
a minimum space of 20 cm to walls.
Chassis ground connection between CC31/32 and aircraft structure

Caution: For safety reasons, an efficient chassis ground connection between the conductive
area on the CC31/32 or on the CC31/32 mounting plate and electrically conductive metallic
aircraft structure must be ensured.
If the CC31/32 is installed in a rack efficient chassis ground connection must be made from
CC31/32 to the rack and from the rack to the aircraft chassis.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 553

Summary mounting base for Leica RCD30 Camera Controller

Thickness 6 mm at the mounting screw holes. See Drawing 38, CC31/32
with base plate, front and top view in Volume 4, Chapter 2 on Page 555.
Shock absorber Gamma 3G2-AS-01
Meets safety requirements UL-94V0 & UL-94H0.
To meet crash safety standards physical security elements are implemented.
Screws 1 x M4 screw per shock absorber
Chassis ground On conductive areas on mounting base.
Fixing holes Total 4 x 6.4 mm diameter. Two holes at each end of each foot of the
mounting base.
Drawings See Drawing 38, CC31/32 with base plate, front and top view in Volume 4,
Important: The Leica RCD30 Camera Controller CC31 or CC32 should always be installed on
shock absorbers. This ensures optimal reliability of the system. It it highly recommended to use
article # 785782 for mounting. Details see below.
Summary of Camera Controller CC31 / CC32

Material Aluminium
Screws M5screws. Screw in-dept maximal 7mm
Chassis ground Connection on CC31 / CC32 back panel.
Drawings See Drawing 39, CC31/32 bottom side mounting screw holes in Volume 4,
Drawing 37: Minimum space in front and rear
554 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Drawing 38: CC31/32 with base plate, front and top view
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 555

Drawing 39: CC31/32 bottom side mounting screw holes
Important: Use only M5screws. Screw in-dept maximal 7mm.
556 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Installation of IS40
Ideal position of IS40 in aircraft

The Interface Stand IS40 holds the OC52 or OC50 for operator. The IS40 should be installed
such that the operator has convenient access to the OC52 or OC50 for operator. The ideal posi-
tion is in front of the operators seat.
Tip: For safety reasons the tube of the IS40 can be removed for take off and landings and stored
in a safe place.
Installation if used alternatively with Navigation Sight mount PAS12

The mounting screw holes on the IS40 mounting plate have the same location as the screw holes
of the Navigation sight mount PAS12.
Chassis ground connection between IS40 and aircraft structure

Caution: For safety reasons, an efficient chassis ground connection between the base plate of
the IS40 and the aircraft structure has to be fulfilled.
The areas surrounding the screw holes on the IS40 base plate are conductive. If the IS40 is
secured by metallic screws directly to the aircraft structure, chassis ground connection is suffi-
cient. If the IS40 is secured on a non-metallic intermediate fixing plate, a ground strap has to
connect one of the two conductive areas on the IS40 base plate with electrically conductive
metallic aircraft structures. See Drawing 40, IS40 base plate in Volume 4, Chapter 2 on
Page 558.
Summary IS40 base plate

Thickness 10 mm at the mounting screw holes.
Fixing holes 4 x 10 mm diameter for M8 size screws, location see Drawing 40, IS40 base
plate in Volume 4, Chapter 2 on Page 558.
Additionally two conductive areas are located on the plate.
Use either the fixing holes or one of the conductive areas with a chassis
ground strap.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 557

Figure 205: Detail photo IS40 base plate
The photo on the left shows the IS40 mounting

plate. The screw holes for mounting are
located at each corner and the holes are
surrounded by a conductive area.
Additionally two conductive areas are located
close to the tube holder.
The photo on the left side shows a ground

strap connected to one of the conductive areas
located on the IS40 base plate.
Drawing 40: IS40 base plate
558 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Drawing 41: Adjustment and center of gravity of IS40 and OC50/52
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 559

Installation of OC52/OC50 for operator

The OC52/OC50 for operator can be attached to the IS40. In this case no special aircraft modifi-
cation is required.
Tip: For safety reasons the OC50/52 can be removed for take off and landings and stored in a
safe place.
Ideal position of OC52/OC50 for operator in aircraft

The OC52/OC50 for operator should be installed such that the operator has convenient access to
the hard keys on the screen and to the keyboard. The ideal position is in front of operators seat.
The OC52/OC50 for operator is fitted by means of a screw on to the Interface Stand IS40. There-
fore, the position of the OC52/OC50 for operator is given by the position of the IS40.
Chassis ground connection for OC52/OC50 for operator

Chassis ground connection for OC52/OC50 for operator is established via IS40. No separate
chassis ground connection is required if the OC52/OC50 for operator is mounted on the IS40.
Caution: For safety reasons, an efficient chassis ground connection between the fastening threat
or the screw holes of the OC52/OC50 holder plate and the aircraft structure has to be fulfilled if
the OC52/OC50 for operator is mounted without means of the IS40.

On the rear part of the OC50/52 there are fans with airflow inlets. The airflow outlet is on the
left, right and top side of the OC50/52 rear part of the housing.
Important: The space at the airflow inlets and the space at the airflow outlets should not be
obstructed. Install the OC50/52 with a minimum space to walls.
560 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Airflow inlet is at the lower part of the

rear side of the OC50/52. Two fans
are located at this position.
Airflow outlet is on the left, right and
top side through the slots located
close to the rear of the OC50/52.
The space in front of the airflow inlet

and in front of the airflow outlets
should not be obstructed. Install the
OC50/52 with a minimum space of 50
mm to walls at the airflow areas.
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 561

Drawing 42: OC52 front, rear and side view
562 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Installation of OC50 for pilot
Ideal position of OC50 for pilot in aircraft

The OC50 for pilot should be installed ideally in front of the pilot such that he can conveniently
read the display and operate the keys. Nevertheless, the customer is free to choose any other loca-
tion in the aircraft for mounting. The exact position depends mainly on pilot preferences and
available space and is a customizing task.
Safety
Warning: The OC50 should be mounted such that there is no safety hazard to the pilot etc. in
rough and turbulent flight conditions.
The OC50 should be mounted that it is removable for safe storage very quickly, with as little
manual effort as possible and without tools. Safe storage must take place during take off and
landings and very turbulent flight conditions.
Cabling
A single cable connects power and data. The connector of the cable is protected against being
pulled out of its socket.
Storage of the OC50 for pilot

Once the OC50 has been removed from the operating position, it must be safely storable.
Chassis ground connection for OC50 for pilot

Caution: For safety reasons, an efficient chassis ground connection between the screw holes of
the OC50 and the aircraft structure has to be fulfilled.
Drawing 43: OC50 for pilot oblique and rear view
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 563

Summary OC50 for pilot

Fixing holes 3 x M5 threads, 10 mm deep. Location see Drawing 43, OC50 for pilot
oblique and rear view in Volume 4, Chapter 2 on Page 563.
Chassis ground Each screw hole is a conductive area.
Ensure ground connection from on of the screw holes to the aircraft
structure.

On the rear part of the OC50 there are fans with airflow inlets. The airflow outlet is on the left,
right and top side of the OC50 housing.
Important: The space at the airflow inlets and the space at the airflow outlets should not be
obstructed. Install the OC50 with a minimum space to walls.
Airflow inlet is at the lower part of the

rear side of the OC50. Two fans are
located at this position.
Airflow outlet is on the left, right and
top side through the slots located
close to the rear of the OC50.
The space in front of the airflow inlet

and in front of the airflow outlets
should not be obstructed. Install the
OC50 with a minimum space of 50
mm to walls at the airflow areas.
564 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Drawing 44: OC50 front, side, top and bottom views
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 565

Installation of GI40
Ideal position of GI40 in aircraft

The Guidance Indicator GI40 should be installed ideally in front of the pilot such that he can con-
veniently read the display. The exact position depends mainly on pilot preferences and available
space and is a customizing task.
Tip: For safety reasons the GI40 may be installed in a removable fashion so as to not interfere
with take off and landings procedures.
Safety
Warning: The GI40 should be mounted such that there is no safety hazard to the pilot etc. in
rough and turbulent flight conditions.
The GI40 should be mounted that it is removable for safe storage very quickly, with as little man-
ual effort as possible and without tools. Safe storage must take place during take off and landings
and very turbulent flight conditions.
Cabling
A single cable connects power and data. The connector of the cable is protected against being
pulled out of its socket.
Storage of the GI40

Once the GI40 has been removed from the operating position, it must be safely storable.
Summary GI40 mounting

Fixing holes 2 x M6 threads, 10 mm deep. Location see Drawing 45, GI40 in Volume 4,
Chassis ground Not required.
566 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Drawing 45: GI40
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 567

Installation of GNSS antenna
Installation of GNSS antenna on the fuselage

Important: When installing the GNSS antenna on the fuselage follow the instructions and
guidelines given by the GNSS antenna manufacturer and by the FAA or national aviation associ-
ations carefully. The recommendations listed below are only of informative character.
The ideal location of the GNSS antenna on the fuselage is as near as possible vertically
above the Sensor Head when the aircraft is placed in the attitude at which the aerial photog-
raphy will be obtained.
It is also very important that shadowing by other parts of the aircraft structure is minimized.
Shadowing is typically minimized if the antenna is installed close to the top center forward
portion of the fuselage aft of the cockpit section.
If other antennas are installed already there should be a minimum separation between the
antenna of at least 30 cm. Ideally the antenna is not mounted within 1m of any other anten-
nas.
.
Tip: An existing L1/L2 GNSS antenna may be used if it meets the specifications of the Leica
RCD30 GNSS antenna. See section "GNSS Antenna" in Volume 1, Chapter 7 on Page 144.
How to install the GNSS antenna vertically above the Leica RCD30
For a perfect installation the Leica PAV80 should be installed such that it is in pitch and roll close
to mechanical ZERO at the typical aircrafts attitude angle during the photo flight. See section
"Compensation of aircraft attitude angle" in Volume 4, Chapter 2 on Page 530. Perform a simu-
lated photography flight to check if the typical attitude position of the Leica PAV80 is close to
mechanical ZERO.
On the ground, place the aircraft on jacks to re-establish the plane in its flight attitude. This can
be done by levelling the aircraft until the plane Q is leveled in x and y. For Q see Drawing 23,
Cross section of Leica RCD30 Single Camera Pod in Volume 4, Chapter 2 on Page 533. One
can then use an optical plummet to sight the antenna location point on the inside top of the fuse-
lage. A plumb bob should be used as a check.
Orientation of the GNSS antenna on the aircraft

No flight direction has to be taken into account for the GNSS antenna mounting on the fuse-
lage. But please note that the antenna cable connector is not located at the mechanical center of
ten antenna.
Offset reference or Leica PAV80 rotation center to GNSS antenna

For the GNSS/IMU real time solution which provides navigation data during the photo flight and
for GNSS/IMU post-processing, the position in x, y and z of the GNSS antenna phase center rel-
ative to the reference or rotation centre of the Leica PAV80 gyro-stabilized camera mount respec-
tively must be known. The Leica PAV80 rotation center is D in Drawing 24, Leica PAV80 top
view and side view in Volume 4, Chapter 2 on Page 539.
568 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Summary GPS-GLONASS antenna

Screws 4x, delivered with antenna
Fixing wholes Size and location see Drawing 46, GPS-GLONASS Antenna in Volume 4,
FAA form Delivered with Antenna, example see section "General about cabling and
power connection" in Volume 4, Chapter 2 on Page 572.
Figure 206: Detail photos GNSS antenna
GPS-GLONASS antenna
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 569

FAA Form 8130-3 for GPS-GLONASS antenna
570 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Drawing 46: GPS-GLONASS Antenna
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 571

General about cabling and power connection
Overview cabling
Figure 207: Cabling diagram of Leica RCD30 system
Cable lengths are given in Table 35, Cables in Volume 1, Chapter 7 on Page 150.
Caution:
Do not modify the cables of the Leica RCD30 system.
Do not extend the cable lengths.
Information about chassis ground connection is given for each device in the corresponding sec-
tion of this documentation.
It is the certified aircraft installers task to install looming of the Leica RCD30 system if it is
required to place them in protected channels.
572 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Overview installation data electrical installation
Power connection Leica PAV80

Power connectors Cable is delivered with connector to CU3x
Power remote control Software controlled by Leica FCMS, if power switch on Leica PAV80
is set to Remote position.
Drawings See Drawing 48, #752739, Power cable SH9x/CU8/PAV80 in
Wires, dimension + and - , each two wires, each wire 1 square mm
Power connection CC31/CC32 to DC aircraft power

Power connectors Cable is delivered with open ends marked with + and -.
Drawings See Drawing 47, #764193 CC3x to DC aircraft power in Volume 4,
Wires, dimension + and - , each two wires, each wire 6 square mm
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 573

Responsibility for adequate power supply

Leica Geosystems in its technical data shows the required power necessary to operate the sensor
system components adequately.
Important: It is the aircraft owners sole responsibility to ensure that enough power is available
to operate those sensor system components that he has chosen to install in the aircraft. It is the
aircraft owners responsibility to ensure that the power consumption of the installed sensor
system components does not jeopardize the safe operation of the aircraft and that adequate
circuit breakers are installed.
UPS
Tip: An UPS might be installed in certain aircraft to ensure non-interrupted power for the Leica
RCD30 system. The UPS allows a safe shut down of all Leica RCD30 components in the case of
a power failure.
Specifications for the UPS:

Output Voltage: 28VDC (20.0...30.0VDC)
Power: 320W (600W, <0.3s) for CH62, CC32, NUS-5, OC52, OC50, GI40, PAV80
Over voltage / Surge and reverse polarity protection features.
Hold-up time >10 minutes at 320W after power failure.
Power plug to aircraft power

Note: The power cable to the aircraft power comes with open ends at the aircraft power supply
end, because plugs will vary with aircraft and applicable safety regulations. It is the aircraft
owners responsibility to attach an adequate connector to connect the Leica RCD30 system to
the aircraft power output plug.
Caution: When connecting the open ends of the power cable make sure the polarity marked on
the wires match the polarity of the connectors on the aircraft.
Drawing of the power cable see Drawing 47, #764193 CC3x to DC aircraft power in Volume
574 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Power requirements, fuses and circuit breakers
Power requirements
Average and peak power consumption for each device of the Leica RCD30 system is given in
section "Electrical" in Volume 1, Chapter 7 on Page 141
Fuses
The sub-components of the Leica RCD30 system have internal fuses. But protection at aircraft
power output to the devices with circuit breakers is mandatory.
Warning: Do not connect any of the Leica RCD30 power cables to aircraft power output
with circuit breakers exceeding the maximum value given in section "Circuit
breakers"below.
Circuit breakers
Table 146. Recommended circuit breakers in aircraft for Leica RCD30
Device Circuit breaker

Minimum Maximum
See section 15 A 50A
"Electrical" in
Volume 1, Chapter 7
on Page 141
Chassis ground connection

Leica PAV80, CU3x and IS40/OC52, OC50 for Pilot need efficient chassis ground connection.
For details see
section "Chassis ground connection between mount and aircraft structure" in Volume 4,
section "Chassis ground connection between CC31/32 and aircraft structure" in Volume 4,
section "Chassis ground connection between IS40 and aircraft structure" in Volume 4, Chap-
ter 2 on Page 557
section "Chassis ground connection for OC50 for pilot" in Volume 4, Chapter 2 on Page 563
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 575

Power connection
Figure 208: Power cabling diagram
PS56 Power Supply for ground test purposes

The PS56 Power Supply is used to power-up the Leica RCD30 system for test purposes from a
wall AC current outlet providing 110V/230V 50/60Hz. A DC power cable is used to connect the
PD56 Power Distributorbox to the PS56 Power Supply.
576 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Drawing 47: #764193 CC3x to DC aircraft power
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 577

Drawing 48: #752739, Power cable SH9x/CU8/PAV80
578 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Weight and balance

The illustration in Figure 209 below gives an overview of the required data for weight and bal-
ance calculations.
Weight of the individual components is given in section "GPS-GLONASS Antenna Electrical
Specifications, Article #777441" in Volume 1, Chapter 7 on Page 145.
The center of gravity for OC52/IS40 can also be found in Drawing 41, Adjustment and center of
gravity of IS40 and OC50/52 in Volume 4, Chapter 2 on Page 559.
Figure 209: Weight and balance
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 579

580 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Chapter 3 Installation Questionnaire
Version 4.01-61 Oct / 19 / 2012 581

Introduction
The purpose of this questionnaire is to collect from the customer specific dimensions and param-
eters required for installation of the Leica RCD30 Airborne Digital Sensor in an aircraft. Based
on this information, Leica Geosystems is able to provide support to the customer, or aircraft
installer, in connection with the installation of the Leica RCD30, especialy the Leica PAV80
mount.
General installation guidelines, advice and dimensions can be taken from section "Aircraft Instal-
lation Information" in Volume 4, Chapter 2 on Page 513. The standard drawings pertain only to
the minimum dimensions of the aircraft bottom hole for the standard rotation range of the sensor/
mount for installation where there is no optical window.
Leica Geosystems uses special software to determine the required minimum dimensions of the
aircraft bottom hole/optical window and calculates any restrictions in the mount rotation angles
for given dimensions of the bottom hole/optical window. Together with CAD facilities, Leica
Geosystems can also assist in the evaluation of an installation situation where the installation
space is potentially limiting.
This questionnaire does not include further installation aspects such as cabling, for which Leica
Geosystems can provide customer-specific advice. For this item please refer to the installation
documentation mentioned above.
582 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Requested information
Please fill in the customer information table.
Table 148. Customer identification
Company Name
Street
City
Country
Phone #
Fax #
Web site
e-mail
Contact person Name
First Name
Phone # direct
e-mail
Inquiry date
Please fill in the Leica RCD30 identification table if you already own an Leica RCD30 system.
The model and serial numbers of the components of the Leica RCD30 system are indicated on
the housings.
Table 149. Leica RCD30 identification
Device Model Serial number

Sensor system
Gyro-stabilized mount
Please fill in the aircraft identification table.

Table 150. Aircraft identification
Aircraft Manufacturer
Model
Type
Single engine
Twin engine
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 583

Optionally fill in the table for identification of the installer.

Table 151. Installer identification
Company Name
Street
City
Country
Phone #
Fax #
Web side
e-mail
Contact person Name
First Name
Phone # direct
e-mail
Optionally fill in your specific requirements.

Table 152. General customer-specific requirements
584 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

If optical window is installed please fill in the required dimension and information.
Table 153. Required dimensions and information for optical window
Criteria Required dimension/information
Overall window dimensions if window is in flight direction_______________ mm

rectangular-shaped across flight direction ___________ mm
if corners are rounded:
radius ________________________ mm
Overall window dimensions if window is diameter ______________________ mm

circular-shaped if corners are cut:
size __________________________ mm
Window frame in flight direction _______________ mm

across flight direction ___________ mm
Clear window dimensions if window is in flight direction _______________ mm

rectangular-shaped across flight direction ___________ mm
if corners are rounded:
radius ________________________ mm
Clear window dimensions if window is diameter ______________________ mm

circular-shaped if corners are cut:
size __________________________ mm
Thickness of window e ____________________________
Glass type _________________________

refraction index n _______________
Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 585

Questionnaire for GNSS antenna

Please fill in the table of general items.
Table 154. GNSS antenna
Question / Requirement Yes No Required information
Is a GNSS antenna already installed in

this aircraft and shall it be used for Leica
RCD30?
if yes: dual frequency L1 / L2 , GLONASS
if yes: antenna manufacturer Manufacturer:
if yes: antenna specification Antenna data sheet
In particular:
Pre-amp gain (LNA gain): dB
Nominal impedance: Ohm
Band pass: +/- MHz
If yes: type of connector Specify one of the types below
TNC, male/female
BNC, male/female
N, male/female
586 Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

RCD30 - Documentation 784799 4.01 61 PDF

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

RCD30 - Documentation 784799 4.01 61 PDF

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Leica RCD30 Documentation

Including Leica FCMS Version 4.01-61 for Leica RCD30

This documentation contains important information.

Document code 784799

ii Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Leica RCD30 Documentation

Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 iii

Volume 1 User Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i

About this User Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Installing the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

iv Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 v

vi Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Delete data in the OC52 memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 vii

Trouble shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Care & Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Safety Directions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

viii Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Warranty - Software License Agreement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 ix

Volume 2 Technical Reference Manual . . . . . . 165

About this Technical Reference Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Introduction to Leica RCD30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Description of System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Description of Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

x Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Leica PAV80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 xi

Leica FramePro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Advanced operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Multiple Camera Heads Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

xii Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Mounting the IMU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 xiii

DUS5 - IMU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Service & Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

xiv Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

Operation with 3rd party components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Interface Control Document (ICD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 xv

Leica RCD30 configurations provided by Leica Geosystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

xvi Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Volume 3 Field Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

About Field Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

General for Leica RCD30 photo flights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 xvii

Leica FCMS - Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

xviii Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Input and message control icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Leica FCMS - Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 xix

Configuration of Flight Guidance & Sensor Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425

Leica FCMS - Flight Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453

xx Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012

Speed control for frame sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474

Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012 xxi

Volume 4 Installation Information . . . . . . . . . . . 509

About Installation Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511

Aircraft Installation Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513

xxii Version 4.01-61 - Oct / 19 / 2012